Upload
duongkiet
View
336
Download
17
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
Type D “Domino” 16 mm Push Buttons
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Selector Switches and Potentiometer Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Illuminated Operators and Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Contacts and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mmSpecifications
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
4
11/97
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 947-5-1, IEC 337-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660 part 200, UL 508,CSA C 22-2 n
°
14.
ApprovalsIn normal operation:CSA, ULASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO: pending.
Protective treatment “TC” (All climates.)
Ambient air temperature Storage: from -40 to +70
°
C (-40 to +158
°
F). Operation: from -25 to +60
°
C (-13 to +140
°
F).
Operating positions All positions
Vibration resistance Mushroom head push button: 8 gn; other push buttons: 15 gn(10 Hz < Frequency < 500 Hz) conforming to IEC 68 2-6.
Shock resistance Push button: 70 gn; mushroom head push button: 15 gn; selector switch: 200 g conforming to IEC 68 2-27.
Electric shock protection Class II, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030
Degree of protectionconforming IEC 529 and NF C 20-010
NEMA Type 1, 4, 4X (indoor), 13IP 65
Mechanical life Push button: 1 million operations. Mushroom head push button: 0.1 million operations Selector switch: 0.3 million operations.
Contact block characteristics
Rated insulation voltage Ui = 380 V - degree of pollution: 3 conforming to IEC 947-1.
Rated shock resistance voltage Uimp = 6 kV conforming to IEC 947-1.
Rated operating characteristics AC-15: B150, 5 A Continuous; DC-13: Q150, 2.5 A continuous
Contact operation Slow-make, N.O., slow-break, N.C., N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN60947-5-1 section 3.
Terminal referencing Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
Short circuit protection Fused 6 A gF conforming to IEC 269-1 and VDE 0660-200
Rated powerconforming to IEC 947-5-1(electrical durability)Connection by pinor connector
For 1 million operations
Voltage V 24 48 60 120 230 380
AC-15 72 VA 144 VA 180 VA 360 VA 460 VA 380 VA
DC-13 (L/R - 15 ms) 144 W 144 W 180 W 120 W 46 W
Connection- Pin 2.8 X 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.32 in)- Printed circuit connector- Female connector (conforming to DIN 41651) + ribbon cable
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.
Marking FileCCN
E164353NKCR
FileClass
LR 440873211 03
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mmOperators
5
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
k
Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). Only bezels 5 and 6 are available in this style operator.
f
Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). Only bezels 8 and 9 are available in this style operator.
t
Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.
Non-Illuminated Operators
Legends are not included with operators.
Type Color Catalog Number
Momentary Flush Push Button, Square
Red D
k
A2R
Green D
k
A2G
Black D
k
A2S
White D
k
A2W
Yellow D
k
A2Y
Blue D
k
A2B
Momentary Flush Push Button, Round
Red D
f
A1R
Green D
f
A1G
Black D
f
A1S
White D
f
A1W
Yellow D
f
A1Y
Blue D
f
A1B
Momentary Extended Guard Push Button
Red D
t
A7R
Green D
t
A7G
Black D
t
A7S
White D
t
A7W
Yellow D
t
A7Y
Blue D
t
A7B
Momentary Push Mushroom Red D
t
B1R
Push Maintain/ Rotate Release Mushroom Red D
t
C1R
Toggle Switch White D
t
E1W
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9
Bezel Style 5Square Black
Bezel Style 6Square Chrome
Bezel Style 8Round Black
Bezel Style 9Round Chrome
D5A2R
D8A1G
D5A7Y
D6B1R
D5C1R
D8E1W
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mmSelector Switches and Potentiometer Knobs
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
6
11/97
d
Key is removable in all positions. Replacement key is 9001Z18, CP1 (key is marked 8D1).
t
Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.
Selector Switches – Two Position
Type Color Catalog Number
Maintained
Black D
t
G2S
Key
d
D
t
L30
Momentary Spring Return Black D
t
G7S
Selector Switches – Three Position
Type Color Catalog Number
Maintained
Black D
t
G3S
Key
d
D
t
L80
Momentary Spring ReturnBoth Sides To Center Black D
t
G4S
Momentary Spring ReturnRight To Center Black D
t
G5S
Momentary Spring ReturnLeft To Center Black D
t
G6S
Potentiometer Control Knobs (potentiometer not supplied)
Type Catalog Number
Integrated Mounting 4 mm shaft diameter X 50 mm length D
t
R1S
PCB Board Mounting 4 mm shaft diameter X 50 mm length D
t
R3S
D5Gkk
D5L80
D8Rkk
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 11-12Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9
Bezel Style 5Square Black
Bezel Style 6Square Chrome
Bezel Style 8Round Black
Bezel Style 9Round Chrome
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mmPilot Lights and Illuminated Operators
7
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Bezel Style 5Square Black
Bezel Style 6Square Chrome
Bezel Style 8Round Black
Bezel Style 9Round Chrome
t
Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.
k
Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). Only style 5 and 6 are available in this style operator.
f
Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). Only style 8 and 9 are available in this style operator.
Illuminated Operators
Legends are not included with operators. See page 10 for legends.
Type Color Catalog Number
Square Momentary Illuminated Push Button
Red D
k
A2R
Green D
k
A2G
White D
k
A2W
Yellow D
k
A2Y
Blue D
k
A2B
Round Momentary Illuminated Push Button
Red D
f
A1R
Green D
f
A1G
White D
f
A1W
Yellow D
f
A1Y
Blue D
f
A1B
Momentary Illuminated Extended Guard Button
Red D
t
A7R
Green D
t
A7G
White D
t
A7W
Yellow D
t
A7Y
Blue D
t
A7B
Square Push On - Push Off Illuminated Push Button
Red D
k
A2R
Green D
k
A2G
White D
k
A2W
Yellow D
k
A2Y
Blue D
k
A2B
Round Push On - Push Off Illuminated Push Button
Red D
f
A1R
Green D
f
A1G
White D
f
A1W
Yellow D
f
A1Y
Blue D
f
A1B
Pilot Lights
Legends are not included with operators. See page 10 for legends.
Type Color Catalog Number
Square Pilot Light
Red D
k
V2R
Green D
k
V2G
White D
k
V2W
Yellow D
k
V2Y
Blue D
k
V2B
Round Pilot Light
Red D
f
V1R
Green D
f
V1G
White D
f
V1W
Yellow D
f
V1Y
Blue D
f
V1B
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10
D5A2R
D8A1G
D5A7Y
D9A1R
D5V2Y
D8V1G
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mmContacts and Light Modules
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
8
11/97
k
Maintained operation is Push on - Push off.
d
Contact ratings and lamp voltage can be limited by the type of mounting. i.e. printed circuit termination might not carry full current because of the printed circuit board tracing.
Contact Blocks Only
Type Contact Arrangement Catalog Number
For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination.
N.O. DU10N.C. DU01
N.O. – N.C. DU11N.O. – N.O. DU20N.C. – N.C. DU02
Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9.
N.O. DUB10N.C. DUB01
N.O. – N.C. DUB11N.O. – N.O. DUB20N.C. – N.C. DUB02
For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs.
N.O. DV10N.C. DV01
N.O. – N.C. DV11N.O. – N.O. DV20N.C. – N.C. DV02
For soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator.
N.O. DVB10N.C. DVB01
N.O. – N.C. DVB11N.O. – N.O. DVB20N.C. – N.C. DVB02
Ribbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator.
N.O. DR10N.C. DR01
N.O. – N.C. DR11N.O. – N.O. DR20N.C. – N.C. DR02
Module With Lamp Holder Only
Type Catalog Number
For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. DUFPrinted circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9. DUFB
For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs. DVFFor soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator. DVFBRibbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator. DRF
Module With Lamp Holder And Contacts
TypeContact
Arrangement6 to 120 V, 1.2 Watt Max.
d
Momentary Maintained
k
For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination.
N.O. DUF10 DUFR10N.C. DUF01 DUFR01
N.O. – N.C. DUF11 DUFR11N.O. – N.O. DUF20 DUFR20N.C. – N.C. DUF02 DUFR02
Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9.
N.O. DUFB10
N/AN.C. DUFB01
N.O. – N.C. DUFB11N.O. – N.O. DUFB20N.C. – N.C. DUFB02
For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs.
N.O. DVF10 DVFR10N.C. DVF01 DVFR01
N.O. – N.C. DVF11 DVFR11N.O. – N.O. DVF20 DVFR20N.C. – N.C. DVF02 DVFR02
For soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator.
N.O. DVFB10
N/AN.C. DVFB01
N.O. – N.C. DVFB11N.O. – N.O. DVFB20N.C. – N.C. DVFB02
Ribbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator.
N.O. DRF10 DRFR10N.C. DRF01 DRFR01
N.O. – N.C. DRF11 DRFR11N.O. – N.O. DRF20 DRFR20N.C. – N.C. DRF02 DRFR02
DU
kk
DUB
kk
DV
kk
DVB
kk
DR
kk
DUF
DUFB DVF
DVFB DRF
DUF
kkk
DUFB
kk
DVF
kkk
DVFB
kk
DRF
kkk
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mmAccessories
9
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
k
For use with illuminated operators of the same color as the LED.
t
Order must specify standard package quantity or multiples of that quantity.
Type Std. Pkg. Qty.
t
Catalog Number
Ring Nut Wrench 1 Z201
Lamp Remover Tool 1 Z02
Closing Plate Black-Square 1 Z205
Closing Plate Black-Round 1 Z223
Replacement Mounting Ring Nut 1 Z216
Type Voltage Assembly Code Std. Pkg. Qty.
t
Catalog Number
Incandescent(T 1
3
⁄
4)
6 Vac 06 10 Z206
12 Vac 12 10 Z207
24 Vac 24 10 Z208
48 Vac 48 10 Z209
60 Vac 60 10 Z210
LEDk 24 Vac/dc
24 V - Red R4 5 Z219R
24 V - Green G4 5 Z219G
24 V - Yellow Y4 5 Z219Y
LEDk 120 Vac 120 V - Red R2 1 Z220R
Type Std. Pkg. Qty.t Catalog NumberPrinted Circuit Board AdapterFor Type DU Contacts Only. 1 Z203
Wire Harness.For Type DU Contacts Only. 10 Z204
Type Std. Pkg. Qty.t Catalog NumberReplacement Key (No 8D1) 1 Z18
Adjustable Spacer (for rear fixing blocks) 4 Z220
Wire clip 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.32 in.) 100 Z231
Ribbon Cable Connector(for 4 wire DR Blocks) 25 Z228
Ribbon Cable Connector(for 6 wire DR Blocks) 25 Z229
Z201
Z02
Z205
Z223
Z216
Z2kk
Z203 Z204
Z18
Z220
Z231 Z22k
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType D – 16 mmLegend Plates
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved10
11/97
Engraving field is 16 mm x 22 mm. Factory engraving limited to 3 lines of 12 characters (including spaces). Black letters on silver field.
Order must specify standard package quantity or multiples of that quantity.
Type Std. Pkg. Qty. Catalog NumberLegend Plate Holder with Blank PlateUse with D5, D6 bezel 25 Z215
Legend Plate Holder Only, Use with D5D6 bezel 25 Z213
Legend Plate Holder with Blank LegendUse with D5, D6 bezel 25 Z222
Legend Plate Holder Only, Use with D5D6 bezel 25 Z221
Blank Plate without Holder (For use with all holders) 25 Z214Yellow Contrast Plate-Round, 50 mm 1 Z211Yellow Contrast Plate-Rectangular, 25 mm x 50 mm 1 Z212
Marking
Legend Plate with HolderAnodized Aluminum
Legends Only Mylar Inserts
For D5, D6 Operators
Only
For D8, D9 Operators
Only
Legend Plate
without Holder
Legend Plate without Holder
White with Black Letters
for Round Button
Illuminated Devices
White with Black Letters
for Square Button
Illuminated Devices
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Blank Legend Z215 Z222 Z214 Z214 01D 01ASpecial Engraved 99Q2 99R2 99W2 99S2 N/A N/A
O 02Q2 02R2 02W2I 03Q2 03R2 03W2 03S2II 04Q2 04R2 04W2 04S2O I 05Q2 05R2 05W2 05S2II O I 34Q2 34R2 34W2 34S2 65DE 65AClose 65Q2 65R2 65W2 65S2 77DE 77ADown 77Q2 75R2 77W2 77S2 82DE 82AEmerg. Stop 82Q2 82R2 82W2 82S2 78DE 78AFast 78Q2 78R2 78W2 78S2 66DE 66AForward 66Q2 66R2 66W2 66S2Hand Auto 21Q2 21R2 21W2 21S2Hand O Auto 24Q2 24R2 24W2 24S2High 80Q2 80R2 80W2 80S2 80DE 80AIn 72Q2 72R2 72W2 72S2 72DE 72AInch 74Q2 74R2 74W2 74S2 74DE 74AJog 69Q2 69R2 69W2 69S2 69DE 69ALow 81Q2 81R2 81W2 81S2 81DE 81ALower 71Q2 71R2 71W2 71S2 71DE 71AOff 63Q2 63R2 63W2 63S2 63DE 63AOff On 85Q2 85R2 85W2 85S2On 62Q2 62R2 62W2 62S2 62DE 62AOpen 64Q2 64R2 64W2 64S2 64DE 64AOut 73Q2 73R2 73W2 73S2 73DE 73ARaise 70Q2 70R2 70W2 70S2 70DE 70AReverse 67Q2 67R2 67W2 67S2 67DE 67ARun 75Q2 75R2 75W2 75S2 75DE 75ASlow 79Q2 79R2 79W2 79S2 79DE 79AStart 17Q2 17R2 17W2 17S2Stop 18Q2 18R2 18W2 18S2Stop Start 90Q2 90R2 90W2 90S2Test 84Q2 84R2 84W2 84S2Up 76Q2 76R2 76W2 76S2 76DE 76A
Z215 Z213
Z222 Z221
Z214
Z211
Z212
Legend Plate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 12
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType D – 16 mm
Dimensions
1111/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Body
Mounting conforming to DIN EN 50 007 and IEC 947 forfixing holes with or without anti-rotation pip
Push-buttons and pilot lights
Headswith legend plate without legend plate
A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25D5A2k D5A1k D5A7k D8A7kD6A2k D9A1k D6A7k D9A7k
A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25 D5Gkk D8Gkk D5LkO D8LkO D5B1k D8B1k D5C1R D5C1R D6Gkk D9Gkk D6LkO D9LkO D6B1k D9B1k D6C1R D9C1R
Potentiometer heads Integrated fixing Board fixing
A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25 A: d25 Ø25 D5E1W D8E1W D5R1S D8R1S D5R3S D8R3S D6E1W D9E1W D6R1S D9R1S D6R3S D9R3S
DUkk DUBkk DVBkk DVkk DRkk
Wiring AccessoriesDUkk + Z204 DUBkk + Z203 Z204 Z203
1.725
25
9.8
16.2 +0.2-0.0
16.2
25 25
1.7
9.8
2525
2525
25 25
+0.2-0.0
A
13 18
M16
x1
1.5 - 6 8
A
15 18
M16
x1
1.5 - 6 6
A
26 18
M16
x1
1.5 - 6 6
55 18
M16
x1
1.5 - 6 6
A
È 3
1
29 18
M16
x1
A
1.5 - 6 6
È 3
1
29 18
M16
x1
A
1.5 - 6 6
A
20 18
M16
x1
1.5 - 6 6
A
27 34
1.5 - 6
8M7 x 0.75
50
4
A
27 18
M16
x1
1.5 - 6
42 - 65
42.5
9.5
13.5
42.5
17
40.5
17
40.5
9.5
13.5
41.5
9.5
13.5
52
9.5
13.5
52
17 15
18
16.5
2.1
2.5
12.5
1 ø
1.2
5
17
2.5
5.08
7 10.1
6
15.24
22
All dimensions are in mm's. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType D – 16 mmDimensions
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved12
11/97
Pilot lightsHead Pilot lights + contact
BodyDUFDUFkk
DUFBDUFBkk
DVFBDVFBkk
DVFDVFkk
A: d25 Ø25 A: d 25 Ø25
D5V2k D8V1k D5A2k D8A1k
D6V2k D9V1k D6A2k D9A1k
DRFDRFkkk
DUFDUFkk+Z204
DUFBDUFBkk + Z203
Head + DVkk DVF DVFkk
Head + DUkkDUFDUFkk + Z204
Head + DUkkDUFDUFkk + Z203
Head +DRkkDRFDRFkkk
Blanking Plug
A: d 25 Ø25Z205 Z223
Adjustable spacerZ220
Legend plate carrierfor square headZ213
for round headZ221
Legend platesZ212 Z211
A
16 18
M16
x1
1.5 - 6
A
13 18
M16
x1
1.5 - 6 8
48
9.5
13.5
48
17
46
17
46
9.5
13.5
47
9.5
13.5
589.
513
.558
17
48.5 4
9.5
13.5
9.5
13.5
48.5
64
9.5
13.5
48.5
58.5
9.5
13.5
53.5
A
M16
x 1
15.5
37
39 -
58
18.516.2
24.5
44
25
44
25
1.7
50 17.9
16.2
25
1.7
50 17.9
16.2
All dimensions are in mms. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType D – 16 mm
Dimensions
1311/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers GuideType J, O, and XVL – Pilot Lights
Class 9001
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PageType J, Description and Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Type J, Dimensions and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Type O, Description and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Type XVL, Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Type XVL, Selection and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType J – Pilot LightsDescription and Selection
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved14
11/97
JP1R29
JTR1R29
Pilot Lights, Push-To-Test and Remote Test Pilot Lights
Class 9001 Type J compact pilot lights are designed to be mounted in a .69" (11/16") diameter mounting hole. Each terminal will accept up to two #14 AWG wires (CU only). Type J compact pilot lights meet NEMA Type 4 (watertight) and NEMA Type 13 (oiltight) requirements. Type JT push-to-test pilot lights have contacts built into the encapsulated body. Type JTR remote test pilot lights have dual inputs for one push remote testing – all you need is a push button with a current rating equal to or greater than the total lamp draw. Type JTR remote test pilot lights can also be energized from two separate input signals of the same voltage and polarity. This is done by wiring the “test” terminal to the second input signal.
(1) See Page 18 for replacement LED lamps. For other voltage LED lamps contact local field office.k Supplied with “plastic” color caps. If “glass” color caps are desired, substitute G26, R26, etc., for G29, R29, etc. Example:
JP1G26, JP1R26, etc. To order a pilot light with color cap not listed above, add the color cap type number from the table below to the basic pilot light number. Example: For a standard 120 volt transformer style pilot light with a plastic amber color cap, order a 9001JP1A29. LED lamps are only for use with plastic red, green or yellow color caps.
t Remote test (Type JTR) only is available in AC.
Standard Pilot Light
Style/VoltageColor Cap Lamp
Volt/AmpReplacement
LampNone Redk Greenk Yellow kTrans/110-120Vac, 50-60 Hz JP1 JP1R29 JP1G29 JP1Y29 6.3 V, 0.15A 2550101020
Incandescent/120 Vac or dc JP38 JP38R29 JP38G29 JP38Y29 120 V, 0.015A 2550101040
Incandescent/24-28 Vac or dc JP35 JP35R29 JP35G29 JP35Y29 28 V, 0.040A 2550101024
Other Voltagest JPt JPtR29 JPtG29 JP tY29
LED – 24-28 Vac – JP35LRR29 JP35LGG29 JP35LYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)
LED – 24-28 Vdc – JP35DRR29 JP35DGG29 JP35DYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)
LED – 120Vac – JP38LRR29 JP38LGG29 JP38LYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)
Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Style/VoltageColor Cap Lamp
Volt/AmpReplacement
LampNone Red k Green k Yellow kTrans/110-120Vac, 50-60 Hz JT1 JT1R29 JT1G29 JT1Y29 6.3 V, 0.15A 2550101020
Incandescent/120 Vac or dc JT38 JT38R29 JT38G29 JT38Y29 120 V, 0.15A 2550101040
Incandescent/24-28 Vac or dc JT35 JT35R29 JT35G29 JT35Y29 28 V, 0.040A 2550101024
Other Voltagest JTt JTtR29 JTtG29 JTtY29
LED – 24-28 Vac – JT35LRR29 JT35LGG29 JT35LYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)
LED – 24-28 Vdc – JT35DRR29 JT35DGG29 JT35DYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)
LED – 120 Vac – JT38LRR29 JT38LGG29 JT38LYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)
Remote Test Pilot Light
Style/VoltageColor Cap Lamp
Volt/AmpReplacement
LampNone Red k Green k Yellow kTrans/110-120 Vac, 50-60 Hz JTR1 JTR1R29 JTR1G29 JTR1Y29 6.3 V, 0.15A 2550101020
Incandescent/120 Vac JTR38 JTR38R29 JTR38G29 JTR38Y29 120 V, 0.015A 2550101040
Incandescent/24-28 Vac JTR35 JTR35R29 JTR35G29 JTR35Y29 28 V, 0.040A 2550101024
Other Voltages (ac Only)t JTRt JTRtR29 JTRtG29 JTRtY29
LED – 24-28 Vac – JTR35LRR29 JTR35LGG29 JTR35LYY29 28 V, 0.03A (1)
Other Voltagest
VoltageJP/JTCode
ReplacementLamp
Volt/AmpJTR
CodeReplacement
LampVolt/Amp
Incandescent/6 Vac or dc 31 2550101020 6.3 V, 0.15A 31t 2550101003 3 V, 0.16A
Incandescent/12 Vac or dc 32 2550101022 12 V, 0.17A 32t 2550101022 12 V, 0.17A
Incandescent/48 Vac or dc 36 2550101025 48 V, 0.053A 36t 2550101025 48 V, 0.053A
Incandescent/60 Vac or dc 37 2550101026 60 V, 0.05A 37t 2550101026 60 V, 0.05A
File 25490Class 3211 03
File E42259CCN NKCR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType J – Pilot Lights
Dimensions and Accessories
1511/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Type J Dimensions
Legend Plates
TypeMax. No. of
LinesMax. No. of Characters
Catalog Number
BlankBlack Field 2 8 JN100Red Field 2 8 JN100R
Special Marking (Specify Marking)
Black Field 2 8 JN199Red Field 2 8 JN199R
Blank Aluminum Field 2 16 JN700Special Marking (Specify Marking) Aluminum Field 2 16 JN799
Replacement Color Caps - Class 9001, Type J
ColorCatalog Number
Plastic GlassRed R29 R26Green G29 G26Amber A29 A26Blue L29 L26Clear C29 C26White W29 W26Yellow Y29 Y26
Replacement Parts - Class 9001, Type JType Catalog Number
Ring Nut 6512909601Locking Thrust Washer 6512909201Trim Washer 6512909301Rubber Sealing Washer 6512901801Note:Octagonal ringnuts can be tightened with standard tools, or use the reverse end of Square D wrench
Class 9001 Type K95.
Type A B C
JTR1 2.83" 1.20" .93"
JP, JT, JTR31
through JTR38
2.34" 1.11" .84"
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType O - Pilot LightsDescription and Selection
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved16
11/97
Type O
t This product is not recommended for continuous use at 120 V.
Approximate Dimensions
Instrument Type Incandescent Pilot Lights – Class 9001, Type O NEMA 13
Voltage AC/DC Average Current (Amps) Color Catalog Number
12 V 0.170
Red OR12
Green OG12
Amber OA12
Clear OC12
Yellow OY12
White OW12
Blue (Fluted) FB12
24 V 0.073
Red OR24
Green OG24
Amber OA24
Clear OC24
Yellow OY24
White OW24
Blue (Fluted) FB24
120 Vt 0.025
Red OR120
Green OG120
Amber OA120
Clear OC120
Yellow OY120
White OW120
Blue (Fluted) FB120
Replacement Lamps - Class 9001, Type O
Voltage Sylvania Lamp NumberSquare D Catalog
Number12 V 12PSB 255010500324 V 24PSB 2550105004
120 V 120PSB 2550105005
Replacement Lenses* - Class 9001, Type OColor Catalog Number
Red 2550420020
Green 2550420040
Amber 2550420060
Clear 2550420010
Yellow 2550420030
White 2550430040
Blue 2550470010
Minimum Order Quantity 10
1.8447
0.4110
0.8121
0.6817.5
0.205
0.02.5
mtg holerequired
width
thicknessA30064-963
max panelthickness
Dual Dimensions inchesmm
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXVL Miniature LED Pilot Lights
Specifications
1711/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
GeneralThis new Telemecanique range of LED pilot lights meets the very latest requirements in signalling techniques.
Because of their small size, Ø8 and Ø12 mm fixing pilot lights are particularly suitable for the following applications:
• mounting on small control stations.• shallow depth mounting.• large number of signalling units on a control station (low power dissipation).Small diameter LED pilot lights also have sealed front faces (IP 65 option available). An unsealed Ø8 mm fixing model with protruding LED and black bezel (aesthetic appearance) is also offered.
Advantages:LED pilot lights have many advantages:
• very long life and so low maintenance costs (bulb test no longer required).• highly resistant to shocks, vibrations and over-voltage.• low power consumption which, for example, allows compatibility with programmable controller outputs
by parallel connection with the load, to give a direct indication of output state.• very high reliability.Quick fixing by means of tags for soldered clips for Ø8 mm type, or threaded connectors Ø12 mm type. Safe connection due to integral ballast resistor and reverse polarity protection device.
Dimensions
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 230.
Conforming to standards IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660-200.
Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” treatment.
Ambient temperature Operation: -25 °C to + 70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F). Storage: -40 °C to + 70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F).
Electric shock protection Class III conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Degree of protection IP 40 (IP 65 with seal) conforming to IEC 529 and NF C 20-010.
Current consumption 25 mA.
Rated Insulation voltage 50 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110.
Life Can exceed 100,000 hours.
Voltage limits including ripple (---—) 0.8 UN ≤ U ≤1.2 Un.
Terminal referencing Polarity marked + – conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
Cabling
XVLA1kk, XVLA2kk: tags for 2.8 x 0.5 mm quick connectors, also for soldered connections.XVLA3kk: threaded connectors, clamping, capacity: min. 1 - 26 AWG solid or stranded, max. 1 - 16 AWG solid or stranded.
E
M12 x 1
10
6 45
O 1
6
O 12, with lens incorporated,protected LED XVL-A3
E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 6 mmE - mounting plate thickness 1 to 8 mm
O 8, with lens incorporated,protected LED XVL-A2
E
M8 x 0,5
12
341.5
O10
E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 8 mm
LED pilot lightsO8, with black bezel,visible LED XVL-A1..
E
M8 x 0.5
12
321.5
O12
MarkingFile LR 44087Class 3211 03
File E164353CCN NKCR2
All dimensions are in mms. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXVL Miniature LED Pilot LightsSelection and Accessories
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved18
11/97
1 Quick Connects (2.8 mm x 0.5 mm)2 Screw Termination
With Black Bezel, Raised LEDDescription Supply Voltage DC Color Catalog Number
Ø8 mmwith integral ballast resistorand reverse polarity protection diode
Degree of protection IP 40
5 V
Green XVLA113
Red XVLA114
Orange-yellow XVLA115
12 V
Green XVLA123
Red XVLA124
Orange-yellow XVLA125
24 V
Green XVLA133
Red XVLA134
Orange-yellow XVLA135
48 V
Green XVLA143
Red XVLA144
Orange-yellow XVLA145
With Integral Lens Cap, Covered LEDDescription Supply Voltage DC Color Catalog Number
Ø8 mm(1)
with integral ballast resistorand reverse polarity protection diode
Degree of protection IP 40
5 V
Green XVLA213
Red XVLA214
Orange-yellow XVLA215
12 V
Green XVLA223
Red XVLA224
Orange-yellow XVLA225
24 V
Green XVLA233
Red XVLA234
Orange-yellow XVLA235
48 V
Green XVLA243
Red XVLA244
Orange-yellow XVLA245
Ø12 mm(2)
with integral ballast resistorand reverse polarity protection diode
Degree of protection IP 40
5 V
Green XVLA313
Red XVLA314
Orange-yellow XVLA315
12 V
Green XVLA323
Red XVLA324
Orange-yellow XVLA325
24 V
Green XVLA333
Red XVLA334
Orange-yellow XVLA335
48 V
Green XVLA343
Red XVLA344
Orange-yellow XVLA345
AccessoriesDescription Catalog Number
Tightening tools(Sold singly)
For Ø8 mm pilot lights XVLX08
For Ø12 mm pilot lights XVLX12
Seals (IP 65)(Sold in lots of 10)
For Ø8 mm pilot lights XVLZ911
For Ø12 mm pilot lights XVLZ912
XVL-X..
XVL-Z91.
XVLA1kk
XVLA2kk
XVLA3kk
XVLXkk
XVLZ91k
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm, Double Insulated
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Selector, Toggle, and Reset Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Pilot Lights and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Illuminated Operators and Selector Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Square Illuminated Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Legend Plate Carriers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31XALB General Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32XALB Enclosures and Base Mounted Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33XALB Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34XA2B 22 mm Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mmDouble Insulated
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
20
11/97
Environment
Conformity to standards
XB2B, XD2P:
IEC-947-5-1, EN60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660-200, UL 508, CSA C 22-2 No. 14.
Approvals
CSA and UL:
push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600 - Q600, pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max); pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V)ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, BUREAU, VERITAS, SAHKOTARKASTUSKESKUS, GL, DNV, LROS
XD2P, standard version:
CSA A600-Q600, LROS.
Protective treatment Standard Version: “TC” (all climates).
Ambient temperature Storage: -40
°
C to +70
°
C (-40
°
F to +158
°
F.). Operating: -25
°
C to +70
°
C (-13
°
F to +158
°
F.).
Resistance to vibration 60 mm diameter mushroom head: 8 g. Other push buttons: 15 g. Small joystick controllers: 5g (from 40 to 50 Hz) conforming to IEC 68-2-6.
Resistance to shock Push buttons: 70 g. Mushroom head push buttons: 15 g.Selector switches: 120 g. Conforming to IEC 68-2-27.
Electric shock protection
XB2B, XD2P:
Class 1, conforming to IEC 536 and NF 20-030.
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 529 and NEC 20-010.
NEMA ratings XB2B: 1, 2, 4, 4x, 12K, 13, XB2B, XD2P.IP 65: flush and protecting, illuminated and non-illuminated push buttons (mounted).IP 40: double-headed push buttons (IP 65 on request).
Mechanical life
Push buttons -- 3 million operations. Latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations. Illuminated selector switches: 100,000 operations. (The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the warranty offered on this product, please refer to the Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.)
Contact block characteristics
Nominal thermal current 10 A conforming to IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No. 14, VDE 0660 part 2, NEMA Type A600-Q600.
Nominal insulation voltage 500V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110, IEC 158-1, 600V conforming to UL 508, 600v conforming toCSA 22-2 No. 14.
Insulation catagory Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.
Contact operation Slow-make N.O. or slow-break N.C. N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1 Section 3.
Contact resistance
≤
25 m
Ω
conforming to: NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 225-7 category 3.
Operating force Flush or projecting push buttons - with 1 NO contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 NC contact: 1.8 lbAdditional contacts - N.O.: add 1 lb - N.C.: add 0.7 lb.
Terminal referencing Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuses, g1 or N conforming to IEC 269-1 and VDE 0660-200.
Rated powerconforming to IEC 947-5-1 Appendix Cduty categories AC15-DC13Operating frequency: 3,600 ops/hourLoad factor: 0.5AC supply (50-60 Hz)
Cabling
XB2B, XD2P:
Screw and captive clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 lb-in. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5mm
2
(20 AWG), solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm
2
(16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm
2
(14 AWG) or by cable clips conforming to NF C 20-120 (on request).
1
0604
02
01
.06
.04
.02
.01
220 V127 V
24/48 V
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60current in amperes
mill
ions
of o
pera
tions ith = 10 A
AC Ratings, Inductive - NEMA A600
35% Power factor
VA BreakAmperes VA
Continuouscarrying Amperes
Resistive 75%Power factor
Make, Break and continuous Amperes
Volts MakeAmperes
120 60 7200 6 720 10 10240 30 7200 3 720 10 10480 15 7200 1.5 720 10 10600 12 7200 1.2 720 10 10
DC Ratings, NEMA Type Q600Inductive and resistive
Volts Make and break Continuous
125 0.55 2.5
250 0.27 2.5
600 0.10 2.5
DC supplyPower broken in wattsfor 1 million operations
Voltage 24 V 48 V 120 VInductive
load 65 W 48 W 40 W
File E164353CCN NKCR
File LR 44087Class 3211 03
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 35
XA2B Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 21-23XA2B Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 25-27XA2B Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 24Contact Blocks & Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mmNon-Illuminated Operators
21
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Operator
Type Size ColorCatalogNumber
Flush head
White ZA2BA1Black ZA2BA2Green ZA2BA3Red ZA2BA4
Yellow ZA2BA5Blue ZA2BA6Grey ZA2BA8
Flush headpremarked
Green “START” ZA2BA333Green “ON” ZA2BA341
White “I” ZA2BA131Black “O” ZA2BA232Green “I” ZA2BA331Red “O” ZA2BA432
Red “STOP” ZA2BA434Red “OFF” ZA2BA435
Transparent flush head(for use with ZB2BY1• stick on legendssee page 30)
Green ZA2BA38Red ZA2BA48
Yellow ZA2BA58Blue ZA2BA68Clear ZA2BA78
Extended head
White ZA2BL1Black ZA2BL2Green ZA2BL3Red ZA2BL4
Yellow ZA2BL5Blue ZA2BL6
Extended headpremarked
Red “STOP” ZA2BL434Red “O” ZA2BL432
Red “OFF” ZA2BL435
Silicone booted head
Black ZA2BP2Green ZA2BP3Red ZA2BP4
Yellow ZA2BP5Blue ZA2BP6
Neoprene booted head
Black ZA2BP02Green ZA2BP03Red ZA2BP04
Yellow ZA2BP05Blue ZA2BP06
Flush plunger(with full guard)
Black ZA2BA24Green ZA2BA34Red ZA2BA44
Yellow ZA2BA54Blue ZA2BA64
Flush plunger(with half guard)
Black ZA2BA22Green ZA2BA32Red ZA2BA42
Yellow ZA2BA52Blue ZA2BA62
Two button operators
Two flushBlack/Red ZA2BA9124Green/Red ZA2BA9134
Two flushpremarked
Black/Red “I/O” ZA2BA9224Green/Red “I/O” ZA2BA9234
Black/Red “START/STOP” ZA2BA9724Green/Red “START/STOP” ZA2BA9734
One flush,one extended
Black/Red ZA2BL9324Green/Red ZA2BL9334
One flush, one extendedpremarked
Black/Red “I/O” ZA2BL9424Green/Red “I/O” ZA2BL9434
Black/Red “START/STOP” ZA2BL9824Green/Red “START/STOP” ZA2BL9834
Flush headZA2BA•
Transparent flush headZA2BA•8
Booted headZA2BP•
Extended headZA2BL•
Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mmMushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
22
11/97
f
Key release operators come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 30. For switches keyed with different keys, add the suffixes shown in the table below (no change in price). For other key numbers, contact local field office.
j
Trigger action mushroom heads are "tamper proof" whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.
Yellow Contrast Plates
Yellow Contrast Plates comply with EN418 of the European Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC.
Operator
Type Size Color Catalog Number
Mushroom headmomentary
30 mm
Black ZA2BC24Green ZA2BC34Red ZA2BC44
Yellow ZA2BC54Blue ZA2BC64
40 mm
Black ZA2BC2Green ZA2BC3Red ZA2BC4
Yellow ZA2BC5Blue ZA2BC6
60 mmBlack ZA2BR2Red ZA2BR4
Mushroom headLatchingPush-Pull
30 mmBlack ZABT24Red ZABT44
40 mmBlack ZA2T2Red ZA2BT4
60 mmBlack ZA2BX2Red ZA2BX4
Mushroom headLatchingTurn to Release
30 mm Red ZA2BS4440 mm Red ZA2BS5460 mm Red ZA2BS64
Mushroom headLatching, Turn to Release Trigger Action
f
30 mm Red ZA2BS83440 mm Red ZA2BS844
Mushroom headLatchingKey to Release
j
30 mm Red ZA2BS7440 mm Red ZA2BS1460 mm Red ZA2BS24
Mushroom headLatching, Key to Release Trigger Action
fj
30 mm Red ZA2BS93440 mm Red ZA2BS944
Key Number Suffix
421 12
458A 10
520 14
3131A 20
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter
Text LanguageCatalog Number
Text LanguageCatalog Number
Blank N/A ZB2BY9101 Blank N/A ZB2BY8101Emergency Stop English ZB2BY9330 Emergency Stop English ZB2BY8330Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY9130 Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY8130Not Aus German ZB2BY9230 Not Aus German ZB2BY8230Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY9430 Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY8430Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY9630 Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY8630
Mushroom Head Momentary 30 mm
ZA2BC•4
Mushroom Head Turn to Release 40 mm
ZA2BS54
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
Mushroom Head Momentary 40 mm
ZA2BC•
Mushroom Head Key to Release 40 mm
ZA2BS14
EMERGENCY
STOP
ZB2BY8330
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mmSelector, Toggle, and Reset Switches
23
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
t
When ordering extended lever, substitute “J” for “D” in part number (No additional cost).Example: ZA2BD3 becomes ZA2BJ3
f
Key selector switches come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 30.For other key numbers contact local field office.
For switches keyed with different keys, add the following suffixes:
Non-illuminated selector switches
Type Positions, ActionCatalogNumber
Standard handleor extended lever
t
2-maintained ZA2BD22-spring return from right to left ZA2BD43-maintained ZA2BD33-spring return to center from left and right ZA2BD53-spring return from right to center ZA2BD83-spring return from left to center ZA2BD7
Key selectors
Type Positions, ActionKey
removalCatalogNumber
Key switch
f
2-maintained Left ZA2BG22-maintained Left, Right ZA2BG42-spring return right to left Left ZA2BG63-maintained All ZA2BG03-maintained Center ZA2BG33-maintained Left, Right ZA2BG53-maintained Left ZA2BG93-spring return to centerfrom left and right Center ZA2BG7
3-spring return to centerfrom left Right ZA2BG1
3-spring return to centerfrom right Center ZA2BG8
Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 28)
2 Position selector switch 3 Position selector switch
Contact block guide
Contact block guide
O X 1 N.O. (left or right) X O O 1 N.O. (left)X O 1 N.C. (left or right) O X O 2 NC wired in series (side-by-side)O X 1 N.O. O O X 1 N.O. (right)
and X X O 1 N.C. (right)X O 1 N.C. O X X 1 N.C. (left)
Note: View from front of panel X O X 2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)
Toggle switch
Description ColorCatalogNumber
Two position toggle switch Black ZA2BD28
Reset buttons (Mechanical overload resets 10 mm travel)
NEMA Type 4X(not suitablefor use withZA2BZ10•
body/contactassemblies)
FlushBlank
Green ZA2BA83Red ZA2BA84Blue ZA2BA86
with legendO Red ZA2BA8401R Blue ZA2BA8602
Extendedhead with legend O Red ZA2BL8401
Plunger (may be trimmed to length desired)The total operating distance may be set between 17 and 120 mm,as measured from the front face of the panel.
ZA2BZ13
Key Number Suffix
421 12
458A 10
520 14
3131A 20
StandardZA2BD•
ExtendedZA2BJ•
Key SwitchZA2BG•
Toggle SwitchZA2BD28
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 28Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 29Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 31
ZA2BA8602
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mmPilot Lights and Light Modules
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
24
11/97
a
Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
f
Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field office for details.
Pilot light head
Type Color Catalog Number
Standard
White ZA2BV01
Green ZA2BV03
Red ZA2BV04
Amber ZA2BV05
Blue ZA2BV06
Clear ZA2BV07
Special lens forneon and LED lamps
Green ZA2BV033
Red ZA2BV043
Amber ZA2BV053
Blue ZA2BV063
Clear ZA2BV073
Pilot light modules
Type Catalog Number
Direct supply (bulb included)
a (AC/DC)
ZA2BV6
a
Transformer type (AC only) 1.2 VA/6 V (bulb included)
f
24 V ZA2BV1
48 V ZA2BV2
110/120 V ZA2BV3
220/240 V ZA2BV94
440/480 V ZA2BV95
550/660 V ZA2BV98
Resistor type 130 V (bulb included)
220/250 V ZA2BV7
Lamps
Type Voltage AC/DC Watts Catalog Number
Incandescent
Replacement bulbs (Type BA9s)
6 1.5 DL1CB006
12 2.0 DL1CE012
24 2.0 DL1CE024
48 2.4 DL1CE048
130 2.6 DL1CE130
Neon(use with direct supply light module)
120 - NE51HRT120V
220 - NE51HRT220V
380 - NE51HRT380V
Type Color Voltage Part Number
LED
, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks
Green 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0063
Red 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0064
Amber 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0065
Green 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0123
Red 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0124
Amber 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0125
Green 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0243
Red 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0244
Amber 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0245
Green 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1203
Red 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1204
Amber 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1205
LED
, BA9s base for retrofitting into transformer Light Modules
Green 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0093
Red 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0094
Amber 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0095
StandardZA2BV0•
ZA2BV6
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20Replacement parts (bulbs & lenses). . . . . . . . . . . Page 30Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29
ZA2BV3
DLICE • • •(incandescent)
DLICJUS • • •(LED)
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mmIlluminated Operators
25
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
f
To upgrade to NEMA Type 3, 4 & 13 order silicon boot ZB2BW008.
Illuminated operators
Type Color Catalog Number
Flush head
White ZA2BW31Green ZA2BW33Red ZA2BW34
Amber ZA2BW35Blue ZA2BW36Clear ZA2BW37
Flush head for neon and LED lamps
Green ZA2BW333Red ZA2BW343
Amber ZA2BW353Blue ZA2BW363Clear ZA2BW373
Extended head
White ZA2BW11Green ZA2BW13Red ZA2BW14
Amber ZA2BW15Blue ZA2BW16Clear ZA2BW17
Extended head for neon and LED lamps
Green ZA2BW133Red ZA2BW143
Amber ZA2BW153Blue ZA2BW163Clear ZA2BW173
With half guard
White ZA2BW312Green ZA2BW332Red ZA2BW342
Amber ZA2BW352Blue ZA2BW362Clear ZA2BW372
Illuminated Turn-to-Releasemushroom head
Green ZA2BW73Red ZA2BW74
Yellow ZA2BW75Blue ZA2BW76Clear ZA2BW77
Two button momentaryaction operatorsNEMA Type 1 only
f
Amber indicatorTwo flush
Black/Red ZA2BW81254Green/Red ZA2BW81354
Two flush premarked
Black/Red “I/O” ZA2BW82254Green/Red “I/O” ZA2BW82354
Black/Red “Start/Stop” ZA2BW87254Green/Red “Start/Stop” ZA2BW87354
Amber indicatorOne flush,one extended
Black/Red ZA2BW83254
Green/Red ZA2BW83354
One flush extended, premarked
Black/Red “I/O” ZA2BW84254Green/Red “I/O” ZA2BW84354
Black/Red “Start/Stop” ZA2BW88254Green/Red “Start/Stop” ZA2BW88354
Turn to releaseZA2BW7•
Half guardZA2BW3•2
Extended headZA2BW1•
Flush headZA2BW3•
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 28Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 29Replacement Parts (lenses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 30Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 31
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mmIlluminated Selector Switches
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
26
11/97
Selector Switches
Number of positions, action ColorCatalogNumber
2-maintained Green ZA2BK123
Red ZA2BK124
Amber ZA2BK125
Blue ZA2BK126
Clear ZA2BK127
2-spring return Green ZA2BK143
from right to left Red ZA2BK144
Amber ZA2BK145
Blue ZA2BK146
Clear ZA2BK147
3-maintained Green ZA2BK133
Red ZA2BK134
Amber ZA2BK135
Blue ZA2BK136
Clear ZA2BK137
3-spring return to Green ZA2BK153
center from right and left Red ZA2BK154
Amber ZA2BK155
Blue ZA2BK156
Clear ZA2BK157
3-spring return Green ZA2BK183
from right to center Red ZA2BK184
Amber ZA2BK185
Blue ZA2BK186
Clear ZA2BK187
3-spring return Green ZA2BK173
from left to center Red ZA2BK174
Amber ZA2BK175
Blue ZA2BK176
Clear ZA2BK177
Selector Switch Sequences (using light module/contact block assemblies, page 28)
2 Position selector switch 3 Position selector switch
Contact block guide
Contact block guide
O X 1 N.O. (left or right) X O O 1 N.O. (left)X O 1 N.C. (left or right) O X O 2 NC wired in series (side-by-side)O X 1 N.O. O O X 1 N.O. (right)
and X X O 1 N.C. (right)X O 1 N.C. O X X 1 N.C. (left)
Note: View from front of panel X O X 2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 28Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 29Replacement Parts (lenses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 30Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 31
Illuminated selectorZA2BK1••
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mmSquare Push Buttons
27
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
t
For use with contact block assemblies, page 28.
f
For use with pilot light modules, page 24.
j
For use with light module / contact block assemblies, page 28.
Standard operators
t
Description Type ColorCatalogNumber
Push buttons
Flush
Black ZA2CA2
Green ZA2CA3
Red ZA2CA4
Yellow ZA2CA5
Blue ZA2CA6
Extended head
Black ZA2CL2
Green ZA2CL3
Red ZA2CL4
Yellow ZA2CL5
Blue ZA2CL6
Standard pilot lights
f
White ZA2CV01
Green ZA2CV03
Red ZA2CV04
Yellow ZA2CV05
Blue ZA2CV06
Clear ZA2CV07
Illuminated push buttons
j
Flush push buttonheads
White ZA2CW31
Green ZA2CW33
Red ZA2CW34
Yellow ZA2CW35
Blue ZA2CW36
Clear ZA2CW37
Projectingpush button heads
White ZA2CW11
Green ZA2CW13
Red ZA2CW14
Yellow ZA2CW15
Blue ZA2CW16
Clear ZA2CW17
Accessories for square push buttons
Mounting Tool Ring Nut Wrench and Lens Extractor ZA2CZ12
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20Contact Block Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
ZA2CA
k
ZA2CVO
k
ZA2CW1
k
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mmContact Block Assemblies
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
28
11/97
N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.
+
Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
t
Select proper digit for desired primary voltage:
1
(24 V 50/60 Hz)
2
(48 V 50/60 Hz)
3
(110/120 V 50/60 Hz)
94
(220/240 V 60 Hz)
95
(440/480 V 60 Hz)
98
(550/600 V 60 Hz).
f
Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field for details.
u
Non- illuminated devices can be configured with 6 contact blocks maximum (3 decks of 2).
j
Illuminated devices can be configured with a light module and 4 contact blocks maximum (2 decks of 2).
s
Contact blocks and light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number. Example: ZB2BE101 becomes ZB2BE1013.
Contact block assembliescontact blocks and mounting collar for XA2B pilot devices
s
DescriptionContacts
N.O. N.C.Catalog Number
1 Contact block1 - ZA2BZ101
- 1 ZA2BZ102
2 Contact blocks
2 - ZA2BZ103
- 2 ZA2BZ104
1 1 ZA2BZ105
Additional contact blocks
u
Description Contact Type Catalog Number
For converting body/contact assemblies to 3, 4, 5 or 6 contacts max or replacing 1st or 2nd contact blocks
N.O. Standard ZB2BE101
N.C. Standard ZB2BE102
Mounting collar onlyfor attaching contact block(s) to operator heads
ZA2BZ009
Light module assembliesmounting collar with light module and contact blocks for XA2B pilot devices
s
DescriptionContacts
N.O. N.C.Catalog Number
Direct supply incandescent bulb included (AC/DC)
j
Without contacts 1 - ZA2BW061+
1 Contact block - 1 ZA2BW062+
2 Contact blocks
2 - ZA2BW063+
- 2 ZA2BW064+
1 1 ZA2BW065+
Transfomer type (1.2 VA/6 V incandescent bulb included) (AC only)
fj
Without contacts
1 - ZA2BW0
t
1
1 Contact block - 1 ZA2BW0
t
2
2 Contact blocks
2 - ZA2BW0
t3
- 2 ZA2BW0t4
1 1 ZA2BW0t5
Resistor type (130 V incandescent bulb included) 220-250 V supply2 Contact blocks 1 1 ZA2BW075
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20Replacement Parts (bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 30Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
Contact block with mounting collar
ZA2BZ101
Additional contact blockZB2BE10k
Mounting collarZA2BZ009
Transformer typeZA2BWOt1
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXA2B 22 mm
Legend Plate Carriers
2911/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Legend plate carriers (30 x 40 mm) for XA2B pilot devicesComplete with “snap-in” (27 x 8 mm) legend plates, with standard text.“Start” functions: white characters on black. “Stop” functions: white characters on red.
Standard textsCatalogNumber
Standard textsCatalog Number
Auto-Hand ZA2BZ32364 Off ZA2BZ32312
Auto-O-Hand ZA2BZ32385 On ZA2BZ32311
Off-On ZA2BZ32367 Open ZA2BZ32313
Auto ZA2BZ32115 Power On ZA2BZ32326
Close ZA2BZ32314 Reset ZA2BZ32323
Down ZA2BZ32308 Reverse ZA2BZ32306
Emergency Stop ZA2BZ32330 Run ZA2BZ32334
Fast ZA2BZ32328 Slow ZA2BZ32327
Forward ZA2BZ32305 Start ZA2BZ32303
Hand ZA2BZ32316 Stop ZA2BZ32304
Inch ZA2BZ32321 Up ZA2BZ32307
Hand-O-Auto ZA2BZ32387
Description ColorCatalogNumber
Complete with “snap-in”(27 x 8 mm) legend plates, blank
Black or red background ZA2BZ32101
White or yellow background ZA2BZ32102
Legend plate carriers only ZA2BZ32
Snap in blank only (27 X 8 mm)Black or red background ZA2BY4101
White or yellow background ZA2BY4102
Legend plate carriers (30 x 50 mm) for XA2Bf pilot devices
Description ColorCatalogNumber
Complete with “snap-in”(27 x 18 mm) legend plates, blank
Black or red background ZA2BZ33101
White or yellow background ZA2BZ33102
Legend plate carriers only ZA2BZ33
Snap in blank only (27 x 18 mm)Black or red background ZA2BY5101
White or yellow background ZA2BY5102
Legend carrier for square aspect head (30 x 40 mm) for XA2B pilot devices
With “snap-in” blank legend plateBlack or red background ZA2BZ34101
White or yellow background ZA2BZ34102
Legend plate carriers only ZA2BZ34
No legend square aspect ring ZA2BZ31
Legend carrier for square aspect head (30 x 50 mm) for XA2B pilot devices
With “snap-in” blank legend plateBlack or red background ZA2BZ35101
White or yellow background ZA2BZ35102
Legend plate carriers only ZA2BZ35
Standard textZA2BZ32326
30 x 40 mmCarrier only
ZA2BZ32
30 x 50 mmZA2BZ33
30 x 40 mmSquare aspect
ZA2BZ34
30 x 50 mmSquare aspect
ZA2BZ35
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXA2B 22 mmAccessories and Replacement Parts
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved30
11/97
+ Complete lens part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (1-white, 3-green, 4-red, 5-amber, 6-blue, 7-clear). Example ZB2BV013 green standard pilot lens. Note: Jeweled lens not available in white.
j Complete boot part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (2-black, 3-green, 4-red, 5-yellow, 6-blue). Example ZB2BP013 green silicon boot.
AccessoriesType Description Catalog Number
Guards/Locks 60 mm mushroom guard (black plastic)no padlocking provision ZB2BZ19
Closing plates22 mm
Black plastic ZB2SZ3
Gray plastic ZB2SZ4
Blue metallic ZB2SZ2
Miscellaneous Accessories Add on push-on/push-off mechanism ZB2BZ21
Tools
Bulb extractor for use with BA9s XBFX13
Ring nut wrench ZA2BZ905
Lense removal key ZB2BZ8
Mylar circularlegends for use withtransparent flushhead operatorsSee page 21
No text ZB2BY1101
O ZBZBY1146
I ZBZBY1147
Auto ZB2BY1115
Hand ZB2BY1316
Off ZB2BY1312
On ZB2BY1311
Start ZB2BY1303
Stop ZB2BY1304
Forward ZB2BY1305
Reverse ZB2BY1306
Replacement PartsType Description Catalog Number
Replacement lenses
Lens – standard pilot light ZB2BV01k
Lens kit – standard pilot light (includes lens, diffuser and gasket) ZB2BV02k
Lens – pilot light (jeweled for LED and Neon) ZB2BV01k3
Lens – flush illuminated push buttons ZB2BW91k
Lens – flush illuminated push buttons (jeweled for LED and Neon) ZB2BW93k3
Lens – extended push buttons ZB2BW93k
Lens – extended push buttons (jeweled for LED and Neon) ZB2BW93k3
Lens – push-to-test ZB2BV01k1
Lens – rectangle for ZB2BW80000 series (2 button with indicator) ZB2BW90k
Lens – 40 mm mushroom W4042926400k
Replacement ring nut Standard nut for all operators ZB2BBZ901
Replacement bootsReplacement silicon boot for ZB2BP series operators ZB2BP01j
Replacement neoprene booty for ZB2BP series operators ZB2BP02j
Replacement keys Replacement key for standard selector switches and key release mushroom operators. Qty. 1- Ronis key #455. Q99900901
Key #421 Qty. 1 Q99900911
Key #458A Qty. 1 Q99900910
Key #520 Qty. 1 Q99900912
Key #3131A Qty. 1 Q99900915
ZB2-BV...
ZB2-BW93.
ZB2-BP012
ZA2-BZ901
Closing plateZB2SZ3
ZB2BVkkk
ZB2BW93k
ZB2BP012
ZA2 BZ901
Mylar circular legend
Push on/push offmechanism
ZB2BZ21
Q99900901
Q99900901
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXA2B 22 mmDimensions
3111/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
All dimensions are in mm. To convert to inches, divide mm by 25.4.
O 3
0
19
O 3
0
19
ZA2BW3•• ZA2BW1••
55
11
ZA2BW8•••4 ZA2BW8•••4 ZA2BK1••
55
15
55
25.5
E
1.18 30dia.
.4712
1.18 30
.6617
1.18 30
.6617
1.18 30
.6516.5
1.18 30
.6617
1.57 40
1.8948
1.8948
1.18 302.36 60
1.2231
1.2231
1.57 40
1.2231
1.18 30
1.18 30
1.2231
.9424
1.2231
.9424
1.57 40
1.2231
.9424
2.36 60
1.9148.5
.9424
1.18 30
.7820
.9424
1.18 30
1.18 30
1.18 30
1.0025.5
1.0025.5
1.18 30
1.1830
.5915
1.67
42.5
1.67
42.5
.4311
.9424
.9424
1.6943
1.14 29
1.65 42
1.1830
.277
1.57 40
1.1830
1.57 40
1.1830
1.57 40
Panel cut-out(Thickness E = 1 to 5 mm)
Control units(operating heads)ZA2BA•• ZA2CA• ZA2BL• ZA2BP• ZA2CL•
ZA2BS844ZA2BS834ZA2B•••ZA2B•••ZA2B•••
ZA2BS9•4 ZA2BS24ZA2BS14ZA2BS74
ZA2BG•ZA2BJ••ZA2BD••ZA2BL••34 ZA2BA••34
Body contact assembliesZA2BZ10•
Mounting collarZA2BZ009
ZA2B (with 30 x 50 legend plate carrier)
ZA2B (with 30 x 40 legend plate carrier)
16.5
30
ZA2BVO•(bodies) ZA2BV6
42 29
36.5
ZA2BV7
42 42
42
33
60
ZA2BV3, BV4, BV5
33
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXALBGeneral Purpose Control Stations
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved32
11/97
The XALB line of standard push button wall stations are in IEC Type IP65, plastic enclosures for indoor and outdoor use. The units have UL, CSA, and IEC approvals. The enclosures are provided with 4 to 8 cable entry knockouts. Two knockouts are in the base. A cross reference between the base (contact blocks) and the cover (operators) is provided to avoid confusion.
* Yellow cover per EN418 of European Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC
Operators NameplatesWiring
diagramPart
Number
1 push button Start XALB101
1 push button Stop XALB111
1 push button(mushroom head) N/A XALB164
1 push button(mushroom head)
Turn to release
N/A*
XALJ174
1 push button(mushroom head)
Turn to release“No Tease”
XALJ178
1 push button(mushroom head)
key to releaseXALJ184
1 push button(mushroom head)
key to release“No Tease”
XALJ188
2 push buttons StartStop XALB211
2 push buttons ForwardReverse XALB221
1 pilot light2 push buttons
StartStop XALB371
3 push buttonsForwardReverse
StopXALB311
3 push buttonsUp
DownStop
XALB321
3 push buttonsOpenCloseStop
XALB341
120V max
Marking
File LR 44087
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.
File E164353CCN NKCR
Class 3211 03
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXALB
Enclosures and Base Mounted Components
3311/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
XALB Wall Stations use ZA2B operators, special base mounted contact blocks and light modules. Legends used are ZB2BYkk type from page 57.
j Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. Replacement bulbs available on page 24. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
f Base mounted transformer light modules require a separately mounted transformer which mounts in the open next to the light module (hole blanking plug provided).
t Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field office for details.
Empty EnclosuresDescription Number of Holes Part Number
Light grey lid withdark grey base
1 XALB01
2 XALB02
3 XALB03
4 XALB04
5 XALB05
Yellow lid with grey base 1 XALJ01
Contact Blocks (base mounted)Description Symbol Function Part Number
Slow make 1 N/O XENL1111
Slow break, direct opening 1 N/C XENL1121
Contact Blocks (operator mounted)Description Symbol Function Part Number
Slow make, Slow break, (direct opening) 2 N/C, 1N/O ZA2BZ141
Pilot Light BodiesDescription Supply Voltage Part Number
Direct supply bulb included (AC/DC) j XALV6
Transformer Type (AC only)(1.2 VA/6 V Lamp Included)ft
120 V Primary XALV3
240 V Primary XALV94
480 V Primary XALV95
Direct through resistorBA9s, 130 V bulb included 230-240 V XALV7
Illuminated Push Button Bodies (1 N/C + 1 N/O)Description Supply Voltage Part Number
Direct supply (bulb included) (AC/DC) j ≤ 400 V XALW6
Transformer Type (AC only)(1.2 VA/6 V Lamp Included)ft
120 V Primary XALW3
240 V Primary XALW94
480 V Primary XALW95
Direct through resistorBA9s, 130 V bulb included 230-240 V XALW7
43
21
21
22
31
32
13
14
Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 21-23Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 25Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 30Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 30Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 34
XALB03
XENL1111
XALV6
XALW6
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXALBDimensions
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved34
11/97
Single-way control stations XALB01, XALJ01, XALB1kk, XALJ1kk
2-way control stations XALB02, XALB2kk
3-way control stations XALB03, XALB3kk
4 and 5-way control stations XALB04, B05
(1) 62 mm with push button
(2) 77 mm with selector switch
(3) 82 mm with mushroom head push button
(4) 102 mm with trigger action mushroom head push button
(5) 2 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands
(6) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base
(1) 4 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands
(2) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base
(1) Pilot light
(2) 6 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands
(3) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base
XAL b H H1 H2 (1) 6 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glandsB04 164 128 108 62
B05 194 158 138 72 (2) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base
512.0
4.17106
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
682.68
682.68
401.57
= =
==
= =
542.13
==
==
(5) (6) 2xø4.3
512.0
104
4.10
622.4
682.67
301.18
=
==
=
==
542.13
= =
=
==
=
401.57
(2)
(1)
2xØ4.3
1.9
482.
6868
622.4
134
5.28
2.5264 (1)
512.0
682.68
==
==
301.18
301.18
451.77
==
= =
= =54
2.1340
1.57
783.07
983.86
==
==
(3)
(2)
2xø4.3
(ZA2-BC44.BS44)3.22 / 82
b
65(ZA2-BP.)2.56
2.5164(ZA2-BVO.)
2.051
2.6066
==
==
301.18
301.18
301.18
301.18
==
H2
H1 H
=
=
= =
= =2.1354
1.5740
(2)
(1)
=
=
2xØ4.3
62(ZA2-BA...)2.40
Dual Dimensions:Millimeters
Inches
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXA2B 22 mm
Mounting Instructions
3511/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Panel cut-out: (legend plate carrier included)
Legend plate carrier mounting:
Fixing the operating head onto the body:
Removing the body:
3.3+ 0.20
24.1
+ 0
.40
1 5 mm 22.3+ 0.40 22.3
+ 0.40
clic
clic
1
2
3
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved36
11/97
Square D offers specialized control packages through the Modified Panels Group. Assemblies can be manufactured to meet your specific design criteria, incorporating special dimensions, enclosure types, and component makeup.
Specific control operator needs can be satisfied with products ranging fromstandard 30 mm push buttons to printed circuit board mounted pilot device assemblies.
In addition, Square D offers the widest variety of control products in numerous enclosure types to meet your electrical, environmental, anddimensional needs. Use of CAD designs, prototype assembly before production, and personalized service insures the product you receive will be exactly what you ordered...Guaranteed.
For additional information or receive a personalized proposal, contact your local Square D sales office.
Modified Panels by Square D
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Two Button Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Specialty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Reset Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Pilot Lights and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Light Module Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Specialty Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58XAPA Glass-Reinforced Polyester Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61XAPG Diecast Metal Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62XAPE Flush Mount Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63XB2B 22 mm Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mmGeneral Characteristics
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
38
11/97
Environment
Conformity to standards XB2B, XD2P: UL 508, IEC 947-5-1, EN60947-5-1, IEC337-1, IEC337-2, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE1003,BS 4794, VDE 0660-200, CSA C 22-2 No. 14, CSA C 22-2 No. 66
Approvals
UL:
push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600-Q600;pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max.);pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V)
CSA:
push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600-Q600.pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max.);pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V).ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, BUREAU VERITAS, SAHKOTARKASTUSKESKUS, GL, DNV, LROS
XD2P,
standard version: CSA A600-Q600, LROS.
Protective treatment Standard version: TC “All climates”
Ambient temperature Operating: -25
°
C to +70
°
C (-13
°
F to +158
°
F) Storage: -40
°
C to +70
°
C (-40
°
F to +158
°
F )
Resistance to vibration 60 mm diameter mushroom head: 8 g. Other push buttons: 15 g. Small joystick controllers: 5 g (from 40 to 50 Hz)Conforming to IEC 68-2-6.
Resistance to shock Push buttons: 70 g. Mushroom head push-buttons: 15 g. Selector switches: 200 g. Conforming to IEC 68-2-27.
Protection against electric shock
XB2B, XD2P:
Class 1, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Degree of protectionconforming to IEC 529and NF C 20-010
NEMA ratings XB2B: 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12K, 13, XB2B, XD2P: IP 65: flush and protecting, illuminated and non-illuminated push buttons (mounted). IP 66: booted and mushroom head push buttons, selector switches, pilot lights and small joystick controllers (mounted). IP 40: double- headed push buttons (IP 65 on request).
Mechanical life Push buttons—3 million operations (Latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations. Illuminated selector switches: 100,000 operations). The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product, please refer to Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.
Contact block characteristics
Nominal thermal current 10 A conforming to IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No. 14, VDE 0660 part 2, NEMA Type A600-Q600.
Nominal insulation voltage 500 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110, IEC 158-1, 600 V conforming to UL 508, 600 V conforming to CSA 22-2 No. 14.
Insulation catagory Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.
Contact operation Slow- make N.O. or slow-break N.C. N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN60947-5-1section 3.
Contact resistance
≤
25 m
Ω
conforming to: NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 225-7 category 3.
Operating force Flush or projecting push buttons - with 1 NO contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 NC contact: 1.8 lbAdditional contacts - N.O.: add 1 lb - N.C.: add 0.7 lb.
Terminal referencing Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuses, Gl or N conforming to IEC 269-1and VDE 0660-200.
Rated powerconforming to IEC 947-5-1 Appendix Cduty categories AC11-DC11Operating frequency: 3,600 ops/hourLoad factor: 0.5AC supply (50-60 Hz)
Cabling
XB2B, XD2P:
Screw and captive clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 lb-in. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5 mm
2
(20 AWG) solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm
2
(16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm
2
(14 AWG) or by quick connector conforming to NF C 20-120 (on request).
1
0604
02
01
.06
.04
.02
.01
220 V127 V
24/48 V
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60current in amperes
mill
ions
of o
pera
tions ith = 10 A
DC supplyPower broken in wattsfor 1 million operations
Voltage 24 V 48 V 120 V
Inductiveload 65 W 48 W 40 W
AC Ratings, Inductive - NEMA A600
35% Power factor
VA BreakAmperes VA
Continuouscarrying Amperes
Resistive 75%Power factor
Make, Break and continuous Amperes
Volts MakeAmperes
120 60 7200 6 720 10 10
240 30 7200 3 720 10 10
480 15 7200 1.5 720 10 10
600 12 7200 1.2 720 10 10
DC Ratings, NEMA Type Q600Inductive and resistive
Volts Make and break Continuous125 0.55 2.5
250 0.27 2.5
600 0.10 2.5
File E164353CCN NKCR
File LR 44087Class 3211 03
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mmNon-Illuminated Operators
39
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Operator
Type Color CatalogNumber
Flush head
White ZB2BA1
Black ZB2BA2
Green ZB2BA3
Red ZB2BA4
Yellow ZB2BA5
Blue ZB2BA6
Grey ZB2BA8
Flush head premarked
White “I” ZB2BA131
Black “START” ZB2BA230
Black “O” ZB2BA232
Green “I” ZB2BA331
Red “O” ZB2BA432
Green “START” ZB2BA333
Green “ON” ZB2BA341
Red “STOP” ZB2BA434
Red “OFF” ZB2BA435
Metallic flush head(metal pusher)
Black ZB2BA29
Green ZB2BA39
Red ZB2BA49
Yellow ZB2BA59
Transparent flush headUse with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1
kkk
) See page 57
Green ZB2BA38
Red ZB2BA48
Amber ZB2BA58
Blue ZB2BA68
Clear ZB2BA78
Guarded head
White ZB2BA16
Black ZB2BA26
Green ZB2BA36
Red ZB2BA46
Yellow ZB2BA56
Blue ZB2BA66
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references (except
ZB2BP2
TO ZB2BP6
).Example:
ZB2BA2
becomes
ZB2BA27
.
Flush headZB2BA•
Metallic flush headZB2BA•9
Transparent flush headZB2BA•8
Guarded headZB2BA•6
Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 46Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 38Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 57Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 55Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 56Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mmNon-Illuminated Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
40
11/97
Type ColorCatalogNumber
Extended head
White ZB2BL1
Black ZB2BL2
Green ZB2BL3
Red ZB2BL4
Yellow ZB2BL5
Blue ZB2BL6
Extended head premarked
Red “O” ZB2BL432
Red “STOP” ZB2BL434
Red “OFF” ZB2BL435
Silicon booted head
Black ZB2BP2
Green ZB2BP3
Red ZB2BP4
Yellow ZB2BP5
Blue ZB2BP6
Neoprene booted head
Black ZB2BP02
Green ZB2BP03
Red ZB2BP04
Yellow ZB2BP05
Blue ZB2BP06
Flush with reinforced dust, damp, and cutting oil protection
White ZB2BA15
Black ZB2BA25
Green ZB2BA35
Red ZB2BA45
Yellow ZB2BA55
Blue ZB2BA65
Transparent silicon booted push buttonUse with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1
kkk
) See page 57.
Green ZB2BP38
Red ZB2BP48
Yellow ZB2BP58
Blue ZB2BP68
Clear ZB2BP78
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix
7
to the above references (except
ZB2BP2 TO ZB2BP6
and
ZB2BP02 TO ZB2BP06
).Example:
ZB2BL2
becomes
ZB2BL27.
Operator
Extended headZB2BL•
Extended head marked stopZB2BL434
Silicon booted headZB2BP•
Flush with reinforced protectionZB2BA•5
Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 46Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 38Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 57Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 55Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 56Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mmMushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates
41
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Yellow Contrast Plates
Operator
Type Size ColorCatalogNumber
Mushroom headMomentary
30mm
Black ZB2BC24
Green ZB2BC34
Red ZB2BC44
Yellow ZB2BC54
Blue ZB2BC64
40mm
Black ZB2BC2
Green ZB2BC3
Red ZB2BC4
Yellow ZB2BC5
Blue ZB2BC6
60mm
Black ZB2BR2
Green ZB2BR3
Red ZB2BR4
Yellow ZB2BR5
Blue ZB2BR6
Mushroom headKey release
a
40mm Red ZB2BS14
60mm Red ZB2BS24
Mushroom head push buttonwith trigger action
f
Key release
a
40mm Red ZB2BS944
Mushroom headturn to release 40mm Red ZB2BS54
Premarked “EMO” 40mm Red ZB2BS5430
Mushroom head push buttonwith trigger action
f
Turn to release40mm Red ZB2BS844
Mushroom headturn to release 60mm Red ZB2BS64
Mushroom headpush-pull 40mm
Black ZB2BT2
Red ZB2BT4
Premarked “EMERGENCY STOP” 40mm Red ZB2BT43
Mushroom headpush-pull 60mm
Black ZB2BX2
Red ZB2BX4
a
Key release operators come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 56. For other key numbers contact local field office.
f
Trigger action mushroom heads are “tamper proof” whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.
Guards / Locks
Type Size Color CatalogNumber
Metal 40 mm with finger cutout and 7 mm holes for padlocking
Red
ZB2BZ1804
Plastic 60 mm (for 40 mm turn to release)
Yellow
ZB2BZ1905
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter
Text Language Catalog Number Text Language Catalog Number
Blank N/A ZB2BY9101 Blank N/A ZB2BY8101Emergency Stop English ZB2BY9330 Emergency Stop English ZB2BY8330Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY9130 Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY8130Not Aus German ZB2BY9230 Not Aus German ZB2BY8230Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY9430 Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY8430Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY9630 Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY8630
Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 46Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 38Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 57Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 55Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 56Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59
ZB2BY8330
Mushroom head 40mmZB2BC•
Mushroom head 60mmZB2BR•
Mushroom headkey release
ZB2BS•4
Mushroom headturn to release
ZB2BS54
Mushroom headwith trigger action
turn to releaseZB2BS844
EM
ERGENCY
STOP
4/98
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mmLever and Key Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
42
11/97
a
When ordering extended lever subsitute J for D. Example:
ZB2BD2
becomes
ZB2BJ2
.
f
Key selector switches come with Ronis #455 keys (quanitity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 21. For switches keyed with different keys, add the suffixes shown in the table below (no change in price). For other key numbers contact local field office.
Lever Operators
Type Number of positions, actions Lever Color Catalog Number
Standard orExtended lever
a
2-maintainedBlack ZB2BD2White ZB2BD201Red ZB2BD204
2-spring returnfrom right to left
Black ZB2BD4White ZB2BD401Red ZB2BD404
3-maintainedBlack ZB2BD3White ZB2BD301Red ZB2BD304
3-spring return to centerfrom left and right
Black ZB2BD5White ZB2BD501Red ZB2BD504
3-spring return fromright to center
Black ZB2BD8White ZB2BD801Red ZB2BD804
3-spring return fromleft to center
Black ZB2BD7White ZB2BD701Red ZB2BD704
Key Operators
Type Number of positions, actions, key removal Catalog Number
Key switch
f
2-maintained key removal from left ZB2BG22-maintained key removal from left or right ZB2BG42-spring return from right to left, key removal from left ZB2BG63-maintained key removal from center ZB2BG33-maintained key removal from left and right ZB2BG53-maintained key removal from left ZB2BG93-maintained key removal from all positions ZB2BG03-spring return left or right to center, key removal from center ZB2BG73-spring return left to center key removal right ZB2BG13-spring return right to center key removal center ZB2BG83-spring return right to center key removal left ZB2BG08
Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 46)
2 Position selector switch 3 Position selector switch
Contact block guide
Contact block guide
O X 1 N.O. (left or right) X O O 1 N.O. (left)X O 1 N.C. (left or right) O X O 2 NC wired in series (side-by-side)O X 1 N.O. O O X 1 N.O. (right)
and X X O 1 N.C. (right)X O 1 N.C. O X X 1 N.C. (left)
Note: View from front of panel X O X 2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix
7
to the above references.Example:
ZB2BD3
becomes
ZB2BD37
.
Key Number Suffix
421 12458A 10520 14
3131A 20
Contact Block Assemblies .....................................................................Page 46Specialty Contacts................................................................................ Page 53Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59
Standard leverZB2BD•••
Extended lever
a
ZB2BJ•••
Key switchZB2BG••
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mmTwo Button Operators
43
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Momentary operators
Type Marked
f
ColorCatalogNumber
Two flush
Black/Red ZB2BA9124
Green/Red ZB2BA9134
I,O Black/Red ZB2BA9224
I,O Green/Red ZB2BA9234
STOP, START Black/Red ZB2BA9724
STOP, START Green/Red ZB2BA9734
One flush, one extended
Black/Red ZB2BL9324
Green/Red ZB2BL9334
I,O Black/Red ZB2BL9424
I,O Green/Red ZB2BL9434
STOP, START Black/Red ZB2BL9824
STOP, START Green/Red ZB2BL9834
f
Additional markings available on special order. Contact local field office for details.
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix
7
to the above references.Example:
ZB2BA9124
becomes
ZB2BA91247
.
2 Button maintained operators
TypeNumber ofcontact(s)
Button 1 Button 2CatalogNumber
Flush interlocked push buttons(30 mm centers, maintained,mechanically interlocked)Units include contact block(s) as shown.
1 NO-Black Black XB2BF521
1 NO-Black Red XB2BF551
1 NO-Green Red XB2BF581
2 NO-Black NO-Black XB2BF523
2 NO-Black NO-Red XB2BF553
2 NO-Green NO-Red XB2BF583
2 NO-Black NO-Black XB2BF525
2 NO-Black NC-Red XB2BF555
2 NO-Green NC-Red XB2BF585
Type ColorCatalogNumber
Replacement push button operators only(with no spring return in head)for XB2BF
Black ZB2BAW80424194002
Green ZB2BAW80424194003
Red ZB2BAW80424194004
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix
7
to the above references.Example:
ZB2BF521
becomes
ZB2BF5217
.
Two flushZB2BA9•••
One flush, one extendedZB2BL94••
Start/stopZB2BL98••
InterlockedXB2BF5••
Contact Block Assemblies ............................................................... Page 46Specialty Contacts.......................................................................... Page 53Application Information .................................................................... Page 38Legend Plates.................................................................................. Page 57Accessories ..................................................................................... Page 55Replacement Parts .......................................................................... Page 56Dimensions............................................................................... Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mmSpecialty Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
44
11/97
t
Units come with 1 N.O. contact in each direction. Screw terminals. Contact blocks cannot be added or removed from the above arrangements. For other requirements, contact local sales office.
f
Customer to supply potentiometer, unit accepts 1/4" diameter, 1.625" (43-47 mm) length shaft potentiometer.
These 2 direction and 4 direction position charts are viewed from behind the panel, thereby reversing east and west positions. When lever is moved away from center, only one contact changes from N.O. to N.C. The other contact blocks in the swtich are unaffected.
Operators
Type ColorCatalogNumber
Wobble sticksBlack ZB2BB2
Red ZB2BB4
Potentiometer operator
f
Black ZB2BD922
Joysticks
t
Contacts supplied
2-maintained XD2PA12
2-spring return XD2PA22
4-maintained XD2PA14
4-spring return XD2PA24
Two step push buttons (contacts supplied)
TypeContact1st step
Contact2nd step
CatalogNumber
Flush head
N.O. N.O. XB2BA
k
41
N.O. N.C. XB2BA
k
42
N.O.+N.C. N.O. XB2BA
k
43
N.O.+N.C. N.O.+N.C. XB2BA
k
44
k
Replace
k
with desired color head. (1-white, 2-black, 3-green, 4-red, 5-yellow, 6-blue).
Two position toggle switch (maintained)
Type ColorCatalogNumber
Two position toggle switchNEMA Type 1 only Black ZB2BD28
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix
7
to the above references.Example:
ZB2BD922
becomes
ZB2BD9227
.
2 Position
OPERATED
CENTER
X
OPERATED
CENTER
X
4 Position
OPERATED
CENTER
X
OPERATED
CENTER
X
OP
ER
AT
ED
CE
NT
ER
OP
ER
AT
ED
CE
NT
ER
X X
Wobble sticks
Potentiometer operator
Joysticks
Contact Block Assemblies .....................................................................Page 46Specialty Contacts ................................................................................ Page 53Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mmReset Operators
45
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Reset operators
Type DescriptionAdjustable
length of rodColor
CatalogNumber
Flush head
0.39" (10 mm) TravelPanel thickness: 0.04" - 0.12" (1-3 mm)Tightened by nut
0.24" - 0.63"(6 - 16 mm)
Black XB2BA821
Red XB2BA841
Blue XB2BA861
0.63" - 1.02"(16 - 26 mm)
Black XB2BA822
Red XB2BA842
Blue XB2BA862
0.55" (14 mm) TravelPanel thickness: 0.04" - 0.23" (1-6 mm)Tightened by 2 screw mountingbase (supplied)
1.18" - 2.25"(30 - 57 mm)
Black XB2BA921
Red XB2BA941
Blue XB2BA961
2.16" - 3.23"(55 - 82 mm)
Black XB2BA922
Red XB2BA942
Blue XB2BA962
0.55" (14 mm) TravelPanel thickness: 0.04" - 0.23" (1-6 mm)Tightened by 2 screw mountingbase (supplied)
3.15" - 4.2"(80 - 107 mm)
Black XB2BA923
Red XB2BA943
Blue XB2BA963
4.13" - 5.2"(105 - 132 mm)
Black XB2BA924
Red XB2BA944
Blue XB2BA964
5.12"- 6.18"(130 - 157 mm)
Black XB2BA925
Red XB2BA945
Blue XB2BA965
6.1" - 7.16"(155 - 182 mm)
Black XB2BA926
Red XB2BA946
Blue XB2BA966
7.08" - 8.15"(180 - 207 mm)
Black XB2BA927
Red XB2BA947
Blue XB2BA967
8.07" - 9.13"(205 - 232 mm)
Black XB2BA928
Red XB2BA948
Blue XB2BA968
9.05" - 10.1"(230 - 257 mm)
Black XB2BA929
Red XB2BA949
Blue XB2BA969
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix
7
to the above references.Example:
ZB2BA944
becomes
ZB2BA9447.
XB2BA8kk
XB2BA9kk30 to 82 mm
XB2BA9kk80 to 257 mm
Application Information .........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates .......................................................................................Page 57Dimensions ....................................................................................Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmContact Blocks
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved46
11/97
t Quick connect contact blocks will accept commercially available female quick slide connector (1 x 0.25" or 2 x 0.11")f Non-illuminated devices can be configured with 6 contacts maximum (3 decks of 2). N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.
Mounting base with contact block(s) “Screw clamp connection”
N.O. N.C.
Type ContactsN.O. N.C. Catalog Number
1 Contact Block1 - ZB2BZ101
- 1 ZB2BZ102
2 Contact Blocks
2 - ZB2BZ103
- 2 ZB2BZ104
1 1 ZB2BZ105
Additional contact blocks
Type ContactsN.O. N.C. Catalog Number
For making up body assemblieswith 3, 4, 5 or max. of 6 contact blocksor replacing 1st or 2nd contact blockf
1 - ZB2BE101
- 1 ZB2BE102
Mounting base with contact block(s) “Quick connect” t
TypeContacts
N.O. N.C.Catalog Number
1 Contact Block1 - ZB2BZ1013
- 1 ZB2BZ1023
2 Contact Blocks
2 - ZB2BZ1033
- 2 ZB2BZ1043
1 1 ZB2BZ1053
Additional contact blocks “Quick Connect” *
TypeContacts
N.O. N.C.Catalog Number
For making up body assemblieswith 3, 4, 5 or max. of 6 contact blocksor replacing 1st or 2nd contact blockf
1 - ZB2BE1013
- 1 ZB2BE1023
Spare partsDescription Catalog Number
Mounting Base only With fixing screws ZB2BZ009
Quick Connect t Fitting by customer ZB2BZ003
Non-Illuminated Operators .............................................................Pages 39-41Specialty Contacts ............................................................................... Page 53Application Information..........................................................................Page 38Accessories...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts................................................................................Page 56Dimensions ....................................................................................Pages 58-59
ZB2BZ101
ZB2BE10k
ZB2BZ009
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mm
Pilot Lights and Light Modules
4711/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Direct supplyZB2BV6
Transformer typeZB2BV3
StandardZB2BV••
Special lens for neon and LED bulbsZB2BV0••
t Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.f Light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number.
Example: ZB2BV6 becomes ZB2BV63.
Pilot light heads
Type ColorCatalogNumber
Standard
White ZB2BV01
Green ZB2BV03
Red ZB2BV04
Amber ZB2BV05
Blue ZB2BV06
Clear ZB2BV07
Special lens for neon and LED bulbs
Green ZB2BV033
Red ZB2BV043
Amber ZB2BV053
Blue ZB2BV063
Clear ZB2BV073
Glass lens (NEMA Type 1 only)
Green ZB2BV032
Red ZB2BV042
Amber ZB2BV052
Clear ZB2BV072
Pilot light modules f
TypeCatalogNumber
Direct supply (incandescent bulb included)t (AC/DC) ZB2BV6t
Transformer type (1.2 VA/6 V bulb included) (AC only)
24 V: 50-60 Hz ZB2BV1
48 V: 50-60 Hz ZB2BV2
110 V: 50 Hz 110-120 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV3
127 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV91
220 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV4
240 V: 50 Hz 220-240 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV94
380 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV5
415 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV9
440-480 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV95
500 V: 50 Hz ZB2BV8
550-660 V: 60 Hz ZB2BV98
Resistor type (130 V bulb included).
220/250 V (AC/DC) ZB2BV7
Replacement Bulbs................................................................................Page 56Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmIlluminated Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved48
11/97
Operator
Type ColorCatalog Number
Flush head White ZB2BW31
Green ZB2BW33
Red ZB2BW34
Amber ZB2BW35
Blue ZB2BW36
Clear ZB2BW37
Flush head for neon and LED lamps Green ZB2BW333
Red ZB2BW343
Amber ZB2BW353
Blue ZB2BW363
Clear ZB2BW373
Extended head White ZB2BW11
Green ZB2BW13
Red ZB2BW14
Amber ZB2BW15
Blue ZB2BW16
Clear ZB2BW17
Extended head for neon and LED lamps Green ZB2BW133
Red ZB2BW143
Amber ZB2BW153
Blue ZB2BW163
Clear ZB2BW173
Silicon booted flush head Green ZB2BW53
Use with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1kkk ) Red ZB2BW54
See page 57 Amber ZB2BW55
Blue ZB2BW56
Clear ZB2BW57
Push to test Green ZB2BV031
Red ZB2BV041
Amber ZB2BV051
Blue ZB2BV061
Clear ZB2BV071
Operating heads with black metal bezelTo order, add suffix 7 to the above references.Example: ZB2BV071 becomes ZB2BV0717.
Light Module Assemblies .......................................................................Page 52Specialty Light Modules.........................................................................Page 54Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59
Flush HeadZB2BW3•
Flush Head for LEDZB2BW3••
Extended HeadZB2BW1•
Extended Head for LEDZB2BW1••
Silicon Booted Flush HeadZB2BW5•
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mm
Illuminated Operators
4911/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
t Additional color indicators available, contact local field office for details.f To upgrade to NEMA Type 3, 4, 13 order clear silicon boot ZB2BW008.
Mushroom operator
Type Color CatalogNumber
40 mm Mushroon head Green ZB2BW43
2 position momentary Red ZB2BW44
Amber ZB2BW45
Blue ZB2BW46
Clear ZB2BW47
40 mm Mushroom head Green ZB2BW63
2 position maintained Red ZB2BW64
Amber ZB2BW65
Blue ZB2BW66
Clear ZB2BW67
Two button with amber indicatort NEMA Type 1 onlyf
Type Marked Color CatalogNumber
Two Flush Black/Red ZB2BW81254
Green/Red ZB2BW81354
I,O Black/Red ZB2BW82254
I,O Green/Red ZB2BW82354
START,STOP Black/Red ZB2BW87254
START,STOP Green/Red ZB2BW87354
One flush, one extended Black/Red ZB2BW83254
Green/Red ZB2BW83354
I,O Black/Red ZB2BW84254
I,O Green/Red ZB2BW84354
START,STOP Black/Red ZB2BW88254
START,STOP Green/Red ZB2BW88354
Operating heads with black metal bezelTo order, add suffix 7 to the above references.Example: ZB2BW64 becomes ZB2BW647.
Light Module Assemblies.......................................................................Page 52Specialty Light Modules ........................................................................Page 54Application Information..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates .......................................................................................Page 57Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59
40 mm Mushroom headZB2BW••
Two FlushAmber Indicator
ZB2BW8••54
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmIlluminated Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved50
11/97
Selector Switches
Number of positions, action ColorCatalogNumber
2-maintained Green ZB2BK123
Red ZB2BK124
Amber ZB2BK125
Blue ZB2BK126
Clear ZB2BK127
2-spring return Green ZB2BK143
from right to left Red ZB2BK144
Amber ZB2BK145
Blue ZB2BK146
Clear ZB2BK147
3-maintained Green ZB2BK133
Red ZB2BK134
Amber ZB2BK135
Blue ZB2BK136
Clear ZB2BK137
3-spring return to Green ZB2BK153
center from right and left Red ZB2BK154
Amber ZB2BK155
Blue ZB2BK156
Clear ZB2BK157
3-spring return Green ZB2BK183
from right to center Red ZB2BK184
Amber ZB2BK185
Blue ZB2BK186
Clear ZB2BK187
3-spring return Green ZB2BK173
from left to center Red ZB2BK174
Amber ZB2BK175
Blue ZB2BK176
Clear ZB2BK177
Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 52)2 Position selector switch 3 Position selector switch
Contact block guide
Contact block guide
O X 1 N.O. (left or right) X O O 1 N.O. (left)X O 1 N.C. (left or right) O X O 2 NC wired in series (side-by-side)O X 1 N.O. O O X 1 N.O. (right)
and X X O 1 N.C. (right)X O 1 N.C. O X X 1 N.C. (left)
Note: View from front of panel X O X 2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)
Operating heads with black metal bezelTo order, add suffix 7 to the above references.Example: ZB2BK123 becomes ZB2BK1237.
Selector switchZB2BK1kk
Light Module Assemblies.......................................................................Page 52Specialty Light Modules.........................................................................Page 54Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mm
Illuminated Operators
5111/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
40 mm Mushroom head
Type Pushpositiont Color Catalog Number
1N.O. - 1N.C.♦Catalog Number
2N.O. - 2N.C.
Non-illuminatedM: MaintainedSR: Spring Return
M White XB2BN111 XB2BN112M Green XB2BN311 XB2BN312M Red XB2BN411 XB2BN412M Amber XB2BN511 XB2BN512M Blue XB2BN611 XB2BN612M Clear XB2BN711 XB2BN712
SR White XB2BN121 XB2BN322SR Red XB2BN421 XB2BN422SR Amber XB2BN521 XB2BN522SR Blue XB2BN621 XB2BN622SR Clear XB2BN721 XB2BN722
IlluminatedDirect supply
M White XB2BN1161 XB2BN1162M Green XB2BN3161 XB2BN3162M Red XB2BN4161 XB2BN4162M Amber XB2BN5161 XB2BN5162M Blue XB2BN6161 XB2BN6162M Clear XB2BN7161 XB2BN7162
SR White XB2BN1261 XB2BN1262SR Green XB2BN3261 XB2BN3262SR Red XB2BN4261 XB2BN4262SR Amber XB2BN5261 XB2BN5262SR Blue XB2BN6261 XB2BN6262SR Clear XB2BN7261 XB2BN7262
IlluminatedTransformer Type 110/120 V
M White XB2BN1131 XB2BN1132M Green XB2BN3131 XB2BN3132M Red XB2BN4131 XB2BN4132M Amber XB2BN5131 XB2BN5132M Blue XB2BN6131 XB2BN6132M Clear XB2BN7131 XB2BN7132
SR White XB2BN1231 XB2BN1232SR Green XB2BN3231 XB2BN3232SR Red XB2BN4231 XB2BN4232SR Amber XB2BN5231 XB2BN5232SR Blue XB2BN6231 XB2BN6232SR Clear XB2BN7231 XB2BN7232
IlluminatedTransformer Type220/240V
M White XB2BN1141 XB2BN1142M Green XB2BN3141 XB2BN3142M Red XB2BN4141 XB2BN4142M Amber XB2BN5141 XB2BN5142M Blue XB2BN6141 XB2BN6142M Clear XB2BN7141 XB2BN7142
SR White XB2BN1241 XB2BN1242SR Green XB2BN3241 XB2BN3242SR Red XB2BN4241 XB2BN4242SR Amber XB2BN5241 XB2BN5242SR Blue XB2BN6241 XB2BN6242SR Clear XB2BN7241 XB2BN7242
Mushroom lens only
White W40429264001Green W40429264003Red W40429264004
Amber W40429264005Blue W40429264006Clear W40429264007
t Position status: Position 1 - Pull. Spring return, Position 2- Center, Maintained, Position 3 - Push. Maintained or spring return. f Contacts cannot be modified or interchanged; therefore operators are not sold separately.
1 N.O./1 N.C. 2 N.O./2 N.C.Pos. 1Pull
Pos. 2Center
Pos. 3Push
Pos. 1Pull
Pos. 2Center
Pos. 3Push
Non-IlluminatedXB2BN•••
Illuminated(Direct Supply)
XB2BN••6•
Illuminated(Transformer type)
XB2BN••••
Application Information...........................................Page 38Legend Plates ........................................................Page 57Accessories............................................................Page 55Replacement Parts.................................................Page 56Dimensions......................................................Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmLight Module Assemblies
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved52
11/97
+ Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V AC/DC.Note: If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
t Select proper digit for voltage desired: 1 (24 V 50/60 Hz) 2(48 V 50/60 Hz) 3 (110/120 V 50/60 Hz).94 (220/240 V 60 Hz) 95 (440/480 V 60 Hz) 98 (550/600 V 60 Hz).
f Illuminated devices can be configured with a light module and 4 contacts maximum (2 decks of 2).j Additional primary voltages available, contact local field office for details.k Contact blocks and light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number.
Example: ZB2BW061 becomes ZB2BW0613. N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.
Light module assemblies with contact block(s) N.O. N.C.screw clamp connectorsk
Type Contacts Catalog
NumberN.O. N.C.
Direct supply (incandescent bulb included) (AC/DC)
Without contactsf - - ZB2BW060+
1 Contact block 1 - ZB2BW061+
- 1 ZB2BW062+
2 Contact blocks 2 - ZB2BW063+
- 2 ZB2BW064+
1 1 ZB2BW065+
Transformer type (1.2 VA/6 V AC incandescent bulb included) (AC only)j
Without contactsf - - ZB2BW0t0
1 Contact block 1 - ZB2BW0t1
- 1 ZB2BW0t2
2 Contact blocks 2 - ZB2BW0t3
- 2 ZB2BW0t4
1 1 ZB2BW0t5
Resistor type (130 V incandescent bulb included) 220-250 V supply
2 Contact blocks 1 1 ZB2BW075
Additional contact blocks f N.O. N.C.
TypeContacts Catalog
NumberN.O. N.C.For making up body assemblieswith 3 or maximum 4 contact blocksor replacing 1st or 2nd contact block
1 - ZB2BE101
- 1 ZB2BE102
Direct supplyZB2BW06k
Resistor typeZB2BW075
Transformer typeZB2BW03k
Additional contact blockZB2BE10k
Illuminated Operators .................................................................... Pages 48-50Specialty Light Modules........................................................................ Page 54Application Information ......................................................................... Page 38Legend Plates....................................................................................... Page 57Accessories .......................................................................................... Page 55Replacement Parts ............................................................................... Page 56Dimensions .................................................................................... Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mm
Specialty Contact Blocks
5311/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Specialty contact blocks N.O. N.C.
Type DescriptionNumber ofcontacts
CatalogNumber
Low voltage / low currentGold flashed contacts5-24 volt 0.1-100 mA
Contact block without mounting base
1-N.O. ZB2BE1016
1-N.C. ZB2BE1026
1-N.O. ZB2BZ1016
1-N.C. ZB2BZ1026
Overlapping, sequencing &time delay contact blocks
Contact block w/o mounting base
1-N.O.
Early closing ZB2BE201
1-N.C.
Late opening ZB2BE202
Overlapping block w/mounting base1-NO (early closing) &
1-NC (late opening) ZB2BZ106
Sequencing block w/mounting base1-NO(early closing) &
1-N.O. ZB2BZ107
0.1-30 sec. time delay block w/mounting base
1-N.O. &
1-N.C. ZB2BZ91
10-180 sec. time delay block w/mounting base
1-N.O. &
1-N.C. ZB2BZ92
Contact blocks for ringtongue lugs with widths smaller than 0.312” (8 mm)
1-N.O. ZB2BE1019
1-N.C. ZB2BE1029
Application Information......................................................................... Page 38Accessories.......................................................................................... Page 55Replacement Parts .............................................................................. Page 56Dimensions ................................................................................... Pages 58-59
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmSpecialty Light Modules
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved54
11/97
c When ordering, specify voltage required (6-120 V) Example: ZB2BV156120V
Specialty Light ModulesType Description Supply Voltage Catalog Number
Flashing pilot light base Light Module with incandescent bulb included 120 Vac ZB2BV184
Flashing illuminated push button base Light Module with incandescent bulb and 1 N.O./1 N.C. included 120 Vac ZB2BW1845
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Type Description Supply Voltage Catalog Number
Remote test pilot light base Single Diode <380 V ac or dc ZB2BV156c
Typical Wiring Diagram – Single Diode
Type Description Supply Voltage Catalog Number
Remote test pilot light base Dual Diode <380 Vac or dc ZB2BV68
Typical Wiring Diagram – Dual Diode
X1 Y1
X2 Y2
X1 Y1
X2 Y2
X1 Y1
X2 Y2
X1 Y1
X2 Y2
X1 Y1
X2 Y2
X1 Y1
X2 Y2
Off Flashing On Wiring in parallel
-X1,+X2
Test X1 X2
Test
X1
X2
M
Illuminated Operators.....................................................................Pages 48-50Application Information..........................................................................Page 38Legend Plates .......................................................................................Page 57Accessories...........................................................................................Page 55Replacement Parts................................................................................Page 56Dimensions ....................................................................................Pages 58-59
Flashing pilot light baseZB2BV184
Remote testpilot light base
ZB2BV156
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mm
Accessories and Replacement Parts
5511/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
XB2B Accessories
Type DescriptionCatalogNumber
BootsSilicon boot for rectangular push button w/indicator light ZB2BW008
Silicon boot for rectangular push button w/o light ZB2BA008
Guards/Locks
40 mm for Momentary Mushrooms
Blue ZB2BZ1601
Black ZB2BZ1602
Red ZB2BZ1604
Yellow ZB2BZ1605
40 mm with finger cut-out for push-pull
Blue ZB2BZ1701
Black ZB2BZ1702
Red ZB2BZ1704
Yellow ZB2BZ1705
40 mm with finger cut-out and 7mm holes for padlocking
Blue ZB2BZ1801
Black ZB2BZ1802
Red ZB2BZ1804
Yellow ZB2BZ1805
60 mm mushroom guard (black plastic)no padlocking provision ZB2BZ19
Padlock attachment(makes flush operator inaccessible) ZB2BZ6
Closing plates22 mm
Black plastic ZB2SZ3
Gray plastic ZB2 SZ4
Blue metallic ZB2SZ2
Miscellaneousaccessories
Adapter for mounting into 1 3/16" (30 mm) holeand used with 30 mm P.B. nameplate ZB2BZ41
Adapter for mounting into 30 mm hole and use withXB2B nameplate ZB2BZ4
Base only-for mounting contact blocks ZB2BZ009
Add on push-on/push-off mechanism ZB2BZ21
Bulb extractor for use with BA9s XBFX13
ZB2BZ16kk
ZB2BZ17kk
ZB2BZ18kk
ZB2SZ3
ZB2BZ21
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmAccessories and Replacement Parts
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved56
11/97
DL1CE• • •(incandescent)
DL1CJUS• • •(LED)
ZB2-BV...ZB2BVkkk
ZB2-BW93.ZB2BW93k
ZB2-BP012ZB2BP012
Q99900901Q99900901
k Complete lens part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (1- white, 3- green, 4-red, 5- amber, 6- blue, 7-clear). Example ZB2BV013 green standard pilot lens. Note: Jeweled lens not available in white.
j Complete boot part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (2- black, 3- green, 4- red, 5- yellow, 6- blue, 7-clear).Example ZB2BP013 green silicon boot.
Lamps
Type Voltage AC/DC Watts Catalog Number
IncandescentReplacement bulbs (Type BA9s)
6 1.5 DL1CB006
12 2.0 DL1CE012
24 2.0 DL1CE024
48 2.4 DL1CE048
130 2.6 DL1CE130
Neon(use with direct supply light module)
120 - NE51HRT120V
220 - NE51HRT220V
380 - NE51HRT380V
Type Color Voltage Part Number
LED, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks
Green 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0063
Red 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0064
Amber 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0065
Green 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0123
Red 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0124
Amber 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0125
Green 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0243
Red 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0244
Amber 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0245
Green 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1203
Red 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1204
Amber 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1205
LED, BA9s base for retrofitting into transformer Light Modules
Green 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0093
Red 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0094
Amber 9 Vac only DL1CJUS0095
Replacement Lenses, Boots and Keys
Type Description Catalog Number
Replacement lenses
Lens - standard pilot light ZB2BV01k
Lens kit - standard pilot light(includes lens, diffuser & gasket) ZB2BV02k
Lens - pilot light(jeweled for LED & Neon) ZB2BV01k3
Lens - flush illuminated push buttons ZB2BW91k
Lens - flush illuminated push buttons(Jeweled for LED & Neon) ZB2BW93k3
Lens - extended push buttons ZB2BW93k
Lens - extended push buttons(jeweled for LED & Neon) ZB2BW93k3
Lens - push-to-test ZB2BV01k1
Lens - rectangle for ZB2BW80000 series(2 button with indicator) ZB2BW90k
Lens - 40 mm mushroom W4042926400k
Replacement boots
Replacement silicon boot for ZB2BPseries operators ZB2BP01j
Replacement neoprene boot for ZB2BPseries operators ZB2BP02j
Replacement keys
Replacement key for standard selector switches and key release mushroom operators. Qty. 1 - Ronis key #455 Q99900901
Key # 421 Qty. 1 Q99900911
Key # 458A Qty. 1 Q99900910
Key # 520 Qty. 1 Q99900912
Key # 3131A Qty. 1 Q99900915
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mm
Legend Plates
5711/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
a All nameplates are black w/white lettering except “Stop”, “Emergency Stop” and “Reset” which are red w/white lettering.For black “Reset” change final digit of catalog number to 2.
j Please specify lettering when ordering. Two lines with 11 characters (including spaces) maximum on each line.
PVC Standard legend plates 30 x 40 mmTexta Catalog Number Texta Catalog Number
Close ZB2BY2314 On ZB2BY2311Down ZB2BY2308 Off On ZB2BY2367Emergency Stop ZB2BY2330 Open ZB2BY2313Fast ZB2BY2328 Open Close ZB2BY2376Forward ZB2BY2305 Open-O-Close ZB2BY2388For Rev ZB2BY2371 Out ZB2BY2339For-O-Rev ZB2BY2384 Power On ZB2BY2326Hand Off Auto ZB2BY2387 Raise ZB2BY2335High ZB2BY2338 Reset ZB2BY2323High Low ZB2BY2369 Reverse ZB2BY2306In ZB2BY2503 Right ZB2BY2309Inch ZB2BY2321 Run ZB2BY2334Jog For ZB2BY2381 Slow ZB2BY2327Jog Rev ZB2BY2380 Start ZB2BY2303Jog Run ZB2BY2365 Stop ZB2BY2304Left ZB2BY2310 Stop Start ZB2BY2366Low ZB2BY2336 Up ZB2BY2307Lower ZB2BY2337 Up Down ZB2BY2370Man-Auto ZB2BY2372 Up-O-Down ZB2BY2389Off ZB2BY2312
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameterText Language Catalog Number Text Language Catalog Number
Blank N/A ZB2BY9101 Blank N/A ZB2BY8101Emergency Stop English ZB2BY9330 Emergency Stop English ZB2BY8330Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY9130 Arret d’Urgence French ZB2BY8130Not Aus German ZB2BY9230 Not Aus German ZB2BY8230Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY9430 Parada de Emergencia Spanish ZB2BY8430Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY9630 Arresto Emergenza Italian ZB2BY8630
Type Description Catalog Number
PVC blank legend
Blank Black or red background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2101Blank Yellow or white background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4101
Blank Red background-45 mm x 67.5 mm (For use w/mushroom head operators) ZB2BY5101
Blank Oversized legend-48 mm x 48 mm(For use with XB2 operators) XBCY22011
Blank Black or red background- 30 mm x 48 mm(For use w/2 position joysticks) ZD2GY2201
Metal legend plates
Silver 30 x 40 mm ZB2BY201130 x 50 mm ZB2BY6011
Black 30 x 40 mm ZB2BY202130 x 50 mm ZB2BY6021
Red 30 x 40 mm ZB2BY204130 x 50 mm ZB2BY6041
PVC custom engraved
Special engravingj Black background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2002Special engravingj Red background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2004Special engravingj White background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4001Special engravingj Yellow background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4005Special engravingj Red background, white letters-45 mm x 67.5 mm ZB2BY5004
Mylar Circular LegendsType Description Catalog Number
Mylar circularlegends for use withtransparent flushhead operatorsSee page 39, 48
No text ZB2BY1101O ZBZBY1146I ZBZBY1147Auto ZB2BY1115Hand ZB2BY1316Off ZB2BY1312On ZB2BY1311Start ZB2BY1303Stop ZB2BY1304Forward ZB2BY1305Reverse ZB2BY1306
EMERGENCY
STOP
ZB2BY8330
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmDimensions
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved58
11/97
ZB2BA•ZB2BA•8ZB2BA•9ZB2BW3•
.4712
1.14 29 1.14 29
.6717
ZB2BA•6
1.14 29
.7920
ZB2BL•ZB2BW1•
.8722
1.18 30
ZB2BH•
1.14 29
.5915
ZB2BP•ZB2BW5•
1.57 40
1.2632
ZB2BC•ZB2BT•ZB2BS54ZB2BW4•
2.36 60
1.3434
ZB2BR•ZB2BX•ZB2BS64
1.57 40
1.2532
.9424
ZB2BS14
2.36 60
1.3434
.9123
ZB2BS24
1.0627
1.54 39
ZB2BJ•••
1.14 29
.9123
.8321
ZB2BG•
1.14 29
.5514
ZB2BVO•ZB2BVO•3
1.14 29
.7519
ZB2BVO•1
1.18 30
.9825
ZB2BVO•2
1.14 29
1.4637
.6316
ZB2BD922
1.1830
1.79
42.5
.4311
ZB2BA91•4
.5915
ZB2 BL93•4
2.17 55
1.1830
.4311
ZB2BW81•••
.5915
ZB2BW83•••
.98
Maximum travel = 25mm in all directions
3.4688
1.14 2922
ZB2BB•
1.57 40
1.8547
ZB2BS844
1.57 40
1.8547
.9424
ZB2BS944
1.14 29
1.0627
ZB2BD•••ZB2BK1•••
Dual Dimensions inchesmm
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmDimensions
5911/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
2.36 60
1.77
45
0.47
12
dia.
1.14
29
cent
ers
1.18 30
XB2BF5••
40°
40°
3.11
79
XD2PA••
1.69
43
0.94
24
0.94
24
Contact blocks and bases onlyZB2BZ10•, ZB2BZ10••, ZB2BE10•, ZB2BE10••,ZB2BE20•
1.57 40
1.46
37
ZB2BV6
1.57 40
2.28
58
ZB2BV1, ZB2BV2ZB2BV3, ZB2BV9•
1.57
x1.1
8
40x3
0
2.40
61
ZB2 BW06•
1.57
x1.1
8
40x3
0
2.60
66
ZB2BW075
1.57
x1.1
8
40x3
0
3.23
82
ZB2BW0••1.
57x1
.18
40x3
0
2.32
59
ZB2BW184ZB2BW1845ZB2BV68
3.54
901.73
44
1.87
47.5
ZB2BZ9•
Operator
Nameplate
Panel
Contact blockwith mounting base
Adder contact block
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (Minimum spacing)General mounting set-up
dia.
0.886
22.5
1.18
30
1.57 40
Standard pushbuttons and pilot lights
1.18
30
3.35 85
dia.
0.886
22.5
3.35 85
3.35
85
dia.
0.886
22.5
2 Position Joysticks 4 Position Joysticks
1.50
38
1.85 47
dia.
0.886
22.5
Rectangular units w/o indicator
2.36 60
1.73
44
dia.
0.886
22.5
Rectangular units w/ indicator
1.57 40
1.65
42
ZB2BV7
+0.4-0.0
+0.4-0.0
+0.4-0.0
+0.4-0.0
+0.4-0.0
Dual Dimensions inchesmm
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXAPInsulated and Metal Control Station Enclosures
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved60
11/97
Characteristics
Glass-reinforced polyester insulated enclosures XAPA
Material Glass-reinforced polyester.
Approvals Special version: CSA COFFRET 4 and 5.
Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” and “TH” treatments.
Ambient temperature Operation: -25 °C to +70 °C. Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C.
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13.
Electric shock protection Class II conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Flame resistance CSTB: M3, NF C 20-455: 850 °C, IEC 92: 960 °C, UL 94: VO.
Chemical resistance High degree of resistance to acids, bases, sea water, mineral salts, all solvents, petrol, diesel, oils and greases.
Cable entry Undrilled.
Diecast metal enclosures XAPG
Material Zinc alloy (XAPG1-XAP4) Aluminum (XAPG5...)
Approvals Special version: CSA COFFRET 4 and 5, UL COFFRET 1, 3, 4 and 12K.
Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” treatment. Special version: “TH” treatment.
Ambient temperature Operation: -25 °C to +70 °C. Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C.
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4, 13.
Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Chemical resistance Special treatments on request.
Cable entry Tapped entries for cable glands (see dimensions page).
Flush mount enclosures XAPE
Material and color Anodized aluminum front plate. Insulated protective rear cover.
Protective treatment Standard version: “TC” and “TH” treatments.
Ambient temperature Operation: -25 °C to +70 °C. Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C.
Degree of protection IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4X, 13.
Electric shock protection Class I conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Chemical resistance High degree of resistance to organic acids, diluted mineral acids, salts, alcohol, acetone, chloride and fluoride solvents, oils and petrol.
Cable entry With rear cover: knock-out cable entries.
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXAPA
Glass-Reinforced Polyester Enclosures
6111/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Undrilled Enclosures, Glass-Reinforced PolyesterType HxW Dimensions (mm) Catalog Number
NEMA 4, 4X, 13Usable depth 83 mm
without hinges
85 x 146 XAPA1100
85 x 226 XAPA2100
151 x 241 XAPA3100
with hinges 151 x 241 XAPA4100
Undrilled Grounding Plate Sheet steel with ground screw
For XAPA1100 XAPZ100
For XAPA2100 XAPZ200
For XAPA3100 and 4100 XAPZ300
XAP a b G H
A1100 85 146 70 105
A2100 85 226 70 180
A3100 151 241 135 200
A4100 151 241 135 200
Cable entries not drilled(1) 11 mm for XAPA4kkk stations with hinges(2) 2 x Ø 5.6 mm untapped holes, depth
12 mm
Drilled Insulated Enclosures, Glass-Reinforced Polyester
TypeNumber of Knock-outs
22 mmNumber of Rows
Catalog NumberVertical Horizontal
NEMA 4, 4X, 13Usable depth 83 mm
40 mm centerline spacing of holes
1 1 1 XAPA1110
2 1 2 XAPA1120
4 2 2 XAPA1104
8 2 4 XAPA2108
16 4 4 XAPA3116
Drilled Grounding Plate Sheet steel with ground screw
For XAPA1110 XAPZ110
For XAPA1120 XAPZ120
For XAPA1104 XAPZ104
For XAPA2108 XAPZ208
For XAPA3116 XAPZ316
For Ø 22 mm control and signalling units
XAP a b b1 b2 G H
A1110 85 146 – – 70 105
A1120 85 146 40 – 70 105
A1104 85 146 40 30 70 105
A2108 85 226 40 30 70 180
A3116 151 241 40 30 135 200
Cable entries not drilled(2) 2 x 5.6 mm untapped holes, depth 12 mm
P=83
87
b
a
H(2)
G
(1)
==
==
b
a
Undrilled Insulated enclosuresXAPA1100, XAP2100 Fixing XAPA3100, XAPA4100
P=83
87 b2
b1b1
==
b
b2= = = =
==
H
G
(2)
Insulated enclosures with cut-outsXAPA Fixing
XAPA1100 XAPA2100
XAPA1104 XAPA2108
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXAPGDiecast Metal Enclosures
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved62
11/97
c a
g
h
b
XAPG 39400
XAP G29703
t 25.4 mm = 1"
Undrilled DieCast Enclosures (Painted Grey RAL 7032)
Type Material Usable DepthH x W x D t
Dimensions (mm)Catalog Number
NEMA Type 4, 13Zinc
49 mm
80 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG19100
130 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG29100
175 x 80 x 51.5 XAPG39100
74.5 mm
80 x 80 x 77 XAPG19400
130 x 80 x 77 XAPG29400
175 x 80 x 77 XAPG39400
220 x 80 x 77 XAPG49400
Aluminum 74.5 mm 310 x 85 x 77 XAPG59400
Drilled DieCast Enclosures (Painted Grey RAL 7032)
Type Material Usable DepthNumber of
22 mm knock-outsCatalog Number
NEMA Type 4, 1330 mm centerlinespacing of holes
Zinc
49 mm
2 XAPG19702
3 XAPG29703
4 XAPG39704
74.5 mm
2 XAPG19802
3 XAPG29803
4 XAPG39804
NEMA Type 4, 1340 mm centerlinespacing of holes
Zinc
49 mm
1 XAPG19201
2 XAPG29202
3 XAPG39203
74.5 mm
1 XAPG19501
2 XAPG29502
3 XAPG39503
4 XAPG49504
Aluminum 74.5 mm 5 XAPG59505
CatalogNumber
a b c g h Conduit openingsuppliedIN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm
XAPG19201 3.15 80 3.15 80 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 2.56 65 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG29202 3.15 80 5.12 130 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 4.53 115 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG39203 3.15 80 6.90 175 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 6.30 160 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG19501 3.15 80 3.15 80 3.03 77 1.97 50 2.56 65 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG29502 3.15 80 5.12 130 3.03 77 1.97 50 4.53 115 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG39503 3.15 80 6.90 175 3.03 77 1.97 50 6.30 160 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG49504 3.15 80 8.66 220 3.03 77 1.97 50 8.07 205 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG59505 3.35 85 12.20 310 3.03 77 2.16 55 11.60 295 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG19702 3.15 80 3.15 80 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 2.56 65 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG29703 3.15 80 5.12 130 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 4.53 115 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG39704 3.15 80 6.90 175 2.03 51.5 1.97 50 6.30 160 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG19802 3.15 80 3.15 80 3.03 77 1.97 50 2.56 65 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG29803 3.15 80 5.12 130 3.03 77 1.97 50 4.53 115 3⁄4" NPT
XAPG39804 3.15 80 6.90 175 3.03 77 1.97 50 6.30 160 3⁄4" NPT
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXAPE
Flush Mount Enclosures
6311/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
25.4 mm = 1"
Drilled Flush Plates
Type MaterialNumber of
22mm holesH x W
Dimensions (mm)Catalog Number
NEMA Type 4, 1330mm centerlinespacing of holes
AnodizedAluminum
1 72 x 72 XAPE301
2 105 x 72 XAPE302
3 138 x 72 XAPE303
4 171 x 72 XAPE304
5 204 x 72 XAPE305
Optional Back Box (for finger protection, if required)Type Material Catalog Number
Protective rear covers InsulatingFiberglass
For flush plate XAPE301 XAPE901
For flush plate XAPE302 XAPE902
For flush plate XAPE303 XAPE903
For flush plate XAPE304 XAPE904
For flush plate XAPE305 XAPE905
For Ø 22 mm control and signalling units
Front plate
XAP b b1 H
E301 72 44 56
E302 105 77 89
E303 138 110 122
E304 171 143 155
E305 204 176 188
Protective rear cover for front plate XAPE30k
XAP b P
E901 52 82.5
E902 85 82.5
E903 118 82.5
E904 151 82.5
E905 184 82.5
Flush mounting enclosuresFront plate with cut-outs for Ø 22 mm control and signalling unitsXAPE30k
Mounting of front plate and protective rear cover
XAPE303 XAPE305
XAPE302
XAPE301
P=Usable depth80
P
59
= =
b
14.5
5
4 x 04.2
56= = ==
H
72
56= =
==
b
3030
30 b1 H
60 4 x M4
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideXB2B 22 mmMounting Instructions
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved64
11/97
Mounting Instructions for ZB2B
1. The panel knockout must be 7/8" (22.3 mm) with a panel thickness of 1 to 6 mm (0.04 in to 0.23 in). No anti-rotation notch is required.
2. Insert the operator through the knockout.3. Bayonet lock the operator into the diecast mounting base with a 1/8 clockwise turn.4. Orient the angled fixing screws at 12 and 6 o’clock and alternately tighten the 2 screws.5. The fixing screws will bite into the metal of the inside panel door and provide anti-rotation and a
tamperproof installation.
1 6 mm
22.3 mm+0.4–0.0
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board ComponentsXA2B-XB2B
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Electrical Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Assembly Items, Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Panel Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Printed Circuit Board Drilling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2BGeneral Characteristics
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
66
11/97
Environment (typical ZA2B or ZB2B operator)
Compatibility This method of connection for the XA2B and XB2B uses special electrical blocks, combined with a range of standard operators.
Conformity to standards IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660 part 200, UL 508, CSA C 22-2 No. 14.
Approvals UL Recognized, CSA Certified
Protective treatment “TC” (All climates.)
Ambient air temperature Storage: from -40
°
C to +70
°
C (-40
°
F to +158
°
F). Operation: from -25
°
C to +70
°
C (-13
°
F to +140
°
F).
Operating positions All positions
Resistance to vibration 60 mm mushroom head push buttons: 4 g; Other push buttons: 10 g; Joystick controller: 5 g.
Resistance to shock Push buttons: 70 g; Mushroom head push buttons: 15 g; Selector switches: 120 g. Conforming to IEC 68 2-27.
Electric shock protection Class II, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030
Mechanical life 1 million operations (latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations, illuminated selector switches: 100,000 operations.
Setting up characteristics
Printed circuit board assembly The special sub-bases, type
ZA2BZ079
or ZB2BZ079,
must be used (see page 68)
Printed circuit board Thickness: from 1.6 to 3.2 mm
Flow soldering Maximum temperature: 250
°
CSpeed: 1.2 m/sec
Contact block characteristics
Rated insulation voltage 300 V conforming to UL 508 and CSA C 22-2 No. 14, 250 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110.
Insulation category Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.
Contact operation Slow break (N.C. contact with direct opening operation).
Operating forceFlush and projecting push buttons - with 1 N.O. contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 N.O. contact: 1.8 lb
Additional contacts: -N.O.: +1.13 lb, N.C.: +0.7 lb
Terminal referencing Unmarked
Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuses gF.
Rated powerconforming to IEC 947-5-1 Utilization category: B300 - Q300
MarkingFile E164353
NKCR2FileClass
LR 440873211 03
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2BElectrical Blocks
67
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Contact Blocks
Description Part Number
Normally Open Contact Block ZB2BE701
Normally Closed Contact Block ZB2BE702
Pilot Light Block
Pilot Light Block Direct Supply ZB2BV67
Combination Blocks Pilot Light + Contact(s)
Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)1 Normally Open Contact ZB2BW0671
Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)+ 1 Normally Closed Contact ZB2BW0672
Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)+ 2 Normally Open Contact ZB2BW0673
Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)+ 1 Normally Open Contact and 1 Normally Closed Contact
ZB2BW0675
13
14
NO
21
22
NC
X1
X2
X1
X2
13
14
X1
X2
11
12
X1
X2
13
14
23
24
X1
X2
21
22
13
14
Dual Dimensions inchesmm
ZB
2-BE
701
France
ZB2BE701
ZB
2-BE
702
France
ZB2BE702
ZB
2-BV
67
ZB2BV67
ZB
2-BW
0672
ZB2BW0672
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2BAssembly Items, Spare Parts
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
68
11/97
Assembly Items
For best LED light output, match lamp with lens color and use jeweled style lenses.
Description Part Number
Socket Adapter for all Electrical Blocks ZB2BZ010
Operator Fixing Sub-Base for XB2B ZB2BZ079
Operator Fixing Sub-Base for XA2B ZA2BZ079
Screw for Fixing Blocks onto Sub-Base ZB2BZ005
Screw for Fixing Blocks onto sub-Base with Socket Adapter ZB2BZ006
Lamps
Type Voltage AC/DC Watts Catalog Number
Incandescent
Replacement bulbs (Type BA9s)
6 1.5 DL1CB006
12 2.0 DL1CE012
24 2.0 DL1CE024
48 2.4 DL1CE048
130 2.6 DL1CE130
Neon(use with direct supply light module)
120 - NE51HRT120V
220 - NE51HRT220V
380 - NE51HRT380V
Type Color Voltage Part Number
LED
, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks
Green 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0063
Red 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0064
Amber 6 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0065
Green 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0123
Red 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0124
Amber 12 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0125
Green 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0243
Red 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0244
Amber 24 Vac/dc DL1CJUS0245
Green 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1203
Red 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1204
Amber 120 Vac/dc DL1CJUS1205
ZB2BZ010
ZB2BZ079
ZA2BZ079
ZB2BZ005
DL1CEO**
DL1CJUS****
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2BPanel Cutouts
69
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Panel cut-outs
Overall tolerances of the panel/printed circuit assembly
The sum of the absolute values of the drilling tolerance must not exceed 0.5 mm (0.196”).
– in the horizontal direction X – and in the vertical direction Y
Dimension - A on the panel
Dimensions - B on the panel
- C on the printed circuit - D on the printed circuit
i.e.: t
1
+ t
2
= 0.5 mm max.
Mounting Precautions
a. Panel cut-out diameter: b. When the head and fixing sub-base assembly are fixed and tightened onto the panel, the sub-base (ZA2BZ079 or ZB2BZ079)
must be oriented at a maximum angle
±
5
°.
Fixing sub base screws (ZB2BZ079) must be tightened with same torque value.c. If any of the heads are fitted with legend plate carriers, it is essential that
all
the products are fitted with legend plate carriers.d. Note: the following heads cannot be used with the electrical blocks on page 67:
– double headed push button operators with indicator light ZB2BW8– ZA2C square head operators
Dimensions in mm and inches
(30 mm)
Y
X
(40
mm
)(4
0 m
m )
Ø 22.3
A ± t1A ' ± t1
A '' ± t1
B ±
t1
B '
± t1
B ''
± t1
(0.878" )
(1.181")(30 mm)(1.181")
(1.5
74")
(1.5
74")
+ 0.4 mm0.0 mm
+ 0.016"0.0"
∅ 22.3 mm 0.0 mm+0.4 mm
0.878"+0.016"
0.0"
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2BPrinted Circuit Board Drilling
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
70
11/97
Legends for printed circuit drilling and terminal marking
3 different types of drilling are necessary:
drilling for two adjacent blocks
C ± t2C ' ± t2
C '' ± t2
410
8.3
5 4
3
24.6
20
19
15
D ±
t2D
' ±
t2
D ''
± t2
D '
'' ±
t2 C''' ± t2
13
14
21
22
11
14
13
12
4
3
N/Ocontact block
13
14
N/Ccontact/block
21
22
Direct Supplyindicator light
block
X1
X2
Indicator contact"combination"
block
11
12
13
14
X1
X2
Indicator contact"combination"
block
23
24
13
14
X1
X2
Y
X
5 4
2010
4
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
24,60
22,75
26
18,7
5
X1-X2 : bulbs1-2-3-4 : contacts
Socket adapter (ZB2BZ010)
ZB2-BZ010
Fra
nce
30 mm
18
14
13
14
23
24
20
X1
X2
X1
X2
X1
X2
X1
X2
View from the electrical block side: Dimensions in mm.
HOLES FOR CONNECTIONS: Ø 1.5 mm ± 0.1 (Ø 0.059" ± 0.0039")→
→
→CENTERING HOLE OF THE ELECTRICAL BLOCK: Ø 4.5 mm ± 0.1 (Ø 0.177" ± 0.0039")
SCREWDRIVER CLEARANCE HOLE: (Ø 0.275" ± 0.0039") (As Required):for the introduction of an electrical block assembling screw to a sub-base.It is recommended to fit a screw every 90 mm (3.54") horizontally and 120 mm (4.72") vertically
13 14 Terminal marking conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.Indicates the function of the electrical block.
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
Type K and SK 30 mm Push Buttons
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Type K and SK Common Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Type K Heavy Duty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73- 86Type K Voltage Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Type K and SK Selector Switch Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Type K Heavy Duty Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Type K Heavy Duty Pilot Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Type K Heavy Duty Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Type SK Corrosion Resistant Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Type SK Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Type SK Corrosion Resistant Potentiometers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Type SK Corrosion Resistant Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Type K, SK, KX, and T Light Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Type K, SK, KX, and T Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Hazardous Location Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Type K and SK “H” Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Type K and SK Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Type K and SK Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 105Type K and SK Application Data and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Type K and SK Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Type K and SK Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Class 9001
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mmCommon Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
72
11/97
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
“START” Push Buttons
OperatorStyle Description Contact
BlockButtonColor Type Legend
Plate
30.5 mmIndustrial (Metal)
Black KR1BH13 KN201SP
30.5 mmCorrosion Resistant
(Non Metallic)
Black SKR1BH13 KN101SP
“OFF – ON” Selector Switch
OperatorStyle Description
ContactSequence
KnobColor Type Legend
PlateContact Block
Included
30.5 mmIndustrial (Metal)
1 00 1
Black KS11BH13 KN244SP
30.5 mmCorrosionResistant
(Non Metallic)
Black SKS11BH13 KN144SP
RED – 120 Vac – “ON” Pilot Light
Operator Style Description Type Legend Plate
30.5 mmIndustrial(Metal)
KP1R31 KN203SP
30.5 mmCorrosion Resistant
(Non Metallic)SKP1R31 KN103SP
RED – 120 Vac – “ON” Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Operator Style Description Type Legend Plate
30.5 mmIndustrial(Metal)
KT1R31 KN203SP
30.5 mmCorrosion Resistant
(Non Metallic)SKT1R31 KN103SP
“STOP” Push Buttons
OperatorStyle Description Contact
BlockButtonColor Type Legend
Plate
30.5 mmIndustrial (Metal)
Red KR1RH13 KN202RP
30.5 mmCorrosion Resistant
(Non Metallic)
Red SKR1RH13 KN102RP
“HAND – OFF – AUTO” Selector Switch
OperatorStyle Description
ContactSequence
KnobColor Type Legend
PlateContact Block
Included
30.5 mmIndustrial (Metal)
1 0 00 0 1
Black KS43BH13 KN260SP
30.5 mmCorrosionResistant
(Non Metallic)
Black SKS43BH13 KN160SP
GREEN – 120 Vac – “OFF” Pilot Light
Operator Style Description Type Legend Plate
30.5 mmIndustrial(Metal)
KP1G31 KN204SP
30.5 mmCorrosion Resistant
(Non Metallic)SKP1G31 KN104SP
GREEN – 120 Vac –“OFF” Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Operator Style Description Type Legend Plate
30.5 mmIndustrial(Metal)
KT1G31 KN204RP
30.5 mmCorrosion Resistant
(Non Metallic)SKT1G31 KN104RP
FileCCN
E42259NKCR
FileClass
LR 254903211 03
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 227.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mmHeavy Duty Operators
73
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
①
The universal push button operators contain one each of the following color inserts: black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
➁
See table below.
➂
Knob has the words “Emergency Stop” in raised letters highlighted in white for readability. Available in red snap-in mushroom buttons only.
➃
See table below.
➄
These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks – for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.
EXAMPLE: KR24B + H2(2 - KA1) = KR24BH2
Non-Illuminated Momentary Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Contact blocks and legend plate not included unless otherwise noted.
Description ColorOperator With
1 N.O. and 1 N.C.Contact (KA1)
Operator With1 N.O. Contact
(KA2)
Operator With1 N.C. Contact
(KA3)
Operator OnlyWith No
Contacts
➄
Full Guard
Black KR1BH13 KR1BH5 KR1BH6 KR1B
Red KR1RH13 KR1RH5 KR1RH6 KR1R
Green KR1GH13 KR1GH5 KR1GH6 KR1G
Universal
①
KR1UH13 KR1UH5 KR1UH6 KR1U
Other
➁
KR1
➁
H13 KR1
➁
H5 KR1
➁
H6 KR1
➁
No Guard
Black KR3BH13 KR3BH5 KR3BH6 KR3B
Red KR3RH13 KR3RH5 KR3RH6 KR3R
Green KR3GH13 KR3GH5 KR3GH6 KR3G
Universal
①
KR3UH13 KR3UH5 KR3UH6 KR3U
Other
➁
KR3
➁
H13 KR3
➁
H5 KR3
➁
H6 KR3
➁
Extended Guard
Black KR2BH13 KR2BH5 KR2BH6 KR2B
Red KR2RH13 KR2RH5 KR2RH6 KR2R
Green KR2GH13 KR2GH5 KR2GH6 KR2G
Universal
①
KR2UH13 KR2UH5 KR2UH6 KR2U
Other
➁
KR2
➁
H13 KR2
➁
H5 KR2
➁
H6 KR2
➁
1
3
⁄
8
'' DiameterMushroom Button
Snap-In Mushroom Button
Black KR4BH13 KR4BH5 KR4BH6 KR4B
Red KR4RH13 KR4RH5 KR4RH6 KR4R
Red
➂
KR4R05H13 KR4R05H5 KR4R05H6 KR4R05
Green KR4GH13 KR4GH5 KR4GH6 KR4G
Other
➃
KR4
➃
H13 KR4
➃
H5 KR4
➃
H6 KR4
➃
Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security
Black KR24BH13 KR24BH5 KR24BH6 KR24B
Red KR24RH13 KR24RH5 KR24RH6 KR24R
Green KR24GH13 KR24GH5 KR24GH6 KR24G
Other
➃
KR24
➃
H13 KR24
➃
H5 KR24
➃
H6 KR24
➃
2
1
⁄
4
'' DiameterMushroom Button
Snap-In Mushroom Button
Black KR5BH13 KR5BH5 KR5BH6 KR5B
Red KR5RH13 KR5RH5 KR5RH6 KR5R
Red
➂
KR5R05H13 KR5R05H5 KR5R05H6 KR5R05
Green KR5GH13 KR5GH5 KR5GH6 KR5G
Other
➃
KR5
➃
H13 KR5
➃
H5 KR5
➃
H6 KR5
➃
Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security
Black KR25BH13 KR25BH5 KR25BH6 KR25B
Red KR25RH13 KR25RH5 KR25RH6 KR25R
Green KR25GH13 KR25GH5 KR25GH6 KR25G
Other
➃
KR25
➃
H13 KR25
➃
H5 KR25
➃
H6 KR25
➃
Color
➁
For KR1, 2, 3Choose Color and Place Code in
Type Number
➃
For KR4, 5, 24, 25Choose Color and Place Color
Code in Type Number
BlueYellowWhite
OrangeGray
LYWSE
LY–S–
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Color Inserts and Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mmHeavy Duty Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
74
11/97
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Multifunction Operators
Meets UL Type 13/NEMA Type 13 and UL Type 6/NEMA Type 6, which UL and NEMA consider an equivalent to UL Type 4/NEMA Type 4.For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact blocks not included unless otherwise noted.
Description ColorWith 2 N.O.Contacts(2 KA2)
With 1 N.O.& 1 N.C.Contact
(KA2, KA3)
WithoutContacts
⑨
MomentaryDual
Function
Universal
①
Green-RedOther
➁
KR6UH7KR6GRH7KR6
➁
H7
KR6UH37KR6GRH37KR6
➁
H37
KR6UKR6GRKR6
➁
MomentaryInterlocked
Dual Function
Universal
①
Green-RedOther
➁
KR67UH7KR67GRH7KR67
➁
H7
KR67UH37KR67GRH37KR67
➁
H37
KR67UKR67GRKR67
➁
MaintainedInterlocked
Dual Function
Universal
①
Green-RedOther
➁
KR7UH7KR7GRH7KR7
➁
H7
KR7UH37KR7GRH37KR7
➁
H37
KR7UKR7GRKR7
➁
Description Color –Contacts
See
⑩
(KA2, KA3)
WithoutContacts
⑨
Both ButtonsMaintained Interlocked
Assembly
Universal
➂
Other
➃
– KR11UH1KR11
➃
H1KR11UKR11
➃
One Button MomentaryOne Button MaintainedInterlocked Assembly
Universal
➂
Other
➃
– KR12UH1H1KR12
➃
H1H1KR12UKR12
➃
1
5
⁄
8
" Dia. Knob xFor 1
3
⁄
8
" or 2
1
⁄
4
" Dia. Knob - see Includes Type KN379 Legend Plate Marked
Pull To StartPush To Stop
Description Color With 2 N.C. Contacts(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With 1 N.O. 1 N.C. Contact(1 KA1)
Without Contacts
⑨
3 PositionMomentary Pull -
Maintained Neutral - Momentary PushNon-Illuminated
RedGreen
Other
➄
KR8RH25KR8GH25KR8
➄
H25
–––
KR8RKR8GKR8
➄
2 PositionMaintained Pull - Maintained PushNon-Illuminated
Red Green
Other
➄
–––
KR9RH13KR9GH13KR9
➄
H13
KR9RKR9GKR9
➄
1
5
⁄
8
" Dia. Knob xFor 1
3
⁄
8
" or 2
1
⁄
4
" Dia. Knob - see
Includes Type KN379 Legend
Plate MarkedPull To StartPush To Stop
Description VoltageWith Red Knob With 2
N.C. Contacts(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With Other Color Knob With 2 N.C. Contacts
(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With Other Color Knob Without Contacts
⑨
3 PositionMomentary Pull -
Maintained Neutral - Momentary Push
Illuminated
110-120 V, 50-60 HzOther – Transformer, LED, Flashing
⑦
Other – Full Voltage, Resistor, Neon
⑧
KR8P1RH25KR8P
➅
RH25KR8P
➅
RH25
KR8P1
➄
H25KR8P
➅➄
H25KR8P
➅➄
H25
KR8P1
➄
KR8P
➅➄
KR8P
➅➄
Description VoltageWith Red Knob With 1
N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact (KA1)
With Other Color Knob With 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
Contact (KA1)
With Other Color Knob Without Contacts
2 PositionMaintained Pull - Maintained Push
Illuminated
110-120 V, 50-60 HzOther – Transformer, LED, Flashing
⑦
Other – Full Voltage, Resistor, Neon
⑧
KR9P1RH13KR9P
➅
RH13KR9P
➅
RH13
KR9P1
➄
H13KR9P
➅➄
H13KR9P
➅➄
H13
KR9P1
➄
KR9P
➅➄
KR9P
➅➄
12
12
11
12
12
1211
①
Universal for KR6, 67, 7 includes 2 inserts each of black, red and green.
➁
Choose one color for each button. R = red, G = green, B = Black.
EXAMPLE: A KR6 with left red and right black = KR6RB
➂
Universal for KR11, 12 includes 2 each of black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, white.
➃
Choose one color for each button from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: A KR11 with top button grey and bottom button orange = KR11ES
➄
Choose one color from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: KR9 with a yellow knob = KR9Y
➅ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 76. EXAMPLE: KR8P➅ with a 277 V 50-60 Hz voltage = KR8P8⑦ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED
uses green knob) or use clear knob..⑧ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.⑨ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. For maximum block usage
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: KR67BB + H8(2 KA3) = KR67BBH8
⑩ KR11UH1 has 1 - KA1 (1 N.O., 1 N.C.) and KR12UH1H1 has 2 - KA1 (2 N.O., 2 N.C.).To obtain a red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob – substitute “R05” in place of “R”. Not available in 13⁄8" or 21⁄4" diameter knobs.For 13⁄8" or 21⁄4" Dia. Knob:a) Order -20 or -21 knob from page 105.b) Order 9001K54 adapter (no charge) - allows -20 or -21 knob to fit on push pull
operators. Voids UL and NEMA Type 6 rating.c) Can order assembled operator by replacing color code with -20 or -21. Example: 9001 KR9R would be 9001KR9R20 or 9001KR9R21. No price adder.
These colors are not available on illuminated push-pull operators.
Other Color Code SelectionColor KR6, KR7, KR67 KR11, KR12 KR8, KR9
BlackRed
GreenBlue
YellowWhite
OrangeClear
AmberGray
BRG–––––––
BRGLYWS––E
B RGLYW
S CA–
11
12
Voltage Assembly Codes See Page 76
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Operators
75© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Illuminated Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact block not included unless otherwise noted.
DescriptionVoltage
andFrequency
StyleWith Red Color Cap and 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. Contact
(KA1)
With Green Color Cap and 1 N.O. and 1 N.C.
Contact (KA1)
With Other Color Cap Without Contact Block ①
Full GuardIlluminated
Push ButtonClear Plastic Top
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K1L1RH13 K1L1GH13 K1L1➄
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K1L7RH13 K1L7GH13 K1L7➄
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage K1L35RH13 K1L35GH13 K1L35➄
For other Voltagessee Table ➁
Transformer or Flashing K1L➁RH13 K1L➁GH13 K1L➁➄
Full Voltage K1L➁RH13 K1L➁GH13 K1L➁➄
Resistor or Neon ➂ K1L➁RH13 K1L➁GH13 K1L➁➄
LED ➃ K1L➁RH13 K1L➁GH13 K1L➁➄
Full GuardIlluminated
Push ButtonMetal Top
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K3L1RH13 K3L1GH13 K3L1➄
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K3L7RH13 K3L7GH13 K3L7➄
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage K3L35RH13 K3L35GH13 K3L35➄
For other Voltagessee Table ➁
Transformer or Flashing K3L➁RH13 K3L➁GH13 K3L➁➄
Full Voltage K3L➁RH13 K3L➁GH13 K3L➁➄
Resistor or Neon ➂ K3L➁RH13 K3L➁GH13 K3L➁➄
LED ➃ K3L➁RH13 K3L➁GH13 K3L➁➄
No GuardIlluminated
Push Button
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K2L1RH13 K2L1GH13 K2L1➄
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K2L7RH13 K2L7GH13 K2L7➄
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage K2L35RH13 K2L35GH13 K2L35➄
For other Voltagessee Table ➁
Transformer or Flashing K2L➁RH13 K2L➁GH13 K2L➁➄
Full Voltage K2L➁RH13 K2L➁GH13 K2L➁➄
Resistor or Neon ➂ K2L➁RH13 K2L➁GH13 K2L➁➄
LED ➃ K2L➁RH13 K2L➁GH13 K2L➁➄
13⁄8 InchIlluminatedMushroom
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K2L1R20H13 K2L1G20H13
Order K2L ➁➄Above ➅
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K2L7R20H13 K2L7G20H13
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage K2L35R20H13 K2L35G20H13
For other Voltagessee Table ➁
Transformer or Flashing K2L➁R20H13 K2L➁G20H13
Full Voltage K2L➁R20H13 K2L➁G20H13
Resistor or Neon ➂ K2L➁R20H13 K2L➁G20H13
LED➃ K2L➁R20H13 K2L➁G20H13
21⁄4 InchIlluminatedMushroom
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K2L1R21H13 K2L1G21H13
Order K2L ➁➄Above ➅
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer K2L7R21H13 K2L7G21H13
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage K2L35R21H13 K2L35G21H13
For other Voltagessee Table ➁
Transformer or Flashing K2L➁R21H13 K2L➁G21H13
Full Voltage K2L➁R21H13 K2L➁G21H13
Resistor or Neon ➂ K2L➁R21H13 K2L➁G21H13
LED➃ K2L➁R21H13 K2L➁G21H13
① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage seepage 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.Example: K2L36R20+H2(2 KA1)=K2L36R20H2
➁ Add the Voltage assembly code as chosen from Voltage assembly code table on page 76.Example: K2L➁ with a 240 Vac-dc Voltage = K2L25
➂ On neon Voltages use clear color caps only.➃ The color of the color cap must be the same color as the LED Voltage chosen (i.e., red LED uses
red color cap) or use clear color cap.➄ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table.
Example: K2L25➄ with a blue 13⁄8 mushroom button = K2L25L20➅ The only difference between a no guard (K2L➁) operator and mushroom button operators is the
color cap.
Color Caps
ColorColor Codes
➄ K1LK2L, K3L
➄ 13⁄8 InchMushroom
➄ 21⁄4 InchMushroom
RedGreenBlue
YellowWhiteClear
Amber
RGLYWCA
R20G20L20Y20W20C20A20
R21G21L21Y21W21C21A21
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Color Caps & Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 96Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
Voltage Assembly Codes See Page 76
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mmVoltage Assembly Codes
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved76
11/97
This page lists light module code numbers that are used in op-erators listed on pages 74-75.
• Neon type light modules – use CLEAR color caps only.• LED light modules use a lamp with 7 element LED clus-
ters that provide illumination similar to incandescent illu-mination.
• LED light modules require the color cap color and theLED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage Description Voltage Assembly Code
Separate Light Module Type Number
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3131LR31LG31LY
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3232LR32LG32LY
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
18 Vac-dc Resistor 33 KM33
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3535LR35LG35LY
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
32 Vac-dc Resistor 23 KM23
48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3636LR36LG36LY
KM36KM36LRKM36LGKM36LY
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Voltage Description Voltage Assembly Code
Separate Light Module Type Number
60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3737LR37LG37LY
KM37KM37LRKM37LGKM37LY
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
21
F1
KM2KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc120 Vac Only120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
LED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
3811
38LR38LG38LY
KM38KM11
KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz Transformer 3 KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
47
F7
KM4KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
2512
KM25KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 8 KM8
380 Vac-dc Neon 13 KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
514
KM5KM14
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon Transformer
56
KM15KM6
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K and SK — 30 mm
Selector Switch Selection Guide
77© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Shown below is a simplified method of selecting a selectorswitch to meet almost any combination of contact sequences.
Step No. 1Determine the contact sequence(s) required. Set up a target ta-ble like the one shown for the example below.
Step No. 2Look for a cam type common to all sequences in Table 1, 2 or3. For the example above, Table 2 would be used. For the con-tact sequences A(1 0 0), B(0 1 0) and C(0 0 1) of the exampleabove, cam types F and L are common to all 3 sequences.
Step No. 3Next, the cam type common to all the sequences (If severalcam types are common, choose one.) is used to find the oper-ator type number. Go to the proper page number as indicatedin the table below:
If for the example above:
A manual return operator with a standard black knob is required andIf the F cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:
Type K Line – Class 9001 Type KS46B (From page 80)Type SK Line – Class 9001 Type SKS46B (From page 92)
If the L cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:Type K Line – Class 9001 Type KS401B (From page 80)Type SK Line – Class 9001 Type SKS401B (From page 92)
Step No. 4:Determine the contact blocks required by using the same tableused for Step No. 2.
If for the example above:
The F cam type were chosen:A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or 2 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
The L cam type were chosen:A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or a 9001 KA3 mounted on side no. 2would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
Example:Contact
Sequence
A 1 0 0
B 0 1 0
C 0 0 1
0 – contact open1 – contact closed
Number of Positions Push Button Line Page Number
2 Type KType SK 78, 79, 90, 91
3 Type KType SK 80, 81, 92, 93
4 Type KType SK 82, 94
One Type KA1 double circuit block can be used in place of oneType KA2 single circuit block and one Type KA3 single circuitblock mounted on the same side.
For “H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99For Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108
The KA5 must be the last block on either side. If more than one KA5 is required on eitherside – contact your local Square D sales office.
Table 1 – 2 Position Selector Switch
If you requirecontact sequence Use Sel. Sw.
with cam typeUse contactblock type
Mount onside No.
(See page 99)
1 0E KA3 1 or 2
D KA2 1 or 2
0 1E KA2 1 or 2
D KA3 1 or 2
Table 2 – 3 Position Selector Switch
If you requirecontact sequence Use Sel. Sw.
with cam typeUse contactblock type
Mount on side No.
(See page 99)
1 0 0
G M KA2 1
L KA2 2
C E KA3 1
B C E F G J KA3 2
B G J KA5 2
0 1 0
D E J L KA2 1
D E KA2 2
F KA3 1
L KA3 2
0 0 1
C F KA2 1 or 2
B D G L KA3 1
D KA3 2
B KA5 1
M KA2 2
1 1 0
B KA2 1
C F KA5 1 or 2
M KA3 2
0 1 1
B G J KA2 2
G KA5 1
L KA5 2
M KA3 1
1 0 1
J KA3 1
D E J L KA5 1
D E KA5 2
Table 3 – 4 Position Selector Switch
If you requirecontact sequence Use Sel. Sw.
with cam typeUse contactblock type
Mount onside No.
(See page 99)
1 0 0 0 H (A) KA3 2
0 1 0 0 H (B) KA2 1
0 0 1 0 H (C) KA2 2
0 0 0 1 H (D) KA3 1
1 0 0 1 H A & D Wired in Parallel
1 1 0 0 H A & B Wired in Parallel
0 1 1 0 H B & C Wired in Parallel
0 0 1 1 H C & D Wired in Parallel
1 1 1 0 H A, B & C Wired in Parallel
0 1 1 1 H B, C & D Wired in Parallel
1 0 1 0 H A & C Wired in Parallel
0 1 0 1 H B & D Wired in Parallel
1 1 0 1 H KA5 2
1 0 1 1 H KA5 1
KA1 KA3 KA2= +
= +
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mmHeavy Duty Selector Switches
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved78
11/97
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
StandardKnob
GlovedHand Knob
CoinOperated
➁KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type
BlackRed
GreenYellowOrange
BlueWhiteAmberClear
BRGYSLWAC
B11R8G8Y8
S11L8W8A8C8
FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC
B25R24G24Y24S25L24W24A24C24
TBTRTGTY–
TL––
TC
B18R16G16Y16
–L16
––
C16
➂ Key Withdrawal Code
Code
1 Yes No
Code
2 No Yes
Code
3 Yes Yes
Non-Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact block not included unless noted.
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side Left Right Left Right
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1
KA2#2 0 1 1 0
KA1#1
KA3#1 1 0 0 1
KA2#1 0 1 1 0
CAM E D
Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type
Manual Return
Operator Only ①
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 1,2,3)➂➃
KS11KS11BKS11➁
KS11K➂
KS12KS12BKS12➁
KS12K➂
With Contact Block(s)
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors, Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)With 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H2)
KS11BH13KS11BH1KS11BH2
–––
Spring Return from Left Operator Only ①
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 2 only)➃
KS25KS25BKS25➁KS25K2
––––
Spring Return From Right Operator Only ①
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 1 Only)➃
––––
KS34KS34BKS34➁KS34K1
Top View
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
KA1KA3
KA2
KA1KA3
KA2
① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.Example:KS11K1+H13(KA1-SIDE 2)=KS11K1H13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.Example: KS11➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS11FG
➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table.Example: KS11K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS11K2
➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (key only part no. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes are available at no extra cost: E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all operable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions are avail-able.
Example: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number isKS11K2E29.All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased by specifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105
Key No. Total Key ChangesAvailable
Master Key (E99)
Part No.
E36 thru E60 25 2941151990
OR
OR
OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Selector Switches
79© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.Example: K12J35FR+H2(2 KA1) = K12J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from the voltage assembly code table below.Example: K25J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc Voltage = K25J37.
➂ Add the color code as chosen form the knob color table at right.Example: K25J35➂ with a green knob = K25J35G.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – ULTypes 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend plate and contact block not included unless noted.
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side Left Right Left Right
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1
KA2#2 0 1 1 0
KA1#1
KA3#1 1 0 0 1
KA2#1 0 1 1 0
CAM E D
Illuminated Operators Type Type
Manual Return ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
K11J1K11J1RK11J➁K11J➁
K11J➁➂
K11J➁➂
K12J1K12J1RK12J➁K12J➁
K12J➁➂
K12J➁➂
Spring Return from Left ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
K25J1K25J1RK25J➁K25J➁
K25J➁➂
K25J➁➂
–––––
–
Spring Return From Right ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
–––––
–
K34J1K34J1RK34J➁K34J➁
K34J➁➂
K34J➁➂
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
StandardKnob
GlovedHand Knob
CoinOperated
➂KnobCode
Type➂
KnobCode
Type➂
KnobCode
Type
RedGreenYellowBlueWhiteAmberClear
RGYLWAC
R8G8Y8L8W8A8C8
FRFGFYFLFWFAFC
R24G24Y24L24W24A24C24
TRTGTYTL––
TC
R16G16Y16L16
––
C16
Top View
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
KA1KA3
KA2
KA1KA3
KA2
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type K11J1 Form Y178.
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage Description Voltage Assembly Code
Separate Light Module Type Number
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3131LR31LG31LY
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3232LR32LG32LY
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
18 Vac-dc Resistor 33 KM33
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3535LR35LG35LY
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
32 Vac-dc Resistor 23 KM23
48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3636LR36LG36LY
KM36KM36LRKM36LGKM36LY
60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3737LR37LG37LY
KM37KM37LRKM37LGKM37LY
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
21
F1
KM2KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc120 Vac Only120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
LED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
3811
38LR38LG38LY
KM38KM11
KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz Transformer 3 KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
47
F7
KM4KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
2512
KM25KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 8 KM8
380 Vac-dc Neon 13 KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
514
KM5KM14
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon Transformer
15 6
KM15KM6
Two Color Selector SwitchUsed to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illuminated operators.
Knob Factory Assembled Form Number
Standard Y178
Gloved Hand Y1781
OR
OR OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mmHeavy Duty Selector Switches
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved80
11/97
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105
Selector Switch Knobs
ColorStandard
Knob GlovedHand Knob
CoinOperated
➁KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type
BlackRed
GreenYellowOrange
BlueWhiteAmberClear
BRGYSLWAC
B11R8G8Y8
S11L8W8A8C8
FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC
B25R24G24Y24S25L24W24A24C24
TBTRTGTY–
TL––
TC
B18R16G16Y16
–L16
––
C16
Non-Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED 1 — Contact Closed 0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
KA2#2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
KA1#1
KA3#1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
KA2#1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
CAM B C D E F G J L M
Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return
Operator Only ➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4 through 10) ➂➃
KS42KS42BKS42➁
KS42K➂
KS43KS43BKS43➁
KS43K➂
KS44KS44BKS44➁
KS44K➂
KS45KS45BKS45➁
KS45K➂
KS46KS46BKS46➁
KS46K➂
KS47KS47BKS47➁
KS47K➂
KS49KS49BKS49➁
KS49K➂
KS401KS401BKS401➁
KS401K➂
KS402KS402BKS402➁
KS402K➂
With Contact Block(s)
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors, Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)With 1 KA1 on side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 (H2)
KS42BH13KS42BH1KS42BH2
KS43BH13KS43BH1KS43BH2
KS44BH13KS44BH1KS44BH2
KS45BH13KS45BH1KS45BH2
KS46BH13KS46BH1KS46BH2
KS47BH13KS47BH1KS47BH2
KS49BH13KS49BH1KS49BH2
KS401BH13KS401BH1KS401BH2
KS402BH13KS402BH1KS402BH2
Spring Return from Left to Center
Operator Only ➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 5, 6 or 9 only) ➂➃
KS62KS62BKS62➁
KS62K➂
KS63KS63BKS63➁
KS63K➂
KS64KS64BKS64➁
KS64K➂
KS65KS65BKS65➁
KS65K➂
KS66KS66BKS66➁
KS66K➂
KS67KS67BKS67➁
KS67K➂
KS69KS69BKS69➁
KS69K➂
KS601KS601BKS601➁
KS601K➂
KS602KS602BKS602➁
KS602K➂
Spring Return From Right to Center
Operator Only ➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4, 5 or 7 Only) ➂➃
KS72KS72BKS72➁
KS72K➂
KS73KS73BKS73➁
KS73K➂
KS74KS74BKS74➁
KS74K➂
KS75KS75BKS75➁
KS75K➂
KS76KS76BKS76➁
KS76K➂
KS77KS77BKS77➁
KS77K➂
KS79KS79BKS79➁
KS79K➂
KS701KS701BKS701➁
KS701K➂
KS702KS702BKS702➁
KS702K➂
Spring Return Both Sides to Center
Operator Only ➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 5 Only) ➂➃
KS52KS52BKS52➁KS52K5
KS53KS53BKS53➁KS53K5
KS54KS54BKS54➁KS54K5
KS55KS55BKS55➁KS55K5
KS56KS56BKS56➁KS56K5
KS57KS57BKS57➁KS57K5
KS59KS59BKS59➁KS59K5
KS501KS501BKS501➁KS501K5
KS502KS502BKS502➁KS502K5
Top View
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
KA1KA3
KA2
KA1KA3
KA2
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: KS43K6+H13(KA1-SIDE 2)=KS43K6H13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.EXAMPLE: KS43➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS43FG
➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table below.EXAMPLE: KS43K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS43K6
➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (key only partno. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes are available at noextra cost:E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all op-erable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions areavailable.
EXAMPLE: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number isKS43K6E29.
All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased byspecifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.
Key No. Total Key ChangesAvailable
Master Key (E99)
Part No.
E36 thru E60 25 2941151990
3-Position Switches
➂ Code ➂ Code
4 Yes No No 8 Yes No Yes
5 No Yes No 9 No Yes Yes
6 No No Yes 10 Yes Yes Yes
7 Yes Yes No
OR
OR
OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Selector Switches
81© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch OperatorsFor use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED 1 — Contact Closed 0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
Center
Left Right
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
KA2#2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
KA1#1
KA3#1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
KA2#1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
CAM B C D E F G J L M
Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
K42J1K42J1RK42J➁K42J➁
K42J➁➂K42J➁➂
K43J1K43J1RK43J➁K43J➁
K43J➁➂K43J➁➂
K44J1K44J1RK44J➁K44J➁
K44J➁➂K44J➁➂
K45J1K45J1RK45J➁K45J➁
K45J➁➂K45J➁➂
K46J1K46J1RK46J➁K46J➁
K46J➁➂K46J➁➂
K47J1K47J1RK47J➁K47J➁
K47J➁➂K47J➁➂
K49J1K49J1RK49J➁K49J➁
K49J➁➂K49J➁➂
K401J1K401J1RK401J➁K401J➁K401J➁➂K401J➁➂
K402J1K402J1RK402J➁K402J➁K402J➁➂K402J➁➂
Spring Return Left
ToCenter ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
K62J1K62J1RK62J➁K62J➁
K62J➁➂K62J➁➂
K63J1K63J1RK63J➁K63J➁
K63J➁➂K63J➁➂
K64J1K64J1RK641➁K64J➁
K64J➁➂K64J➁➂
K65J1K65J1RK65J➁K65J➁
K65J➁➂K65J➁➂
K66J1K66J1RK66J➁K66J➁
K66J➁➂K66J➁➂
K67J1K67J1RK67J➁K67J➁
K67J➁➂K67J➁➂
K69J1K69J1RK69J➁K69J➁
K69J➁➂K69J➁➂
K601J1K601J1RK601J➁K601J➁K601J➁➂K601J➁➂
K602J1K602J1RK602J➁K602J➁K602J➁➂K602J➁➂
Spring Return
Right To Center ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
K72J1K72J1RK72J➁K72J➁
K72J➁➂K72J➁➂
K73J1K73J1RK73J➁K73J➁
K73J➁➂K73J➁➂
K74J1K74J1RK74J➁K74J➁
K74J➁➂K74J➁➂
K75J1K75J1RK75J➁K75J➁
K75J➁➂K75J➁➂
K76J1K76J1RK76J➁K76J➁
K76J➁➂K76J➁➂
K77J1K77J1RK77J➁K77J➁
K77J➁➂K77J➁➂
K79J1K79J1RK79J➁K79J➁
K79J➁➂K79J➁➂
K701J1K701J1RK701J➁K701J➁K701J➁➂K701J➁➂
K702J1K702J1RK702J➁K702J➁K702J➁➂K702J➁➂
Spring Return
Both Sides To
Center ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
K52J1K52J1RK52J➁K52J➁
K52J➁➂K52J➁➂
K53J1K53J1RK53J➁K53J➁
K53J➁➂K53J➁➂
K54J1K54J1RK54J➁K54J➁
K54J➁➂K54J➁➂
K55J1K55J1RK55J➁K55J➁
K55J➁➂K55J➁➂
K56J1K56J1RK56J➁K56J➁
K56J➁➂K56J➁➂
K57J1K57J1RK57J➁K57J➁
K57J➁➂K57J➁➂
K59J1K59J1RK59J➁K59J➁
K59J➁➂K59J➁➂
K501J1K501J1RK501J➁K501J➁K501J➁➂K501J➁➂
K502J1K502J1RK502J➁K502J➁K502J➁➂K502J➁➂
Top View
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
KA1KA3
KA2
KA1KA3
KA2
Non-Illuminated only.
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
StandardKnob Gloved
Hand Knob
CoinOperated
KnobCode ➂ Type Knob
Code ➂ Type KnobCode ➂ Type
BlackRed
GreenYellowOrange
BlueWhiteAmberClear
BRGYSLWAC
B11 R8G8Y8
S11 L8W8A8C8
FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC
B25 R24G24Y24
S25 L24W24A24C24
TBTRTGTY–
TL––
TC
B18 R16G16Y16
–L16
––
C16
① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: K43J35+H(2 KA1)=K43J35FRH2
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 82.EXAMPLE: K43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage=K43J37
➂ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.EXAMPLE: K43J35➂ with a green knob = K43J35G
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED usered knob) or use a clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Basic Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Two Color Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 79Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
Voltage Assembly Codes See Page 82
OR
OR
OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mmHeavy Duty Selector Switches
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved82
11/97
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: KS88K11 + H13(KA1-SIDE 2) = KS88K11H13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color tableEXAMPLE: KS88➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS88FG
➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table below.EXAMPLE: KS88K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS88K12
➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (keyonly part no. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes areavailable at no extra cost: E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all op-erable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions areavailable.
EXAMPLE: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number isKS88K11E29.All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased by spec-ifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.
➄ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table below.EXAMPLE: K88J➄ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = K88J37
➅ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen, (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use clear knob.
➆ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 4 Position Selector SwitchOperatorsFor use in hazardous locations – See page 98.UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED1 — Contact
Closed0 — Contact Open
Contact Block Position Quantity and Type Mount on Side
1 0 0 0KA1#2
KA3#2
KA2#2 0 0 1 0
KA1#1
KA3#1 0 0 0 1
KA2#1 0 1 0 0
Non-Illuminated Operators Cam Type
Manual Return ➀Operator Only ➀ Without Knob With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁ Key Operated with E10 Key (Codes 11,12,13,14,15) ➂➃
HHHH
KS88KS88BKS88 ➁
KS88K ➂
Spring Return From Left - Spring Return From Right-Maintained in the Two Mid PositionsOperator Only ➀Without Knob With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
HHH
KS89KS89BKS89➁
Illuminated Operators Cam Type
Manual Return ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and With Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆
HHHHHH
K88J1K88J1RK88J➄K88J➄
K88J➄➁K88J➄➁
Spring Return From Left - Spring Return From Right-Maintained in the Two Mid Positions
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and With Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆
HHHHHH
K89J1K89J1RK89J➄K89J➄
K89J➄➁K89J➄➁
Key No.Total KeyChangesAvailable
Master Key (E99)
Part No.
E36 thru E60 25 2941151990
Top View
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
KA1KA3
KA2
KA1KA3
KA2
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage Description Voltage Assembly Code
Separate Light Module Type Number
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3131LR31LG31LY
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3232LR32LG32LY
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
18 Vac-dc Resistor 33 KM33
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3535LR35LG35LY
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
32 Vac-dc Resistor 23 KM23
48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3636LR36LG36LY
KM36KM36LRKM36LGKM36LY
60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3737LR37LG37LY
KM37KM37LRKM37LGKM37LY
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
21
F1
KM2KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc120 Vac Only120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
LED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
3811
38LR38LG38LY
KM38KM11
KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz Transformer 3 KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
47
F7
KM4KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
2512
KM25KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 8 KM8
380 Vac-dc Neon 13 KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
514
KM5KM14
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon Transformer
156
KM15KM6
➂ Key Withdrawal Code:
4-Position Switches
Code
11 Yes No No Yes
12 No No No Yes
13 Yes No No No
14 Yes Yes Yes Yes
15 No Yes Yes Yes
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
StandardKnob Gloved
Hand Knob
CoinOperated
➁ See table on page 81.
OR
OR
OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Pilot Lights
83© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Pilot Lights – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Type 4 & 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plates Not Included
Description Voltage StyleWith Red
Fresnel Color Cap
With Green Fresnel Color
Cap
With OtherColor Cap
Without Color Cap
Standard Pilot Light(Plastic fresnel
Color Cap Shown)
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
24-28 Vac-dcFor Other Voltages See
Table ➀
TransformerTransformerFull Voltage
Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃
KP1R31KP7R31
KP35R31KP➀R31KP➀R31
KP1G31KP7G31
KP35G31KP➀G31KP➀G31
KP1 ➁KP7 ➁
KP35 ➁KP ➀➁KP ➀➁
KP1KP7
KP35KP ➀KP ➀
Push To Test Pilot Light
(Glass Color Cap Shown)
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
24-28 Vac-dcFor Other Voltages
See Table ➀
TransformerTransformerFull Voltage
Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃
KT1R31KT7R31
KT35R31KT➀R31KT➀R31
KT1G31KT7G31
KT35G31KT➀G31KT➀G31
KT1 ➁KT7 ➁
KT35 ➁KT ➀➁KT ➀➁
KT1KT7
KT35KT ➀KT ➀
Remote Test Pilot Light
(Glass Color Cap Shown)
120 Vac Only24-28 Vac Only
For Other VoltagesSee Table ➀➄
Resistor ➄Full Voltage ➄
Full Voltage or Resistor ➄
KTR38R31KTR35R31KTR➀R31
KTR38G31KTR35G31KTR➀G31
KTR38 ➁KTR35 ➁KTR ➀➁
KTR38KTR35KTR ➀
Pilot Light For Intrinsically
Safe Circuits(NEMA Type 4X)
Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal energy capa-ble of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous atmospheres, for which the equipment has been tested.These pilot lights are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved bar-rier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2). These pilot lights are Factory Mutual (FM approved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further de-tails.These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – ex-cept for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates as shown on pages 100 and 101.
KP44R KP44G
KP44Y(YellowColorCap)
—
OperatingVoltage Range Nominal Current
V max. = 32 VI max. = 165 mA20-30 V
AC/DC 25 mA
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Voltage Assembly Codes See Page 82
R
M
M O.L.
L2
321
L1
STOPSTART
L2
C
Test
L1
M
STOP
LSI
M3
(TEST) C
(TEST) C L2
L2
L1(SIG)
CR
M2
M1
L2(TEST) C
START
TEST BUTTONL1 L2
L1(SIG)
L1(SIG)
Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Remote Test Pilot Light
➀ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 82.EXAMPLE: KT①R31 with a 60VAC red LED voltage=KT37LRR31
➁ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table. EXAMPLE: KP1➁ with a bluefresnel cap = KP1L31
➂ The color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED use agreen color cap) or use clear cap.
➃ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.➄ On remote test pilot lights use only full voltage or resistor voltage assembly codes. Do not
choose LED, neon or transformer codes. For AC use only.
Basic Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Push-To-Test Ground Detector Pilot Light(Contact Block Included — But NOT Legend Plate or Color Cap)
Used in pairs to indicate a grounded condition in a control circuit fed from a grounded center-tapped transformer. The Type KT50 is commonly used in press control circuits, and fulfills therequirements of the ground detector called for in ANSI B11.1 (1971), Par. E3.6.5. Consult local Square D Sales Office for proper application.
Voltage and Frequency Type
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz KT50
Color
➁ Plastic Fresnel ➁ Plastic Domed ➁ Glass
AmberBlueClearGreenRed
WhiteYellow
A31L31C31G31R31W31Y31
A9L9C9G9R9W9Y9
A6L6C6G6R6W6Y6
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mmHeavy Duty Joysticks
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved84
11/97
Joy Stick Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Contact Blocks And Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
DescriptionOperator
WithContacts
OperatorWithout
Contacts ➀
3 Position-Center
Off
Momentary Contact —Spring Return to Center
Without Latch K71H7 K71
With Latch K70H7 K70
Maintained ContactWithout Latch K73H7 K73
With Latch K72H7 K72
3 Position-Center
Off
Momentary Contact —Spring Return to Center
Without Latch K31H8 K31
With Latch K30H8 K30
Maintained ContactWithout Latch K33H8 K33
With Latch K32H8 K32
5 Position-Center
Off
Momentary Contact —Spring Return to Center
Without Latch K35H2 K35
With Latch K34H2 K34
Maintained ContactWithout Latch K37H2 K37
With Latch K36H2 K36
The joystick operator is ideal for applications where only one circuit is to be energized at one time. The three position joy stick closes one circuit each in Up-Down or Right-Left position with all circuits open in center position. The five position operator closes one circuit each in Up, Down, Left and Right positions with all circuits open in center position.Momentary contact operators are spring return to the center position. Maintained operators remain in each position and must be reset manually. Operators with latch cannot be operated until the latch button in center of handle is pressed.
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.Use Legend Plate 9001KN900
Contact Arrangements
Operator Contact BlockType
Contact BlockLocation
(See Fig. 2)
Contact(See Fig. 2)
Handle position (with ref. to Nib, See Fig. 1)
1 2 OFF 3 4
3 Position OperatorKA3 POS 1 A 1 0 0
KA3 POS 2 A 0 0 1
3 Position Operator
KA2 POS 1 B 1 0 0
KA2 POS 2 B 0 0 1
5 Position Operator
KA1 POS 1A 0 1 0 0 0
B 1 0 0 0 0
KA1 POS 2A 0 0 0 0 1
B 0 0 0 1 0
(1) Contact Closed (0) Contact Open
Without Latch
With Latch
Figure 1
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Figure 2
1.6 mm MIN - 6.3mm MAX
InchesMM
Dimensions
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Operators
85© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Selector Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included
Inserts are field convertible. For colors not listed, order operator without insertplus separate color insert from page 105. Up to two Type KA contact blockscan be mounted in tandem (total of four blocks). Selector push buttons cannotbe illuminated.
➀ Order color inserts from page 105.➁ Cams are not interchangeable.
Key Operated Push Button – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
ContactBlock
Required
Two Position Operators ThreePosition
Operators
Order Contact Blocks From Pages97-98.
1 — Contact ClosedxxXXxxXxxxxxxxxxxxxF — FreexXXxX0 — Contact OpenxxxxxxxxxXxxxxxxxxxxxD — Depressed Maintained
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Center Right
F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D D F D F D F D
1-KA-1#2 0 0
0 11 00 1
0 00 1
1 00 0
0 00 1
1 10 0
1 10 0
1 00 1
1 00 1
0 00 1
1 00 1
- 0- 1
1 00 1
1 00 0
1 10 0
1-KA-1#1 0 0
0 11 10 0
0 00 1
1 00 0
1 10 0
0 00 1
1 00 1
1 10 0
1 10 0
0 00 1
1 00 1
- 0- 1
1 10 0
1 00 0
1 00 1
CAM ➁ P R S T Y Z U
Color Insert Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Without Insert ➀Black
KQ11KQ11B
KQ12KQ12B
KQ13KQ13B
KQ14KQ14B
KQ15KQ15B
KQ18KQ18B
KQ27KQ27B
Color Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 99Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Key operated push buttons are used wherever unauthorizeduse of a push button is to be discouraged. Examples are lock-ing a “Start” push button in the extended position or locking a“Stop” push button in the depressed position. The operator canalso be locked in the flush position –holding all contacts open.Up to two Type KA contact blocks can be mounted in tan-dem (total of four blocks).
All key operated push buttons are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 keychange.
See page 82 for other key changes (Note 4).
Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included
DescriptionPositions In Which
Push Button Can Be Locked TypeExtended Flush Depressed
Push button operable only with key in lock. Key is removable in locked position only.
X––X
–X–X
––XX
KR131KR132KR133KR137
Push button operable with or without key in lock. Push button can be locked with key only. Key removable in both locked or un-locked position.
X––X
–X–X
––XX
KR141KR142KR143KR147
Unit is set by rotating key, with button in ex-tended position. Key is removable only in this set position. When pushed, the button will then lock in position indicated at right.
––
X–
–X
KR152KR153
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type K — 30 mmHeavy Duty Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved86
11/97
➀ The dial plate only is Class 9001 Type KN905. ➁ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below. Example: Type K2105➂ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below. Example: Type K2385➃ For use with 9050 Type T. Pontentiometer shaft diameter 1/4” (6 mm), 7/8” (22 mm) length.Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Mark.
Potentiometer (with Dial Plate ➀ – NEMA Types 4, 13)Watts Description Type
2
Operator only – Single PotOperator with Single Pot
Operator only – Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot
K20K21 ➁
K22K23 ➂
➁ ➂ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.Example: Type K2105
Suffix➁
Ohms Suffix➁
Ohms Suffix➁
Ohms Suffix➂
Ohms
Front Rear
01023803040532390633
50100200250500
10001500200025003500
070840093510361112
5 K10 K15 K25 K35 K50 K75 K
100 K250 K
1337141516
17 ➃
500 K750 K
1.0 Meg2.5 Meg5.0 Meg5.0 Meg
8283858889
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
Emergency “Break Glass” Operator –UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
Operator is held in a depressed position by a glass disc. When the glass discis broken with the hammer, button returns to a normal extended position.Package of 5 discs included with operator. For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA1 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA4.For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of a 9001KA4 or 9001KA6.
Type
K15
9001 K15 Replacement PartsDescription Part Number
Yellow bumperHammer and chain
Lower ring nutTop ring nut
Package of 5 replacement discsClip to hold hammer
310521110131052067506512232801
9001K409001K57
2540902240
Time Delay Push Button – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
Time Delay After Release of Button
Note:When mounted in top or bottomhole of Type K enclosures, de-vice requires one additionalspace below or above operator.When mounted other than in topor bottom hole, device may re-quire two additional spaces, oneabove and one below operator.Closing plates must be installedon unused holes.
DescriptionType (All Colors)
FullGuard
ExtendedGuard
NoGuard
Timed Cont.1 N.O. and 1
N.C.
KRD1UH1 KRD2UH1 KRD3UH1
Timed Cont.2 N.O. and 2
N.C.
KRD1UH2 KRD2UH2 KRD3UH2
Timing period is adjustable from 0.1 second to 60 secondsand begins after button has been released. Devices includea package of seven color inserts for color coding the pushbutton. Contacts are quick make – quick break.
Rocker Arm Operating Lever
Allows two standard push buttons to be operated independent-ly of each other. Order push buttons and legend plates frompages 72 and 100 — specify which marking is to be inverted.
Type
K50
Alternate Action – (Push-On Push-Off) Module
This module can be added to standard 9001 Type K, KX, SK or T mo-mentary push button operators. Contact blocks mounted behind thismodule (maximum of 2) will be held in the depressed position whenthe operator is operated once and released to their normal positionwhen the operator is operated again. For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA1 or the N.C. contact of a9001KA4. For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of a 9001KA4 or9001KA6.
Type
K85
Wobble Stick
For easy operation of any standardpush button.
Type
K8
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Operators
87© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Non-Illuminated Momentary Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Contact Blocks And Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
Description ColorOperator With 1 N.O.
and1 N.C. Contact (KA1)
Operator With (KA2)
Operator With 1 N.C. Contact(KA3)
Operator Only With No Contacts ➄
Full Guard
Black SKR1BH13 SKR1BH5 SKR1BH6 SKR1B
Red SKR1RH13 SKR1RH5 SKR1RH6 SKR1R
Green SKR1GH13 SKR1GH5 SKR1GH6 SKR1G
Universal ➀ SKR1UH13 SKR1UH5 SKR1UH6 SKR1U
Other ➁ SKR1➁H13 SKR1➁H5 SKR1➁H6 SKR1➁
No Guard
Black SKR3BH13 SKR3BH5 SKR3BH6 SKR3B
Red SKR3RH13 SKR3RH5 SKR3RH6 SKR3R
Green SKR3GH13 SKR3GH5 SKR3GH6 SKR3G
Universal ➀ SKR3UH13 SKR3UH5 SKR3UH6 SKR3U
Other ➁ SKR3➁H13 SKR3➁H5 SKR3➁H6 SKR3➁
Extended Guard
Black SKR2BH13 SKR2BH5 SKR2BH6 SKR2B
Red SKR2RH13 SKR2RH5 SKR2RH6 SKR2R
Green SKR2GH13 SKR2GH5 SKR2GH6 SKR2G
Universal ➀ SKR2UH13 SKR2UH5 SKR2UH6 SKR2U
Other ➁ SKR2➁ SKR2➁H5 SKR2➁H6 SKR2➁
13/8 Mushroom Button
Snap In Mushroom Button
Black SKR4BH13 SKR4BH5 SKR4BH6 SKR4B
Red SKR4RH13 SKR4RH5 SKR4RH6 SKR4R
Red ➂ SKR4R05H13 SKR4R05H5 SKR4R05H6 SKR4R05
Green SKR4GH13 SKR4GH5 SKR4GH6 SKR4G
Other ➃ SKR4➃H13 SKR4➃H5 SKR4➃H6 SKR4➃
Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security
Black SKR24BH13 SKR24BH5 SKR24BH6 SKR24B
Red SKR24RH13 SKR24RH5 SKR24RH6 SKR24R
Green SKR24GH13 SKR24GH5 SKR24GH6 SKR24G
Other ➃ SKR24➃H13 SKR24➃H5 SKR24➃H6 SKR24➃
21/4 Mushroom Button
Snap-In Mushroom Button
Black SKR5BH13 SKR5BH5 SKR5BH6 SKR5B
Red SKR5RH13 SKR5RH5 SKR5RH6 SKR5R
Red ➂ SKR5R05H13 SKR5R05H5 SKR5R05H6 SKR5R05
Green SKR5GH13 SKR5GH5 SKR5GH6 SKR5G
Other ➃ SKR5➃H13 SKR5➃H5 SKR5➃H6 SKR5➃
Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security
Black SKR25BH13 SKR25BH5 SKR25BH6 SKR25B
Red SKR25RH13 SKR25RH5 SKR25RH6 SKR25R
Green SKR25GH13 SKR25GH5 SKR25GH6 SKR25G
Other ➃ SKR25➃H13 SKR25➃H5 SKR25➃H6 SKR25➃
➀ The universal push button operators include one each of the following color inserts: black,red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
➁ See table below.➂ Knob has the words “Emergency Stop” in raised letters highlighted in white for readability.
Available in red snap-in mushroom buttons only.➃ See table below.➄ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber. EXAMPLE: SKR24B + H2(2-KA1) = SKR24BH2
Color➁ For SKR1,2,3
Choose Color and Place Color Code in Type Number
➃ For SKR4,5,24,25Choose Color and Place
Color Code in Type Number
BlueYellowWhiteOrangeGray
LYWSE
LY–S–
Color Inserts and Mushroom Knobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mmCorrosion Resistant Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved88
11/97
Multifunction Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate And Contact Blocks Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
Description Color Contacts ➇ Without Contacts ➆
Both Buttons MaintainedInterlocked Assembly
Universal ➀Other ➁
SKR11UH1SKR11➁H1
SKR11USKR11➁
One Button MomentaryOne Button MaintainedInterlocked Assembly
Universal ➀Other ➁
SKR12UH1H1SKR12➁H1H1
SKR12USKR12➁
Non-Illuminated15/8" Diameter Knob
Includes Type KN179WPLegend Plate Marked
Pull To Start Push To Stop
Description Color With 2 N.C. Contacts(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With 1 N.O. 1 N.C. Contact (1 KA1)
WithoutContacts ➆
3 POSITIONMomentary Pull-
Maintained Neutral-Momentary Push
Red ➈Green
Other ➂
SKR8RH25SKR8GH25SKR8➂H25
–––
SKR8RSKR8GSKR8➂
2 POSITIONMaintained Pull-Maintained Push
Red ➈Green
Other ➂
–––
SKR9RH13SKR9GH13SKR9➂H13
SKR9RSKR9GSKR9➂
Illuminated15/8" Diameter Knob
Includes Type KN179WP Legend Plate Marked
Pull to Start Push To Stop
Description VoltageWith Red Knob ➈
With 2 N.C. Contacts (1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With Other Color Knob With 2 N.C. Contacts
(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With Other Color Knob Without Contacts ➆
3 POSITIONMomentary Pull-
Maintained Neutral-Momentary Push
110-120 V, 50-60 HzOther – Transformer, LED,
Flashing ➄Other – Full Voltage, Resistor,
Neon ➅
SKR8P1RH25SKR8P➃RH25
SKR8P➃RH25
SKR8P1➂H25SKR8P➃➂H25
SKR8P➃➂H25
SKR8P1➂SKR8P➃➂
SKR8P➃➂
Description Voltage With Red ➈ Knob With 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact (KA1)
With Other Color Knob With 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact (KA1)
With Other Color Knob Without Contacts
2 POSITIONMaintained Pull-Maintained Push
Illuminated
110-120 V, 50-60 HzOther – Transformer, L.E.D.,
Flashing ➄Other – Full Voltage, Resistor,
Neon ➅
SKR9P1RH13SKR9P➃RH13
SKR9P➃RH13
SKR9P1➂H13SKR9P➃➂H13
SKR9P➃➂H13
SKR9P1➂SKR9P➃➂
SKR9P➃➂
➀ Universal for SKR11,12 includes 2 each of black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, white.➁ Choose one color for each button from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: An SKR11 with top button gray and bottom button orange = SKR11ES➂ Choose one color from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: SKR9 with a yellow knob=SKR9Y➃ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 89.
EXAMPLE: SKR8P➃ with a 277 V 50-60 Hz voltage=SKR8P8➄ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED uses
green knob) or use a clear knob.➅ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.➆ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.
➇ SKR11UH1 has 1 KA1(1N.O., 1N.C.) and SKR12UH1H1 has 2 KA1 (2N.O., 2N.C.).➈ To obtain a red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob – substitute “R05” in
place of “R”. Not available in 1 3/8” or 2 1/4”.
These colors are not available on illuminated push-pull operators.
Color SKR11, SKR12➁ SKR8, SKR9 ➂
BlackRed
GreenBlue
YellowWhite
OrangeClear
AmberGray
BRGLYWS––E
B RGLYW
S CA–
Color Inserts and Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Operators
89© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Illuminated Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
DescriptionVoltage
andFrequency
Style
With Red ColorCap and 1 N.O.
and 1 N.C.Contact (KA1)
With Green ColorCap and 1 N.O.
and 1 N.C.Contact (KA1)
With OtherColor Cap
Without ContactBlocks ➀
Full GuardIlluminated
Push Button
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SK1L1RH13 SK1L1GH13 SK1L1➄
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SK1L7RH13 SK1L7GH13 SK1L7➄
24-28 Vac/dc Full Voltage SK1L35RH13 SK1L35GH13 SK1L35➄
For other voltagesSee Table ➁
Transformer, Flashing SK1L➁RH13 SK1L➁GH13 SK1L➁➄
Full Voltage SK1L➁RH13 SK1L➁GH13 SK1L➁➄
Resistor, Neon ➂ SK1L➁RH13 SK1L➁GH13 SK1L➁➄
LED ➃ SK1L➁RH13 SK1L➁GH13 SK1L➁➄
No GuardIlluminated
Push Button
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SK2L1RH13 SK2L1GH13 SK2L1➄
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SK2L7RH13 SK2L7GH13 SK2L7➄
24-28 Vac/dc Full Voltage SK2L35RH13 SK2L35GH13 SK2L35➄
For other voltagesSee Table ➁
Transformer, Flashing SK2L➁RH13 SK2L➁GH13 SK2L➁➄
Full Voltage SK2L➁RH13 SK2L➁GH13 SK2L➁➄
Resistor, Neon ➂ SK2L➁RH13 SK2L➁GH13 SK2L➁➄
LED ➃ SK2L➁RH13 SK2L➁GH13 SK2L➁➄
13/8 InchIlluminatedMushroom
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SK2L1R20H13 SK2L1G20H13
Order SK2L➁ ➄ ➅
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SK2L7R20H13 SK2L7G20H13
24-28 Vac/dc Full Voltage SK2L35R20H13 SK2L35G20H13
For other voltagesSee Table ➁
Transformer, Flashing SK2L➁R20H13 SK2L➁G20H13
Full Voltage SK2L➁R20H13 SK2L➁G20H13
Resistor, Neon ➂ SK2L➁R20H13 SK2L➁G20H13
LED ➃ SK2L➁R20H13 SK2L➁G20H13
21/4 InchIlluminatedMushroom
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SK2L1R21H13 SK2L1G21H13
Order SK2L➁ ➄ ➅
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SK2L7R21H13 SK2L7G21H13
24-28 Vac/dc Full Voltage SK2L35R21H13 SK2L35G21H13
For other voltagesSee Table ➁
Transformer, Flashing SK2L➁R21H13 SK2L➁G21H13
Full Voltage SK2L➁R21H13 SK2L➁G21H13
Resistor, Neon ➂ SK2L➁R21H13 SK2L➁G21H13
LED ➃ SK2L➁R21H13 SK2L➁G21H13
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage Description Voltage Assembly CodeSeparate Light Module
Type Number
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3131LR31LG31LY
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3232LR32LG32LY
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
18 Vac-dc Resistor 33 KM33
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3535LR35LG35LY
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
32 Vac-dc Resistor 23 KM23
48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3636LR36LG36LY
KM36KM36LRKM36LGKM36LY
60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3737LR37LG37LY
KM37KM37LRKM37LGKM37LY
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
21
F1
KM2KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc120 Vac Only120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
LED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
3811
38LR38LG38LY
KM38KM11
KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz Transformer 3 KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
47
F7
KM4KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
2512
KM25KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 8 KM8
380 Vac-dc Neon 13 KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
514
KM5KM14
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon Transformer
156
KM15KM6
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber. EXAMPLE: SK2L36R20 +H2 (2 KA1) =SK2L36R20H2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table atright. EXAMPLE: SK2L➁ with a 240 Vac-dc voltage=SK2L25.
➂ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.➃ The color of the color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED
uses red color cap) or use a clear cap.➄ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table below. EXAMPLE: SK2L25➄ with
a blue 13/8" mushroom button=SK2L25L20.➅ The only difference between a no guard (SK2L) operator and mushroom button operators is
the color cap.
Color Caps and Mushroom Knobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Color Caps
ColorColor Codes
SK1LSK2L
13/8 InchMushroom
21/4 InchMushroom
RedGreenBlue
YellowWhiteClear
Amber
RGLYWCA
R20G20L20Y20W20C20A20
R21G21L21Y21W21C21A21
➄ ➄ ➄
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mmCorrosion Resistant Selector Switches
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved90
11/97
Non-Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side Left Right Left Right
Top View
KA1KA3
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1
KA2 KA2#2 0 1 1 0
KA1
KA3
KA1#1
KA3#1 1 0 0 1
KA2KA2#1 0 1 1 0
CAM E D
Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type
Manual Return
Operator Only ➀Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
SKS11SKS11BSKS11 ➁
SKS12SKS12BSKS12 ➁
With Contact Block(s)
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors,Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)With 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H2)
SKS11BH13SKS11BH1SKS11BH2
–––
Spring Return from Left Operator Only ➀Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
SKS25SKS25BSKS25 ➁
–––
Spring Return From Right Operator Only ➀Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
–––
SKS34SKS34BSKS34 ➁
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.Example: SKS11FB+H13(KA1-Side 2) = SKS11FBH13
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.Example: SKS11➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS11FG
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
StandardKnob
GlovedHand Knob
CoinOperated
➁KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type
BlackRed
GreenYellowOrange
BlueWhiteAmberClear
BRGYSLWAC
B11R8G8Y8
S11L8W8A8C8
FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC
B25R24G24Y24S25L24W24A24C24
TBTRTGTY–
TL––
TC
B18R16G16Y16
–L16
––
C16
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
OROR
OROR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches
91© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber. Example: SK12J35FR+H2(2 KA1) = SK12J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code tablebelow. Example: SK25J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc Voltage = SK25J37
➂ Add the color code as chosen from the knob color table at right. Example: SK25J35➂ witha green knob = SK25J35G
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use a clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
Contact Block Required 1 — Contact Closed0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side Left Right Left Right
Top View
KA1KA3
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1
KA2 KA2#2 0 1 1 0
KA1KA3
KA1#1
KA3#1 1 0 0 1
KA2 KA2#1 0 1 1 0
CAM E D
Illuminated Operators Type Type
Manual Return ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK11J1SK11J1RSK11J➁SK11J➁
SK11J➁➂SK11J➁➂
SK12J1SK12J1RSK12J➁SK12J➂
SK12J➁➁SK12J➁➂
Spring Return from Left ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK25J1SK25J1RSK25J➁SK25J➁
SK25J➁➂SK25J➁➂
––––––
Spring Return From Right ➀Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
––––––
SK34J1SK34J1RSK34J➁SK34J➁
SK34J➁➂SK34J➁➂
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
StandardKnob
GlovedHand Knob
CoinOperated
➂KnobCode
Type➂
KnobCode
Type➂
KnobCode
Type
RedGreenYellowBlueWhiteAmberClear
RGYLWAC
R8G8Y8L8W8A8C8
FRFGFYFLFWFAFC
R24G24Y24L24W24A24C24
TRTGTYTL––
TC
R16G16Y16L16
––
C16
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type SK11J1 Form Y-178.
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 95Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage Description Voltage Assembly Code
Separate Light Module Type
Number
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3131LR31LG31LY
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3232LR32LG32LY
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
18 Vac-dc Resistor 33 KM33
24-28Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3535LR35LG35LY
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
32 Vac-dc Resistor 23 KM23
48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3636LR36LG36LY
KM36KM36LRKM36LGKM36LY
60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3737LR37LG37LY
KM37KM37LRKM37LGKM37LY
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
21
F1
KM2KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc120 Vac Only120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
LED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
3811
38LR38LG38LY
KM38KM11
KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz Transformer 3 KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
47
F7
KM4KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
2512
KM25KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 8 KM8
380 Vac-dc Neon 13 KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
514
KM5KM14
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
NeonTransformer
156
KM15KM6
Two Color Selector SwitchUsed to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illuminated operators.
Knob Factory AssembledForm Number
Standard Y178
GlovedHand Y1781
OR
OR OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mmCorrosion Resistant Selector Switches
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved92
11/97
Non-Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED 1 — Contact Closed 0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side
Center Center Center Center Center Center Center Center Center
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
Top View
KA1KA3
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
KA2KA2#2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
KA1KA3
KA1#1
KA3#1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
KA2KA2#1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
CAM B C D E F G J L M
Non-Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return
Operator Only➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁
SKS42SKS42BSKS42➁
SKS43SKS43BSKS43➁
SKS44SKS44BSKS44➁
SKS45SKS45BSKS45➁
SKS46SKS46BSKS46➁
SKS47SKS47BSKS47➁
SKS49SKS49BSKS49➁
SKS401SKS401BSKS401➁
SKS402SKS402BSKS402➁
With Con-tact Block(s)
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors, Replace B in Type No. with Color Code)With 1 KA1 on side #2 (H13)With 1 KA1 on side #1 (H1)With 1 KA1 on side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 (H2)
SKS42BH13SKS42BH1SKS42BH2
SKS43BH13SKS43BH1SKS43BH2
SKS44BH13SKS44BH1SKS44BH2
SKS45BH13SKS45BH1SKS45BH2
SKS46BH13SKS46BH1SKS46BH2
SKS47BH13SKS47BH1SKS47BH2
SKS49BH13SKS49BH1SKS49BH2
SKS401BH13SKS401BH1SKS401BH2
SKS402BH13SKS402BH1SKS402BH2
Spring Return from
Left to Center
Operator Only➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁
SKS62SKS62BSKS62➁
SKS63SKS63BSKS63➁
SKS64SKS64BSKS64➁
SKS65SKS65BSKS65➁
SKS66SKS66BSKS66➁
SKS67SKS67BSKS67➁
SKS69SKS69BSKS69➁
SKS601SKS601BSKS601➁
SKS602SKS602BSKS602➁
Spring Return From
Right to Center
Operator Only➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁
SKS72SKS72BSKS72➁
SKS73SKS73BSKS73➁
SKS74SKS74BSKS74➁
SKS75SKS75BSKS75➁
SKS76SKS76BSKS76➁
SKS77SKS77BSKS77➁
SKS79SKS79BSKS79➁
SKS701SKS701BSKS701➁
SKS702SKS702BSKS702➁
Spring Return Both
Sides to Center
Operator Only➀
Without KnobWith Standard Black KnobWith Other Color Knob (See Table)➁
SKS52SKS52BSKS52➁
SKS53SKS53BSKS53➁
SKS54SKS54BSKS54➁
SKS55SKS55BSKS55➁
SKS56SKS56BSKS56➁
SKS57SKS57BSKS57➁
SKS59SKS59BSKS59➁
SKS501SKS501BSKS501➁
SKS502SKS502BSKS502➁
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
Basic Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 100-101Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
OR
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.EXAMPLE: SKS43FB+H13(KA1-POS 2) = SKS43FBH13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.EXAMPLE: SKS43➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS43FG.
Selector Switch Knobs
ColorStandard
Knob GlovedHand Knob
CoinOperated
➁KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type
BlackRed
GreenYellowOrange
BlueWhiteAmberClear
BRGYSLWAC
B11R8G8Y8
S11L8W8A8C8
FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC
B25R24G24Y24S25L24W24A24C24
TBTRTGTY–
TL––
TC
B18R16G16Y16
–L16
––
C16
OROR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches
93© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type SK43J1 Form Y178.
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Two Color Selector SwitchUsed to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illumi-nated operators.
Knob Factory AssembledForm Number
Standard Y178
Gloved Hand Y1781
Voltage Assembly Codes (Con’t.)
Voltage DescriptionVoltage
AssemblyCode
SeparateLight ModuleType Number
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
21
F1
KM2KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc120 Vac Only120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
LED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
3811
38LR38LG38LY
KM38KM11
KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz Transformer 3 KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
47
F7
KM4KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
2512
KM25KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 8 KM8
380 Vac-dc Neon 13 KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
514
KM5KM14
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon Transformer
156
KM15KM6
Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED 1 — Contact Closed 0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side
Center Center Center Center Center Center Center Center Center
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
Top View
KA1KA3
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
KA2 KA2#2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
KA1KA3
KA1#1
KA3#1
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
KA2 KA2#1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
CAM B C D E F G J L M
Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
SK42J1SK42J1RSK42J➁SK42J➁
SK42J➁➂SK42J➁➂
SK43J1SK43J1RSK43J➁SK43J➁
SK43J➁➂SK43J➁➂
SK44J1SK44J1RSK44J➁SK44J➁
SK44J➁➂SK44J➁➂
SK45J1SK45J1RSK45J➁SK45J➁
SK45J➁➂SK45J➁➂
SK46J1SK46J1RSK46J➁SK46J➁
SK46J➁➂SK46J➁➂
SK47J1SK47J1RSK47J➁SK47J➁
SK47J➁➂SK47J➁➂
SK49J1SK49J1RSK49J➁SK49J➁
SK49J➁➂SK49J➁➂
SK401J1SK401J1RSK401J➁SK401J➁
SK401J➁➂SK401J➁➂
SK402J1SK402J1RSK402J➁SK402J➁
SK402J➁➂SK402J➁➂
Spring Return Left
To Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
SK62J1SK62J1RSK62J➁SK62J➁
SK62J➁➂SK62J➁➂
SK63J1SK63J1RSK63J➁SK63J➁
SK63J➁➂SK63J➁➂
SK64J1SK64J1RSK64J➁SK64J➁
SK64J➁➂SK64J➁➂
SK65J1SK65J1RSK65J➁SK65J➁
SK65J➁➂SK65J➁➂
SK66J1SK66J1RSK66J➁SK66J➁
SK66J➁➂SK66J➁➂
SK67J1SK67J1RSK67J➁SK67J➁
SK67J➁➂SK67J➁➂
SK69J1SK69J1RSK69J➁SK69J➁
SK69J➁➂SK69J➁➂
SK601J1SK601J1RSK601J➁SK601J➁
SK601J➁➂SK601J➁➂
SK602J1SK602J1RSK602J➁SK602J➁
SK602J➁➂SK602J➁➂
Spring Return
Right To Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
SK72J1SK72J1RSK72J➁SK72J➁
SK72J➁➂SK72J➁➂
SK73J1SK73J1RSK73J➁SK73J➁
SK73J➁➂SK73J➁➂
SK74J1SK74J1RSK74J➁SK74J➁
SK74J➁➂SK74J➁➂
SK75J1SK75J1RSK75J➁SK75J➁
SK75J➁➂SK75J➁➂
SK76J1SK76J1RSK76J➁SK76J➁
SK76J➁➂SK76J➁➂
SK77J1SK77J1RSK77J➁SK77J➁
SK77J➁➂SK77J➁➂
SK79J1SK79J1RSK79J➁SK79J➁
SK79J➁➂SK79J➁➂
SK701J1SK701J1RSK701J➁SK701J➁
SK701J➁➂SK701J➁➂
SK702J1SK702J1RSK702J➁SK702J➁
SK702J➁➂SK702J➁➂
Spring Return
Both Sides To Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor➄
SK52J1SK52J1RSK52J➁SK52J➁
SK52J➁➂SK52J➁➂
SK53J1SK53J1RSK53J➁SK53J➁
SK53J➁➂SK53J➁➂
SK54J1SK54J1RSK54J➁SK54J➁
SK54J➁➂SK54J➁➂
SK55J1SK55J1RSK55J➁SK55J➁
SK55J➁➂SK55J➁➂
SK56J1SK56J1RSK56J➁SK56J➁
SK56J➁➂SK56J➁➂
SK57J1SK57J1RSK57J➁SK57J➁
SK57J➁➂SK57J➁➂
SK59J1SK59J1RSK59J➁SK59J➁
SK59J➁➂SK59J➁➂
SK501J1SK501J1RSK501J➁SK501J➁
SK501J➁➂SK501J➁➂
SK502J1SK502J1RSK502J➁SK502J➁
SK502J➁➂SK502J➁➂
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: SK43J35FR+H2(2KA1) = SK43J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table at right.EXAMPLE: SK43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = SK43J37.
➂ Add the color as chosen from knob color table on page 91.EXAMPLE: SK43J35➂ with a green gloved hand knob = SK43J35FG.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED usered knob) or use a clear kob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage DescriptionVoltage
AssemblyCode
SeparateLight ModuleType Number
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3131LR31LG31LY
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3232LR32LG32LY
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
18 Vac-dc Resistor 33 KM33
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3535LR35LG35LY
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
32 Vac-dc Resistor 23 KM23
48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3636LR36LG36LY
KM36KM36LRKM36LGKM36LY
60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3737LR37LG37LY
KM37KM37LRKM37LGKM37LY
For additional product information and accessoriesSee Page 92
OR
OR
OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
93
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type SK43J1 Form Y178.
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Two Color Selector Switch
Used to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illumi-nated operators.
Knob Factory AssembledForm Number
Standard Y178
Gloved Hand Y1781
Voltage Assembly Codes (Con’t.)
Voltage DescriptionVoltage
AssemblyCode
SeparateLight ModuleType Number
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
21
F1
KM2KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc120 Vac Only120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
LED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
3811
38LR38LG38LY
KM38KM11
KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz Transformer 3 KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz220-240 V 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformer
Flashing
47
F7
KM4KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
2512
KM25KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer 8 KM8
380 Vac-dc Neon
13 KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
514
KM5KM14
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon
Transformer156
KM15KM6
Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED 1 — Contact Closed 0 — Contact Open
ContactBlock
Position
QuantityandType
Mounton
Side
Center Center Center Center Center Center Center Center Center
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
Top View
KA1KA3
KA1#2
KA3#2 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
KA2 KA2#2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
KA1KA3
KA1#1
KA3#1
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
KA2 KA2#1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
CAM
B C D E F G J L M
Illuminated Operators Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return
➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
SK42J1SK42J1RSK42J
➁
SK42J
➁
SK42J
➁➂
SK42J
➁➂
SK43J1SK43J1RSK43J
➁
SK43J
➁
SK43J
➁➂
SK43J
➁➂
SK44J1SK44J1RSK44J
➁
SK44J
➁
SK44J
➁➂
SK44J
➁➂
SK45J1SK45J1RSK45J
➁
SK45J
➁
SK45J
➁➂
SK45J
➁➂
SK46J1SK46J1RSK46J
➁
SK46J
➁
SK46J
➁➂
SK46J
➁➂
SK47J1SK47J1RSK47J
➁
SK47J
➁
SK47J
➁➂
SK47J
➁➂
SK49J1SK49J1RSK49J
➁
SK49J
➁
SK49J
➁➂
SK49J
➁➂
SK401J1SK401J1RSK401J
➁
SK401J
➁
SK401J
➁➂
SK401J
➁➂
SK402J1SK402J1RSK402J
➁
SK402J
➁
SK402J
➁➂
SK402J
➁➂
Spring Return Left
To Center
➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
SK62J1SK62J1RSK62J
➁
SK62J
➁
SK62J
➁➂
SK62J
➁➂
SK63J1SK63J1RSK63J
➁
SK63J
➁
SK63J
➁➂
SK63J
➁➂
SK64J1SK64J1RSK64J
➁
SK64J
➁
SK64J
➁➂
SK64J
➁➂
SK65J1SK65J1RSK65J
➁
SK65J
➁
SK65J
➁➂
SK65J
➁➂
SK66J1SK66J1RSK66J
➁
SK66J
➁
SK66J
➁➂
SK66J
➁➂
SK67J1SK67J1RSK67J
➁
SK67J
➁
SK67J
➁➂
SK67J
➁➂
SK69J1SK69J1RSK69J
➁
SK69J
➁
SK69J
➁➂
SK69J
➁➂
SK601J1SK601J1RSK601J
➁
SK601J
➁
SK601J
➁➂
SK601J
➁➂
SK602J1SK602J1RSK602J
➁
SK602J
➁
SK602J
➁➂
SK602J
➁➂
Spring Return
Right To Center
➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
SK72J1SK72J1RSK72J
➁
SK72J
➁
SK72J
➁➂
SK72J
➁➂
SK73J1SK73J1RSK73J
➁
SK73J
➁
SK73J
➁➂
SK73J
➁➂
SK74J1SK74J1RSK74J
➁
SK74J
➁
SK74J
➁➂
SK74J
➁➂
SK75J1SK75J1RSK75J
➁
SK75J
➁
SK75J
➁➂
SK75J
➁➂
SK76J1SK76J1RSK76J
➁
SK76J
➁
SK76J
➁➂
SK76J
➁➂
SK77J1SK77J1RSK77J
➁
SK77J
➁
SK77J
➁➂
SK77J
➁➂
SK79J1SK79J1RSK79J
➁
SK79J
➁
SK79J
➁➂
SK79J
➁➂
SK701J1SK701J1RSK701J
➁
SK701J
➁
SK701J
➁➂
SK701J
➁➂
SK702J1SK702J1RSK702J
➁
SK702J
➁
SK702J
➁➂
SK702J
➁➂
Spring Return
Both Sides To Center
➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWith Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 HzWithout Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED
➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor
➄
SK52J1SK52J1RSK52J
➁
SK52J
➁
SK52J
➁➂
SK52J
➁➂
SK53J1SK53J1RSK53J
➁
SK53J
➁
SK53J
➁➂
SK53J
➁➂
SK54J1SK54J1RSK54J
➁
SK54J
➁
SK54J
➁➂
SK54J
➁➂
SK55J1SK55J1RSK55J
➁
SK55J
➁
SK55J
➁➂
SK55J
➁➂
SK56J1SK56J1RSK56J
➁
SK56J
➁
SK56J
➁➂SK56J➁➂
SK57J1SK57J1RSK57J➁SK57J➁
SK57J➁➂SK57J➁➂
SK59J1SK59J1RSK59J➁SK59J➁
SK59J➁➂SK59J➁➂
SK501J1SK501J1RSK501J➁SK501J➁
SK501J➁➂SK501J➁➂
SK502J1SK502J1RSK502J➁SK502J➁
SK502J➁➂SK502J➁➂
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator typenumber.EXAMPLE: SK43J35FR+H2(2KA1) = SK43J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table at right.EXAMPLE: SK43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = SK43J37.
➂ Add the color as chosen from knob color table on page 91.EXAMPLE: SK43J35➂ with a green gloved hand knob = SK43J35FG.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED usered knob) or use a clear kob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage DescriptionVoltage
AssemblyCode
SeparateLight ModuleType Number
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3131LR31LG31LY
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3232LR32LG32LY
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
18 Vac-dc Resistor 33 KM33
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3535LR35LG35LY
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
32 Vac-dc Resistor 23 KM23
48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3636LR36LG36LY
KM36KM36LRKM36LGKM36LY
60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
3737LR37LG37LY
KM37KM37LRKM37LGKM37LY
For additional product information and accessoriesSee Page 92
OR
OR
OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches and Potentiometers
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved94
11/97
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type num-ber.EXAMPLE: SKS88FB + H13(KA1-SIDE 2) = SKS88FBH13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.EXAMPLE: SKS88➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS88FG.
➂ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Voltage Assembly Code Table on page 93.EXAMPLE: SK88J➂ with a 60 Vac-Vdc voltage = SK88J37.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED usered knob) or use a clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages, use clear knobs only.
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 4 Position Selector Switch Oper-ators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted. For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED
1 — Contact Closed
0 — Contact Open
Contact Block Position Quantity and Type Mount on Side
1 0 0 0
Top View
KA1
KA3
KA1#2
KA3#2
KA2KA2#2 0 0 1 0
KA1
KA3
KA1#1
KA3#1 0 0 0 1
KA2KA2#1 0 1 0 0
Non-Illuminated Operators Cam Type
Manual Return Operator Only ➀ Without Knob With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
HHH
SKS88SKS88BSKS88➁
Spring Return From Left Spring Return From Right Maintained in the Two Mid Positions Operator Only ➀ Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
HHH
SKS89SKS89BSKS89➁
Illuminated Operators
Manual Return ➀ Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Without Knob and With Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄ With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
HHHHHH
SK88J1SK88J1RSK88J➂SK88J➂
SK88J➂➁SK88J➂➁
Spring Return From Left Spring Return From Right Maintained in the Two Mid Positions Operator Only ➀ Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄ With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
HHHHHH
SK89J1SK89J1RSK89J➂SK89J➂
SK89J➂➁SK89J➂➁
i
Side 2Side 1
Operator LocatingNotch
Voltage Assembly Codes See Page 93
➅ The dial plate only is Class 9001 Type SKN905.➈ For use with 9050 Type T.♦ Potentiometer shaft diameter = 1/4" (6 mm), length = 7/8" (22 mm).Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Marked.
Black and orange are opaque and for use on non-illuminated operators only.
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
Potentiometer♦ (with Dial Plate ➅)Watts Description Type
2
Operator only – Single Pot Operator with Single Pot Operator only – Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot
SK-20SK-21 ➆SK-22SK-23 ➇
➆ ➇ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.Example: Type SK2105 or SK2385
Suffix➆
Ohms Suffix➆
Ohms Suffix➆
Ohms Suffix➇
Ohms
Front Rear
01023803040532390633
50 K100 K200 K250 K500 K
1000 K1500 K2000 K2500 K3500 K
070840093510361112
500010 K15 K25 K35 K50 K75 K
100 K250 K
1337141516
17➈
500 K750 K
1.0 Meg2.5 Meg5.0 Meg5.0 Meg
8283858889
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
Selector Switch Knobs
ColorStandard
Knob GlovedHand Knob
CoinOperated
➁KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type➁
KnobCode
Type
BlackRed
GreenYellowOrange
BlueWhiteAmberClear
BRGYSLWAC
B11 R8G8Y8
S11 L8W8A8C8
FBFRFGFYFSFLFWFAFC
B25 R24G24Y24
S25 L24W24A24C24
TBTRTGTY–
TL––
TC
B18 R16G16Y16
–L16
––
C16
OR
OR
OR
OR
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Pilot Lights
95© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Pilot Lights – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate Not Included.
Description Voltage Style
With Red Fresnel Color
Cap
With Green Fresnel Color
Cap
With Other Color Cap
Without Color Cap
StandardPilot Light
(Plastic fresnel color cap shown)
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SKP1R31 SKP1G31 SKP1➁ SKP1
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SKP7R31 SKP7G31 SKP7➁ SKP7
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage SKP35R31 SKP35G31 SKP35➁ SKP35
For other voltagessee Table ➀
Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂ SKP➀R31 SKP➀G31 SKP➀➁ SKP➀
Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃ SKP➀R31 SKP➀G31 SKP➀➁ SKP➀
Push-To-TestPilot Light
(Plastic fresnel color cap shown)
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SKT1R31 SKT1G31 SKT1➁ SKT1
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer SKT7R31 SKT7G31 SKT7➁ SKT7
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage SKT35R31 SKT35G31 SKT35➁ SKT35
For other voltagessee Table ➀
Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂ SKT➀R31 SKT➀G31 SKT➀➁ SKT➀
Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃ SKT➀R31 SKT➀G31 SKT➀➁ SKT➀
Remote TestPilot Light
(Plastic fresnel color cap shown)
120 Vac Only Resistor ➄ SKTR38R31 SKTR38G31 SKTR38➁ SKTR38
24-28 Vac Only Full Voltage ➄ SKTR35R31 SKTR35G31 SKTR35➁ SKTR35
For other voltagessee Tables ➀➁➄ Full Voltage or Resistor➄ SKTR➀R31 SKTR➀➄G31 SKTR➀➁➄ SKTR➀
Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits(NEMA 4X)
Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal en-ergy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous at-mosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.These pilot lights are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable ap-proved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2). These pi-lot lights are Factory Mutual (FM approved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.These pilot lights are fully encapsulated — there are no replaceable parts — except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates as shown on pages 100 and 101
KP44R KP44G
KP44Y(YellowColorCap)
–
Operating Volt-age Range Nominal Current
V max = 32 VI max = 165 mA
20-30 Vac/dc 25 mA
Typical Push-To-Test Wiring Diagram
Typical Remote Test Pilot Light Wiring Diagram
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 96Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
R
M
M O.L.
L2
321
L1
STOPSTART
L2
C
Test
L1
M
STOP
LSI
M3
(TEST) C
(TEST) C L2
L2
L1(SIG)
CR
M2
M1
L2(TEST) C
START
TEST BUTTONL1 L2
L1(SIG)
L1(SIG)
➀ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table, page 93.EXAMPLE: SKT➀R31 with a 60Vac red LED voltage = SKT37LRR31.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table below.EXAMPLE: SKP1➁ with a blue fresnel cap = SKP1L31.
➂ The color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED use agreen color cap) or use a clear cap.
➃ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.➄ Use only full voltage or resistor voltage assembly codes on remote test pilot lights. Do not
choose LED, or neon transformer codes. For AC use only.
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101Light Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Color Caps
Color
➁ PlasticFresnel
➁ PlasticDomed
AmberBlueClearGreenRed
WhiteYellow
A31L31C31G31R31W31Y31
A9L9C9G9R9W9Y9
Voltage Assembly Codes See Page 93
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX and T - 30 mmLight Modules
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved96
11/97
Standard Light Modules for Types K, SK,. and KX Control Units ➃
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.• Neon type light modules — use CLEAR color caps only.• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
Shallow Depth Light Modules For Types K and SK Control UnitsFor use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Reduces the depth of illuminated push buttons with contact blocks by over 33%.• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
➀ 9001 K, SK, KX.➁ Do not use on any remote test version pilot light.➂ LED lamps shown here will also function in Class 9001 Type J pilot lights.➃ For Series A through F light modules – see page 106.➄ All light modules with a LED above 12 V use a 14 V Bipolar LED.➅ 9001K, SK, T
Voltage Description
For UseWith Single Lamp Ill.
Operators as Indicated➀
Light Module
Type No. ➄
Voltage Assembly
CodeRating
Replacement Lamps ➂ ➃
LampNumber(ANSI)
Lamp PartNumber ➄
6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc6 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
AllAll Except ➁All Except ➁All Except ➁
KM31KM31LRKM31LGKM31LY
3131LR31LG31LY
0.9 VA0.65 VA0.65 VA0.65 VA
755 2550101020650880520165088052036508805202
12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc12-14 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
AllAll Except ➁ All Except ➁All Except ➁
KM32KM32LRKM32LGKM32LY
3232LR32LG32LY
1.2 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA
756 2550101037650880520165088052036508805202
18 Vac-dc Resistor All KM33 33 1.4 VA 756 2550101037
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
AllAll Except ➁ All Except ➁ All Except ➁
KM35KM35LRKM35LGKM35LY
3535LR35LG35LY
1.2 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA
757 2550101002650880520465088052066508805205
32 Vac-dc Resistor All KM23 23 2.5 VA 757 2550101002
48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
AllAll Except ➁All Except ➁ All Except ➁
KM36KM36LRKM36LGKM36LY
3636LR36LG36LY
2.6 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA
48MB 2550101025650880520465088052066508805205
60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
AllAll Except ➁All Except ➁ All Except ➁
KM37KM37LRKM37LGKM37LY
3737LR37LG37LY
3.0 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA0.50 VA
60MB 2550101026650880520465088052066508805205
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformerFlashing
All Except ➁ All Except ➁ All Except ➁
KM2KM1KMF1
21F1
2.2 VA2.4 VA0.85 VA
1490755267
255010100325501010202550101036
120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc
ResistorFull VoltageNeonLED RedLED GreenLED Yellow
AllAllAll Except ➁All Except ➁All Except ➁All Except ➁
KM38KM38KM11KM38LRKM38LGKM38LY
38381138LR38LG38LY
3.0 VA3.0 VA0.2 VA4.0 VA4.0 VA4.0 VA
120MB120MBNE51H
255010102725501010272550101013650880520465088052066508805205
208-220 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except ➁ KM3 3 2.5 VA 755 2550101020
220-240 V, 25-30 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformerFlashing
All Except ➁ All Except ➁ All Except ➁
KM4KM7KMF7
47F7
2.2 VA2.0 VA2.0 VA
1490755267
255010100325501010202550101036
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
All Except ➁ All Except ➁ and KX
KM25KM12
2512
6.0 VA0.3 VA
120MBNE51H
25501010272550101013
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except ➁ KM8 8 2.4 VA 755 2550101020
380 Vac-dc Neon All Except ➁ and KX KM13 13 0.4 VA NE51H 2550101013
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
All Except ➁ All Except ➁ and KX
KM5KM14
514
2.8 VA0.5 VA
755NE51H
25501010202550101013
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
NeonTransformer
All Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁
KM15KM6
156
0.6 VA2.5 VA
NE51H755
25501010132550101020
Replacement lamps for Series G 120Vac LED Light Modules➂
Voltage Description Lamp Part Number
120 Vac Only LED Red 6508805207
120 Vac Only LED Green 6508805209
120 Vac Only LED Yellow 6508805208
Voltage DescriptionFor Use With Single
Lamp Ill. Operators as Indicated ➅
Light Module Type No. ➄
Voltage Assembly
CodeRating
Replacement Lamps ➂ ➃
Lamp Number(ANSI)
Lamp PartNumber ➄
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
All Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KX
KM55KM55LRKM55LGKM55LY
5555LR55LG55LY
1.2 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA
757 2550101002650880520465088052066508805205
110-120 Vac-dc110-120 Vac-dc110-120 Vac-dc110-120 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
All Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁ and KX
KM58KM58LRKM58LGKM58LY
5858LR58LG58LY
3.0 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA
120MB 2550101027650880520465088052066508805205
2.78 in70.61 mm
1.75 in44.45 mm
StandardDuty
ShallowDepth
1.8948.01
1.8747.50
1.1228.45
1.7343.94
1.8747.50
Side View Top View
Side Viewshown with 9001 KA contact block
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Contact Blocks
97© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K orSKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For se-quencing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.
Standard Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
(Clear Cover)
KA1
(Green Cover)
KA2
(Red Cover)
KA3
(Clear Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA4
(Red Cover)
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA5
(Green Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA6
Additional Circuit Arrangements AvailableSequencing N.O. Contact of
KA4 closes beforeN.O. Contact on
KA1 KA4 KA1
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA1
Overlapping N.O. Contact of
KA4 closesbefore N.C.
Contact of KA5Opens
KA4 KA5
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA5
Minimum order quantity is 25.
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks, But Provide:• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue connectors• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep vs. 0.97" deep
on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89. • Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 107Maximum Block Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 103
Symbol
Contact BlocksWith Binder Head Screws
(not Fingersafe)
Gold Flashed ContactsWith Standard
Pressure Wire Terminals
Type Quantity Type
KA21 25-Up KA31
KA22 25-Up KA32
KA23 25-Up KA33
N.O. EarlyClosing
KA24 25-Up KA34
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA25 25-Up KA35
Symbol Type Symbol Type
KA1G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA4G
KA2GN.C. Contact Late Opening
KA5G
KA3G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA6G
Symbol Type
KA12
KA13
Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts – Types KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
Volts
AC
Volts
DC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600)35% Power Factor Resistive 75%
Power FactorMake, Break
and ContinuousAmperes
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type P600)
Make Break ContinuousCarryingAmperes
Make and Break Continuous
CarryingAmperes
Amperes VA Amperes VA KA1 KA2KA3 KA4 KA5
KA6
120240480600
60301512
7200720072007200
6.03.01.51.2
720720720720
10101010
10101010
125250600
1.10.550.2
1.10.550.2
1.1––
1.10.550.2
101010
The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are Fingersafe contact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminal screws. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the wiping action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will accept up to 2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA3, KA31, and KA33 NC contacts are direct opening.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmReed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved98
11/97
In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explosion-proofequipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control stations. It can savemoney to know what type of hazardous location exists. If you're not surewhat type of hazardous location exists, the “Summary of Classification”Chart may help. If not, contact your local electrical inspector. When youknow what class, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in the lowerlefthand corner of this page for what Square D has to offer.
① An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or anintrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardousarea to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system,any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can beused. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light,may be used.
➁ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Divi-sion 2 hazardous locations.1. Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.2. All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2
areas. 3. Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules
other than the transformer type. 4. The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.
➂ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.
For ➁ and ➂: UL Listed: File E10054(N), CCN NOIV.For : Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.
Summary Of Classification Chart
Class Division Group
I. Gas 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
B. Location adjacent to Division 1 location.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases Containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
II. Dust 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
E. Conductive and Combustible Dust (Resistivity <105 ohms/cm)
F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity >102 ohm/cm but ≤ 108ohm/cm)
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
III. Fibers1. Production Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
2. Handling and Storage Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
ForUse
Class Division Group(s)
I 1 A 1. Intrinsically Safe System ①
I 1 B, C, D 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System ①
I 2 A1.
2.
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
I 2 B, C, D
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
II 1 E, F, G 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System ①
II 2 E, F
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
II 2 G
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①
III 1, 2 –
1.2.
3.
9001 BR Station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①
All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire.
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per opera-tor is as indicated on page 103 for standard contact blocks, except:• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M”
mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tan-dem.
• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (ei-ther side), maximum 2 in tandem.
• On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blockson one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters throughNEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.➃ Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor.➄ Inductive and Resistive Ratings.
Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact BlocksSuitable for use on low energy level circuits
Description Symbol Type
KA41
KA42
KA43
KA44
KA45
Max. Volts AC/DCMaximum Load
Res. Ind. Cont.32/30
120/1000.25 A 8 VA
0.10 A3 VA
0.5 A0.5 A
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
KA51
KA52
KA53
KA54
KA55
Volts
AC NEMA Type C300 ➃Make Break Continuous
Carrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
120240
10.005.00
12001200
1.0000.500
120120
3.03.0
Volts
DC NEMA Type Q150 ➄Make Break Continuous
Carrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
115 0.50 58 0.50 58 3.0
Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits — NEMA Type 4XIntrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal en-
ergy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous at-mosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.
Listed below are pilot lights that are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2. These pilot lights are Factory Mutual FM# J.I. OH4A2,AX,3610 (FM ap-proved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.
These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates as shown on pages 100 and 101.
OperatingVoltageRange
NominalCurrent
LensColor Type
V max. = 32 V 20-30 VAC/DC 25 mA
RedGreenYellow
KP44RKP44GKP44YI max. = 165 mA
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK
"H" Numbers
99© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
The design of the Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks allowsthem to be mounted side by side and/or in tandem.
The system illustrated below has been set up to enable an op-erator and a particular arrangement of contact blocks to bespecified by a single type number. Operators and contactblocks will be shipped completely assembled.
EXAMPLE: A Type KR1B push button with 2 Type KA1 contactblocks would be Class 9001 Type KR1BH2.
For Types K and SK
Suffix No.(Add to
OperatorType No.)
Positions
1 2 3 4 5 6
H1H2H3H4H5H6H7H8H9
H10H11H12H13H14H15H16H17H18H19
KA1KA1KA1KA1KA2KA3KA2KA3KA4KA4KA1KA2
KA2KA2KA1KA3KA1
KA1KA1KA1
KA2KA3KA1KA5KA1KA3KA1KA3KA3KA3KA1KA1KA1
KA1KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2KA3KA1
KA1
KA1KA3
KA3
KA1KA3KA1
H21 KA2 KA3
H23H24H25H26H27H28H29
KA1KA1KA5KA1KA3KA1KA1
KA1KA2KA3KA1KA3KA3KA4
KA1
KA4KA3
KA1
KA1
KA5
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
H31H32H33H34
KA2
KA1KA5
KA2KA1KA3KA1
KA1
KA3KA1
H36H37H38H39H40H41H42H43H44H45H46H47H48
KA3KA3KA5KA1KA3KA1KA2KA3KA1KA2KA5KA1
KA2KA2KA2KA1KA1KA2KA1KA2KA2KA2KA2KA3KA1
KA3
KA2KA2
KA3
KA3KA4
KA2KA3KA4KA2KA2
KA3KA2KA2KA5KA4
KA3 KA3
H50H51H52H53H54H55H56H57H58H59H60H61H62H63H64
KA5KA5KA3KA4KA4KA1KA2KA5
KA1KA1KA2KA1KA1KA3
KA3KA3KA1KA2KA5KA2KA2KA4KA5KA2KA2KA2KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA2KA2KA2
KA1KA1KA5KA3KA3KA2
KA3KA4
KA2
KA5
KA1
KA3
Top View
“H” Numbers not shown in their sequence are no longer used.
Suffix No.(Add to
OperatorType No.)
Positions
1 2 3 4 5 6
H66 KA3 KA1 KA3 KA1
H71H72H73H74H75H76H77H78H79H80H81
KA3KA3KA1KA1KA1KA1KA1KA1KA3KA4KA1
KA3KA5KA1KA2KA3KA2
KA2KA3KA4KA1
KA3
KA3KA5KA3KA2KA1
KA5KA2
KA3
KA5KA3KA2
KA5KA5KA5KA3
KA3KA2
H82H83
KA12KA35
KA12KA33
KA13 KA13
H86H87
KA3KA3
KA2KA2
KA3KA3 KA2 KA3
H89H90H91H92H93H94H95
KA3KA1KA1KA1KA3KA1KA2
KA1KA1KA2KA2KA2KA1KA1
KA3KA1KA3KA3KA1
KA3KA2KA2KA5KA3
KA3
KA3KA5KA3
KA3KA3
H97H98H99H100
KA1KA1KA2KA1
KA3KA1KA2KA3
KA1KA2KA1
KA2KA2KA2KA2
KA2KA2
H101H102H103H104H105H106H107
KA2KA1KA1KA1KA31KA31KA3
KA2KA3KA1KA1
KA31KA2
KA2
KA3KA1
KA5
KA2KA3KA3KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
H109H110H111H112H113H114
KA3KA3KA4KA33KA1KA21
KA3KA3KA4KA33KA1
KA2KA3KA4
KA5
KA3KA5
KA3 KA3
H115H116H117H118H119H120H121H122
KA3KA3KA2KA1KA1KA3KA3KA1
KA1KA1KA3KA5KA1KA4KA3KA3
KA5KA3KA1
KA5KA3KA3
KA3KA2KA2
KA3
KA5KA5
KA2
H124H125H126H127H128H129H130H131H132H133H134H135H136H137H138H139H140H141H142H143H144H145H146H147H148H152H153H154H155H156H157H158H159
KA5KA42KA43KA41KA2KA2KA2KA2KA3KA3KA3KA3KA45KA3KA5KA44KA43KA1KA3
KA51KA53KA53KA51KA1KA53KA4KA42KA1KA1KA1KA1
KA3KA5
KA3
KA2
KA3KA2
KA45KA3KA5
KA43KA1KA1K85
KA52
KA51KA2KA52KA5KA43KA1
KA2KA1
KA3
KA2
KA3KA3KA2KA2KA2KA5KA44
KA41KA5
KA53
KA2KA1KA1KA3KA3
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA2KA2
KA44KA2
KA4
KA2
KA1
KA3KA2
KA2
KA2KA2
KA2
H161H162H163H164H165H166H167H168H170H171H172H173H174H175H176H177H178H179
KA52KA2K85K85
KA55KA22
KA54KA53KA23KA54KA1KA6KA4KA3K85
KA53
K85
KA22KA23KA22KA51KA51KA23KA51KA3KA2
KA4
KA55
KA5KA4KA4
KA1KA5
KA3
KA4
KA51
KA3KA5
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmLegend Plates
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved100
11/97
➀ Legend plate has red background with silver letters.➁ Legend plate has red background with black letters.
StandardMarkings
Plastic Legend PlatesFor Use With Types K and SK Operators
Aluminum Legend PlatesFor Use With Type K Operators
1.7" Square 21/4" Square 21/2" SquareBlack
Legend
KN200
BlackLegend
KN300
BlueLegend
KN800
Silver Legend
with Black Letters
WhiteLegend
with Black
Letters
Black Legend
with White
Letters
Silver Legend
with Black
Letters
White Legend
with Black
Letters
Black Legend
with White
Letters
Silver Legend
withBlack
Letters
White Legend
with Black
Letters
Black Legend
with White
Letters
For Push Button or Pilot Light
BlankBlank(red)StartStopOnOff
Emerg. StopForwardReverseCloseOpenDown
UpFastSlowHighLowInch
InJogJog For.Jog Rev.LowerOut
ResetRunStart JogTestRaiseDecrease
IncreaseLeftRightCycle StartFeed StartCycle Stop
Motor RunMotor StopPower OnPull To StartPush To Stop
KN200SPKN200RP ➁KN201SPKN202RP ➁KN203SPKN204RP ➁
KN205RP ➁KN206SPKN207SPKN208SPKN209SPKN210SP
KN211SPKN212SPKN213SPKN214SPKN215SPKN216SP
KN217SPKN218SPKN219SPKN220SPKN221SPKN222SP
KN223SPKN224SPKN225SPKN226SPKN227SPKN228SP
KN229SPKN230SPKN231SPKN232SPKN233SPKN234SP
KN236SPKN237SPKN238SP
N/A
KN200WPKN200RP ➁KN201WPKN202RP ➁KN203WPKN204RP ➁
KN205RP ➁KN206WPKN207WPKN208WPKN209WPKN210WP
KN211WPKN212WPKN213WPKN214WPKN215WPKN216WP
KN217WPKN218WPKN219WPKN220WPKN221WPKN222WP
KN223WPKN224WPKN225WPKN226WPKN227WPKN228WP
KN229WPKN230WPKN231WPKN232WPKN233WPKN234WP
KN236WPKN237WPKN238WP
N/A
KN200BPKN200RP ➁KN201BPKN202RP ➁KN203BPKN204RP ➁
KN205RP ➁KN206BPKN207BPKN208BPKN209BPKN210BP
KN211BPKN212BPKN213BPKN214BPKN215BPKN216BP
KN217BPKN218BPKN219BPKN220BPKN221BPKN222BP
KN223BPKN224BPKN225BPKN226BPKN227BPKN228BP
KN229BPKN230BPKN231BPKN232BPKN233BPKN234BP
KN236BPKN237BPKN238BP
N/A
KN100SPKN100RP ➁KN101SPKN102RP ➁KN103SPKN104RP ➁
KN105RP ➁KN106SPKN107SPKN108SPKN109SPKN110SP
KN111SPKN112SPKN113SPKN114SPKN115SPKN116SP
KN117SPKN118SPKN119SPKN120SPKN121SPKN122SP
KN123SPKN124SPKN125SPKN126SPKN127SPKN128SP
KN129SPKN130SPKN131SPKN132SPKN133SPKN134SP
KN136SPKN137SPKN138SP
KN179SP
KN100WPKN100RP ➁KN101WPKN102RP ➁KN103WPKN104RP ➁
KN105RP ➁KN106WPKN107WPKN108WPKN109WPKN110WP
KN111WPKN112WPKN113WPKN114WPKN115WPKN116WP
KN117WPKN118WPKN119WPKN120WPKN121WPKN122WP
KN123WPKN124WPKN125WPKN126WPKN127WPKN128WP
KN129WPKN130WPKN131WPKN132WPKN133WPKN134WP
KN136WPKN137WPKN138WP
KN179WP
KN100BPKN100RP ➁KN101BPKN102RP ➁KN103BPKN104RP ➁
KN105RP ➁KN106BPKN107BPKN108BPKN109BPKN110BP
KN111BPKN112BPKN113BPKN114BPKN115BPKN116BP
KN117BPKN118BPKN119BPKN120BPKN121BPKN122BP
KN123BPKN124BPKN125BPKN126BPKN127BPKN128BP
KN129BPKN130BPKN131BPKN132BPKN133BPKN134BP
KN136BPKN137BPKN138BP
KN179BP
KN700SPKN700RP ➁KN701SPKN702RP ➁KN703SPKN704RP ➁
KN705RP ➁KN706SPKN707SPKN708SPKN709SPKN710SP
KN711SPKN712SPKN713SPKN714SPKN715SPKN716SP
KN717SPKN718SPKN719SPKN720SPKN721SPKN722SP
KN723SPKN724SPKN725SPKN726SPKN727SPKN728SP
KN729SPKN730SPKN731SPKN732SPKN733SPKN734SP
KN736SPKN737SPKN738SP
KN779SP
KN700WPKN700RP ➁KN701WPKN702RP ➁KN703WPKN704RP ➁
KN705RP ➁KN706WPKN707WPKN708WPKN709WPKN710WP
KN711WPKN712WPKN713WPKN714WPKN715WPKN716WP
KN717WPKN718WPKN719WPKN720WPKN721WPKN722WP
KN723WPKN724WPKN725WPKN726WPKN727WPKN728WP
KN729WPKN730WPKN731WPKN732WPKN733WPKN734WP
KN736WPKN737WPKN738WP
KN779WP
KN700BPKN700RP ➁KN701BPKN702RP ➁KN703BPKN704RP ➁
KN705RP ➁KN706BPKN707BPKN708BPKN709BPKN710BP
KN711BPKN712BPKN713BPKN714BPKN715BPKN716BP
KN717BPKN718BPKN719BPKN720BPKN721BPKN722BP
KN723BPKN724BPKN725BPKN726BPKN727BPKN728BP
KN729BPKN730BPKN731BPKN732BPKN733BPKN734BP
KN736BPKN737BPKN738BP
KN779BP
KN200KN200R ➀KN201KN202 ➀KN203KN204 ➀
KN205 ➀KN206KN207KN208KN209KN210
KN211KN212KN213KN214KN215KN216
KN217KN218KN219KN220KN221KN222
KN223KN224KN225KN226KN227KN228
KN229KN230KN231KN232KN233KN234
KN236KN237KN238
N/A
KN300KN300R ➀KN301KN302 ➀KN303KN304 ➀
KN305 ➀KN306KN307KN308KN309KN310
KN311KN312KN313KN314KN315KN316
KN317KN318KN319KN320KN321KN322
KN323KN324KN325KN326KN327KN328
KN329KN330KN331KN332KN333KN334
KN336KN337KN338
KN379
KN800KN800R ➀KN801KN802 ➀KN803KN804 ➀
KN805 ➀KN806KN807KN808KN809KN810
KN811KN812KN813KN814KN815KN816
KN817KN818KN819KN820KN821KN822
KN823KN824KN825KN826KN827KN828
KN829KN830KN831KN832KN833KN834
KN836KN837KN838
N/A
For Selector Switch or Selector Push Button
For.-Rev.Hand-Auto.High-LowJog-RunMan.-Auto.Off-On
On-OffOpen-CloseRaise-LowerRun-JogSlow-FastStart-Stop
Up-DownLow-HighStop-StartLeft-RightOn-AutoAuto-Off-Hand
For.-Off-Rev.Hand-Off-Auto.Man.-Off-Auto.Open-Off-CloseUp-Off-DownLow-Off-High
Jog-Stop-RunHigh-Low-OffHigh-Off-LowAuto-Man.-Off
KN239SPKN240SPKN241SPKN242SPKN243SPKN244SP
KN245SPKN246SPKN247SPKN248SPKN250SPKN251SP
KN253SPKN254SPKN255SPKN256SPKN276SPKN258SP
KN259SPKN260SPKN262SPKN263SPKN264SPKN265SP
KN267SPKN270SPKN277SPKN278SP
KN239WPKN240WPKN241WPKN242WPKN243WPKN244WP
KN245WPKN246WPKN247WPKN248WPKN250WPKN251WP
KN253WPKN254WPKN255WPKN256WPKN276WPKN258WP
KN259WPKN260WPKN262WPKN263WPKN264WPKN265WP
KN267WPKN270WPKN277WPKN278WP
KN239BPKN240BPKN241BPKN242BPKN243BPKN244BP
KN245BPKN246BPKN247BPKN248BPKN250BPKN251BP
KN253BPKN254BPKN255BPKN256BPKN276BPKN258BP
KN259BPKN260BPKN262BPKN263BPKN264BPKN265BP
KN267BPKN270BPKN277BPKN278BP
KN139SPKN140SPKN141SPKN142SPKN143SPKN144SP
KN145SPKN146SPKN147SPKN148SPKN150SPKN151SP
KN153SPKN154SPKN155SPKN156SPKN176SPKN158SP
KN159SPKN160SPKN162SPKN163SPKN164SPKN165SP
KN167SPKN170SPKN177SPKN178SP
KN139WPKN140WPKN141WPKN142WPKN143WPKN144WP
KN145WPKN146WPKN147WPKN148WPKN150WPKN151WP
KN153WPKN154WPKN155WPKN156WPKN176WPKN158WP
KN159WPKN160WPKN162WPKN163WPKN164WPKN165WP
KN167WPKN170WPKN177WPKN178WP
KN139BPKN140BPKN141BPKN142BPKN143BPKN144BP
KN145BPKN146BPKN147BPKN148BPKN150BPKN151BP
KN153BPKN154BPKN155BPKN156BPKN176BPKN158BP
KN159BPKN160BPKN162BPKN163BPKN164BPKN165BP
KN167BPKN170BPKN177BPKN178BP
KN739SPKN740SPKN741SPKN742SPKN743SPKN744SP
KN745SPKN746SPKN747SPKN748SPKN750SPKN751SP
KN753SPKN754SPKN755SPKN756SPKN776SPKN758SP
KN759SPKN760SPKN762SPKN763SPKN764SPKN765SP
KN767SPKN770SPKN777SPKN778SP
KN739WPKN740WPKN741WPKN742WPKN743WPKN744WP
KN745WPKN746WPKN747WPKN748WPKN750WPKN751WP
KN753WPKN754WPKN755WPKN756WPKN776WPKN758WP
KN759WPKN760WPKN762WPKN763WPKN764WPKN765WP
KN767WPKN770WPKN777WPKN778WP
KN739BPKN740BPKN741BPKN742BPKN743BPKN744BP
KN745BPKN746BPKN747BPKN748BPKN750BPKN751BP
KN753BPKN754BPKN755BPKN756BPKN776BPKN758BP
KN759BPKN760BPKN762BPKN763BPKN764BPKN765BP
KN767BPKN770BPKN777BPKN778BP
KN239KN240KN241KN242KN243KN244
KN245KN246KN247KN248KN250KN251
KN253KN254KN255KN256KN276KN258
KN259KN260KN262KN263KN264KN265
KN267KN270KN277KN278
KN339KN340KN341KN342KN343KN344
KN345KN346KN347KN348KN350KN351
KN353KN354KN355KN356KN376KN358
KN359KN360KN362KN363KN364KN365
KN367KN370KN377KN378
KN839KN840KN841KN842KN843KN844
KN845KN846KN847KN848KN850KN851
KN853KN854KN855KN856KN876KN858
KN859KN860KN862KN863KN864KN865
KN867KN870KN877KN878
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Legend Plate Order Information
101© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Other colors available:
The maximum number of characters and lines given above is a practical maximum and isbased on a minimum size of characters to facilitate easy reading.
Legend Plate Description Type
KN100PPlastic
Standard Markings Select fromTable on p. 100
Special Marking(Specify Marking
Required)
Silver Field, Black Letters KN199SPWhite Field, Black Letters KN199WPRed Field, Black Letters KN199RP
Black Field, White Letters KN199BP
KN200
Standard Markings Select fromTable on p. 100
Specify Marking(Specify Marking
Required)
Black Field KN299
Red Field KN299R
KN200P(Plastic)
Standard Markings Select fromTable on p. 100
Special Marking(Specify Marking
Required)
Silver Field, Black Letters KN299SPWhite Field, Black Letters KN299WPRed Field, Black Letters KN299RP
Black Field, White Letters KN299BP
KN300
Standard Markings Select fromTable on p. 100
Special Marking(Specify Marking
Required)
Black Field KN399
Red Field KN399R
KN400Blank KN400
Any Marking (Specify Marking) KN499
KN500
Standard Markings Select fromTable Below
Special Marking(Specify Marking
Required)
Black Field KN599Green Red
Field KN519
KN600Blank Black Field
Red FieldKN600
KN600RAny Marking
(Specify Marking)Black FieldRed Field
KN699KN699R
KN700PPlastic
Standard Markings Select fromTable on p. 100
Special Marking(Specify Marking
Required)
Silver Field, Black Letters KN799SPWhite Field, Black Letters KN799WPRed Field, Black Letters KN799RP
Black Field, White Letters KN799BP
KN800
Standard Markings Select fromTable on p. 100
Special Marking(Specify Marking
Required)
Blue Field KN899
Red Field KN899R
KN900Blank KN900
Any Marking (Specify Marking) KN999
PlateColor
LetterColor
1.7 InchSquare
2.25 InchSquare
2.5 InchSquare
BlankLegendPlates
YellowGreenBlueRed
OrangeBurnt Orange
BlackWhiteWhiteWhiteWhiteBlack
KN200YPKN200GPKN200LPKN200CPKN200APKN200HP
KN100YPKN100GPKN100LPKN100CPKN100APKN100HP
KN700YPKN700GPKN700LPKN700CPKN700APKN700HP
SpecialEngravedLegendPlates
YellowGreenBlueRed
OrangeBurnt Orange
BlackWhiteWhiteWhiteWhiteBlack
KN299YPKN299GPKN299LPKN299CPKN299APKN299HP
KN199YPKN199GPKN199LPKN199CPKN199APKN199HP
KN799YPKN799GPKN799LPKN799CPKN799APKN799HP
Maximum Number of Lines and Characters for Type KN Legend Plates
Type KN100 KN200 KN300 KN400 KN500 KN600 KN700 KN800 KN900Max. No. of
Char. per Line 16 14 18 18 8per field 22 17 18 18 per
pos.
Max. No. ofLines 2 1 3 2 2
per field 4 2 2 1 per pos.
Approximate Dimensions (Inches)Type A B
KN200 31/32 15/8KN300 115/64 13/4KN500 31/32 15/8KN600 19/16 21/4
Mounting Hole For All Types K, SK, and KX Control Units
HOLE PUNCH:Use Greenlee Tool #60242 for punching mounting hole and notch.
Minimum Centerline Spacing for Type K & SK Control UnitsLegend
Plate OperatorCenterline Spacing (Inches)
A B C D E FLEGEND PLATE ORIENTATION POS #1
KN-2KN-5
Standard Push Button13/8" Dia. Mushroom 21/4" Dia. Mushroom Selector Switch Knobs
1.751.752.251.75
1.311.311.311.31
1.441.441.441.44
2.252.252.252.25
1.691.692.251.69
0.880.881.120.88
KN3
Standard Push Button13/8" Dia. Mushroom 21/4" Dia. Mushroom Selector Switch Knobs
2.002.002.252.00
1.311.311.311.31
1.441.441.441.44
2.252.252.252.25
1.751.752.251.75
0.880.881.120.88
KN4
Standard Push Button13/8" Dia. Mushroom 21/4" Dia. Mushroom Selector Switch Knobs
1.941.942.251.74
1.311.311.311.31
1.441.441.441.44
2.252.252.252.25
1.621.622.251.62
0.880.881.120.88
KN6
Standard Push Button13/8" Dia. Mushroom 21/4" Dia. Mushroom Selector Switch Knobs
2.382.382.382.38
1.621.621.621.62
1.441.441.441.44
2.252.252.252.25
2.252.252.252.25
1.121.121.121.12
LEGEND PLATE ORIENTATION POS #2
KN2KN5
Standard Push Button13/8" Dia. Mushroom 21/4" Dia. Mushroom Selector Switch Knobs
1.621.622.251.62
1.311.311.311.31
1.441.441.441.44
2.252.252.252.25
1.751.752.251.75
0.880.881.120.88
KN3
Standard Push Button13/8" Dia. Mushroom 21/4" Dia. Mushroom Selector Switch Knobs
1.751.752.251.75
1.311.311.311.31
1.441.441.441.44
2.252.252.252.25
2.002.002.252.00
0.880.881.120.88
KN4
Standard Push Button13/8" Dia. Mushroom 21/4" Dia. Mushroom Selector Switch Knobs
1.621.622.251.62
1.311.311.311.31
1.441.441.441.44
2.252.252.252.25
1.941.942.251.94
1.001.001.121.00
KN6
Standard Push Button13/8" Dia. Mushroom 21/4" Dia. Mushroom Selector Switch Knobs
2.252.252.252.25
1.311.311.311.31
1.621.621.621.62
2.382.382.382.38
2.382.382.382.38
0.880.881.120.88
Special Legend Plates x
Type KN500(For Use with DualFunction OperatorsKR6, KR7 and KR67)
TypeStandard Markings
Green Red
KN500KN501KN502
BlankStartOn
BlankStopOff
Type Black Black
KN520KN521KN522KN523KN524KN525KN526
BlankStartOnForwardUpHighOpen
BlankStopOffReverseDownLowClose
Or
D30052-287
PartMetalGroundedEnclosure
E
D
DD
A
F
B
C
1.13
1.31
Type KN200, KN300KN500, KN600
Type KN400
1 85
31
31
32
32
A
B
KN800KN100*P
KN900KN700*P
TypeType
TypeType
1.105
.833
.690Dia.1.200
sq.2.210
1
Sq.2.437
1.218
.817
.690
200Dia.200
87
87
2
2
16
4
1
1
11
11
1
43
.200
InchesMM
Dimensions
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmAccessories
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved102
11/97
t The mushroom guard has finger holes for pushpull operators. B=Black G=Green R=Red Y=Yellow R=Red Y=Yellow
Mushroom Button Guards
AluminumMushroom
Guard for 13/8"Mushroom
ButtonOperator
(KR4, KR24)
Yellow PlasticExtendedMushroomGuard for 13/8"
MushroomButtonOperators
AluminumMushroom
Guard for 21/4"Mushroom
ButtonOperator
Type Type Used On Type Used On
K48 K56 KR4, SKR4 K68 KR5
K56Mt KR8, KR9, SKR8,SKR9 K685 KR25
Padlock AttachmentsUsed On Description Type
For Type K non- illumi-nated push button — Std. or mushroom (KR4, KR5 mushroom buttons only).
Holds button in depressed position . . . and can be padlocked.
K4
Type K5For Types K and SK non-illuminated push buttons with or without protective boots.
Holds button in depressed position when padlocked.
K5
Type K97
K97
For Types K and SK non-illuminated push buttons, cover type attachment.
Attachment can be padlocked. Does not hold button in depressed position.
K6
For Types K and SK push-pull operator and illuminated push buttons.
Holds button in depressed position . . . and can be padlocked.
K62
For Types K and SK push buttons, cover type attachment.
Similar to K6 shown above EXCEPT without lockout provision and with spring loaded cover.
K60
For KR11U and KR12U .
Holds maintained button in depressed position . . . and can be padlocked.
K96
For Type KR9 & SKR9 Push-Pull operators-Non-Illuminated andIlluminated
Holds button in depressed position- Can be padlocked
K162
k Use KU27 for maintained contact push buttons.
Padlock AttachmentsUsed On Description Type
For Types K and SK selector switches (will not work with gloved hand knob) and potentiometers
Cover type attach-ment that can be padlocked to keep unauthorized personnel from tampering with the operator.
K7
For Types K and SK selector switches (will not work with gloved hand knob) and potentiometers
Same as 9001 K7 except that this lockout is spring loaded.
K107
For Types K and SK illuminated push buttons (with or without guard) and key operated push buttons
Cover type attach-ment that can be padlocked to keep unauthorized personnel from tampering with the operator.
K108
For Types K and SK illuminated push buttons (with or without guard) and key operated push buttons
Same as 9001 K108 except that this lockout is spring loaded.
K109
For Types K and SK maintained push-pull operators using 13/8" dia. mushroom buttons (-20 series as shown on Page 15-72).
Cover type attach-ment that holds mushroom button in depressed position and can be padlocked.
K110
Protective Boots
KU1 KU17 KU37 KU27
These Type KU protective boots are not required for UL Type 4 rating on the Type K operators or UL Type 4 or 4X rating on the Type SK operators. Protective boots are still recommended for very dirty environments or severe hose down. The K1 (see Page 15-73) wrench is required for installation of these boots.
For Non-IlluminatedPush Buttonsk Clear Color for Type
Color Type Standard Knob Selector Switch KU17
BlackRedBlueBrownGreenYellowClearClear(Provides Full Guard)
KU1KU2KU3KU4KU5KU6KU7KU8
Gloved Hand Cap for use on std.knob Selector Switch KU18
Standard Pilot Light and Maintained Contact Push Buttons KU27
Push-to-Test and Illuminated Push Button Without Guard KU37
Illuminated Push But. With Guard KU47
j Meets UL and NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 12 and 13.q Meets UL and NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13.
Closing Plates
Description
Round(11/2'' Dia.)
Type Type
Gray K11q K51j
ChromePlated K12q K52j
Dimensions .................................................................Page 108
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Basic Operators, Application Data
103© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
Selector Switch Angular Travel (Types K and SK)
Maximum Contact Block Usage(Includes Types K and SK)
2 blocks mounted side by side only: Any 2, 3 or 4 position springreturn selector switch (non-illuminated, illuminated or keyed).
2 blocks mounted in tandem on one side only: Any 2 operatorinterlocked push button.
2 blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks): Any selectorpush button, keyed push button, 2, 3, or 4 position maintainedselector switch (non-illuminated, illuminated or keyed), pushpull operators (non-illuminated or illuminated), joy stick, dualpush button.
3 blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks): Single mo-mentary push buttons (non-illuminated or illuminated).
Non Hazardous Locations
TypesK, SK
FileCCN
E42259NKCR
FileClass
LR254903211 03 Marking
Hazardous Locations (see page 98)
TypesK, SK
FileCCN
E10054NNOIV
FileClass
LR268173218 02 Marking
Operator Service Temperature Range:-22 °F to + 140 °F at 50% relative humidity-30 °C to + 60 °C
Environmental Ratings:Types K: The Type K (Series H) operators are UL approved
for use in Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 flat surface enclosures.
Type SK: The Type SK operators are UL approved for use inTypes 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6, 12 and 13 flat surface enclosures.
Types K, SK: For hazardous location use — see page 98.
Dimensions:Types K and SK: See pages 107-108.
Mounting Hole Dimensions:See page 101.
Minimum Centerline Spacing:Types K and SK: See page 101.
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.
.
➀ Operator can be converted to an illuminated operator by removing the liner (6509704901) and adding a light module.➁ Operator can be converted to a non-illuminated operator by adding liner (6509704901).➂ Operator includes jumper wires for push-to-test conversion.➃ These operators can be supplied with 13/8" or 21/4" dia. mushroom buttons. For 13/8": Add 20 to type number. The refers to the color chosen - see page 74, 88, or 105.
For 21/4": Add 21 to type number. The refers to the color chosen - see page 74, 88, or 105. Voids UL and NEMA Type 6 Rating.
Basic Operators(Does not include Color Caps, Mushroom Buttons, Knobs, Selector Switch Cams, Contact Blocks, Light Modules or Legend Plates)
DescriptionUL Types/NEMA Types
4, 13 4, 4X, 13
Non Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR1 SKR1
Non Illuminated Push Button (Extended Guard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR2 SKR2
Non Illuminated Push Button (No Guard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR3 SKR3
Non Illuminated Push Button (Mushroom Button/screw on). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR20 SKR20
Non Illuminated Dual Push Button (Momentary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR6 –
Non Illuminated Dual Push Button (Momentary Interlocked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR67 –
Non Illuminated Dual Push Button (Maintained Interlocked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR7 –
Momentary Pull - Maintained Neutral - Momentary Push. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR8 ➀➃ SKR8 ➀
Maintained Pull - Maintained Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR9 ➀➃ SKR9 ➀
Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard - Plastic Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K1L ➁ SK1L ➁
Illuminated Push Button and Push To Test (No Guard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K2L ➁➂ SK2L➁➂
Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard - Metal Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3L ➁ –
Standard Pilot Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KP SKP
3 Pos. Maintained Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KS4 ➀ SKS4 ➀
3 Pos. Spring Return Both Sides To Center – Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KS5 ➀ SKS5 ➀
3 Pos. Spring Return Left To Center – Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KS6 ➀ SKS6 ➀
3 Pos. Spring Return Right To Center – Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KS7 ➀ SKS7 ➀
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmApplication Data, Materials
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved104
11/97
Type K Operator Materials:Push Button and Push To Test Pilot Light(Types KR and KT)
Gasket – NitrileSeal – NitrileSeal Cap – Amorphous AcetalDecorative Ring – Polyester FilmCompensating Washer – PolypropyleneLock Ring – Amorphous NylonStem – Thermoplastic PolyesterBase Cap – Thermoplastic PolyesterKnob – PolycarbonateLiner – PolypropyleneHold Down Spring for Type K-15 – NeopreneOperator Base – ZincOperator Base (KR8) – PolyesterReturn Spring – Music Wire or Stainless Steel (KT only)Ring Nuts – Aluminum or ZincSpringkeeper – SteelLocking Thrust Washer – ZincColor Insert – Polyethylene
Selector Switch (Types KS)
Gasket – NitrileSeal – NitrileBearing Washer – Polyester FilmCompensating Washer – PolypropyleneCam Follower – Delrin 100Liner – PolypropyleneKnob – PolycarbonateCam Carrier – Amorphous NylonCam Rotor – Celenex 3300Cam Profile– Delrin 100Operator Base – ZincDetent Spring – Stainless SteelRing Nuts – Aluminum or ZincSeal keeper – Stainless SteelLocking Thrust Washer – Zinc
Pilot Light (Type KP)
Gasket – NitrileCompensating Washer – PolypropyleneLens – Glass or PolycarbonateLight Module Housing – Thermoplastic PolyesterOperator Base – ZincGlass Lens Ring – Anodized Aluminum
Contact Block And Light Module Materials:
Contact Block (Type KA)
Housing – Amorphous NylonContact Slider – Phenolic, Nylon or AcetalTerminal – SteelSaddle Clamp – SteelSpring – Stainless SteelContacts – Silver and CopperBlade – Beryllium CopperMounting Screw – SteelLabel – Paper
Type SK Operator Materials:Push Button and Push To Test Pilot Light(Types SKR and SKT)
Base – Thermoplastic PolyesterStem – Acetal (non-illuminated push button)
Thermoplastic Polyester (illuminated push buttonand push-to-test pilot light)
Seal – NitrileGasket – NitrileSpring – 302 Stainless SteelSpring Support – CRSLock Ring – NylonTrim Washer – PolypropyleneLocking Thrust Washer – Thermoplastic PolyesterRing Nut – Thermoplastic PolyesterColor Insert – Polyethylene (non-illuminated push button)Color Cap – Polycarbonate (illuminated push button and
push-to-test pilot light)Mushroom Button – Acetal (non-illuminated push button)
Polycarbonate (illuminated push button)Liner – Polypropylene (non-illuminated push button)
Selector Switch (Types SKS)
Base – Thermoplastic PolyesterSeal – NitrileGasket – NitrileSeal Keeper – 302 Stainless SteelSpring – 302 Stainless SteelCam Follower – Delrin 100Bearing Washer – Polyester FilmCam Carrier – TrogamidCam Profile – Delrin 100Liner – Polypropylene (non-illuminated only)Knob – PolycarbonateTrim Washer – PolypropyleneLocking Thrust Washer – Thermoplastic PolyesterSpring Support – CRS
Pilot Light (Type SKP)
Gasket – NitrileBase – Thermoplastic PolyesterTrim Washer – PolypropyleneLocking Thrust Washer – Thermoplastic PolyesterRing Nut – Thermoplastic PolyesterColor Cap – Polycarbonate
Light Module (Type KM)
Housing – Thermoplastic PolyesterSocket – SteelTerminal – Steel with Tin PlateSaddle Clamp – SteelTranslating Pin – PolycarbonateTransformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel, Copper,
Polyvinyl Chloride, Polytetrafluorethylene, Acetate, Paper
Lamp Spring – Tin Plated Music Wire
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Accessories
105© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
➀ Includes one each of the following color inserts: Black, Red, Green, Yellow, Orange, Blue,and White.
➁ “EMERGENCY STOP” is in raised letters and hot stamped white across the front of themushroom button.
➂ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR1U or SKR1U to forma 9001 KR4 or SKR4.
➃ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR1U or SKR1U to forma 9001 KR5 or SKR5.
➄ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR20 to form a 9001KR24 or SKR20 to form a 9001 SKR24.
➅ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR20 to form a 9001KR25 or a SKR20 to form a 9001 SKR25.
➆ These color caps are opaque and are for use on non–illuminated operators only.➇ Includes two of each of the following color inserts: Black, Red, and Green.➈ May be used on KR8 and KR9 operators. Order mushroom button and K54 adapter (no
charge) from page 106. Using the K54 adapter voids Type 6 rating.➉ Red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” marked on top of knob.
Description Color Type PackageQty.
Color inserts forKR1, KR2, KR3, SKR1,
SKR2, SKR3, KR11,KR12, SKR11, SKR12,
KRD, T, TRD
BlackBlueGray
GreenOrange
RedUniversal ➀
WhiteYellow
T6BKT6BET6GYT6GNT6OET6RDT6U
T6WHT6YW
101010101010101010
13/8'' Snap-inMushroom knob
for KR4 and SKR4 ➂
BlackBlue
GreenOrange
RedRed ➁Yellow
K16BK16LK16GK16SK16R
K16R05K16Y
1111111
21/4" Snap-inMushroom knob
for KR5 and SKR5 ➃
BlackBlue
GreenOrange
RedRed ➁Yellow
K17BK17LK17GK17SK17R
K17R05K17Y
1111111
13/8" Screw-onMushroom knob
for KR24 and SKR24➄
BlackBlue
GreenOrange
RedYellow
K92BK92LK92GK92SK92RK92Y
111111
21/4" Screw-onMushroom knob
for KR25 and SKR25 ➅
BlackBlue
GreenOrange
RedYellow
K93BK93LK93GK93SK93RK93Y
111111
15/8" Push-Pull Knobs for KR8,KR9, SKR8, SKR9 Operators
AmberBlack ➆
BlueClearGreen
Orange ➆Red
Red ➉WhiteYellow
A22B23L22C22G22S23R22
R2205W22Y22
1111111111
Color Inserts forDual Function Operators
KR6, KR7, KR67
BlackGreenRed
Universal ➇
B19G19R19U19
10101010
Standard ColorCaps for Illuminated
Push ButtonsK1L, K2L, K3L, SK1L, SK2L
AmberBlueClearGreenRed
WhiteYellow
A7L7C7G7R7W7Y7
1111111
Description Color Type PackageQty.
13/8" Mushroom Knob for Illuminated Push Buttons
K2L, SK2L ➈
AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow
A20L20C20G20R20W20Y20
1111111
21/4" MushroomKnob for Illuminated
Push ButtonsK2L, SK2L ➈
AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow
A21L21C21G21R21 W21Y21
1111111
Plastic FresnelPilot Light Lens
for KP, KT, SKP, SKT
AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow
A31L31C31G31R31W31Y31
1111111
Domed PlasticPilot Light Lens
for KP, KT, SKP, SKT
AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow
A9L9C9G9R9W9Y9
1111111
Glass Pilot LightLens for KP, KT
AmberBlueClearGreen RedWhiteYellow
A6L6C6G6R6W6Y6
1111111
Standard Selector Switch Knob for K and SKSelector Switches
AmberBlack ➆
BlueClearGreen
Orange ➆ RedWhiteYellow
A8B11L8C8G8S11R8W8Y8
111111111
Gloved Hand Selector Switch Knob for K and SKSelector Switches
AmberBlack ➆
BlueClearGreen
Orange ➆ RedWhiteYellow
A24B25L24C24G24S25R24W24Y24
111111111
Coin Operated SelectorSwitch Knob for K and SK
Selector Switches
Black ➆BlueClearGreen RedYellow
B18L16C16G16R16Y16
111111
Color Inserts for KQand TQ Selector
Push Buttons
BlackBlue
GreenOrange RedWhiteYellow
T5BKT5BET5GNT5OET5RDT5WHT5YW
10101010101010
Cam Type
Selector Switch Cams
BCDEFGHJLM
K13BK13CK13DK13EK13FK13GK13HK13JK13L
3105402402
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmReplacement Parts
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved106
11/97
➀ Maintained button of two button operator.➁ Momentary button of two button operator.➂ Secondary ring nut (holds knob on selector switch or potentiometer).
➃ GE44 and GE755 are interchangeable (GE755 gives longer life). If a GE-44 lamp is ordered,a GE755 (2550101020) will be substituted. For a replacement lamp in a current series lightmodule see the light module listing on page 96.
Ring NutsUsed On Type Used On Type
K1L K44 SK1L SK44K30-K37 6512233501 – –K70-K73 6512233501 – –K20, K21,K22, K23 K45 SK20, SK21,
SK22, SK23 SK45
K20, K21,K22, K23 ➂ K46 SK20, SK21,
SK22, SK23 ➂ SK46
K2L K49 SK2L SK49K3L K111 – –KP, KTR K40 SKP, SKTR SK40KR1 K41 SKR1 SK41KR11 K42 SKR11 SK42KR12 ➀ K42 SKR12 ➀ SK42KR12 ➁ K41 SKR12 ➁ SK41KR13-, 14-, 15- K55 – –KR2 K42 SKR2 SK42KR20 K49 – –KR24 K49 – –KR25 K49 – –KR3 K40 SKR3 SK40KR4 K41 SKR4 SK41KR5 K41 SKR5 SK41KR6 K47 – –KR67 K47 – –KR7 K47 – –KR8, KR89 K58 SKR8, SKR89 SK58KR9 K41 SKR9 SK41KS K45 SKS SK45
KS ➂ K46 SKS ➂ SKRU11 SKRU1,2,3,4,5,10
SK46SK41SK40
KT K49 SKT SK49
Replacement Lamps For Series A thru F (black) Light Modules
LightModule Type
Lamp No.(ANSI)
Square D Replacement Lamps
Part NumberKM1 GE44 ➃ –KM2 GE1490 2550101003KM3 GE44 ➃ –KM4 GE1490 2550101003KM5 GE44 ➃ –KM6 GE44 ➃ –KM7 GE44 ➃ –KM8 GE44 ➃ –KM9 GE755 2550101020KM11 CMDK1A5 2550105014KM12 CMDK1A5 2550105014KM13 CMDK1A5 2550105014KM14 CMDK1A5 2550105014KM15 CMDK1A5 2550105014KM21 SYL 12PSB 2550105003KM22 SYL 12PSB 2550105003KM23 SYL 28PSB 2550105008KM25 SYL 120PSB 2550105005KM31 SYL 6PSB 2550105007KM32 SYL 12PSB 2550105003KM34 SYL 24PSB 2550105004KM35 SYL 28PSB 2550105008KM36 SYL 48PSB 2550105009KM37 SYL 60PSB 2550105010KM38 SYL 120PSB 2550105005
Selector Switch CamsCam Type Cam Type
BCDEF
K13BK13CK13DK13EK13F
GHJLM
K13GK13HK13JK13L
3105402402
➄ Allows Type -20 and -21 mushroom color caps to be used on push pull operators. Use of9001 K54 voids Type 6 rating.
Repair PartsDescription Part Number
E10 KeyE11 through E33 keysD10 KeyMaster Key for E36 – E60Gray cap for KR11, KR12, SKR11, or SKR12Clear plastic top (only) for 9001 K44 & SK44
Ring NutGasket for Type K and SK Push-Pull KnobGasket for Plastic Illuminated LensGasket for Type K and SK selector switch knobBlack Compensating Gasket (Type K and SK
Operators)Liner for Non Illuminated OperatorsLocking Thrust Washer Nylon SpacerLocking Thrust Washer (Std. Type SK Operator)Push Pull Mushroom Adapter ➄Rubber Boot for JoystickKnob on Joysticks without latch
2941101100Refer to page 822940601100294115199031052170014487D63XI
6509701801650970190131054064016509702001
6509704901651223120165097050016512240601K5465122432014458D20X3
KU Replacement Ring Nuts (Threaded Inside and Out)Used On Part Number
KU1 through KU8, KU27, KU37, KU47 3105204101
KU17, KU18 3105205901
InterlockFor mechanically interlocking two push buttons so that only one button can be depressed at a time. A Type K3 attachment is furnished with the 9001 KR11, KR12, SKR11, SKR12, SKRU1 and SKRU11 operators. However, maintained operators are supplied here and the K3 interlock serves to release one of the buttons when the other is depressed. When used with momentary contact buttons, the K3 interlock does not hold the buttons in the depressed position. It simply prevents pushing both buttons at the same time.The Type K3 interlock can be mounted behind the operators, or behind Type KA contact blocks as shown. Operators and blocks not included.
Type
K3
Screwdriver
Used to tighten mounting screws oncontact blocks and light modules.
Type No.
K69
Wrench
K95 K1
Where Used Type
For tightening ring nuts on Types K, KX, SK and J control units K95
For protective cap kits K1
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Dimensions
107© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved11/97
1.625
41.3C30052-247
Type KS
1.8145.9
1.4135.8
B30052-272
IlluminatedStandardKnobType KType SK
LightModule
Approximate Dimensions — Consult your local Square D Sales Office for latest version of dimension drawings.
Interlocked Push ButtonsTypes KR11, KR12
SKR11, SKR12, and K3 Interlock
Key OperatedSelector Switch
MushroomButtons
PilotLights
SelectorSwitches
PushButtons
Push Pull
Type: K22 w/o Potentiometer K23 w/ Potentiometer SK22 w/o Potentiometer SK23 w/ Potentiometer
Type: K20 w/o Potentiometer K21 w/ Potentiometer SK20 w/o Potentiometer SK21 w/ Potentiometer
PotentiometerType K
Type SK
All ReedContact Blocks
All Type KAExcept Reed
Dimensions When Using Contact Blocks
Key OperatedPush Button
Type No.
“A” Dim.
“B” Dim.Depressed (Stop)
Midway (Neutral)
Extended (Start)
KR8, SKR8 13/8 19/16 13/4
3/4
KR9, SKR9 1 -- 15/16
3/4
KR8P, SKR8P 13/8 19/16 13/4
113/16KR9P,
SKR9P 1 -- 15/16
26 421.661.03
.062 6
.25Min Max
Panel Thickness
.5614
C30052-246
NoGuardType KR3Type SKR3
.5614
C30052-246
FullGuardType KR1Type SKR1
.5614
C30052-246
ExtendedGuardType KR2Type SKR2
B30052-270
Push ButtonIlluminatedNo GuardType K2L
Light Module
31.81.25 1.81
45.9
B30052-270
IlluminatedFull GuardType SK1L
Light Module31.81.25
1.8145.9
1.6341.4
Dia
A B
Illuminated andNon-IlluminatedTypes KR8, KR9KR8P, KR9P
B30052-285
( Illuminated Shown )
1.4135.8
1.12528.6
1.72
43.7
C30052-247
C30052-247
1.1930.2
C30052-247
Coin OperatedType KS
1.6642
1.5239
1.3434
1.9650
.062
.256
min max
panel thickness
In.mmDual Dims
C65075-235
1.6642
1.5239
2.85
72
,062
.256
min max
panel thickness
.062
.25
6min max
Panel Thickness
0.56
14
1.66
42
.97
25
2.63
67
2.1053
0.5614
1.6041
3.6693
65075-323
Panel Thickness1/16 min-1/4 max
2.2557
1.3835
B30052-270
IlluminatedType K2LType SK2L
Light Module31.81.25
1.8145.9
2.2557
1.3835
1.0626.9
C30052-246
Non-IlluminatedTypesKR4, KR5KR24, KR25SKR4, SKR5
1.6642
1.0326
1.7544
thru 2.2557
Spacing betweenOperator Center Line
1.1329
1.25max32
30052-284Type KR11, 12
.062
min max.25
6
panel thickness
1.125
28.6
1.81
45.98
Light Module
1.28
33
2.78
71
B30052-271
C30052-271
Push-To-TestType KTType SKT
StandardType KPType SKP
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmDimensions
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved108
11/97
1.6140.9
0.7519.05
Approximate Dimensions — Consult your local Square D Sales Office for latest version of dimension drawings.
Type K4
Mushroom Button GuardsType K56Y, K56YM
Rocker Arm Operating LeverType K50
Protective Boots
Emergency“Break Glass” Operator
Type K15
Padlock Attachments
SelectorPush Button
Type KQ
Dual Function Operator
Types KR6, KR7
Time Delay Push Button
Type K68
Type K6, K60, and K97
Type K48
Type K96 Type KU27
9001K56YM includes finger holes.
Type No. Dimension A Dim. B
KRD1UH1KRD1UH2 Full Guard 9/16 21/2
KRD2UH1KRD2UH2 Ext. Guard 11/16 21/2
KRD3UH1KRD3UH2 No Guard 9/16 21/2
Type K62
Type K7, K107, K108,K109, and K110
Type K5
Alternate Action Module “Push-on,
Push-off”
Type K85
2.050.8
BA 2.563.5
3.2883.3
2.2557.21 1
16 4
panel thickness
min max
Type KRD
1.2833
4.69119
.6617
B30051-248
.062
.256
min max
1.6642
.97
25
2.63
67
Panel Thickness
1.5038
Dia.
A65075-075
0.6916
1.5038
Dia.
1.3636
A65075-079
TYPE KU37
TYPE KU171.5141
Dia.
1.3940
A65075-077A65075-101
A65075-060
1.6241
Dia
2.0050
TYPE KU18
TYPE KU471.4537
Dia
411.61
A65075-078
1.50 Dia38
1.0827
Type KU1 to KU8
20* max.
20* max.
3.0
76.2
1.9449.28
STOP
C65013-001-27
1.7544.45
50.82.0
max
min
START
2.7570
2.5064
1.1429
A65075-233
1.8848 Dia
1.6943
0.195 Dia
1.0025
2.3860 Dia
B65075-232
1.7344 Dia
Dia1.63
41
1.0928
B65075-231
2.2055.88
471.84
2.6166
B65075-071
2.5665
1.5239
1.7945
2.2958 B65075-074
1.9650
2.2657
0.9825
1.6241
1.9850
1.7244
1.5640
2.2256 max
0.8121
C65075-234
2.2958
1.7945
0.9726
For K67
B65075-069
2.2056
1.9449
1.8547
562.20
B65075-065
Push Button andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
Type KX 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Type KX Square Multifunction Complete Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Type KX Square Oiltight/Watertight Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Type KX Selector Switch Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Type KX Square Multifunction Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Type KX Square Multifunction Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Type KX Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Type KX Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Types K, SK, KX, and T Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Hazardous Location Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Application Data, Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Type KX Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Complete Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
110
11/97
The operators listed below come complete with color caps, legend inserts/plates, contact blocks, and light modules (illuminatedoperators only) and can be ordered using the short type number. If the operator you desire is not listed below, see pages 110through 119. For a component breakdown of each of the operators listed on this page, refer to Product Data M-603.
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
Buttons are mechanically interlocked.
Description ButtonColor
LegendMarking Contacts Type
Number
Non-Illuminated
GreenRed
StartStop
KXRA101KXRA102
Green Start KXRA133
Red Stop KXRA134
RedMushroom
Emerg.Stop KXRN105
RedMushroom
Emerg.Stop KXRN135
Illuminated110-120 V,50-60 HzTransf.
GreenRed
StartStop
KXRB103KXRB104
RedMushroom
Emerg.Stop KXRP106
Dual Push Buttons
Description Top Button (#1) Bottom Button (#2) Contacts TypeNumber
Green-Mom.-Start Red-Mom.-Stop KXRC111
Green-Mom.-Start Red-Mom.-Stop KXRC136
Green-Mom.-Up
Green-Mom.-Down
KXRD112
Green-Mom.-Open
Green-Mom.-Close
KXRD113
Green-Mom.-Fwd.
Green-Mom.-Rev.
KXRD114
Green-Mom.-Up
Green-Mom.-Down
KXRD140
Green-Mom.-Open
Green-Mom.-Close
KXRD141
Green-Mom.-Fwd.
Green-Mom.-Rev.
KXRD142
Green-Maint.-Start
Red-Maint.-Stop
KXRE115
Green-Mom.-Reset
Red-Maint.-Stop
KXRF116
Dual Push Button With One Pilot Light
DescriptionTop
Button(#1)
MiddleLens(#2)
BottomButton
(#3)Contacts Type
Number
Pilot Lightat 110-120 V,
50-60 Hz Transf.
Green-Mom.-Start
Red-On
Red-Mom.-Stop KXRG117
Green-Mom.-Start
Red-On
Red-Mom.-Stop KXRG137
GreenMom.
-BlankRed-Blank
Green-Mom.
-Blank KXRH118
Green-Maint.
-StartRed-On
Red-Maint.
-Stop KXRJ119
Green-Mom.-Reset
Red-On
Red-Maint.
-Stop KXRK120
Dual Push Button With Dual Pilot Lights
Description TopButton (#1)
LeftLens (#2)
RightLens (#3)
BottomButton (#4) Contacts Type
Number
Pilot Lightsat 110-120 V,
50-60 Hz Transf.
Green-Mom.-Start
Red-On
Green-Off
RedMom.-Stop KXRL121
White-Mom.-Number 1
White1
Blue2
Blue-Mom.-Number 2 KXRL132
Green-Mom.-Start
Red-On
Green-Off
Red-Mom.-Stop KXRL138
Green-Mom.
-Blank
Red-Blank
Red-Blank
Green-Mom.
-Blank
KXRM122
If all four lamps are illuminated at the same time continuously – do NOT operate above120 Vac.
Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated
Description Positions Legend Knob Contacts TypeNumber
2-Maint. Off-On Black 1 00 1 KXSA125
2-Maint. Off-On Black 0 1 KXSA139
3-Maint. Hand-Off-Auto. Black 1 0 00 0 1 KXSD126
3-Maint. Hand-Off-Auto. Black
1 0 00 0 11 0 00 0 1
KXSD127
Illuminated - 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz, Transf.
Description Positions Legend Knob Contacts TypeNumber
2-Maint. Off-On Red 1 00 1 KXSJ128
3-Maint. Hand-Off-Auto. Red 1 0 00 0 1 KXSM129
3-Maint. Hand-Off-Auto. Red
1 0 00 0 11 0 00 0 1
KXSM130
Single Pilot Light
Description LensColor
LegendMarking
TypeNumber
110-120 V,50-60 HzTransf.
Standard RedGreen
OnOff
KXPA107KXPA108
Push-To-Test
RedGreen
OnOff
KXTA109KXTA110
Dual Push To Test Pilot Light
(Pushing Button #1 Tests Pilot Light #2 — Pushing Button #4 Tests Pilot Light #3)
Description TopButton (#1)
LeftLens (#2)
RightLens (#3)
BottomButton (#4)
TypeNumber
Pilot Lightsat 110-120 V,
50-60 Hz Transf.
GreenBlank
RedBlank
RedBlank
GreenBlank KXTC123
Dual Pilot Light
Description Left Lens (#1) Right Lens (#2) Type Number
110-120 V,50-60 Hz. Transf.
RedOn
GreenOff KXPB124
Four Field Pilot Light
Description TopLeft (#1)
TopRight (#2)
BottomLeft (#3)
BottomRight (#4)
TypeNumber
110-120 V,50-60 HzTransf.
WhiteBlank
BlueBlank
GreenBlank
RedBlank KXPC131
Remote Test
120 V, AC ResistorWhiteBlank
BlueBlank
GreenBlank
RedBlank KXTE150
1234
123
12
1234
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Complete Operators
111
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
9001 KX
Operator Code
Cam Code
VoltageCode
KeyWithdrawal
Code
OhmValueCode
ColorCode
ContactBlockCode
A
A
A
AA
A
A B
B
B B
B
C
CC
D
D
This information is also available on the Class 9001 Type KX key sheet M-8091 which is available from your local Square D sales office.
Operator Codes and Operator Description
Selector Switches
SASBSCSDSESFSGSHSJSKSLSMSNSOSPSQSRSSSTSVSWSXSYSZ
Non-illuminated – 2 position maintained selector switchNon-illuminated – 2 position spring return from leftNon-illuminated – 2 position spring return from rightNon-illuminated – 3 position maintained selector switchNon-illuminated – 3 position spring return from left to centerNon-illuminated – 3 position spring return from right to centerNon-illuminated – 3 position spring return both sides to centerNon-illuminated – 4 position maintained selector switchIlluminated – 2 position maintained selector switchIlluminated – 2 position spring return from leftIlluminated – 2 position spring return from rightIlluminated – 3 position maintained selector switchIlluminated – 3 position spring return left to centerIlluminated – 3 position spring return right to centerIlluminated – 3 position spring return both sides to centerIlluminated – 4 position maintained selector switchKey Operated – 2 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 1, 2, 3Key Operated – 2 position spring return from left – Key Code 2Key Operated – 2 position spring return from right – Key Code 1Key Operated – 3 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 4-10Key Operated – 3 position spring return left to center – Key Codes 5, 6, 9Key Operated – 3 position spring return right to center – Key Codes 4, 5, 7Key Operated – 3 position spring return both sides to center – Key Code 5Key Operated – 4 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 11, 12, 13, 14
Push Buttons
RARBRCRDRERFRGRHRJRKRLRMRNRP
Standard Single Momentary Push Button – Non-illuminatedStandard Single Momentary Push Button – IlluminatedTwo Momentary Push Buttons with NO InterlockTwo Momentary Push Buttons with InterlockTwo Maintained Push Buttons with InterlockOne Momentary – One Maintained Push Button with InterlockTwo Momentary Push Buttons with NO Interlock and a Single Pilot LightTwo Momentary Push Buttons with Interlock and a Single Pilot LightTwo Maintained Push Buttons with Interlock and a Single Pilot LightOne Momentary – One Maintained Push Button with Interlock and a Single Pilot LightTwo Momentary Push Buttons with NO Interlock and a Dual Pilot LightTwo Momentary Push Buttons with Interlock and a Dual Pilot LightMushroom Single Momentary Push Button – Non-illuminatedMushroom Single Momentary Push Button – Illuminated
Pilot Lights
PAPBPCTATBTCTDTE
Standard Pilot LightStandard Dual Pilot LightStandard Four-Field Pilot LightSingle Push-To-Test Pilot LightSingle Remote Test Pilot LightDual Push-To-Test Pilot LightDual Remote Test Pilot LightRemote Test Four-Field Pilot Light
Potentiometers
BABBBCBD
Operator Only – Single PotOperator with Single PotOperator Only – Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot
1 Yes No 11 Yes No No Yes
2 No Yes 12 No No No Yes
3 Yes Yes 13 Yes No No No
14 Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Yes No No 8 Yes No Yes
5 No Yes No 9 No Yes Yes
6 No No Yes 10 Yes Yes Yes
7 Yes Yes No
Only voltage codes 31, 34, 35 and 38 may be used with KXTE.
Only resistor and full voltage styles may be used with KXTB and KXTD.
For Use With
Voltage andFrequency
CodeNo.
KXPAKXRAKXRBKXRGKXRHKXRJKXRKKXRNKXRPKXSKXTAKXTB
Transformer
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz 1
110-120 V, 50-60 HzFlashing Type F1
208-220 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
37
220-24 V, 50-60 HzFlashing Type F7
277 V, 50-60 Hz380-480 V, 50-60 Hz550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
856
Resistor
18 V, AC or DC32 V, AC or DC
120 V, AC or DC240 V, AC or DC
33233825
Full Voltage
6 V, AC or DC12-14 V, AC or DC24-28 V, AC or DC48 V, AC or DC60 V, AC or DC
120 V, AC or DC
313235363738
KXPBKXRLKXRMKXTCKXTD
Transformer
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz208-220 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz277 V, 50-60 Hz380-480 V, 50-60 Hz550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
137856
Full Voltage
6 V, AC or DC24 V, AC or DC28 V, AC or DC
120 V, AC or DC
31343538
Resistor
12 V, AC or DC48 V, AC or DC60 V, AC or DC
120 V, AC or DC
32363738
KXPC
KXTE
Transformer 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz 1
Full Voltage 6 V, AC or DC120 V, AC or DC
3138
Resistor
12 V AC24 V AC28 V AC48 V AC60 V AC
120 V AC
323435363738
Legend/Color Location
KXRAKXRBKXRNKXRPKXPAKXTA
KXRGKXRHKXRJKXRK
KXPB
KXPCKXTE
KXRCKXRDKXREKXRF
KXRLKXRMKXTC
KXS
Potentiometers have black knobs
Contact Block(s) Required To Obtain These Sequences
2 Position 3 Position 4 Position
1 = Contact Closed 0 = Contact Open
KA – 1 Mtd. on Side 2(Code H13)
1 00 1
0 11 0
1 0 00 1 1
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
1 0 00 1 1
1 0 00 1 1
0 1 01 0 0
1 1 00 0 1
1 0 0 00 0 1 0
KA – 1 Mtd. on Side 1(Code H1)
1 00 1
0 11 0
0 0 11 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
0 1 00 0 1
0 0 11 0 0
1 0 10 1 0
0 0 10 1 0
0 1 11 0 0
0 0 0 10 1 0 0
Use These Cam Codes E D B C D E F G J L M H
With TheseOperatorCodes
SA – SBSJ – SKSR – SS
SC – SLST
SD – SE – SF – SGSM – SN – SO – SPSV – SW – SX – SY
SHSQSZ
Not available with text or with certain operators (see selection in this section).
Color Code Color
RGALWB
RedGreenAmberBlueWhiteBlack
For KXBB
Code Ohms
010203040506070809101112131415163233353637383940
5010025050010002500500010 K25 K50 K100 K250 K500
1.0 Meg2.5 Meg5.0 Meg
1500350035 K75 K750 K200200015 K
For KXBD
CodeOhms
Front Rear
8283858889
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
Not used on standard type pilot lights (KXPA, KXPB, KXPC, KXTB, KXTD, KXTE) or potentiometers (KXBA, KXBB, KXBC, KXBD).See page 122 for Proper H Number
For Use WithSelector Switches
ONLY
For Use WithIlluminated Operators
ONLY
For Use WithKey-operated Selector
Switches ONLY
For Use WithPotentiometers
ONLY
Insert the proper color code(s) for the lens or knob required. For location of color codes,
see table below.
1
123
1
2
12 3
4
121
1 2
43
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
112
11/97
Non-Illuminated Push Buttons
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
All non-illuminated push buttons are of the no guard type. Tomake the Type KXRA operator a full guard type (does not applyto the KXRN operators), add a shroud from page 119. If legendinserts are required to be assembled into the operator, see in-structions on page 118.
Momentary operators on this page will accept up to three TypeKA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks).
Maintained operators on this page will accept up to two TypeKA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks).
Add 2 color codes from button cover table. See example below.
Example:
To get a Dual Push Button similar to a 9001KXRCGR except the top button is blue, order a 9001KXRCLR.
Description ButtonType
ButtonCoverColor
TypeNumber
Single ButtonMomentary
Standard
No CoverGreenRed
AmberWhiteBlue
KXRAKXRAGKXRARKXRAAKXRAWKXRAL
Mushroom
No CoverRed
GreenAmberWhiteBlue
KXRNKXRNRKXRNGKXRNAKXRNWKXRNL
Description ButtonType
MechanicalInterlock
Button CoverColor Type
Number(1)Top
(2)Bottom
Dual Push Button(Non–illuminated
Only)
BothMomentary No
NoneGreenAmberAmberOther
NoneRedRed
GreenOther
KXRCKXRCGRKXRCARKXRCAGKXRC
BothMomentary Yes
NoneGreenGreenRed
AmberOther
NoneRed
GreenRed
AmberOther
KXRDKXRDGRKXRDGGKXRDRRKXRDAAKXRD
BothMaintained Yes
NoneGreenGreenRed
AmberOther
NoneRed
GreenRed
AmberOther
KXREKXREGRKXREGGKXRERRKXREAAKXRE
Top ButtonMomentary
Bottom ButtonMaintained
Yes
NoneGreenGreenGreenOther
NoneRed
GreenAmberOther
KXRFKXRFGRKXRFGGKXRFGAKXRF
Two required per operator. When ordering an assembled operator — specify two codenumbers. The first code will be assembled into #1 and the second code will be assembledinto #2.
Not available with text.
Example:
Class 9001 Type KXRAG with a KA1 contact block is Type KXRAGH13. Types KA1 and KA3 NC contacts are direct opening
Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Lockouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 120 -121“H” Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 122Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 118Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 123Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 110Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 120 -121
Button Covers
Description For Use on Color TypeNumber Code
IncludesKXN100
KXRA
RedGreenAmberBlueWhiteBlack
KXAR1KXAG1KXAA1KXAL1KXAW1KXAB1
RGALWB
IncludesKXN100
KXRN
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXARM1KXAGM1KXAAM1KXALM1KXAWM1
RGALW
IncludesKXN200
KXRCKXRDKXREKXRF
RedGreenAmberBlueWhiteBlack
KXAR2KXAG2KXAA2KXAL2KXAW2KXAB2
RGALWB
Standard Contact Blocks
Symbol Contact BlockType
Contact Block AssembledTo Operator
Suffix
KA1 H13
KA2 H5
KA3 H6
1
2
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Oiltight/Watertight Operators
113
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Illuminated Push Buttons
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
All illuminated push buttons are of the no guard type. To makethem a full guard type (does not apply to the KXRP operators),add a shroud from page 119. If legend inserts are required to beassembled into the operators, see instructions on page 118.
Momentary operators on this page will accept up to three TypeKA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks).
Maintained operators on this page will accept up to two Type KAcontact blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks).
To order operators with color caps other than those listed below,substitute the proper color code from the Button Cover Table.
Example:
To get a Dual Push Button/Single Pilot Light similar to a 9001 KXRG1GGR exceptthe pilot light is white, order a 9001 KXRG1GWR.
Insert the proper voltage code from page 116 (single lamp).
Insert the proper voltage code from page 116 (single lamp).
Description ButtonType
MechanicalInterlock Voltage Button
Cover ColorType
Number
TwoPush Buttons
(1 & 3)One PilotLight (2)
BothMomentary No
No Light Module No Covers KXRG
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoversGreen-Red-RedGreen-Green-RedGreen-Amber-Red
KXRG1KXRG1GRRKXRG1GGRKXRG1GAR
OtherVoltages No Covers KXRG
BothMomentary Yes
No Light Module No Covers KXRH
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoversGreen-Red-GreenGreen-Amber-GreenRed-Green-Red
KXRH1KXRH1GRGKXRH1GAGKXRH1RGR
OtherVoltages No Covers KXRH
BothMaintained Yes
No Light Module No Covers KXRJ
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoversGreen-Red-RedGreen-Green-RedGreen-Amber-Red
KXRJ1KXRJ1GRRKXRJ1GGRKXRJ1GAR
OtherVoltages No Covers KXRJ
TopMomentary
BottomMaintained
Yes
No Light Module No Covers KXRK
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoversGreen-Red-RedGreen-Green-RedGreen-Amber-Red
KXRK1KXRK1GRRKXRK1GGRKXRK1GAR
OtherVoltages No Covers KXRK
Description ButtonType Voltage Button
Cover ColorType
Number
SingleButton
Momentary
Standard
No Light Module No Cover KXRA
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoverGreenRedAmberWhiteBlue
KXRB1KXRB1GKXRB1RKXRB1AKXRB1WKXRB1L
OtherVoltages
No CoverGreenRed
KXRB
KXRB
GKXRB
R
Mushroom
No Light Module No Cover KXRN
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Trans.
No CoverRedGreenAmberWhiteBlue
KXRP1KXRP1RKXRPIGKXRPIAKXRPIWKXRPIL
OtherVoltages
No CoverRedGreen
KXRP
KXRP
RKXRP
G
Not available with text.
Insert the proper voltage code from page 117 (dual lamp).
Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 119Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 119Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 120 -121Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 110Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 118Boots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 119Lamp and Lens Removal Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 119Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 124Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 123Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 116 - 117“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 122Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 120 - 121
Button Covers
Description For Use on Color Type Number Code
IncludesKXN100
KXRAKXRB
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXAR1KXAG1KXAA1KXAL1KXAW1
RGALW
IncludesKXN100
KXRNKXRP
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXARM1KXAGM1KXAAM1KXALM1KXAWM1
RGALW
IncludesKXN400
KXRG (Pos. 1 & 3)KXRH (Pos. 1 & 3)KXRJ (Pos. 1 & 3)KXRK (Pos. 1 & 3)KXRL (Pos. 1 & 4)KXRM (Pos. 1 & 4)
RedGreenAmberBlueWhiteBlack
KXAR4KXAG4KXAA4KXAL4KXAW4KXAB4
RGALWB
IncludesKXN300
KXRG (Pos. 2)KXRH (Pos. 2)KXRJ (Pos. 2)KXRK (Pos. 2)
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXAR3KXAG3KXAA3KXAL3KXAW3
RGALW
IncludesKXN500
KXRL (Pos. 2 & 3)KXRM (Pos. 2 & 3)
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXAR5KXAG5KXAA5KXAL5KXAW5
RGALW
Replacement Parts
Ring NutAdapter Assembly w/o Liner
Spring ClipAdapter with Liner
6508901401650890335065089009026508903351
Description ButtonType
MechanicalInterlock
Voltage andFrequency
Button Cover Color
TypeNumber
TwoPush Buttons
(1 & 4)Two Pilot
Lights (2 & 3)
BothMomentary No
No Light Module No Covers KXRL
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Transformer
No CoversGreen-Green-Red-Red
Green-Red-Red-Green
Red-Green-Green-Red
KXRL1
KXRL1GGRR
KXRL1GRRG
KXRL1RGGR
OtherVoltages No Covers KXRL
BothMomentary Yes
No Light Module No Covers KXRM
110-120 V50-60 Hz
Transformer
No CoversGreen-Green-Red-Red
Green-Red-Red-Green
Red-Green-Green-Red
KXRM1
KXRM1GGRR
KXRM1GRRG
KXRM1RGGR
OtherVoltages No Covers KXRM
1234
123
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSelector Switch Selection Guide
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
114
11/97
Shown below is a simplified method of selecting a selectorswitch to meet almost any combination of contact sequences.
Step No. 1
Determine the contact sequence(s) required. Set up a targettable like the one shown for the example below.
Step No. 2
Look for a cam type common to all sequences in Table 1, 2 or3. For the example above, Table 2 would be used. For the con-tact sequences A(1 0 0), B(0 1 0) and C(0 0 1) of the exampleabove, cam types F and L are common to all 3 sequences.
Step No. 3
Next, the cam type common to all the sequences (If severalcam types are common, choose one.) is used to find the oper-ator type number. Go to the proper page number as indicatedin the table below:
If for the example above:
A manual return operator with a standard black knob is required andIf the F cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:
Type KX Line – Class 9001 Type KXSDFB (from page 115)If the L cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:
Type KX Line – Class 9001 Type KXSDLB (from page 115)
Step No. 4:
Determine the contact blocks required by using the same tableused for Step No. 2.
If for the example above:
The F cam type were chosen:
A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or 2 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
The L cam type were chosen:
A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or a 9001 KA3 mounted on side no.2 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
One Type KA1 double circuit block can be used in place of oneType KA2 single circuit block and one Type KA3 single circuitblock mounted on the same side.
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 122Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124
Example:
ContactSequence
A 1 0 0
B 0 1 0
C 0 0 1
0 – contact open1 – contact closed
Number of Positions Push Button Line Page Number
2 Type KX 115
3 Type KX 115
4 Type KX 115
KA1 KA3 KA2= +
= +
The KA5 must be the last block on either side. If more than one KA5 is required on eitherside – contact your local Square D sales office.
Table 1 – 2 Position Selector Switch
If you requirecontact sequence Use Sel. Sw.
with cam typeUse contactblock type
Mount onside No.
(See page 122)
1 0E KA3 1 or 2
D KA2 1 or 2
0 1E KA2 1 or 2
D KA3 1 or 2
Table 2 – 3 Position Selector Switch
If you requirecontact sequence Use Sel. Sw.
with cam typeUse contactblock type
Mount on side No.
(See page 122)
1 0 0
G M KA2 1
L KA2 2
C E KA3 1
B C E F G J KA3 2
B G J KA5
2
0 1 0
D E J L KA2 1
D E KA2 2
F KA3 1
L KA3 2
0 0 1
C F KA2 1 or 2
B D G L KA3 1
D KA3 2
B KA5
1
M KA2 2
1 1 0
B KA2 1
C F KA5
1 or 2
M KA3 2
0 1 1
B G J KA2 2
G KA5
1
L KA5
2
M KA3 1
1 0 1
J KA3 1
D E J L KA5
1
D E KA5
2
Table 3 – 4 Position Selector Switch
If you requirecontact sequence Use Sel. Sw.
with cam typeUse contactblock type
Mount onside No.
(See page 122)
1 0 0 0 H (A) KA3 2
0 1 0 0 H (B) KA2 1
0 0 1 0 H (C) KA2 2
0 0 0 1 H (D) KA3 1
1 0 0 1 H A & D Wired in Parallel
1 1 0 0 H A & B Wired in Parallel
0 1 1 0 H B & C Wired in Parallel
0 0 1 1 H C & D Wired in Parallel
1 1 1 0 H A, B & C Wired in Parallel
0 1 1 1 H B, C & D Wired in Parallel
1 0 1 0 H A & C Wired in Parallel
0 1 0 1 H B & D Wired in Parallel
1 1 0 1 H KA5
2
1 0 1 1 H KA5
1
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Selector Switches
115
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Add form number to standard type number, example: Type KXSMC1 Form Y178.
Two Color Selector Switch Kit
— Used to indicate red in left position and green in right position and off in the center on 3 position illuminated selector switches.
Used With
Factory Assembled Form No.
2 pos. s/s3 pos. s/s
Y178Y178
Selector Switch Knobs
For Use On Color TypeNumber Code
All SelectorSwitch
OperatorsEXCEPT
KeyOperated
BlackGreenRed
AmberBlueWhite
KXAB6KXAG6KXAR6KXAA6KXAL6KXAW6
BGRALW
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
The selector switches listed below do not include a legend plate. Legend plates are required to be assembled into the opera-tors. Maintained selector switches will accept up to two Type KA contact blocks mounted in tandem (a total of four blocks). Springreturn selector switches will accept a maximum of two Type KA contact blocks mounted side by side. To order a selector switchwith a knob other than black, substitute the proper color code from the selector switch knob table. Example: To get a selector switch similar to a 9001KXSDCB except with a red knob, order a KXSDCR.
Note: All key operated selector switches are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 key change. See 30 mm push buttons types K and SK page 85 for other key changes. Insert the proper key withdrawal code from the table below. Insert the proper color code from the selector switch knob table below. Insert proper voltage code from page 116.
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Contact Block(s)Required To ObtainThese Sequences
1 = Contact Closed 0 = Contact Open 4 Position2 Position 3 Position
Left Right Left Right CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
CenterLeft Right
KA-1 Mtd. on Side 2(Code H13)
1 00 1
0 11 0
1 0 00 1 1
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
1 0 00 1 1
1 0 00 1 1
0 1 01 0 0
1 1 00 0 1
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
KA-1 Mtd. on Side 1(Code H1)
1 00 1
0 11 0
0 0 11 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
0 1 00 0 1
0 0 11 0 0
1 0 10 1 0
0 0 10 1 0
0 1 11 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
CAM E D B C D E F G J L M HManual Return – Operator OnlyWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther ColorsKey Operated
KXSAEKXSAEBKXSAEKXSRE
....
....
....
....
KXSDBKXSDBBKXSDBKXSVB
KXSDCKXSDCBKXSDCKXSVC
KXSDDKXSDDBKXSDDKXSVD
KXSDEKXSDEBKXSDEKXSVE
KXSDFKXSDFBKXSDFKXSVF
KXSDGKXSDGBKXSDGKXSVG
KXSDJKXSDJBKXSDJKXSVJ
KXSDLKXSDLBKXSDLKXSVL
KXSDMKXSDMBKXSDMKXSVM
KXSHHKXSHHBKXSHHKXSZH
Spring Return from LeftWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 2 Only)
KXSBEKXSBEBKXSBEKXSSE
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....Spring Return from RightWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 1 Only)
....
....
....
....
KXSCDKXSCDBKXSCDKXSTD
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....Spring Return – Left to CenterWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 5, 6, or 9 Only)
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSEBKXSEBBKXSEBKXSWB
KXSECKXSECBKXSECKXSWC
KXSEDKXSEDBKXSEDKXSWD
KXSEEKXSEEBKXSEEKXSWE
KXSEFKXSEFBKXSEFKXSWF
KXSEGKXSEGBKXSEGKXSWG
KXSEJKXSEJBKXSEJKXSWJ
KXSELKXSELBKXSELKXSWL
KXSEMKXSEMBKXSEMKXSWM
....
....
....
....Spring Return – Right to CenterWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 4, 5, or 7 Only)
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSFBKXSFBBKXSFBKXSXB
KXSFCKXSFCBKXSFCKXSXC
KXSFDKXSFDBKXSFDKXSXD
KXSFEKXSFEBKXSFEKXSXE
KXSFFKXSFFBKXSFFKXSXF
KXSFGKXSFGBKXSFGKXSXG
KXSFJKXSFJBKXSFJKXSXJ
KXSFLKXSFLBKXSFLKXSXL
KXSFMKXSFMBKXSFMKXSXM
....
....
....
....
Spring Return – Both Sides to CenterWithout KnobStandard Black KnobOther Colors Key Operated (Code 5 Only)
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSGBKXSGBBKXSGBKXSYB
KXSGCKXSGCBKXSGCKXSYC
KXSGDKXSGDBKXSGDKXSYD
KXSGEKXSGEBKXSGEKXSYE
KXSGFKXSGFBKXSGFKXSYF
KXSGGKXSGGBKXSGGKXSYG
KXSGJKXSGJBKXSGJKXSYJ
KXSGLKXSGLBKXSGLKXSYL
KXSGMKXSGMBKXSGMKXSYM
....
....
....
....
Illuminated Selector SwitchesManual ReturnWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
KXSJEKXSJERKXSJE
....
....
....
KXSMBKXSMBRKXSMB
KXSMCKXSMCRKXSMC
KXSMDKXSMDRKXSMD
KXSMEKXSMERKXSME
KXSMFKXSMFRKXSMF
KXSMGKXSMGRKXSMG
KXSMJKXSMJRKXSMJ
KXSMLKXSMLRKXSML
KXSMMKXSMMRKXSMM
KXSQHKXSQHRKXSQH
Spring Return from LeftWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
KXSKEKXSKERKXSKE
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....Spring Return from RightWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
....
....
....
KXSLDKXSLDRKXSLD
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....Spring Return – Left to CenterWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSNBKXSNBRKXSNB
KXSNCKXSNCtRKXSNC
KXSNDKXSNDRKXSND
KXSNEKXSNERKXSNE
KXSNFKXSNFRKXSNF
KXSNGKXSNGRKXSNG
KXSNJKXSNJRKXSNJ
KXSNLKXSNLRKXSNL
KXSNMKXSNMRKXSNM
....
....
....Spring Return – Right to CenterWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSOBKXSOBRKXSOB
KXSOCKXSOCRKXSOC
KXSODKXSODRKXSOD
KXSOEKXSOERKXSOE
KXSOFKXSOFRKXSOF
KXSOGKXSOGRKXSOGv
KXSOJKXSOJRKXSOJ
KXSOLKXSOLRKXSOL
KXSOMKXSOMRKXSOM
....
....
....Spring Return – Both Sides to CenterWithout KnobStandard Red KnobOther Colors
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSPBKXSPBRKXSPB
KXSPCKXSPCRKXSPC
KXSPDKXSPDRKXSPD
KXSPEKXSPERKXSPE
KXSPFKXSPFRKXSPF
KXSPGKXSPGRKXSPG
KXSPJKXSPJRKXSPJ
KXSPLKXSPLRKXSPL
KXSPMKXSPMRKXSPM
....
....
....
Key Withdrawal Codes — The key withdrawal code numbers listed below indicate the positions in which the key can be withdrawn (removed) from the selector switch.
2-Position Switches 4-Position Switches
Code Code
1 Yes No 11 Yes No No Yes2 No Yes 12 No No No Yes3 Yes Yes 13 Yes No No No
14 Yes Yes Yes Yes3-Position Switches
Code Code
4 Yes No No 8 Yes No Yes5 No Yes No 9 No Yes Yes6 No No Yes 10 Yes Yes Yes7 Yes Yes No
CAMSCam Type
BCDEFGHJLM
K13BK13CK13DK13EK13FK13GK13HK13JK13L
3105402402
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mmSquare Multifunction Pilot Lights
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved116
11/97
Add voltage assembly code. Remote test AC only. Use only full voltage or resistor assembly code. Do not use transformer. Add color code.
No neon light modules available.
Single Standard Pilot Light For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
DescriptionVoltage
andFrequency
StyleThese operators include a blank KXN100 Legend Insert Without
Color CapType
With RedColor CapType
With GreenColor Cap Type
With OtherColor Cap Type
Type KXPASingle Standard
Pilot Light
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
24-28 Vac-dc
TransformerTransformerFull Voltage
KXPA1RKXPA7RKXPA35R
KXPA1GKXPA7GKXPA35G
KXPA1KXPA7KXPA35
KXPA1KXPA7KXPA35
See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency
and Assembly Code
Transformer or FlashingResistor
Full Voltage
KXPARKXPARKXPAR
KXPAGKXPAGKXPAG
KXPAKXPAKXPA
KXPAKXPAKXPA
Type KXTASingle Push-To-Test Pilot Light
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
24-28 Vac-dc
TransformerTransformerFull Voltage
KXTA1RH1KXTA7RH1KXTA35RH1
KXTA1GH1KCTA7GH1KXTA35GH1
KXTA1KXTA7
KXTA35
KXTA1H1KXTA7H1KXTA35H1
See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency
and Assembly Code
Transformer or FlashingResistor
Full Voltage
KXTA RH1KXTARH1KXTARH1
KXTAGH1KXTAGH1KXTAGH1
KXTAKXTAKXTA
KXTAH1KXTAH1KXTAH1
Type KXTBSingle RemoteTest Pilot Light
24 Vac120 Vac
Resistor/Full Voltage
KXTB35RKXTB38R
KXTB35GKXTB38G
KXTB35KXTB38
KXTB35KXTB38
Choose Resistor orFull Voltage Required from Table Below.
KXTBR KXTBG KXTB KXTB
Single Lamp Light Module Codes
Voltage Description For Use with Single Lamp ILL. Operators As Indicated
AssemblyCode
Separate LightModule
Type No.
RatedVA
(Watts)
Replacement Lamps
Lamp Number(ANSI)
Lamp PartNumber
6 Vac-dc Full Voltage All 31 KM31 0.9 755 2550101020
12-14 Vac-dc Full Voltage All 32 KM32 1.2 756 2550101037
18 Vac-dc Resistor All 33 KM33 1.4 756 2550101037
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage All 35 KM35 1.2 757 2550101002
32 Vac-dc Resistor All 23 KM23 2.5 757 2550101002
48 Vac-dc Full Voltage All 36 KM36 2.6 SYL48MB 2550101025
60 Vac-dc Full Voltage All 37 KM37 2.6 SYL60MB 2550101026
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 2 KM2 2.2 1490 2550101003
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 1 KM1 3.9 755 2550101020
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz Flashing All Except KXTB F1 KMF1 3.9 267 2550101036
120 Vac-dc Resistor All 38 KM38 3.0 SYL120MB 2550101027
120 Vac-dc Full Voltage All 38 KM38 3.0 SYL120MB 2550101027
208-220 V 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 3 KM3 7.1 755 2550101020
220-240 V 25-30 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 4 KM4 2.2 1490 2550101003
220-240 V 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 7 KM7 7.7 755 2550101020
220-240 V 50-60 Hz Flashing All Except KXTB F7 KMF7 7.7 267 2550101036
240 Vac-dc Resistor All 25 KM25 5.5 SYL120MB 2550101027
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 8 KM8 4.3 755 2550101020
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 5 KM5 4.8 755 2550101020
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except KXTB 6 KM6 6.0 755 2550101020
Basic Operators (Without Light Modules, Color Caps, or Legend Inserts)
Description Type
Single Standard Pilot Light KXPA
Single Push-to-Test Pilot Light KXRA
Dual Standard Pilot Light KXPB
Dual Push-to-Test Pilot Light KXRL
Four Field Pilot Light KXPC
Button CoversFor Use On Color Type Number Code
KXPAIncludes KXN100
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXAR8KXAG8KXAA8KXAL8KXAW8
RGALW
KXTA-KXTBIncludes KXN100
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXAR1KXAG1KXAA1KXAL1KXAW1
RGALW
Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 110Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 118Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Lamp and Lens Removal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 123
R
M
M O.L.L2
321L1
Stop Start
Test
L2
C
L1
M
STOP
LSI
M3
(TEST) C
(TEST) C L2
L2
L1(SIG)
CR
M2
M1
L2(TEST) C
START
TEST BUTTONL1 L2
L1(SIG)
L1(SIG)
Typical Push to Test Pilot Light Wiring Diagram
Typical Remote Test Pilot Light Wiring Diagram
1234
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Square Multifunction Pilot Lights
11711/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
If all four lamps are illuminated at the same time continuously — DO NOT operate above 120 Vac. Remote Test Pilot Lights are AC only. Use only full voltage or resistor assembly code. Do not use trans-former.
➀ Add the voltage assembly code number in the type number. Example: KXTD➀RG with a 60 Vac voltage = KXTD37RG.➁ Add the color codes from the button cover table below. Example: KXPB1➁➁ with a white and blue button cover = KXPB1WL.
2 and 4 Lamp Pilot Lights – These operators include blank legend inserts For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
Description Voltage andFrequency Style
With 1 = Red 2 = Green
Type
With1 = Red 2 = Red
3 = Green 4 = Green
With Other Button CoverColors Type ➁
Without Button CoverType
Type KXPBDual Lamp Pilot Light
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
28 Vac-dc
TransformerTransformerFull Voltage
KXPB1RGKXPB7RGKXPB35RG
....
....
....
KXPB1➁➁KXPB7➁➁KXPB35➁➁
KXPB1KXPB7KXPB35
See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency and Assembly Codes➀
TransformerFull Voltage
Resistor
KXPB➀RGKXPB➀RGKXPB➀RG
....
....
....
KXPB➀➁➁KXPB➀➁➁KXPB➀➁➁
KXPB➀KXPB➀KXPB➀
Type KXTCDual Lamp Push-To-
Test Pilot Light
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
28 Vac-dc
TransformerTransformerFull Voltage
....
....
....
KXTC1RRGGH2KXTC7RRGGH2KXTC35RRGGH2
KXTC1➁➁➁➁H2KXTC7➁➁➁➁H2KXTC35➁➁➁➁H2
KXTC1H2KXTC7H2KXTC35H2
See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency
and Assembly Codes➀
TransformerFull Voltage
Resistor
....
....
....
KXTC➀RRGGH2KXTC➀RRGGH2KXTC➀RRGGH2
KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2
KXTC➀H2KXTC➀H2KXTC➀H2
Type KXTDDual Lamp Remote
Test Pilot Light
120 Vac Resistor KXTD38RG .... KXTD38➁➁ KXTD38
See Table Below For Voltage, Frequency and Assembly Codes➀
Full VoltageResistor KXTD➀RG .... KXTD➀➁➁ KXTD➀
Type KXPC (4 Lamp) Type KXTE
(Remote Test 4 Lamp)
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz24 Vac-dc
TransformerResistor
....
....KXPC1RRGG
KXPC35RRGGKXPC1➁➁➁➁
KXPC35➁➁➁➁KXPC1
KXPC35
See Table Below For Other Voltages And Assembly Codes ➀
Full Voltageor Resistor
....
.... KXPC➀RRGG KXPC➀➁➁➁➁ KXPC➀
See Table Below For Other Voltages And Assembly Codes ➀
Full Voltageor Resistor .... KXTE➀RRGG KXTE➀➁➁➁➁ KXTE➀
Voltage Description For Use with Dual or Four Lamp Operators As Indicated
AssemblyCode ➀
Separate LightModule Type No.
RatedVA (Watts)
Lamp Number(ANSI) Lamp Part Number
6 Vac-dc12 Vac-dc24 Vac-dc28 Vac-dc48 Vac-dc60 Vac-dc
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz120 Vac-dc
208-220 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
277 V, 50-60 Hz380-480 V, 50-60 Hz550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Full VoltageResistor
Full VoltageFull Voltage
ResistorResistor
TransformerResistor
TransformerTransformerTransformerTransformerTransformer
KXPB, KXRLKXRM, KXTC
3132343536371
3837856
KXAKM231KXAKM232KXAKM234KXAKM235KXAKM236KXAKM237KXAKM21
KXAKM238KXAKM23KXAKM27KXAKM28KXAKM25KXAKM26
0.92.01.81.22.63.02.43.02.42.42.42.42.4
6PSB12PSB24PSB28PSB48PSB60PSB6PSB
120PSB6PSB6PSB6PSB6PSB6PSB
2550105007255010500325501050042550105008255010500925501050102550105007255010500525501050072550105007255010500725501050072550105007
6 Vac12 Vac24 Vac28 Vac48 Vac60 Vac
120 Vac
Full VoltageResistor
Full VoltageFull Voltage
ResistorResistorResistor
KXTD
31323435363738
KXAKM231KXAKM232KXAKM234KXAKM235KXAKM236KXAKM237KXAKM238
0.92.01.81.22.63.03.0
6PSB12PSB24PSB28PSB48PSB60PSB
120PSB
2550105007255010500325501050042550105008255010500925501050102550105005
6 Vac-dc12 Vac24 Vac28 Vac48 Vac60 Vac
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz120 Vac
Full VoltageResistorResistorResistorResistorResistor
TransformerResistor
KXPC
3132343536371
38
KXAKM431KXAKM432KXAKM434KXAKM435KXAKM436KXAKM437KXAKM41
KXAKM438
0.92.01.81.22.63.02.43.0
6PSB12PSB24PSB28PSB48PSB60PSB6PSB
120PSB
25501050072550105003255010500425501050082550105009255010501025501050072550105005
6 Vac24 Vac28 Vac
120 Vac
Full VoltageResistorResistorResistor
KXTE
31343538
KXAKMR431KXAKMR434KXAKMR435KXAKMR438
0.91.81.23.0
6PSB24PSB28PSB
120PSB
2550105007255010500425501050082550105005
Button CoversFor Use On Color Type No. Code
KXPB, KXTDIncludes 2-KXN200
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXAC28➂KXAC28➂KXAC28➂KXAC28➂KXAC28➂
R➃G➃A➃L➃W➃
KXTC (Pos. 1 & 4)Includes KXN400
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXAR4KXAG4KXAA4KXAL4KXAW4
RGALW
KXTC (Pos. 2 & 3)Includes KXN500
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXAR5KXAG5KXAA5KXAL5KXAW5
RGALW
KXTE, KXPCIncludes 1–KXN100
RedGreenAmberBlueWhite
KXAC48➄KXAC48➄KXAC48➄KXAC48➄KXAC48➄
R➅G➅A➅L➅W➅
1 2
1
2 3
4
1 2
1 2
3 4
➂ Each KXAC28 includes a clear cover and 1 each of all colors. Only 1-KXAC28 should berequired per KXPB operator –unless the same color is required for #1 and #2 – then 2-KXCA28 should be ordered.
➃ When specifying color codes – the first will be installed in #1 and the second in #2. ➄ Each KXAC48 includes a clear cover and 1 each of all colors. Only 1-KXCA48 should be
required per KXPC operator –unless the same color is required for more than 1 position. If2 of the same colors are required – order 2-KXAC48, etc.
➅ When specifying color codes — the first will be installed in #1, the second in #2, the third in#3 and the fourth in #4.
Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 110Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 118Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 123
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mmLegends
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved118
11/97
These legend inserts are for the pilot lights in the center of the operator. These legend inserts are for the push button portion of the operator. These Legend Inserts have Vertical Printing.
For Push Buttons or Pilot Lights
Used On
KXRA, KXRBKXRN, KXRPKXPA, KXPCKXTA, KXTBKXTE
KXRC, KXRDKXRE, KXRF
KXPBKXTD
KXRG, KXRHKXRJ,
KXRK
KXRG, KXRHKXRJ, KXRKKXRL, KXRMKXTC
KXRL, KXRMKXTC
Marking
BlankStartStopOnOff
Emerg. StopForwardReverse
CloseOpenDown
UpJog
ResetRun
Cycle StartMotor RunPower On
KXN100KXN101KXN102KXN103KXN104KXN105KXN106KXN107KXN108KXN109KXN110KXN111KXN118KXN123KXN124KXN132KXN136KXN138
KXN200KXN201KXN202KXN203KXN204KXN205KXN206KXN207KXN208KXN209KXN210KXN211KXN218KXN223KXN224KXN232KXN236KXN238
KXN200KXN201VKXN202VKXN203VKXN204VKXN205VKXN206VKXN207VKXN208VKXN209VKXN210VKXN211VKXN218VKXN223VKXN224VKXN232VKXN236VKXN238V
KXN300KXN301KXN302KXN303KXN304KXN305KXN306KXN307KXN308KXN309KXN310KXN311KXN318KXN323KXN324KXN332KXN336KXN338
KXN400KXN401KXN402KXN403KXN404KXN405KXN406KXN407KXN408KXN409KXN410KXN411KXN418KXN423KXN424KXN432KXN436KXN438
KXN500KXN501KXN502KXN503KXN504KXN505KXN506KXN507KXN508KXN509KXN510KXN511KXN518KXN523KXN524KXN532KXN536KXN538
Special-Marking KXN199 KXN299 KXN299V KXN399 KXN499 KXN599
For Selector Switches
Used On
KXSA, KXSB, KXSC, KXSD,KXSE, KXSF, KXSG, KXSH,KXSJ, KXSK, KXSL, KXSM,KXSN, KXSO, KXSP, KXSQ
KXSR, KXSS, KXST,KXSV, KXSW, KXSX,
KXSY, KXSZ
Marking
BlankFor.-Rev.
Hand-AutoMan-Auto
Off-OnOn-Off
Open-CloseStart-Stop
Auto-Off-HandHand-Off-AutoMan-Off-Auto
KXN600KXN639KXN640KXN643KXN644KXN645KXN646KXN651KXN658KXN660KXN662
KXN700KXN739KXN740KXN743KXN744KXN745KXN746KXN751KXN758KXN760KXN762
Spcl. Marking KXN699 KXN799
1.2331
1.2331
1.2331
0.5614
0.56141.23
31
0.4812
0.4311
0.267
Square
1.3334
0.7619
Square
KXN-600
1.3334
0.7619
Square
KXN-700
KXN100
KXN200(POS 1)
KXN300(POS 1)
KXN300(POS 2)
KXN300(POS 3)
KXN400(POS 1)
KXN400(POS 4)
KXN-400
(POS 2)
KXN-400
(POS 3)KXN200(POS 2)(POS 1)
(PO
S 1
)
(PO
S 2
)
KXN200V
KXN200V
KXRA, KXRBKXRN, KXRPKXPA, KXPCKXTA, KXTBKXTE
KXRG, KXRHKXRJ, KXRK
KXRL, KXRMKXTC
KXPB, KXTDKXRC, KXRDKXRE, KXRF
KXS
KXN600
KXN700
All Type KX push buttons and pilot lights have a blank insert asstandard. These blank inserts can be custom marked using amarking pen, a mechanical lettering set, press letters, or a tapelettering machine that marks a tape which can then be trans-ferred to the blank insert.
To have legend inserts installed into the operators, order theoperator as normal and then tell where to install the legendinserts using the numbered positions shown on the operatorordered.
Example: 9001KXRL1GRGRH2 with a9001KXN 401 in pos. 19001KXN 503 in pos. 29001KXN 504 in pos. 39001KXN 402 in pos. 4
Letter Height For Standard LegendsKXN100KXN200KXN300KXN400KXN500KXN600KXN700
1⁄4 Inch (6 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)3⁄16 Inch (4.75 mm)
1⁄8 Inch (3 mm)1⁄8 Inch (3 mm)
Maximum Number of Lines and Charactersfor Type KXN Legend Inserts
LetterHeight Number of KXN199 KXN299
HorizontalKXN299Vertical KXN399 KXN499 KXN599
1⁄4"(6 mm)
CharactersPer Line 7 7 3 7 7 3
Lines PerLegend Insert 4 2 4 1 1 1
3⁄16"(4.75 mm)
CharactersPer Line 9 9 4 9 9 4
Lines PerLegend Insert 5 2 6 2 1 2
1⁄8"(3 mm)
CharactersPer Line 14 14 5 14 14 6
Lines PerLegend Insert 8 4 9 3 2 3
Maximum Number of Lines and Charactersfor Type KXN699 and KXN799 Legend Plates
Position LetterHeight
Characters PerMarking Area
A and C B
3⁄16"(4.75 mm) 6 6
1⁄8"(3 mm) 8 9
3⁄16"(4.75 mm) 10 5
1⁄8"(3 mm) 13 7
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Accessories
11911/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
① Dial Plate only – Order Class 9001 Type KXN905. ② Uses same potentiometer as Class 9001 Type K and SK. Potentiometer shaft diameter = 1/4" (6 mm), length = 7/8" (22 mm)Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Marked.
Lockout for Push Buttons
Holds button indepressed position
Used On Type No.
KXRA-KXRCKXRD-KXREKXRF-KXRGKXRJ-KXRKKXRL-KXRMKXRH-KXRB
KXAK4
Closing Plate
UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13Square Closing Plate (Chrome Plated)
Same size as KX Bezel
Type No.
KXAK52
Boot for Push Buttons and Pilot Lights
Transparent boot usedto exclude harmful
Contaminants
Used On Type No.
All KXPush Buttons and
Pilot LightsKXAKU7
Boot For Selector Switches
Description Used On Knob Color Type No.
Transparent boot with knob used on selector switches to exclude
harmful contaminants.
All KX selector switches and potentiometer
operators (except key op.)
BlackRed
Green
KXAKU17BKXAKU17RKXAKU17G
Potentiometer (With Dial Plate) ①② Watts Description Type No.
2
Operator only — Single PotOperator with Single Pot
Operator only — Tandem PotOperator with Tandem Pot
KXBAKXBBKXBC
KXBD
Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.Example: Type KXBB05 or KXBD85
Suffix Ohms Suffix Ohms Suffix
Ohms SuffixOhms
Front Rear
01023803040532390633
50100200250500
10001500200032003500
0708400935103611
500010 K15 K25 K 35 K50 K75 K100 K
121337141516
250 K500 K750 K
1.1 Meg2.2 Meg5.0 Meg
8283858889
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
1000500010 K50 K
100 K
Shrouds
Used to color code the Type KX operators.
Type Used On Color Type No.
FullShroud
All PushButtonsand Pilot
Lights
GrayRed
GreenYellowBlackBlue
KXAK41EKXAK41RKXAK41GKXAK41YKXAK41BKXAK41L
ShortShroud
AnyKX
Operator
GrayRed
GreenYellowBlackBlue
KXAK40EKXAK40RKXAK40GKXAK40YKXAK40BKXAK40L
Basic OperatorsDescription Type
2 pos. maintained2 pos. spring return from right2 pos. spring return from left3 pos. maintained3 pos. spring return from right3 pos. spring return from left3 pos. spring return from both sides4 pos. maintained
KXSAEKXSBEKXSCDKXSDKXSEKXSFKXSGKXSHH
LinerType No.
6508900401
Wrench
Used to tighten ring nut on operators.
Type No.
K95
Lamp and Lens Removal Kit
Used to remove lamp and lens on allilluminated operators and pilot lights.
Type No.
KXALLRT
Screwdriver
Used to tighten mounting screws oncontact blocks and light modules.
Type No.
K69
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmContact Blocks
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved120
11/97
For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K orSKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For sequenc-ing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.
Minimum order quantity is 25.
Standard Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
(Clear Cover)
KA1
(Green Cover)
KA2
(Red Cover)
KA3
(Clear Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA4
(Red Cover)
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA5
(Green Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA6
Additional Circuit Arrangements Available
SequencingN.O. Contact of
KA4 closes beforeN.O. Contact on KA1 KA4 KA1
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA1
OverlappingN.O. Contact of
KA4 closes before N.C.Contact of KA5 Opens KA4 KA5
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA5
Symbol
Contact BlocksWith Binder Head Screws
(not Fingersafe)
Gold Flashed ContactsWith Standard
Pressure Wire Terminals
Type Quantity Type
KA21 25-Up KA31
KA22 25-Up KA32
KA23 25-Up KA33
N.O. EarlyClosing
KA24 25-Up KA34
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA25 25-Up KA35
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks, But Provide:• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue
connectors• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep
vs. 0.97" deep on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)
• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89.
• Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124
Symbol Type Symbol Type
KA1G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA4G
KA2GN.C. Contact Late Opening
KA5G
KA3G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA6G
Symbol Type
KA12
KA13
Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts – Types KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
Volts
DC
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type P600)
Make and Break ContinuousCarryingAmperesKA1 KA2
KA3 KA4 KA5KA6
125250600
1.10.550.2
1.10.550.2
1.1..........
1.10.550.2
101010
Volts
AC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600)35% Power Factor
Resistive 75%Power FactorMake, Break
and ContinuousAmperes
Make Break ContinuousCarryingAmperesAmperes VA Amperes VA
120240480600
60301512
7200720072007200
6.03.01.51.2
720720720720
10101010
10101010
FileCCN
E42259NKCR
FileClass
LR 254903211 03
Marking
The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are Fingersafecontact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminalscrews. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of thewiping action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will acceptup to 2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA3, KA31, and KA33 NC contacts are dirct opening.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Reed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information
12111/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explo-sion-proof equipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control sta-tions. It can save money to know what type of hazardouslocation exists. If you're not sure what type of hazardous loca-tion exists, the “Summary of Classification” Chart may help. Ifnot, contact your local electrical inspector. When you knowwhat class, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in thelower lefthand corner of this page for what Square D has to of-fer.
An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or an in-trinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardous areato a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system, any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can be used. No illu-minated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light, may be used.
Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I,Division 2 hazardous locations.1.Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.2.All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2 areas. 3.Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modulesother than the transformer type. 4.The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.
Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.
For and : UL Listed: File E10054N, CCN NOIV.For : Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.
Summary Of Classification ChartClass Division Group
I. Gas 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmos-phere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
B. Location adjacent to Division 1 location.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases Containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
II. Dust 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmos-phere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
E. Conductive and Combustible Dust (Resistivity <105 ohms/cm)
F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity >102 ohm/cm but ≤108ohm/cm)
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
III. Fibers 1. Production Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
2. Handling and Storage Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
ForUse
Class Division Group(s)I 1 A 1. Intrinsically Safe System
I 1 B, C, D 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System
I 2 A1.
2.
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System
I 2 B, C, D
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System
II 1 E, F, G 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System
II 2 E, F
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System
II 2 G
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System
III 1, 2 ....
1.2.
3.
9001 BR Station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnoteIntrinsically Safe System
All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire.
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operator isas indicated for standard contact blocks, except:
• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M,” mountreed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (eitherside), maximum 2 in tandem.
The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters through NEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.① Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor. ➁ Inductive and Resistive Ratings
Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact BlocksSuitable for use on low energy level circuits
Description Symbol Type
KA41
KA42
KA43
KA44
KA45
Max. Volts AC/DCMaximum Load
Res. Ind. Cont.32/30
120/1000.25A 8 VA
0.10A3 VA
0.5 A0.5 A
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
KA51
KA52
KA53
KA54
KA55
VoltsAC NEMA Type C300①
Make Break ContinuousCarrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
120240
10.005.00
12001200
1.0000.500
120120
3.03.0
VoltsDC NEMA Type Q150
Make Break ContinuousCarrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
115 0.50 58 0.50 58 3.0
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX“H” Numbers
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved122
11/97
Suffix No. (Add to Operator Type No.)
Positions1 2 3 4 5 6
H1H2H3H4H5H6H7H8H9H10H11H12H13H14H15H16H17H18H19
KA1KA1KA1KA1KA2KA3KA2KA3KA4KA4KA1KA2
KA2KA2KA1KA3KA1
KA1KA1KA1
KA2KA3KA1KA5KA1KA3KA1KA3KA3KA3KA1KA1KA1
KA1KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2KA3KA1
KA1
KA1KA3
KA3
KA1KA3KA1
H21 KA2 KA3 H23H24H25H26H27H28H29
KA1KA1KA5KA1KA3KA1KA1
KA1KA2KA3KA1KA3KA3KA4
KA1
KA4KA3
KA1
KA1
KA5
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3H31H32H33H34
KA2
KA1KA5
KA2KA1KA3KA1
KA1
KA3KA1
H36H37H38H39H40H41H42H43H44H45H46H47H48
KA3KA3KA5KA1KA3KA1KA2KA3KA1KA2KA5KA1
KA2KA2KA2KA1KA1KA2KA1KA2KA2KA2KA2KA3KA1
KA3
KA2KA2
KA3
KA3KA4
KA2KA3KA4KA2KA2
KA3KA2KA2KA5KA4
KA3 KA3
H50H51H52H53H54H55H56H57H58H59H60H61H62H63H64
KA5KA5KA3KA4KA4KA1KA2KA5
KA1KA1KA2KA1KA1KA3
KA3KA3KA1KA2KA5KA2KA2KA4KA5KA2KA2KA2KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA2KA2KA2
KA1KA1KA5KA3KA3KA2
KA3KA4
KA2
KA5
KA1
KA3
H66 KA3 KA1 KA3 KA1H71H72H73H74H75H76H77H78H79H80H81
KA3KA3KA1KA1KA1KA1KA1KA1KA3KA4KA1
KA3KA5KA1KA2KA3KA2
KA2KA3KA4KA1
KA3
KA3KA5KA3KA2KA1
KA5KA2
KA3
KA5KA3KA2
KA5KA5KA5KA3
KA3KA2
H82H83
KA12KA35
KA12KA33
KA13 KA13
H86H87
KA3KA3
KA2KA2
KA3KA3 KA2 KA3
H89H90H91H92H93H94H95
KA3KA1KA1KA1KA3KA1KA2
KA1KA1KA2KA2KA2KA1KA1
KA3KA1KA3KA3KA1
KA3KA2KA2KA5KA3
KA3
KA3KA5KA3
KA3KA3
H97H98H99H100
KA1KA1KA2KA1
KA3KA1KA2KA3
KA1KA2KA1
KA2KA2KA2KA2 KA2
KA2
H101H102H103H104H105H106H107
KA2KA1KA1KA1KA31KA31KA3
KA2KA3KA1KA1 KA31KA2
KA2
KA3KA1
KA5
KA2KA3KA3KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
H109H110H111H112H113H114
KA3KA3KA4KA33KA1KA21
KA3KA3KA4KA33KA1
KA2KA3KA4
KA5
KA3KA5
KA3 KA3
The design of the Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks allowsthem to be mounted side by side and/or in tandem.
The system illustrated below has been set up to enable an op-erator and a particular arrangement of contact blocks to bespecified by a single type number. Operators and contactblocks will be shipped completely assembled.
EXAMPLE: A Type KXRCGR push button with 2 Type KA1 contact blocks would be Class9001 Type KXRCGRH2.
“H” Numbers not shown in their sequence are no longer used.
Suffix No. (Add to Operator Type No.)
Positions
1 2 3 4 5 6
H115H116H117H118H119H120H121H122
KA3KA3KA2KA1KA1KA3KA3KA1
KA1KA1KA3KA5KA1KA4KA3KA3
KA5KA3KA1
KA5KA3KA3
KA3KA2KA2
KA3
KA5KA5
KA2
H124H125H126H127H128H129H130H131H132H133H134H135H136H137H138H139H140H141H142H143H144H145H146H147H148H152H153H154H155H156H157H158H159
KA5KA42KA43KA41KA2KA2KA2KA2KA3KA3KA3KA3KA45KA3KA5KA44KA43KA1KA3
KA51KA53KA53KA51KA1KA53KA4KA42KA1KA1KA1KA1
KA3KA5
KA3
KA2
KA3KA2 KA45KA3KA5 KA43KA1KA1K85
KA52
KA51KA2KA52KA5KA43KA1
KA2KA1
KA3
KA2
KA3KA3KA2KA2KA2KA5KA44
KA41KA5
KA53
KA2KA1KA1KA3KA3
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA2KA2
KA44KA2
KA4
KA2
KA1
KA3KA2
KA2
KA2KA2
KA2
H161H162H163H164H165H166H167H168H170H171H172H173H174H175H176H177H178H179
KA52KA2K85K85KA55KA22
KA54KA53KA23KA54KA1KA6KA4KA3K85KA53
K85
KA22KA23KA22KA51KA51KA23KA51KA3KA2
KA4
KA55
KA5KA4KA4
KA1KA5
KA3
KA4
KA51
KA3KA5
For Type KX
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Application Data, Materials
12311/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
The Type KX operators are UL and CSA Listed as follows:
The KX operators are rated UL Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6, 12, 13/NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4X, 6, 12, 13 without the use of protectiveboots. Boots are recommended for dirty environments or areasthat are hosed down with water under very high pressure.
Operator Service Temperature Range:-22 °F to +140 °F at 50% relative humidity-30 °C to +60 °C
Mounting Hole For Type KX Control Units
Use Greenlee Tool #60242 for punching mounting hole and notch.
Selector Switch Angular Travel
FileCCN
E42259NKCR
FileClass
25490C3211 03
Maximum Number of Contact Blocks Per OperatorMom. Push Button —Three mounted in tandem for a total of six.
Maint. Push Button —Two mounted in tandem for a total of four.
Selector Switch —Two mounted in tandem for a total of four.
Marking
Type KX Operator Materials
Single Push Button(KXRA, KXRB, KXRN, KXRP, KXTA)Gasket – NitrileLocking Head – ZAMAC #3Screws – SteelTerminals – SteelButton – PolycarbonateSeal – NitrileSeal Retainer – SteelBezel – ZincStem – PolycarbonateStem Cover – PolycarbonateLegend Insert – PolyesterReturn-Spring – Music WireRing Nut – Zinc or AluminumAdaptor – ZincAdaptor Mounting Clip – Music WireLiner – Nylon
Dual Push Button (Non-Illuminated and Illuminated)(KXRC, KXRD, KXRE, KXRF, KXRG, KXRH, KXRJ, KXRK, KXRL, KXRM, KXTC)Gasket – NitrileSeal – NitrileSeal Retainer – BrassBezel – ZincButton Stem – Stainless SteelButton – PolycarbonateButton Cover – PolycarbonateLegend Insert – PolyesterLamp Cover – PolycarbonateLens Retainer – PolycarbonateLens – PolycarbonateReturn-Spring – Music WireRing Nut – Zinc or AluminumAdaptor – ZincAdaptor Mounting Clip – Music WireLiner – NylonRetainer Ring – SteelInterlock Pad – PolyesterInterlock – Sintered SteelInterlock – Nylon (KXRD)Pin – Steel (KXRE, KXRF)Detent Bearing – Steel (KXRE, KXRF)Detent Spring – Music Wire (KXRE, KXRF)Interlock – Steel (KXRM)Baffle – SteelLocking Head – ZAMAC #3Screws – SteelStem – PolycarbonateStem Cover – PolycarbonateTerminals – Steel
Selector Switch (Non-Illuminated and Illuminated)(KXS)Gasket – NitrileSeal – NitrileSeal Retainer – SteelReturn Spring – Music WireCam Rotor – Celenex 3300Cam Follower – Delrin 100Cam Carrier – TrogamidCam Profile – Delrin 100Bearing – PolyesterBezel – ZincKnob – Polycarbonate or NylonKnob Ring Nut – PolycarbonateKnob Seal – NitrileLegend Plate – ABSPlug Insert – PolyesterKey Plug – Zinc, Brass, Music WireKey – BrassLocking Head – ZincLocking Head Seal – NitrileInsert – ZincAdaptor – ZincAdaptor Mounting Clip – Music WireLiner – NylonRing Nut – Zinc or AluminumTerminals – SteelScrews – Steel
Contact Block Type (KA)Housing– Amorphous NylonContact Slider– Nylon or AcetalTerminal– SteelSaddle Clamp– SteelSpring– SteelContacts– Silver and CopperBlade– Beryllium CopperLabel– Paper
Shrouds– Delrin 507Lockout– 410 Stainless SteelClosing Plate– ZAMAC #3Boots– NeoprenePotentiometer (KXBA, KXBB, KXBC, KXBD):
Pot – Clarostat Types J and EJOperator – ZAMAC #3Legend Plate – ABSKnob – PolycarbonatePrinted circuit board – PhenolicCam Rotor – PolyesterCam – AcetalCam Carrier – NylonAdaptor – ZAMAC #3Adaptor Spring – Square Music WireSpacer – Fiber BoardGasket – Buna NTerminal – BrassScrews – SteelBezel – Zinc Locking Head – ZAMAC #3
Legend Inserts (KXN100, KXN200, KXN300, KXN400, KXN500) – .005 Thk. Matte PolyesterLegend Plates (KXN-600, KXN-700) – ABS
Pilot Light(KXPA, KXPB, KXPC, KXTE)O-Ring – NitrileBezel – ZincButton – PolycarbonateButton Cover – PolycarbonateButton Stem – PolycarbonateScrews – SteelTerminals – SteelLens Assembly – PolycarbonateBaffle – SteelRing Nut – Zinc or AluminumAdaptor – ZincAdaptor Mounting Clip – Music Wire
Light Module (Single Lamp KM)Housing – Thermoplastic PolyesterSocket – SteelTerminal – Steel with Tin PlateSaddle Clamp – SteelTranslating Pin – PolycarbonateTransformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel, Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride,Polytetrafluoroeth-ylene, Acetate, PaperLamp Spring – Tin Plated Music Wire
Light Module (2 Lamp KXAKM2)Adaptor Screw – SteelHousing – Thermoplastic PolyesterLamp Terminal – CopperTerminal – SteelSaddle Clamp – SteelContact Spring – CopperTranslating Pin – PolycarbonateTransformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel, Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride, Polytetrafluoroeth-ylene, Acetate, Paper
Light Module (4 Lamp KXAKM4)Housing – Thermoplastic PolyesterLamp Terminal – CopperAdaptor Screw – SteelTerminal – SteelSaddle Clamp – SteelTransformer – Nylon, Steel, Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride, Polytetrafluoroethylene, Acetate, Paper
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type KX — 30 mmDimensions
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved124
11/97
Approximate Dimensions – Consult your local Square D Sales Office for latest version of dimension drawings.
Single Push Button OperatorNon-Illuminated
Selector Switch OperatorNon-Illuminated
Single Pilot Light
Dual Push Button OperatorNon-Illuminated
Key Operator Selector Switch Dual Lamp Pilot Light
Single Push Button OperatorIlluminated
Selector Switch OperatorIlluminated
Four Lamp Pilot Light
Dual Push Button OperatorIlluminated
Single Pot Potentiometer Operator Double Pot Potentiometer Operator
Dual Lamp Push Button Operator Shroud Boot Lockout
1.4737
1.0727
2.8272
1.8547
0.8822
.062
Min. .256
Max.
panel thickness
65075-125
KX RAKX RN 0.87
22
1.4737
1.2832
2.8272
1.8547
0.8822
.062
Min. .256
Max.
panel thickness
65075-125
KX SAKX SBKX SCKX SD
KX SEKX SFKX SGKX SH
1.4737
0.6416
65075-125
2.0051
.062
Min.
panel thickness
1.4737
2.8272
1.8547
0.8822
.062
Min. .256
Max.
panel thickness
65075-125
KX RCKX RDKX REKX RF
0.8722
1.4737
2.5465
2.8272
1.8547
0.8822
.062
Min. .256
Max.
panel thickness
65075-125
KX SRKX SSKX STKX SV
KX SWKX SXKX SYKX SZ
1.4737
2.7570
0.8722 22
0.85
65075-125 .062
Min. .256
Max.
panel thickness
1.4737
1.0727
2.0051
.062
Min. .256
Max.
panel thickness
65075-125
KX RBKX RPKX TA
0.9023
side 2side 1
1.4737
1.2832
65075-125
KX SJKX SKKX SLKX SM
.062
.256
Min. Max.
2.0051
panel thickness
side 1side 2
KX SNKX SOKX SPKX SQ
1.4737
3.1079
0.6416
0.8522
65075-125.062
Min. .256
Max.
panel thickness
1.4737
2.0051
.062
Min. .256
Max.
panel thickness
65075-125
KX RGKX RHKX RJKX RX
0.8722
side 2side 1
1.4737
KX BAKX BB
65075-125
1.2832
2.1555
0.8522
panel thickness.062
Min. .256
Max.
1.4737
KX BAKX BB
65075-125
1.2832
3.2081
0.8522
panel thickness.062
Min. .256
Max.
1.4737
4.69119
2.7570
0.8522
.062
Min. .256
Max.
panel thickness
65075-125
KX RLKX RMKX TC
0.8722
0.9725
1.6041
0.9324
65075-183
SHROUD
Panel Thickness0.062
Min. 0.256
Max.
1.5740
1.0627
65075-183
1.4737
2.2858
1.0827
65075-183
Minimum Centerline Spacings For Type KX21⁄4" Vertically 15⁄8" Horizontally
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
Type T 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Type T Foundry Duty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Type T Foundry Duty Selector Switches and Selector Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 127Type T Foundry Duty Operators and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Legend Plates and Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131List of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmFoundry Duty Operators
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
126
11/97
Non-Illuminated Push Button
– Legend Plate Not Included
Description Color Insert Type
HalfGuard
Universal
— Includes one of each color insert — Black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
BlackRed
GreenBlue
TR50
TR1TR2
TR15TR19
FullGuard
Universal
— Includes one of each color insert — Black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
BlackRed
TR51
TR6 TR7
ExtendedGuard
Universal
— Includes one of each color insert — Black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
BlackRed
TR52
TR35TR36
NoGuard
Universal
— Includes one of each color insert — Black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
BlackRed
TR53
TR13TR14
MushroomButton
1
3
⁄
8
" Dia. Black1
3
⁄
8
" Dia. Red2
1
⁄
4
" Dia. Black2
1
⁄
4
" Dia. Red1
3
⁄
8
" Dia. Yellow2
1
⁄
4
" Dia. GreenNo Mushroom Head
TR3TR4
TR10TR11TR22TR25TR59
Pilot Lights
– Legend Plate Not Included
Description Voltage andFrequency
Standard Pilot Light Push-To-Test Pilot Light
With RedPlastic
Color Cap
With GreenPlastic
Color Cap
With RedGlass
Color Cap
With GreenGlass
Color Cap
Type Type Type Type
Transformer
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz208-220 V, 50-60 Hz380-480 V, 50-60 Hz550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
TP1R1TP3R1TP5R1TP6R1
TP1G1TP3G1TP5G1TP6G1
TP21R2TP23R2TP25R2TP26R2
TP21G2TP23G2TP25G2TP26G2
Neon
120 Vac or dc240 Vac or dc380 Vac or dc480 Vac or dc550 Vac or dc
TP7R1TP8R1TP9R1
TP10R1TP11R1
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
Resistor 120 Vac or dc240 Vac or dc
TP19R1TP20R1
TP19G1TP20G1
TP32R2TP33R2
TP32G2TP33G2
FullVoltage
6 Vac or dc12 Vac or dc18 Vac or dc
24-28 Vac or dc60 Vac or dc120 Vac or dc
TP12R1TP13R1TP14R1TP15R1TP18R1TP19R1
TP12G1TP13G1TP14G1TP15G1TP18G1TP19G1
TP27R2TP28R2TP29R2TP30R2TP64R2TP32R2
TP27G2TP28G2TP29G2TP30G2TP64G2TP32G2
Type T illuminated operators and pilot lights use Type K light modules.For replacement lamps and VA ratings refer to listing on page 132.
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 130Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 130
Illuminated Push Button
– Contact Blocks (1 N.O.-1 N.C.) Included; Legend Plate Not Included
Description Voltage andFrequency
(Without Guard Shown)
Without Guard With Guard
With RedColor Cap
With Green
Color Cap
With RedColor Cap
WithGreen
Color Cap
Type Type Type Type
Transformer
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz208-220 V, 50-60 Hz380-480 V, 50-60 Hz550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
TP35R3TP37R3TP39R3TP40R3
TP35G3TP37G3TP39G3TP40G3
TP41R3TP43R3TP45R3TP46R3
TP41G3TP43G3TP45G3TP46G3
Resistor 120 Vac or dc240 Vac or dc
TP52R3TP53R3
TP52G3TP53G3
TP59R3TP60R3
TP59G3TP60G3
FullVoltage
6 Vac or dc12 Vac or dc18 Vac or dc
24-28 Vac or dc60 Vac or dc
TP47R3TP48R3TP49R3TP50R3TP63R3
TP47G3TP48G3TP49G3TP50G3TP63G3
TP54R3TP55R3TP56R3TP57R3TP68R3
TP54G3TP55G3TP56G3TP57G3TP68G3
Separate Color Caps
Plastic Color Caps forStandard Pilot Lights
Only
Glass Color Caps forStandard or Push To Test
Pilot Lights
Plastic Color Caps forIlluminated Push
Buttons
Color Type Type Type
Red R1 R2 R3
Green G1 G2 G3
Amber A1 A2 A3
Blue B1 B2 B3
Clear C1 C2 C3
White W1 W2 W3
Yellow ..... Y2 .....
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 227.
FileCCN
E42259NKCR
FileClass
LR 254903211 03
Marking
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmFoundry Duty Selector Switches
127
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Key Withdrawal Code: See table below for proper code number. All key operated selector switches are furnished as standard with Square D number NQ1101 key.
For replacement key, order9001NQ1101.
No other keys are available.
Fits onto Type TS1 knob.
Selector Switch Operators
–
Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included
Description Contact BlockRequired
1 - Contact Closed 0 - Contact Open
2 Position 3 Position 4 Position
Selector Switch
QuantityandType
Mounton
SideLeft Right Left Right Left Right
Center Center Center Center Center
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
1-KA1#2 1 0
0 11 00 1
0 11 0
1 0 00 1 1
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
1 0 0 00 0 1 0
1-KA1#1 1 0
0 11 00 1
0 11 0
0 0 11 1 0
1 0 00 0 1
0 0 10 1 0
1 0 00 1 0
0 1 00 0 1
0 0 0 10 1 0 0
CAMA E D B C D E F H
Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Manual Return
Standard Black Knob Key Operated
TS1TS1K
. . . . . .
. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .
TS2TS2K
TS3TS3K
TS4TS4K
TS5TS5K
TS6TS6K
TS401
Spring Return - Left to Center
Standard Black Knob Key Operated
. . . . . .
. . . . . .TS14
TS14K2
. . . . . .
. . . . . .TS15
TS15K
TS16TS16K
TS17TS17K
TS18TS18K
TS19TS19K
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Spring Return - Right to Center
Standard Black Knob Key Operated
. . . . . .
. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .
TS27TS27K1
TS511TS21K
TS521TS22K
TS531TS23K
TS541TS24K
TS551TS25K
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Spring Return - Both Sides to Center
Standard Black Knob Key Operated
. . . . . .
. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .TS8
TS8K5TS9
TS9K5TS10
TS10K5TS11
TS11K5TS12
TS12K5. . . . . .. . . . . .
Key Withdrawal Arrangement For Selector Switches
Positions marked “YES” are those in which the key can be withdrawn, locking the switch in that position.
2-Position Switches 3-Position Switches
No. No. No.
1
Yes No
4
Yes No No
8
Yes No Yes
2
No Yes
5
No Yes No
9
No Yes Yes
3
Yes Yes
6
No No Yes
10
Yes Yes Yes
7
Yes Yes No
Selector Push Button Operators
–
Legend Plate And Contact Block Not Included
ContactBlocks
Required
Two Position Operators
1 = Contact Closed F = Free0 = Contact Open D = Depressed
1 — KA1
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D F D
1 00 1
0 01 1
1 10 0
0 00 1
0 00 1
1 00 0
1 10 0
1 00 1
. . . . . .
. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .
2 — KA1
1 00 1
0 01 1
1 00 1
0 00 1
0 00 1
1 00 0
1 00 1
1 10 0
0 00 1
1 00 1
0 00 1
1 10 0
1 00 1
0 01 1
1 10 0
0 00 1
0 00 1
1 00 0
1 10 0
1 00 1
0 00 1
1 10 0
1 10 0
0 00 1
Cam Z Y R T P S
Half GuardBlack Insert
Full GuardBlack Insert
Extended GuardBlack Insert
TQ1
TQ11
TQ62
TQ2
TQ12
TQ56
TQ36
TQ39
TQ69
TQ26
TQ48
TQ59
TQ42
TQ45
TQ71
TQ50
TQ53
TQ73
Gloved Hand Knob For Selector Switch
Type
T7
Adapter Kit
Allows a Type T Operator to be mounted in Type K mounting hole.
Part Number
3042654250
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmFoundry Duty Operators & Accessories
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
128
11/97
Padlock Attachments
Latch TypePadlock Attachment
Cover TypePadlock Attachment
Selector SwitchPadlock Attachment
Latch TypePadlock Attachment
Type Type Type Type
TL1 TL2 TL3 TL5
Locks button in depressed position. Must be used with operator having standard half guard. Can be
used with mushroom buttons.
(Padlock not furnished.) Must be used with operator having standard half guard. (Padlock not furnished.) Locks button (with Type TU cap) in depressed
position. Does not include cap.
Maintained Contact Arrangement
Type
TM1
Use with two Type TR push buttons and one contact block. The contact block should always be assembled to the “Stop”operator. Not for use on illuminated push buttons.
Alternate Action (Push-on Push-off) Module
This module can be added to standard 9001 Type K, KX, SK or T oper-ators. Contact blocks mounted behind this module (maximum of 2) will be held in the depressed position when the operator is operated once and released to their normal position when the operator is operated again.
For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001 KA1 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA4. For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of the 9001KA4 or a 9001KA6.
Type
K85
Screwdriver
Used to tighten mounting screws on Type K contact blocksand light modules.
Type
K69
Protective Cap
The Type TU1 thru 6 cap will prevent metal shavings and other foreign matter from interfering with proper operation of oil tight push buttons. They are for use with the KY, KZ and KYAF enclosures and can be used with TN legend plates.
Color Type
BlackRed
BrownGreenYellow
TU1TU2TU4TU5TU6
Watertight Cap
These caps are for use on the Class 9001 Type KYSS NEMA Type 4 water tight enclosures. To retain the watertight seal (NEMA Type 4), sepa-rately mounted legend plates must be used (not available from Square D).
Color
For Push Buttons
For Selector Sw.
Type Type
BlackRedBlue
BrownGreenYellow
TU11TU12TU13TU14TU15TU16
TU51TU52TU53TU54TU55TU56
Clear Silicone Cap
–For standard pilot lightsFor push to test pilot lights and illuminated push buttons
TU17
TU27
Push Button Wrench
Type
T1
Simplifies installation of Type T units.
Trim Washer
Type
TN5
For use where legend plate is not required. Keeps ringnut from marring panel finish.
Liner
Part Number
310501401
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmFoundry Duty Operators
129
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
These switches are furnished with special contact blocks.
Symbol 104 is same as 103 except contacts A1 and B1 are not furnished.
Three Position Master Switches
Description Symbol Type
3-Position Master Switch, Complete with Contact Block Maintained
Contact Spring Return to Center
103104
TS80E2TS82D1
3-Position Master Switch, Without
Contact Block TS80
Basic Operators
Illuminated Push ButtonWith Full Guard
Less Color Cap And Light Module
Standard Pilot LightLess Color Cap And Light
Module
Illuminated Push ButtonWithout Guard And
Push To Test Pilot LightLess Color Cap, Light Module
And Contact Block
Type Type Type
T1L TP T2L
Maintained Push Button With 1
3
⁄
8
" Mushroom Button
Button locks in the depressed position – Turning knurled ring releases operator to its normal position. Price includes nameplate:
"Push-to-Stop Rotate Collar CW to Start".
Color Type
BlackRed
GreenBrownYellowOrange
Blue
TRM3TRM4TRM20TRM21TRM22TRM23TRM24
Time Delay Push Button
Timing period is adjustable from 0.2 second to 60 seconds and begins after push button has been released. Devices require the space of two standard operators. Devices include a package of seven color inserts for color coding the push button. Contacts are quick make - quick break.
Type listed is half guard version. Legend plate not included.
Description
TimedContact1 N.O. &1 N.C.
Type
TRD150
Correct Drilling For Mounting All Devices
1
7
⁄
32
" diameter hole may be cut with Greenlee knockout punch, No. 60246,available through electrical wholesalers.
Enclosure Minimum Spacings
Type TL1 or TL2 padlock attachments can be added to TR-Type operatorswithout adding to overall dimensions or without interference to otheroperators mounted adjacent.
Type TM1 maintained contact device may be installed on two push buttonunits mounted from 1
1
⁄
16
" (min.) to 2
1
⁄
2
" (max.) apart, arranged either verti-cally or side by side. The contact block should always be assembled to theoperator designated as Stop, Off or Safe.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmLegend Plates & Contact Blocks
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
130
11/97
Contact Blocks
All Type T Operators Accept Type KA Blocks. Types KA1 and KA3 N.C. contacts are direct opening.
Type K
SymbolType K Equivalent
Type T
Type Type
KA1 TA
KA2 TA2
KA3 TA1
Type T
TwoTypeKA1
OneTypeTB
TwoTypeKA2
OneTypeTD
TwoTypeKA3
OneTypeTC
2 Pole Double Throw For Tandem Mounting
With Type TB Contact Block Only
Symbol Type
TF
Note: A Special Purpose Block is not required to mount a Type K Block in tandem.
Contact Block Rating — Maximum AC
Type K and Type T
Volts
AC Amperes – NEMA Type A600
Inductive PilotDuty
35% Power Factor
Resistive75%
Power Factor
Make Break ContinuousMake, Break,
andContinuous
120240480600
60301512
63
1.51.2
10101010
10101010
Contact Block Rating – Maximum DC
Volts
Type K Type T
DC Inductive and Resistive DC AmperesInductive Pilot Duty
Make and BreakKA5
ContinuousCarryingAmperes
Makeand
Break
Con-tinuousKA1 KA2
KA3 KA4
120240600
1.10.550.2
1.10.550.2
1.1........
1.10.550.2
101010
2.2........
10........
The maximum number of characters and lines given above is a practical maximum and isbased on a minimum size of characters to facilitate easy reading. When fewer charactersthan the maximum are required the size of the characters is changed to permit the best read-ability.
Dimensions
For dimensions of operators, see Approval Drawing Pads 9001-16, 9001-17, and 9001-18. These can be requested from yourlocal Square D sales office.
Legend Plates
TN-200
Standard legend plate markings and special markings are listed in 30mm Push Buttons Types K and SK – order as Type TN2... or TN3... rather than Type KN.
Example: Legend plate marked “Forward,” order TN206 or TN306.
Special Legend Plates
Description Type
DoubleHeaded
TN4
Extra large
For customer's enclosure only. Minimum
spacing between operators must be 2
5
⁄
16
" vertically and 2
1
⁄
4
" hori-zontally.
TN6
Maximum Number Of Lines And CharactersFor Type TN Legend Plates
Type
TN2 TN3 TN4 TN6
Max. No. of Characters per Line
16 16 16 22
Max. No. of Lines
1 3 2 4
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mmLight Modules
131
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Standard Light Modules for Type T Control Units
➃
• Neon type light modules — use CLEAR color caps only..
Shallow Depth Light Modules For Type T Control Units
• Reduces the depth of illuminated push buttons with contact blocks by over 33%.
➀
9001 K, SK, KX.➁ Do not use on any remote test version pilot light.➂ For Series A through F light modules – see page 106.➃ 9001K, SK, T
Voltage Description
For UseWith Single Lamp Ill.
Operators as Indicated➀
Light Module
Type No.
Voltage Assembly
CodeRating
Replacement Lamps ➂
LampNumber(ANSI)
Lamp PartNumber
6 Vac-dc Full Voltage All KM31 31 0.9 VA 755 2550101020
12-14 Vac-dc Full Voltage All KM32 32 1.2 VA 756 2550101037
18 Vac-dc Resistor All KM33 33 1.4 VA 756 2550101037
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage All KM35 35 1.2 VA 757 2550101002
32 Vac-dc Resistor All KM23 23 2.5 VA 757 2550101002
48 Vac-dc Full Voltage All KM36 36 2.6 VA 48MB 2550101025
60 Vac-dc Full Voltage All KM37 37 3.0 VA 60MB 2550101026
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformerFlashing
All Except ➁ All Except ➁ All Except ➁
KM2KM1KMF1
21F1
2.2 VA2.4 VA0.85 VA
1490755267
255010100325501010202550101036
120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc120 Vac-dc
ResistorFull VoltageNeon
AllAllAll Except ➁
KM38KM38KM11
383811
3.0 VA3.0 VA0.2 VA
120MB120MBNE51H
255010102725501010272550101013
208-220 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except ➁ KM3 3 2.5 VA 755 2550101020
220-240 V, 25-30 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
TransformerTransformerFlashing
All Except ➁ All Except ➁ All Except ➁
KM4KM7KMF7
47F7
2.2 VA2.0 VA2.0 VA
1490755267
255010100325501010202550101036
240 Vac-dc240 Vac-dc
ResistorNeon
All Except ➁ All Except ➁ and KX
KM25KM12
2512
6.0 VA0.3 VA
120MBNE51H
25501010272550101013
277 V, 50-60 Hz Transformer All Except ➁ KM8 8 2.4 VA 755 2550101020
380 ac-dc Neon All Except ➁ and KX KM13 13 0.4 VA NE51H 2550101013
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz480 Vac-dc
TransformerNeon
All Except ➁ All Except ➁ and KX
KM5KM14
514
2.8 VA0.5 VA
755NE51H
25501010202550101013
550 Vac-dc550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
NeonTransformer
All Except ➁ and KXAll Except ➁
KM15KM6
156
0.6 VA2.5 VA
NE51H755
25501010132550101020
Voltage DescriptionFor Use With Single
Lamp Ill. Operators as Indicated ➃
Light Module Type No.
Voltage Assembly
CodeRating
Replacement Lamps ➂
Lamp Number(ANSI)
Lamp PartNumber
24-28 Vac-dc Full Voltage All Except ➁ and KX KM55 55 1.2 VA 757 2550101002
110-120 Vac-dc Full Voltage All Except ➁ and KX KM58 58 3.0 VA 120MB 2550101027
2.78 in70.61 mm
1.75 in44.45 mm
StandardDuty
ShallowDepth
1.8948.01
1.8747.50
1.1228.45
1.7343.94
1.8747.50
Side View Top View
Side Viewshown with 9001 KA contact block
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.
FileCCN
E42259NKCR
FileClass
LR 254903211 03
Marking
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type T – 30 mmList of Materials
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved132
11/97
Type TR push button
Base — Chrome plated zinc alloy die castingRing nut, stem and mushroom knob — Anodised aluminiumStem on mushroom head type — Stainless steelReturn spring — Stainless steelSeal washer — Cork/neoprene rubberOperating disc — Zinc plated steelGasket — Buna N rubberColor inserts — PolyethyleneSpring cup — BrassAllen screw on mushroom head — Steel alloy with Zinc oxide finish
Type TS selector switchRing nut, gasket, seal washer, return spring and spring cupsame as Type TR above.
Base and switch knob — Chrome plated zinc alloy die castingShaft — Stainless steelCam — Zinc alloyColor inserts — NylonBall Bearing — Stainless steelBall bearing spring — Stainless steelScrew and lock washer — Zinc plated steel Circlip — Spring steel with black phosphate finishGuide and spacer — Zinc plated steel (spring return type)Seal — Buna N rubber (spring return type)Various pins — Brass or zinc plated steel (spring return type)
Type TSK key operated selector switchAs type TS except as follows:
Lock barrel — Chrome plated zinc alloy die castingLock — Zinc alloy, brass tumblers, steel springs & stainless steel capKnob — Zinc alloy with aluminium shaftLock plate — Brass
Type TP pilot light
Base — Bright zinc plated zinc alloy castingRing nut — AluminiumReflector — AluminiumGasket — Buna N rubberLens — Glass in aluminium holder with Buna N rubber seals or
PolycarbonateLabel — PaperLight module — Type KM as supplied by Square D Ashville
Type TP push to test and illuminated push button
Base — Bright zinc plated zinc alloy castingRing nut — AluminiumOperator — Glass filled polyesterSpring support — Zinc plated steelGasket — Buna N rubberSeal — Nitrile rubberSpring — Stainless steelLock ring — TrogamidLens — PolycarbonateLabel — PaperLight module and contact block — Type KM and KA as supplied
by Square D Asheville
Type T contact block
Contact block — Melamine phenolicContacts — SilverContact backing — BrassMoving contact — Copper/silverOperating button — PhenolicStem — BrassCollar — Zinc alloyTerminal clamps — Zinc plated steelScrews — Zinc plated steelCover — Epoxy/glass laminateSprings — Stainless steel
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Options, Replacement Parts, and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Wiring and LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Class 8330
™
Control BusVersion 2
30 mm Push Button Modules
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
SERIPLEX
Control Bus Version 230 mm Push Button Modules
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
134
11/97
1.2 N•m(11 lb-in)
INSTALLLINER
0°
90°180°
270°
KX
K, SK & T
K, SK & T
KM
KA6•KM
KA6•
KA
KM35•BP
INSTALLLINER
The
Class 9001 Dedicated Module for 30mm Push Buttons
provides an interface between the SERIPLEX control bus andany of the Square D Class 9001 Type K, SK, KX and T push but-tons, pilot lights and selector switches (exceptions: 5-positionjoy stick and Type KX multi-lamp operators). Single-bit bus inter-face circuitry is used in this module. If multiplexed operation isused by the CPU interface card, the push button module isscanned every frame. This adaptor module is not capable of be-ing multiplexed (See page 9 for details).
Features
• Can be used with any Type K, SK, KX or T push button, pilotlight or selector switch operator (exceptions: 5-position joystick operators and Type KX multi-lamp operators)
• Performs control for illuminated and non-illuminated push but-ton operators
• Relay output dedicated modules are for illuminated operatorswith a standard Type KM light module
• Bus powered lamp modules don’t require an auxiliary powersupply or additional power conductors
• Bus powered lamp modules use high visibility, low currentconsumption LED lamps, providing long life and greater sys-tem flexibility
• LED indicators provided on all modules showing power-onstatus, input status and output status – a convenient installa-tion and troubleshooting aide
• Modules use quick and easy IDC panel cabling including pre-terminated cable (Catalog #CBL2222P38C05L20)
Assembly and Dimensions
With insulation displacement connector
See page 135 for general purpose ratings.
Contacts Closed = x Contacts Open = o
For additional information, see catalog 8330CT9601R11/96.
Dedicated Modules for Non-illuminated Operators
Catalog Number Input Type Address A Input Type Address B Output Type
9001KA61
N.C. N.O. none
9001KA62
— N.O. none
9001KA63
N.C. — none
Dedicated Modules for Illuminated Operators Using a Class 9001 Type KM Light Module
Catalog Number Input TypeAddress A
Input TypeAddress B
Output TypeAddress B
9001KA60KM
— — Electromechanical Relay
9001KA61KM
N.C. N.O. Electromechanical Relay
9001KA62KM
— N.O. Electromechanical Relay
9001KA63KM
N.C. — Electromechanical Relay
Dedicated Modules Using Bus Powered LED Lamps for Illuminated Operators
Catalog Number Input TypeAddress A
Input TypeAddress B
Output TypeAddress B
9001KM350BPA
— — LED Lamp - Amber
9001KM350BPG
— — LED Lamp - Green
9001KM350BPR
— — LED Lamp - Red
9001KM351BPA
N.C. N.O. LED Lamp - Amber
9001KM351BPG
N.C. N.O. LED Lamp - Green
9001KM351BPR
N.C. N.O. LED Lamp - Red
9001KM352BPA
— N.O. LED Lamp - Amber
9001KM352BPG
— N.O. LED Lamp - Green
9001KM352BPR
— N.O. LED Lamp - Red
9001KM353BPA
N.C. — LED Lamp - Amber
9001KM353BPG
N.C. — LED Lamp - Green
9001KM353BPR
N.C. — LED Lamp - Red
Selector Switch Logic Table (Operators only. Select 2-input modules from table above.)
Class 9001 Operator Type
KS42 KS43 KS44 KS11 KS25 KS46 KS88
Cam Type B C D E F H X
Knob Position
Address A (N.C.) x o o x o o o o x x o x o o x o o o o x x o
Address B (N.O.) o x o o o x o x o o x o o x o x o o o o x x
1.50
38.1
inmm
1.6241.1
2.16
54.9
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
SERIPLEX
Control Bus Version 230 mm Push Button Modules
135
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Example: To order conformal coating for catalog number 9001KA61, change to 9001KA61T.
The fracture torque leads to damage of the screw shaft, stripping of the thread or deformation of the screw slot.
Options, Replacement Parts and Accessories
Catalog Number Description
SPX30MMXCAM
4-position selector switch cam for use with SERIPLEX modules for 30mm operators
SPXLEDA1
Replacement LED Lamp – amber
SPXLEDG1
Replacement LED Lamp – green
SPXLEDR1
Replacement LED Lamp – red
SPXUSER2
Replacement user label (has marking surface for addresses and control words). Quantity 10.
9001KXALLRT
Lamp Removal Tool
add a ‘
T
’ to the end of a catalog number
Conformal coating. Increases Micro-Environmental Category rating from MEC pollution degree II to MEC pollution degree III, as outlined in IEC 664-1, section 2.5.1. Conformal coating meets MIL-I-46058C.
Specifications
SERIPLEX bus power requirements: Nominal voltage rating Power supply voltage range at 25
°
C
24 Vdc19.2 to 30 Vdc including ripple
Bus power supply current drain (25
°
C, 24 Vdc)
no relay output: 7 mA typicalrelay output: 16 mA typicalbus powered LED lamp: 18 mA typical
Worst case bus power supply current drain (-25
°
C, 30 Vdc)
no relay output: 8 mArelay output: 24 mA bus powered LED lamp: 24 mA
Module capacitance
75 pF typical
Bus clock frequency operating range
10 kHz to 200 kHz
Operating temperature
-25
°
C to +70
°
C (-13
°
F to +158
°
F)
Storage Temperature
-40
°
C to +85
°
C (-40
°
F to +185
°
F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95%, non-condensing
Electromechanical Relay Rating (UL)
250 Vac, 30 Vdc, 2.5 A resistive pilot duty: AC - 180 VA, DC - 15 VA, C300
Micro-environmental category
II (per IEC664-1, Section 2.5.1)
Shock (IEC 68-2-27)
30 g, 3 axes, 11 ms duration, half sine pulse
Vibration (IEC 68-2-6)
10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm peak-to-peak, 2 hour in 3 axes
Noise immunity: Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) Fast transients Impulse
IEC801-2IEC801-3IEC801-4IEC255-4
Compliance standards
UL File E114926, CSA File LR53531 (submitted), NOM-117
Screw terminal block specifications (relay versions only) conductor capacity
Screw terminal torque Fracture torque
Wire strip length
single conductor: UL 14 - 22 AWG, CSA 14 - 26 AWGtwo conductors: 18 AWG - 28 AWG0.4 N•m (3.5 lb-in)0.8 N•m (7.0 lb-in)7 mm (0.3 in.)
Maximum allowable standard contact blocks mounted on a SERIPLEX dedicated module
One Contact Block (Class 9001 Type KA1 through Class 9001 Type KA6)
Bus cable connectionPart #SPX 5IDC22, reference
Bulletin #30298-050-01 for installation
white (data)
blue (clock)
red (V+)
black (common)
bare (sheild drain)
Relay (output B)
S
L
FieldSupply
L=Class 9001Type KM
Light ModuleLED Indicators
OB IB IAP
Locating notch on Operator for selector switch applications
Actuating stem for input address B (N.O.)
Actuating stem for input address A (N.C.)
Wiring and LED Indicators
LED Color Function and Address
I
A
yellow Input A Active
I
B
yellow Input B Active
P green Bus Power Applied
O
B
yellow Output B Active
®
File LR 53531
File E114921CCN NRAQ
Class 2252 01
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
SERIPLEX
Control Bus Version 2
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
136
11/97
Square D offers specialized control packages through the Modified Panels Group. Assemblies can be manufactured to meet your specific design criteria, incorporating special dimensions, enclosure types, and component makeup.
Specific control operator needs can be satisfied with products ranging fromstandard 30 mm push buttons to printed circuit board mounted pilot device assemblies.
In addition, Square D offers the widest variety of control products in numerous enclosure types to meet your electrical, environmental, anddimensional needs. Use of CAD designs, prototype assembly before production, and personalized service insures the product you receive will be exactly what you ordered...Guaranteed.
For additional information or receive a personalized proposal, contact your local Square D sales office.
Modified Panels by Square D
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
Type B and 30 mm Control Stations
Class 9001
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Type B Standard Duty Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Accessories and Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Type K, SK, and KX Industrial Duty Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Type K and Sk Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Type K, SK, KX, and T Flush Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Type K and SK Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Type KY and KZC Security Control Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Type K, SK, KX, and T Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Hazardous Location Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control Stations
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
138
11/97
Standard duty control stations are designed for use with magnetic motor starters to govern the starting, stopping, or reversing of all types of electricmotors. Push buttons are momentary contact unless otherwise indicated. Selector switches are maintained contact.
Control Stations
Many items are stock or can be furnished as a quick ship using a “Universal” station plus accessories.
No.of
UnitsNameplate Markings and Features Contact Symbol
See page 141
Surface MountingNEMA Type 1
t
Stainless SteelFlush Plate
(Pullbox
k
not included)
t
Watertight andDusttight
NEMA Type 4
t
For Hazardous Locations
Class I, Div. I & IIGroups B, C and DClass II Div. I & II
Groups E, F and GNEMA Types 7 & 9
t
Type Type Type Type
1
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop (Mushroom Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal (w/o Legend Inserts)
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1333
16
BG101BG102BG103BG104BG107
BF101BF102
.....
.....BF107
BW146BW147BW151BW148BW159
BR101.....
BR103BR104BR107
Off-on (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal Selector Switch (w/o Legend Insert)
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1917
19 or 17
BG111BG112BG114
BF111BF112BF114
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Green Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pilot Light (w/o Lens): 120 Vac or dc
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121121121
BG121BG122BG123
BF121BF122BF123
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
2
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (Mushroom on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (Mushroom on Start and Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Raise-Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal (w/o Legend Inserts)
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On-Off (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hand-Auto (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop
(Red Mushroom on Stop, Both Buttons Maintained). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal (Maintained Contact w/o Legend Inserts)
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145146145145145146146146146145146251010101010
BG201BG202BG203BG204BG205BG206BG207BG208BG209BG210BG211BG214BG215BG216BG217
.....BG218
BF201BF202
.....
.....
.....BF206BF207BF208BF209BF210BF211BF214BF215BF216BF217
.....BF218
BW240BW252BW250BW241BW246BW242BW244BW243BW253BW245BW254BW260BW255BW256BW257
.....BW258
BR204BR202BR203BR204BR205BR206BR207BR208BR209BR210BR211BR214BR215BR216BR217BR219BR218
Off-On (Selector Switch), Red P.L.: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch), Red P.L.: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal Selector Switch & Pilot Light 120 Vac
or dc (w/o Legend Insert & w/o Lens)
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch) & Start (Push Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal Selector Switch & Push Button
(w/o Legend Inserts)
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 & 12117 & 121
17 or 19& 121
17 & 1
17 or 19& 16
BG221BG223
BG224
BG225
BG226
BF221BF223
BF224
BF225
BF226
q
“Universal” designates control stations without legend inserts, lenses or accessory kits. Universal stations plus separate legend inserts and other acces-sories listed on page 139 allow the user to conveniently build up standard or custom stations.
k
Use standard 2.0 or 2.13 inch deep wall boxes, single gang for Types BF1 – and BF2 – and two gang for Type BF3 –.
t
For replacement interiors, see page 140.Replacement enclosures (case and/or cover) are not available for Type BR devices.
Lockout must be factory installed on NEMA Type 4 devices. However, replace-ment covers are available with the lockout feature as standard. See page 139.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 139Replacement Parts. . . .Page 139-140Replacement Interiors . . . . Page 140Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 141Contact Symbols . . . . . . . . Page 141
Fast-Slow-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Open-Close-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Raise-Lower-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Jog-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Forward-Reverse-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up-Down-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .High-Low-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal (w/o Legend Inserts)
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109109109109109109109109109109
8
BG301BG302BG303BG304BG305BG306BG316BG322BG325BG326BG307
BF301BF302BF303BF304BF305BF306
.....
.....
.....
.....BF307
3
Start-Stop, Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Universal Push Buttons (2) & Pilot Light: 120 Vac
or DC (w/o Legend Inserts & w/o Lens)
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (Maintained Contacts) & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . .On-Off (Maintained Contact) & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . .Hand-Auto (Maintained Contacts), & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . .Universal Push Buttons (Maintained Contact) & Pilot Light: 120 Vac or DC (w/o Legend Inserts & w/o Lens)
q
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch), & Start-Stop (Push Buttons) . . . . . . . . . .Universal Selector Switch & 2 Push Buttons (w/o Legend Inserts)
q
. . . . .
145 & 121
25 & 12110 & 12110 & 12110 & 121
10 & 12117 & 145
17 or 19 & 25
BG308
BG309BG310BG311BG312
BG313BG314BG315
BF308
BF309BF310BF311BF312
BF313BF314BF315
NEMA Type 4Type BW243
NEMA Types 7-9Type BR103
NEMA Type 1Surface Mounting
Type BG201
NEMA Type 1Flush Mounting
(w/o pullbox)Type BF201
File E42259CCN NKCR
File LR 25490Class 3211 03
Marking
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control StationsAccessories and Legends
139
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Mushroom Caps – Kits do not include legendinsert; order separate legend insert from thetables below.
EX: For red mushroom button marked STOP,order one 9001 Type B301 plus one 9001Type B102.
Lockout Kit – For
NEMA Type 1
surfacemounting stations, bottom unit only. Can beused on either push button or on 2 or 3position selector switch. Lockout cannot beused with mushroom cap.
Color Type
For NEMA TYPE 1 surface mounting stations
Red B301
Black B302
For NEMA Type 4
Red B303
Type
B321
Pilot Light Lenses
ColorFor NEMA Type 1Surface Mounting
For NEMA Type 1Flush Mounting
Type Type
Red B331 B341
Green B332 B342
Interchangeable Push Button Legend Inserts
Marking
ForNEMA Type 1
Surface Mounting
Push Button& Mushroom
Caps
ForNEMA Type 1
Flush Mounting
For NEMA Type 4 and
NEMA Types 7-9Lever Type
Square
For NEMA Type 4Button Type
Round
MushroomButton Inserts
For NEMA Type 4
Type Type Type Type Type
StartStopFastSlowForwardReverseOpenCloseRaiseLowerUpDownHighLowOnOffHandAutoJogBlank-BlackBlank-Red
B101B102B103B104B105B106B107B108B109B110B111B112B113B114B115B116B117B118B119B129
B129R
B131B132B133B134B135B136B137B138B139B140B141B142B143B144B145B146B147B148B149B159
B159R
B161B162B163B164B165B166B167B168B169B170B171B172B173B174B175B176B177B178B179B189
B189R
B259B260. . . .. . . .
B255B256B263B264B261B262B253B254. . . .. . . .
B257B258B265B266. . . .
B251B252
B282B283. . . .. . . .
B278B279B286B287B284B285B276B277. . . .. . . .
B280B281B288B289. . . .
B251B252
Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.
t
Replacement cover has lockout factory installed on cover.
Replacement Covers for BF and BW
For Types Types
BF101-BF123BF201-BF226BF301-BF315BW146-BW147BW148
t
BW149-BW159BW240BW241
t
BW242-BW260
304000031130400003023110104301
BWD108BWD109BWD108BWD219BWD220BWD219
Selector Switch Knob for Types BG & BF Selector Switches
SylvaniaLamp No.
120PSB
Replacement Lamp
SylvaniaLamp No.
Square DPart No.
120PSB 2550105005
Replacement Lamp Holder
Type
BGC124
Interchangeable Selector Switch Legend Plates
MarkingFor NEMA Type 1Surface Mounting
For NEMA Type 1Flush Mounting
Type Type
Off-OnHand-Off-AutoManual-AutoFoward-ReverseOpen-CloseOpen-Off-CloseHand-AutoForward-Off-ReverseSummer-WinterSummer-Off-WinterLow-Off-HighUp-Off-Down
B201B202B203B204B205B206B207B208B209B210B211B212
B231B232B233B234B235B236B237B238B239B240B241B242
Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.
Legend Insert Kits
(Kit includes one each of standard legend inserts as indicated below, TypeNo. of kit.)
Where Used: Type
For NEMA Type 1Surface Mounting
Push Buttons B100 (Incl's 1 eachof B101 thru B119)
Selector Switches B200 (Incl's 1 eachof B201 thru B212)
For NEMA Type 1Flush Mounting
Push Buttons B130 (Incl's 1 eachof B131 thru B149)
Selector Switches B230 (Incl's 1 eachof B231 thru B242)
For NEMA Type 4 andNEMA Type 7-9 Lever
Type, SquarePush Button B160 (Incl's 1 each
of B161 thru B179)
For NEMA Type 4Button Type, Round Push Button B250 (Incl's 1 each
of B253 thru B266)
For NEMA Type 4Button Type Mushroom Button B300 (Incl's 1 each
of B276 thru B289)
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control StationsReplacement Parts
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
140
11/97
Replacement Interiors For Type B Standard Duty Push Button Stations
For Control Station Types
Contact Symbol Contact Block Assembly
TypeTerminal Block Wiring Receptacle
Type
BF101—BF107 16 BOC107 BFB107
BF111—BF114 19 or 17 BOC114 BFB114
BF121—BF123 121 BOC123 BFB123
BF201—BF214 25 BOC214 BFB214
BF215—BF218 10 BOC218 BFB214
BF221—BF224 7 or 19 & 121 BOC224 BFB224
BF225—BF226 17 or 19 & 16 BOC226 BFB226
BF301—BF307 8 BOC214 & BOC107 BFB214 & BFB107
BF308—BF309 25 & 121 BOC214 & BOC123 BFB214 & BFB123
BF310—BF313 10 & 121 BOC218 & BOC123 BFB214 & BFB123
BF314—BF315 17 or 19 & 25 BOC214 & BOC114 BFB214 & BFB114
BG101—BG107 16 BGC107 BGB107
BG111—BG114 17 or 19 BGC114 BGB114
BG121—BG123 121 BGC123 BGB123
BG201—BG214 25 BGC214 BGB214
BG215—BG218 10 BGC218 BGB214
BG221—BG224 17 or 19 & 121 BGC224 BGB224
BG225—BG226 17 or 19 & 16 BGC226 BGB226
BG301—BG307BG316—BG326 8 BGC307 BGB307
BG308—BG309 25 & 121 BGC309 BGB309
BG310—BG313 10 & 121 BGC313 BGB309
BG314—BG315 17 or 19 & 25 BGC315 BGB315
BR101—BR107 16 BOC107 BFB107
BR202—BR214 25 BOC214 BFB214
BR215—BR219 10 BOC218 BFB214
BW101—BW107 16 BOC107 BFB107
BW202—BW214 25 BOC214 BFB214
BW215—BW218 10 BOC218 BFB214
BW146—BW159 16 BOC360
BW240—BW260 25 BOC361
BW255—BW258 10 BOC362
Note:
Contact block assemblies for all Type BG stations include cover and contact block.Replacement contact block assemblies and terminal block wiring receptacles for push buttons have provision for 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. circuit on each button. Unneeded circuits need not be wired.
q
Order separate legend plates, if required, from listing on page 139.
Electrical Contact Ratings
AC – NEMA Type B600 DC – NEMA Type P600
Volts
Inductive
35% Power Factor
Resistive
75% Power FactorVolts
Inductive
and
Resistive
Make Break ContinuousCarryingAmperes
Make, Breakand Continuous
Carrying Amperes
Make andBreak
Amperes
ContinuousCarryingAmperesAmps VA Amps VA
120240480600
30.5 15 7.5 6
3600360036003600
3.751.50.750.6
360360360360
5555
5555
120240600
1.10.550.2
555
Type BGC214(Type BGC contact block
assemblies include cover.)Type BGB214
BOC361
“C” Shaped Mounting Bracketfor 9001 BR Interior
3110112001
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control StationsDimensions
141
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Contact Symbols
Approximate Dimensions
1
3 8 10 16
17
19 25 109 145 146
121
120 V Com
Surface Mount
Type BG
Glass Filled Polyester Cover
0.47
12
2.76
70
3.6994
0.34
9
0.72
18
1.38
35
0.48
12
2.34
60
0.19
5(2) Dia Mtg Holes
2.06521.03
26
0.174
2.5364
0.8822
K.O. for 1/2-3/4 cond.both ends
C 30064-834
0.4512
4.09
104
5.00
127
0.34
9
0.72
16
1.38
35
0.48
12
2.34
60
(2)0.19
5Dia Mtg Holes
2.0652
0.174
2.1956
2.4161
0.8822
K.O. for 1/2-3/4 cond.both ends
withmushroom button
C 30052-834
1.0326
Hazardous Location
Type BR
Cast Aluminum Enclosure
3.951001.37
35
0.308 2X
6.36162
5.75146
ON
OFF
0.287O
0.7018
1.3735
conduit centerline
0.318
2X Mtg Holes0
4.35110
1.19
30
1/2-14 NPT Pipe TapBottom Only
Padlock Hole
Watertight & Dusttight
Type BW
Cast Zinc Enclosure
2.76702.2557
3.7595
4.25108
1.38
35
.38
10
B 65075-060
.218 Dia.Mtg. Hole(2) Plcs.
Flush Mount
Type BF
Stainless Steel
0.6115
4.50114
3.2883
1.6341
2.1354
0.164
(4) Dia Mtg Holes
C 30064-835A
3.3886
2.2557
1.8146
1.3835
4.561162.28
58
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmIndustrial Duty Enclosures
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
142
11/97
➀
Type K Series A through Series G operators were rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 12, and 13. Type K Series H operators are rated UL Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, and 13.
➁
Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical.
➂
For machine cavity mounting. Pull box not available.
➃
Type KN1, KN6 and KN7 a series of legend plates will not fit on these enclosures.
➄
Standard Type KYSS enclosures are supplied with Type 304 stainless steel — Use Form Y35 and order by description — contact your local Square D sales office.
Custom Built Control Stations
The catalog numbers shown include the enclosure only. A complete assembled control station is the enclosure plus all control units to be installed.
Ordersmust be accompanied with a key sheet (M-7687)
➅
or sketch showing all control units in their desired locations. Specify the marking on thenameplates for the enclosure.
The standard nameplate size is 1.69" (43 mm) by 0.5" (13 mm) inches. It has a black field with white letters. For name-plates other than our standard, contact your local Square D Sales Office. There is an additional charge to move or add an additional conduit hole or changethe diameter of the conduit.
Example:
Add a 1 inch conduit to the top (nonstandard location) of a KY6 enclosure and increase the bottom conduit from 3/4" to 1 inch (19 to 25 mm).There would be an additionall charge for the top conduit and the bottom conduit. If 20 or more identical stations are ordered at one time, there is no ad-ditional charge.
➀
Type K Series A through Series G operators were rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 12, and 13. Type K Series H operators are rated UL Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, and 13.
➁
Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical.
➂
For machine cavity mounting. Pull box not available.
➃
Type KN1, KN6 and KN7 a series of legend plates will not fit on these enclosures.
➄
Standard Type KYSS enclosures are supplied with Type 304 stainless steel — Use Form Y35 and order by description — contact your local Square D sales office.
➅
For a copy of M-7687 keysheet, reference D-Fax
#1143 or see pages 148-149.
Enclosures Only (For Customer Assembly)
No. of Units
UL Types 1, 3 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3 and 13 UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13
➀
UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13
➀
Surface Mounting Flush Mountingwithout Pullbox
➂ ➃
Surface Mounting Surface Mounting
Sheet Steel Cast Zinc Die Cast Aluminum
➃
Stainless Steel (304)
➄
Polymeric (Plastic)
Type Type Type Type Type
123469
1216202530
KYAF1KYAF2KYAF3KYAF4KYAF6KYAF9
KYAF12KYAF16KYAF20KYAF25KYAF30
KZ11KZ21
➁
KZ31
➁
KZ41
➁
KZ6KZ9
KZ12KZ16
Not Avail.Not Avail.Not Avail.
KY1KY2
➁
KY3
➁
KY4
➁
KY6KY9
KY12KY16
Not Avail.Not Avail.Not Avail.
KYSS1KYSS2KYSS3KYSS4KYSS6KYSS9
KYSS12KYSS16KYSS20KYSS25KYSS30
SKY1SKY2SKY3SKY4SKY6SKY9
SKY12SKY16SKY20SKY25
Not Avail.
No. of Units
UL Types1, 3 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3 and 13 UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13
➀
UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13 (1)
Surface Mounting Flush Mountingwithout Pullbox
➂ ➃
Surface Mounting Surface Mounting
Sheet Steel Cast Zinc Die Cast Aluminum
➃
Stainless Steel (304)
➄
Polymeric (Plastic)
Type Type Type Type Type
123469
1216202530
KYAF100KYAF200KYAF300KYAF400KYAF600KYAF900
KYAF1200KYAF1600KYAF2000KYAF2500KYAF3000
KZ110KZ210
➁
KZ310
➁
KZ410
➁
KZ60KZ90
KZ120KZ160
Not Avail.Not Avail.Not Avail.
KY10KY20
➁
KY30
➁
KY40
➁
KY60KY90
KY120KY160
Not Avail.Not Avail.Not Avail.
KYSS100KYSS200KYSS300KYSS400KYSS600KYSS900
KYSS1200KYSS1600KYSS2000KYSS2500KYSS3000
SKY100SKY200SKY300SKY400SKY600SKY900
SKY1200SKY1600SKY2000SKY2500Not Avail.
Standard Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 143-144Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 146-147Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 148-149
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmControl Stations
143
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Control Stations
Enclosures have sufficient depth to accommodate two contact blocks in tandem (total of four blocks) on non-illuminated operatorsand two contact blocks side-by-side on illuminated operators.
Control stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.
Control station consists of components that are UL Listed for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D.
Assembled Control Stations – UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13
Die Cast Aluminum Enclosures
No ofUnits
Legend Plate MarkingAnd Features Type
Consists Of
Enclosure Operators Contact Blocks Legend Plates
1
Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jog-Run (Selector Switch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off-On (Sel. Sw). (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK111KYK121
KYK18KYK110
KYK122
KY1KY1KY1KY1KY1
KS43BKS43BKS11BKS11BKS11B
KA1KA51KA1KA1
KA51
KN260KN260KN242KN244KN244
Red 120 Vac Pilot Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start (Mushroom Button). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (Mushroom Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK120
KYK11KYK125
KYK12KYK13KYK14
KY1KY1KY1KY1KY1KY1
KP1R31KR1BKR1BKR4BKR1RKR4R
. . .KA1
KA51KA1KA1KA1
. . .KN201KN201KN201KN202KN202
Stop (With Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Mushroom (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Stop - Break Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Stop - Break Glass (Red Enclosure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK15KYK124
KYK123
KYK116KYK117
KY1KY1KY1KY1
KY1S1
KR3R,K4KR3R,K4KR4R,K4
K15K15
KA1KA51KA51KA1KA1
KN202KN202KN202
KN799RPKN799RP
2
Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jog-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK24KYK224KYK218
KYK222
KYK221KYK26
KY2KY2KY2KY2KY2KY2
KR1B,KR1BKR1B,KR3R,K4
KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR3R
KR11GRKR1B,KR1B
KA1,KA1KA1,KA1KA1,KA1
KA51,KA51KA1
KA1,KA1
KN206,KN207KN218,KN202KN203,KN204KN203,KN204KN203,KN204KN209,KN208
Start-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (With Maintained Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop (Mushroom on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK21KYK223
KYK23KYK27
KYK220
KYK22KYK25
KY2KY2KY2KY2KY2KY2KY2
KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR3R,K4KR11GRKR11GR
KR1B,KR4RKR1B,KR1B
KA1,KA1KA51,KA51
KA1,KA1KA1
KA51KA1,KA1KA1,KA1
KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN211,KN210
3
Forward-Reverse-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK35KYK31
KYK326
KYK322
KYK34
KY3KY3KY3
KY3KY3
KS11B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4KR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KA1,KA1,KA1KA1,KA1,KA1KA1,KA1,KA1
KA51,KA51,KA51KA1,KA1,KA1
KN239,KN201,KN202KN206,KN207,KN202KN206,KN207,KN202
KN206,KN207,KN202KN214,KN215,KN202
Jog/Run-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop (With Seated Contacts and
Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 120 Vac Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK36KYK33
KYK327
KYK323
KYK317
KY3KY3KY3
KY3KY3
KS11B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4KP1R31,KR1B,KR3R
KA1,KA1,KA1KA1,KA1,KA1KA1,KA1,KA1
KA51,KA51,KA51KA2,KA3
KN242,KN201,KN202KN209,KN208,KN202KN209,KN208,KN202
KN209,KN208,KN202KN200,KN201,KN202
Red 120 Vac Pilot Light-Start-Stop(With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Red 120 Vac/dc Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop (With Sealed Contacts and
Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK321
KYK324KYK32
KYK325
KYK328
KY3KY3KY3KY3
KY3
KP1R31,KR1B,KR3RKP38R31,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4
KA51,KA51KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1,KA1KA1,KA1,KA1
KA51,KA51,KA51
KN200,KN201,KN202KN200,KN201,KN202KN211,KN210,KN202KN211,KN210,KN202
KN211,KN210,KN202
Standard Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 143-144Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 142Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 146-147Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 148-149
Type KZ310Type KY30 Type SKY200Type KYSS300Type KYAF900
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmControl Stations
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
144
11/97
Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.
Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.
Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.
Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C and D.
Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13
No. ofUnits
Legend Plate MarkingAnd Features Type
Consists Of
Enclosure Operators Contact Blocks Legend Plates
1
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off/On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand/Off/Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYSS101KYSS103KYSS105KYSS110KYSS111
KYSS1KYSS1KYSS1KYSS1KYSS1
KR1BKR3R
KR3R with K5KS11BKS43B
KA1KA3KA3KA1KA1
KN201KN202KN202KN244KN260
2
Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up/Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYSS201KYSS203KYSS205KYSS210
KYSS2KYSS2KYSS2KYSS2
KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR3R with K5
KR1B,KR1BKR11U
KA1,KA3KA1,KA3KA1,KA1KA1,KA1
KN201,KN202KN201,KN202KN211,KN210KN201,KN202
3
Forward/Reverse/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up/Down/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open/Close/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High/Low/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward/Reverse/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . .Up/Down/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Open/Close/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . .High/Low/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYSS301KYSS302KYSS303KYSS304KYSS308KYSS309KYSS310KYSS311
KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3
KR1B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3RKR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5
KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3
KN206,KN207,KN202KN211,KN210,KN202KN209,KN208,KN202KN214,KN215,KN202KN206,KN207,KN202KN211,KN210,KN202KN209,KN208,KN202KN214,KN215,KN202
Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X, and 13
No. ofUnits
Legend Plate MarkingAnd Features Type
Consists Of
Enclosures Operators Contact Blocks Legend Plates
1
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off/On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand/Off/Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYSK101KYSK103KYSK105KYSK110KYSK111
KYSS1KYSS1KYSS1KYSS1KYSS1
SKR1BSKR3R
SKR3R with K5SKS11BSKS43B
KA1KA3KA3KA1KA1
KN101WPKN102RPKN102RPKN144WPKN160WP
2
Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up/Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start/Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYSK201KYSK203KYSK205KYSK210
KYSS2KYSS2KYSS2KYSS2
SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR3R with K5
SKR1B,SKR1BSKR11U
KA1,KA3KA1,KA3KA1,KA1KA1,KA1
KN101WP,KN102RPKN101WP,KN102WPKN111WP,KN110WPKN101WP,KN102WP
3
Forward/Reverse/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up/Down/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open/Close/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High/Low/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward/Reverse/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . .Up/Down/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Open/Close/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .High/Low/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYSK301KYSK302KYSK303KYSK304KYSK308KYSK309KYSK310KYSK311
KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3KYSS3
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5
KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3
KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RPKN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RPKN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RPKN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RPKN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RPKN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RPKN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RPKN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RP
Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X, and 13
No. ofUnits
Legend Plate MarkingAnd Features Type
Consists Of
Enclosure Operators Contact Blocks Legend Plates
1
Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Sw. with Sealed Contacts) . . . . .Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Man-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Off-On (Sel. Sw. with Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . .Off-On (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop (With Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . .
SKY121
SKY111SKY107SKY108
SKY122
SKY110
SKY101SKY125 SKY103SKY105
SKY124
SKY1SKY1SKY1SKY1SKY1SKY1
SKY1SKY1SKY1SKY1SKY1
SKS43BSKS43BSKR1BSKS11BSKS11BSKS11B
SKR1BSKR1BSKR3R
SKR3R,K5SKR3R,K5
KA51KA1KA1KA1
KA51
KA1KA1
KA51KA3KA3
KA51
KN160WPKN160WPKN118WPKN143WPKN144WP
KN144WPKN101WPKN101WPKN102RPKN102RPKN102RP
2
Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Stop (With Maintained Sealed Contacts). . . . . .Start-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SKY204SKY222 SKY206SKY201
SKY203SKY220 SKY223 SKY205
SKY2SKY2SKY2SKY2
SKY2SKY2SKY2SKY2
SKR1B,SKR1BSKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1BSKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1R,K5SKR11GR
SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B
KA1,KA1KA51,KA51
KA1,KA1KA1,KA3
KA1,KA3KA51
KA51,KA51KA1,KA1
KN106WP,KN107WPKN103WP,KN104RPKN109WP,KN108WPKN101WP,KN102RP
KN101WP,KN102RPKN101WP,KN102RPKN101WP,KN102RPKN111WP,KN110WP
3
Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward-Reverse-Stop (With Sealed Contacts
and Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open-Close-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . .
Red 120 VAC Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Start-Jog-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up-Down-Stop (With Sealed Contacts
and Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SKY301
SKY322 SKY304SKY303
SKY323
SKY315ASKY305SKY302
SKY328
SKY3
SKY3SKY3SKY3SKY3
SKY3SKY3SKY3
SKY3
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKP1R31,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3RSKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA51,KA51,KA51KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3
KA51,KA51,KA51
KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3KA1,KA1,KA3
KA51,KA51,KA51
KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RP
KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RPKN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RPKN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RPKN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RP
KN101WP,KN102RPKN101WP,KN118WP,KN102RPKN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP
KN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Flush Plates
14511/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Stainless Steel NEMA Type 1 Flush Plates
These flush plates accept Type K, SK, KX and T operators andcontact blocks and may be used with a standard 2 x 3 generalpurpose switch box. A 21/2" deep box should be used with twoType K contact blocks mounted side by side. If two Type K con-tact blocks mounted in tandem are needed, a 31/2" deep boxshould be used. Although oiltight/watertight operators are used,an assembled station using the flush plates is not oiltight/wa-tertight. The kits include the stainless steel flush plate, coverscrews and a set of liners. The liners must be used to maintainelectrical clearance.
Center to center of operators is 113/16" (46 mm).
Dimensions (Type KZP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 147
Numberof
UnitsDescription Type
Number
1 1 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners K25
2 2 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners K26
3 3 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners K27
4 4 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners K28
Numberof Units
Dimensions (inches)
A B
1 125/32 " (45 mm) 23/4 " (70 mm)
2 319/32 " (91 mm) 49/16 " (116 mm)
3 513/32 " (36 mm) 63/8 " (162 mm)
4 77/32 " (183 mm) 83/16 " (208 mm)
General Purpose NEMA Type 1 Flush Mounting Control Station With Pull Box For Type K Control Units (Stations Are Not Oiltight)
Number ofUnits
Enclosure OnlyFor Customer Assembly
Custom Built FactoryAssembled Control Stations
Type Type
12345678
KZP1KZP2KZP3KZP4KZP5KZP6KZP7KZP8
KZP10KZP20KZP30KZP40KZP50KZP60KZP70KZP80
Special Features
Type 304 Stainless Steel Flush Plate (Form Y242)
No. of Units1-4
5-8
Omit Pull Box (Form Y243)
No. of Units1-2
3-4 5-6 7-8
Two Unit
Approximate Dimensions
A
B
3.1379.5
2.050.8
Commercial Pull Box
Commercial Pull Box
2.6366.9
4.50114.3
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mmEnclosure Dimensions
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved146
11/97
KY16KYAF16KZ16KYSS16SKY16
KYAF20KYSS20SKY20
KYAF25KYSS25SKY25
KYAF30KYSS30
Table for Type KY and KZ
No.of
Units
OverallDimensions Mounting Dim. Conduit Other Dimensions Cover
Thickness
A B CKY KZ
H R J K LKY KZ
D E F G M N
123469
1216
35/8 35/8
35/8 35/8 63/4 91/4 91/4113/4
4 53/4 71/2 91/4
8 8 10
101/2
317/32317/32317/32317/32327/32327/3245/3245/32
3 3 3 3
55/881/881/8
105/8
23/441/261/4
8 67/867/887/893/8
31/831/831/831/861/483/483/4
111/4
31/251/4
7 83/471/271/291/210
11/811/811/811/813/813/8
119/32119/32
3/4-143/4-143/4-143/4-143/4-141-111/2
11/4-111/211/2-111/2
—13/413/413/4
2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
21/4
10-24 x 5/810-24 x 5/810-24 x 5/810-24 x 5/8
8-328-328-328-32
1.181.181.181.181.061.06.88.88
.50
.50
.50
.501.061.06.88.88
Table for Type KYAF and KYSS
No.of
Units
OverallDimensions
MountingDimensions
InsideDim.
ConduitFor Type
KYSSOnly
A B C D E FG
IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm
1 4.18 106 5.24 133 3.63 92 2.25 57 4.62 117 3.41 87 3/4-14
2 4.18 106 7.74 197 3.63 92 2.25 57 7.12 181 3.41 87 3/4-14
3 4.18 106 10.24 260 3.63 92 2.25 57 9.62 244 3.41 87 3/4-14
4 4.18 106 12.74 324 3.63 92 2.25 57 12.12 308 3.41 87 3/4-14
6 7.43 189 11.37 289 4.34 110 5.50 140 10.75 273 4.13 105 3/4-14
9 9.68 246 11.37 289 4.34 110 7.75 197 10.75 273 4.13 105 1-111/212 9.68 246 13.87 352 4.34 110 7.75 197 13.25 337 4.13 105 11/4-111/216 11.93 303 13.87 352 4.34 110 10.00 254 13.25 337 4.13 105 11/2-111/220 11.93 303 16.37 416 4.34 110 10.00 254 15.75 400 4.13 105 11/2-111/225 14.18 360 16.37 416 4.34 110 12.25 311 15.75 400 4.13 105 (2)11/2-111/230 14.18 360 18.87 479 4.34 110 12.25 311 18.25 464 4.13 105 (2)11/2-111/2
Location Of Control Units
Type KY Type KZ
Type KYAFType KYSS
KY1KYAF1KZ11KYSS1SKY1
KY2KYAF2KZ21KYSS2SKY2
KY3KYAF3KZ31KYSS3SKY3
KY4KYAF4KZ41KYSS4
SKY4
KY6KYAF6KZ6KYSS6SKY6
KY9KYAF9KZ9KYSS9SKY9
KY12KYAF12KZ12KYSS12SKY12
(4)0.22
6 Dia. Mtg. Holes
Gasket cementedto coverL
M-N
0.164
C65075-239
C30052-170
0.256 F
E
K
JG
B
0.256
A
D2.50
64
2.13
54
C
H
R-Pt. in bottom as std.
AD
2.5064
318
B
E
(4).318
Dia. Mtg. Holes
2.5064
A
C F1.7043
C65075-176 G Conduit HubBottom Only(Type KYSS Only)
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Enclosure Dimensions
14711/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Glass Polymeric Type SKYMtg.Hole
ConduitSize
ConduitLocation Height Mtg. Dim. Overall Dim. No.
ofUnitsH G F E D C B A
IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm
0.31 8 0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88 99 4.88 124 2.94 75 6.63 169 3.81 97 1
0.31 8 0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88 99 4.88 124 2.94 75 6.63 169 3.81 97 2
0.31 8 0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88 99 7.13 181 2.94 75 8.88 226 3.81 97 3
0.31 8 0.75 19 2.00 51 4.72 120 6.75 172 4.00 102 7.53 191 7.53 191 4
0.31 8 0.75 19 2.00 51 4.72 120 8.88 226 4.00 102 9.50 241 7.50 191 6
0.31 8 1.00 25 1.75 44 4.25 108 10.75 273 6.00 153 11.34 288 9.41 239 9
0.31 8 1.00 25 1.75 44 4.25 108 10.75 273 6.00 153 11.34 288 9.41 239 12
0.31 8 1.50 38 2.00 51 5.25 133 12.75 324 8.00 203 13.41 341 11.44 291 16
0.31 8 1.50 38 2.00 51 5.25 133 12.75 324 8.00 203 13.41 341 11.44 291 20
0.31 8 1.50 38 2.00 51 6.25 159 14.63 372 10.00 254 15.47 393 13.47 342 25
Class 9001 Type KZP
Type
Letter Dimensions
A B C D E
IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm
KZP1 7.56 192 5.56 141 6.38 162 3.78 96 – –
KZP2 9.43 240 7.44 189 8.25 210 3.72 94 2.00 51
KZP3 11.30 287 9.31 236 10.12 257 3.65 93 2.00 51
KZP4 13.18 335 11.18 284 12.00 305 3.59 91 2.00 51
KZP5 15.06 383 13.06 332 13.88 353 3.53 90 2.00 51
KZP6 16.93 430 14.94 379 15.75 400 3.47 88 2.00 51
KZP7 18.81 478 16.81 427 17.62 448 3.40 86 2.00 51
KZP8 20.68 525 18.69 475 19.50 495 3.34 85 2.00 51
Flush Mount Sheet SteelType KZP
A
CH (4 pls)
B
B
D
D
E
F
E
0.215
Dia.(4 pls)
2.2557
GFor 1, 2 & 3 unit only
D30464-152
3.3685
1.6843
2.0051
sky 25 only(2)1.50
38 Dia. holes
F
G
2.2557
H (4 pls)
A
C
2.2557
Type SKY Enclosures
K.O. for 1/2, 3/4, 1conduit Top, Bottom& Back
4.00
108
CMtg.
E
E
D
(4) 0.256
Dia. Mtg. Holes
D
AB
1.00
0.65 maxplaster alignment
.7519
2.5063
0.287
3.4587
3.0076
1.0627
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmKey Sheet
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved148
11/97
CONTROL GROUP
KEY SHEET FOR ORDERING CLASS 9001 TYPE “K”, “KX”, “SK” OR “T” ASSEMBLED OILTIGHT CONTROL STATIONS
INVOICE NUMBER
CUSTOMER
CLASS 9001 TYPE
CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER
DATE QUANTITY LIST PRICE EACH, DS-1
TOPTYPE NUMBER KEY
Select Type Numbers from Catalog Digest
1. Operator or Closing Plate. Include “H” No. for Contact Blocks Assembled to Operator. Example – KR1B-H13
2. Attachment or Protective Cap. Example – KU-1
3. Legend Plate Type Number.Example – KN-201
4. Legend Plate Marking.– Use Only if Special Mark-ing is Required. Example: Line 3. – KN-299Line 4. – ”Panic”
For Further Instructions – See Reverse Side
1 A 1 G 1 N 1 U 1 AA
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
1 B 1 H 1 P 1 V 1 BB
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
1 C 1 J 1 Q 1 W 1 CC
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
1 D 1 K 1 R 1 X 1 DD
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
1 E 1 L 1 S 1 Y 1 EE
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
1 F 1 M 1 T 1 Z 1 FF
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Ordering Instructions
14911/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
INSTRUCTIONS FOR ORDERING ASSEMBLED CONTROLSTATIONS1. Use separate Key Sheet for each different control station ar-
rangement on order.
2. Select locations on sketch (reverse side) which illustratemanner in which station is to be mounted. Example: Selec-tion of location A, B, C and D indicates a four unit stationmounted with its long axis vertical and the legend platesmounted accordingly. Selection of locations A, G, N and Uindicates mounting with long axis horizontal.
3. Each interlock attachment Type K-3 must be specified attwo adjacent locations. Type KR-11 or Type KR-12 must bespecified at two adjacent locations. Type KRD Time DelayUnits require space equal to two push button mountingholes. The unused hole must be covered with at Type K-51or K-52 Closing Plate. The time delay unit must be posi-tioned with the contacts adjacent to the unused hole. Theunused hole may be located above, below, right or left of theunit.
4. Types KN-3 and KN-4 legend plates will not fit upright on 2,3 or 4 unit Type KY or Type KZ enclosures with long axis ver-tical. Type KYC enclosures must use Type KN-8 legendplates.
5. Large (2 1/4” Dia.) mushroom button operators can not bemounted in adjacent locations.
6. Enclosures have sufficient depth to accommodate two con-tact blocks side-by-side on illuminated operators (Types K,SK and T only).
Location of Control Units – Types K, KX, SK and T
KY-160KYAF-1600KYSS-1600KZ-160SKY-1600
KYAF-2000KYSS-2000SKY-2000
KYAF-2500KYSS-2500SKY-2500
KYSS-3000
KY-10KYAF-100KYSS-100KZ-110SKY-100
KY-20KYAF-200KYSS-200KZ-210SKY-200
KY-30KYAF-300KYSS-300KZ-310SKY-300
KY-40KYAF-400KYSS-410KZ-410
SKY-400
KY-60KYAF-600KYSS-600KZ-60SKY-600
KY-90KYAF-900KYSS-900KZ-90SKY-900
KY-120KYAF-1200KYSS-1200KZ-120SKY-1200
Suffix No. (Add to
Operator Type No.)
Positions Total Circuits
Circuit Symbol
1 2 3 4
H1 KA-1 1 N.O.1 N.C.
H2 KA-1 KA-1 2 N.O.2 N.C.
H3 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 3 N.O.3 N.C.
H4 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 4 N.O.4 N.C.
H5 KA-2 1 N.O.
H6 KA-3 1 N.C.
H7 KA-2 KA-2 2 N.O.
H8 KA-3 KA-3 2 N.C.
H9 KA-4 KA-11 N.O.
1 E.C.N.O.2 N.C.
H10 KA-4 KA-51 E.C.N.O.1 E.C.N.C.
1 N.C.
H11 KA-1 KA-1 KA-1 3 N.O.3 N.C.
H12 KA-2 KA-3 KA-2 KA-3 2 N.O.2 N.C.
H13 KA-1 1 N.O.1 N.C.
H14 KA-3 1 N.C.
H36 KA-2 1 N.O.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types KY and KZC — Security Control StationsApplication Data, Features
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved150
11/97
Standard Features• All cylinders are random keyed.• Key operators are all spring return from both sides to cen-
ter, maintained contact not available.• Key withdrawal is in the center position only.• Cover is mechanically interlocked with the box to make it
difficult for unauthorized people to gain entrance into theenclosure.
• Cover is securely held in place by allen screws.• Cylinders are of builders hardware type, which permits key-
ing stations to the rest of the cylinders in a development.• Cylinder legend plate marking is “OPEN-CLOSE.”• An optional push button is available. The legend plate mark-
ing is “STOP.”
Meets NEMA Type 3R requirements. When Best Lock stations are supplied with core, customer should contact local Best Lock
representative to change core. When Best Lock stations are supplied without core, customer must purchase core separate-
ly from Best Lock Company, and customer can subsequently change core at his conve-nience.
Contact Your Local Square D Sales Office If:• Master keying is required.• Keying several stations alike is required.• Station is to be keyed to a specific key number.• Nonstandard legend plates are required.• Extra keys are required.• A specific type of keyway is required.
Repair PartsReplacement or duplicate keys: Emhart, Yale, or Schlage - localdistributor, hardware store, or lock shop that duplicates keys.Square D can supply and deliver in 5 weeks. BEST – Must pur-chase from local Best Lock Corporation representative. Sargent –must purchase from Square D. Keys supplied with our securitycontrol station are registered to the Square D Company.
Description Type ofCylinder
CylinderFinish Special Features
CastAluminum
Enclosure
SatinChrome Finish
Flush Mtd.W/Box
Type Type
KeyOperator
Only
EmhartYaleBest
Best
Best
Best
Schlage
Sargent
ChromeBrass
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Complete With Core (6 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (6 Tumbler Pins)Complete With Core (7 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (7 Tumbler Pins)
Maximum Security Cylinder
KY198KY199KY197
KY196
KY195
KY194
KY193
KY192
KZC198KZC199KZC197
KZC196
KZC195
KZC194
KZC193
KZC192
KeyOperator
WithStop
Button
EmhartYaleBest
Best
Best
Best
Schlage
Sargent
ChromeBrass
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Chrome
Complete With Core (6 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (6 Tumbler Pins)Complete With Core (7 Tumbler Pins)Lock Cylinder Only - Core Omitted (7 Tumbler Pins)
Maximum Security Cylinder
KY298KY299KY297
KY296
KY295
KY294
KY293
KY292
KZC298KZC299KZC297
KZC296
KZC295
KZC294
KZC293
KZC292
Electrical RatingsKey Operator: One Class 9007 Type AO2 snap switch is used forthe “OPEN” position and one snap switch is used for the “CLOSE”position. See page 151 for electrical ratings of the 9007 AO2.
Stop Button: One Class 9001 Type KA1 contact block is used on theoptional push button. See page 151 for 9001KA1 electrical ratings.(Note: The KA1 contact block has a maximum voltage rating of300 volts (NEMA A300) when used in the Type KZC station.)
Dimensions
Replacement enclosures are not sold. Replacement cores orcylinders are not sold.
3
3
3
Mtg
Mtg
Mtg
Mtg
8
8
88 16
16
4
8
28
1
5
55 5
5
3
5
17
4 2
3
45
B30064-682
Surface Mount Type KY
Dia. Mtg. Holes
Conduit TopDim.Inside
32133
811
327(4)
-1443
2169
3
1"K.O. forTop, Bottom and Back
Conduit
Wall Surface
B30064-683
33
3
1632
1616
32
32 32
4
4
2
2
8 4Mtg.Mtg.
Mtg.
Mtg.
1616
1616
16
16
2 416
16
161313
77
MinAdjustmentPlasterMax
04
4
19
19 27
3
3
1
1
3 199
1"
11
1
1
7
2
2
6 857
22
2
2
1"
(14 )1/4 Dia. Mtg. Holes
1 37
11
3
932
Flush Mount Type KZC
UL ListedFile E42259CNN NKCR
CSA ListedFile LR25490Class 321103
Type KY192
Type KZC299
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Contact Blocks
15111/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are FINGERSAFE®
contact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminalscrews. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the wipingaction of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will accept up to2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA31, KA3, and KA33 N.C. contacts are direct opening.
For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K or SKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For sequencing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.
Standard Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
(Clear Cover)
KA1
(Green Cover)
KA2
(Red Cover)
KA3
(Clear Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA4
(Red Cover)
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA5
(Green Cover)
N.O. ContactEarly Closing
KA6
Additional Circuit Arrangements Available
Sequencing N.O. Contact of KA4 closes before N.O. Contact on KA1 KA4 KA1
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA1
Overlapping N.O. Contact of KA4 closes before N.C. Contact
of KA5 Opens KA4 KA5
Order OneType KA4 andOne Type KA5
Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts – Class 9001 Type KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
Volts
AC
Volts
DC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600) 35% Power Factor Resistive 75% Power Factor Make, Break and Continuous Amperes
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type A600)
Make Break ContinuousCarrying Amperes
Make and Break ContinuousCarrying AmperesAmperes VA Amperes VA KA1 KA2, KA3 KA4 KA5, KA6
120240480600
60301512
7200720072007200
6.03.01.51.2
720720720720
10101010
10101010
125250600
1.10.550.2
1.10.550.2
1.1..........
1.10.550.2
101010
Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts – Class 9007 Type AO2
SwitchType
Contact Action
Direct Opening Contacts to Meet IEC 947-5-1
Requirements for Positive Opening Contacts
AC – 50 or 60 Hz DCAC or DC
Volts
Inductive 35% Power Factor Resistive 75% Power Factor
Volts
Inductive and Resistive
Make Break Make and BreakAmperes
Make and Break Amperes ContinuousCarrying AmperesAmps VA Amps VA Single Throw Double Throw
AO-2 SPDT No
120240480600
4020108
4800480048004800
151065
1800240028803000
151065
125250600. . . .
2.00.50.1. . . .
0.50.20.02. . . .
15151515
Minimum order quantity is 25.
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks, But Provide:• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue connectors• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep vs. 0.97" deep
on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89. • Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Con-tact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.
Symbol
Contact Blocks With Binder Head Screws (not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks)
Gold Flashed Contacts With Standard Pressure Wire Terminals
Type Quantity Type
KA21 25-Up KA31
KA22 25-Up KA32
KA23 25-Up KA33
N.O. EarlyClosing
KA24 25-Up KA34
N.C. ContactLate Opening
KA25 25-Up KA35
Symbol Type Symbol Type
KA1G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA4G
KA2GN.C. Contact Late Opening
KA5G
KA3G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA6G
Symbol Type
KA12
KA13
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mmReed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved152
11/97
In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explosion-proofequipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control stations. Knowing whattype of hazardous location exists will permit you to select the most eco-nomical solution to your application. If you're not sure what type of haz-ardous location exists, the “Summary of Classification” chart may help.If not, contact your local electrical inspector. When you know whatclass, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in the lower lefthandcorner of this page for what Square D has to offer.
① An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or anintrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardousarea to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system,any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can beused. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light,may be used.
➁ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Divi-sion 2 hazardous locations.1. Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.2. All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2
areas. 3. Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules
other than the transformer type. 4. The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.
➂ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.
For : Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.
Summary Of Classification Chart
Class Division Group
I. Gas 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
B. Location adjacent to Division 1 location.
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases Containing Hydrogen
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
II. Dust 1. Hazard May ExistMay Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal Operating Conditions.
E. Conductive and Combustible Dust (Resistivity <105 ohms/cm)
F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity >102 ohm/cm but ≤ 108ohm/cm)
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
2. Potential HazardA. May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances.
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust (Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
III. Fibers1. Production Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
2. Handling and Storage Areas Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
ForUse
Class Division Group(s)
I 1 A 1. Intrinsically Safe System ①
I 1 B, C, D 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System ①
I 2 A1.
2.
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
I 2 B, C, D
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
II 1 E, F, G 1.2.
9001 BR stationIntrinsically Safe System ①
II 2 E, F
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➁Intrinsically Safe System ①
II 2 G
1.2.
3.
9001 BR station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①
III 1, 2 –
1.2.
3.
9001 BR Station9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions listed in footnote ➂Intrinsically Safe System ①
All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire.
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operatoris the same for standard contact blocks, except:• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M”
mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (ei-
ther side), maximum 2 in tandem.• On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blocks
on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters throughNEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.
➃ Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor.➄ Inductive and Resistive Ratings.
Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact BlocksSuitable for use on low energy level circuits
Description Symbol Type
KA41
KA42
KA43
KA44
KA45
Max. Volts AC/DCMaximum Load
Res. Ind. Cont.32/30
120/1000.25 A 8 VA
0.10 A3 VA
0.5 A0.5 A
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact BlocksDescription Symbol Type
KA51
KA52
KA53
KA54
KA55
Volts
AC NEMA Type C300 ➃Make Break Continuous
Carrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
120240
10.005.00
12001200
1.0000.500
120120
3.03.0
Volts
DC NEMA Type Q150 ➄Make Break Continuous
Carrying AmpsAmps VA Amps VA
115 0.50 58 0.50 58 3.0
Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits — NEMA Type 4XIntrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal en-
ergy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous at-mosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.
Listed below are pilot lights that are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2. These pilot lights are Factory Mutual FM# J.I. OH4A2,AX,3610 (FM ap-proved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.
These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates.
OperatingVoltageRange
NominalCurrent
LensColor Type
V max. = 32 V 20-30 VAC/DC 25 mA
RedGreenYellow
KP44RKP44GKP44YI max. = 165 mA
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
Type XDP Heavy Duty Monolever
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Type XDP•••••C1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Type XDP•••••C4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Type XDP•••••C5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XDP Heavy Duty Monolever
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
154
11/97
General Description
The XDP exterior, heavy duty monolever was designed for aircraft unloading equipment, where exposure to severe environments and mechanical abuse are inevitable. These switches have been engineered to withstand adverse conditions such as smog, dust, high humidity and extreme temperatures experienced in an airport environment. The XDP is currently being used for aircraft unloading service in Alaska. Other applications include snow plow controls and cherry pickers.
4 Types of hand operations are offered:
A 2-position monolever operator that operates 2 contacts*, one contact per direction. The operator is spring returned to the center position (momentary).
A 2-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*. This is a “Z” cam operation; the lever is spring returned to the center position (momentary). The first contact actuates with 15
°
operator movement; the second contact actuates with an additional 90
°
movement of the operator while still in the 15
°
position. Both contacts are actuated with the second movement.
A 4-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*, one contact per direction. The operator is spring returned to the center position (momentary).
An 8-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*. Movement to the north, south, east, or west positions activates a single contact. Movement to the NE, NW, SE, or SW activates two contacts. The lever is spring returned to the center position (momentary).
* Contacts on monolevers with Telemecanique blocks are stackable with up to 3 contacts in any position.
Specifications
Electrical ratings 10 A resistive/inductive up to 15 Vdc ZB2 contacts NEMA A600, Q600
HousingMain body: diecast ZAMAC 3Contact mounting base: weather-resistant nylonHandle boot: polyester elastomer (extremely temperature resistant)
Operating temperature -40
°
F to +140
°
F-40
°
C to +60
°
C
Mechanical/electrical life In excess of 1 million actuations per direction at rated load
Enclosure
NEMA Type 4 (IP65) when installed in a suitable enclosure.Exposed components:• Unaffected by oil or grease• Ozone resistant• Does not age or crack with prolonged outdoor exposure
Mechanism
• Lever operated• Momentary action (spring return to center)• Panel mounted• Anti-rotational, mounts with 4 screws (not provided)• Mounting nuts remove from the rear, rounded bolt heads exposed on operator side• Withstands severe operator abuse
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XDP Heavy Duty Monolever
155
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Monolever switches with 1 NO ZB2 contact block (ZB2BE101) in each position (up to 3 stackable in any position). NC contacts available, consult factory.
Monolever switches with micro-switch V3 contacts (NO/NC).
Description Function Catalog Number
2 positions2 contacts XDPA1010C1
2/4 positions4 contacts XDPB1111C1
4 positions4 contacts XDPC1411C1
8 positions8 contacts XDPD1111C1
Description Function Catalog Number
2 positions2 contacts XDPA5050C4
2/4 positions4 contacts XDPB5555C4
4 positions4 contacts XDPC5555C4
8 positions8 contacts XDPD5555C4
2.5665
1.7544
Square
.0621.6
4.44113
NeopreneGasket
XDP****C1, C2, C3, C6, P1, P3Monolever with “ZB2” type contact
2.5665
2.0652
0.3910
Square
.0621.6
4.44113
NeopreneGasket
3/16" Quick ConnectTab Terminals
Tolerance = ±0.06 in (1.5mm)
XDP****C4Monolever with V3 switches
File LR 44087Class 3211 03
File E164353CCN NKCR2
®
File E164353CCN NKCR
File LR 44087Class 3211 03
Dual Dimensions:Millimeters
Inches
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XDP Heavy Duty Monolever
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
156
11/97
Monolever switches with Burgess sealed switch V3S9 contacts (NO/NC).
Panel Mounting Dimensions
Description Function Catalog Number
2 positions2 contacts XDPA5050C5
2/4 positions4 contacts XDPB5555C5
4 positions4 contacts XDPC5555C5
8 positions8 contacts XDPD5555C5
1.8848
2.051
2.0
51
4 X 0.20 dia.
dia.
5
0.102.5 2.17
55
.0621.6
4.44113
NeopreneGasket
0.11 in (2.8mm) Quick ConnectTab Terminals
XDP****C5Monolever with sealed switches (V3S9)
Dual Dimensions:Millimeters
Inches
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page
Type BW General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Type BW Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Type BW Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Seriplex Control Bus Version 2, Material Pull Pendant Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Type XACA Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Type XACA Standard Duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Type XACA Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Type XACA Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Type XACA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Type XACA Exploded Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Type XACA Lamps and Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Type XACA Order Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Type XACA Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Type SKYP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Type SKYP Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Type SK Operators, Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Type SKYP Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Type SKYP Order Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
Type BW, SKYP & XACA Pendant Stations
Class 9001
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant StationsGeneral Information
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
158
11/97
Type BW Standard Duty Pendant Stations
The Class 9001 Type BW Pendant Station is a pre-assembled,2 button station well suited for standard hoist applications.Oversized finger grips on the rear of the enclosure make iteasy to grip and operate.
Features and Options
• Made of high impact thermoplastic with self-extinguish-ing flammability rating (UL 94V)
• NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13 Watertight, Dusttight, Oiltight,Corrosion Resistant
• UL Listed and CSA Approved• 1/2" conduit opening• Internal strain relief post• Momentary contact• Maintained contact• Single speed• Two speed• With or without mechanical interlock• Optional external hanger bracket and seal• Ribs on top of enclosure prevent hanger bracket from
rotating and coming loose• Contoured for easy grip• Easy to hold with one hand
• Interchangeable legend inserts• Field installable mushroom button• Full cover gasket to exclude harmful contaminants
• Jumper included on all single speed buttons (except uni-versal types), saves wiring time
• Self-lifting pressure wire connectors for easy wiring
Off and Stop are WhiteLetters on a Red Background
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant StationsSpecifications
159
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
OSHA Regulation, Section 1910.170 Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits the voltage at pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc.
Approximate Dimensions
Specifications
Electrical ratings AC - NEMA B600 DC - NEMA P600
Enclosure type NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, and 4X
Operating temperature - 25
°
C to + 60
°
C- 13
°
F to + 140
°
F
Housing material Polycarbonate/PET Polyester Blend
Storage temperature - 40
°
C to + 70
°
C- 40
°
F to + 158
°
F
Cable entry 1/2 inch NPT
Approvals File E42259CCN NKCR
File LR 25490Class 3211 03
Electrical Contact Ratings(BW70’S AND BW80’S)
AC – NEMA B600
Volts
Inductive35% Power Factor
Resistive75% Power
Factor
Make Break ContinuousCarryingAmperes
Make, Breakand Continuous
CarryingAmperes
Amps VA Amps VA
120240480600
30.015.0
7.50.6
3600360036003600
3.01.50.750.6
360360360360
5555
5555
DC – NEMA P600
Volts
Inductive and Resistive
Make andBreak
Amperes
ContinuousCarryingAmperes
120240600
1.100.550.20
555
2.1956
0.9123
1.0928
4.69119
1.0627
2.94750.43
11
0.25 0.50Mtg. Slot
12
- 14
NPT
Inchesmm
Dual Dimensions:
Type BW70B through Type BW82Y
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant StationsApplication Data and Order Information
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
160
11/97
Contact Symbol
Screws not included. Order quantity 4 of a 21930-14281 for the screws.
For Dimensions ..................................................................................... Page 159
Hanger Bracket and Seal Kit
Type
B350
File E42259 File LR 25490
MarkingCCN NKCR Class 3211 03
Replacement Enclosures 9001BW70’S and 9001BW80’S
Description Yellow Red Black
Box 3110113201 3110113202 3110113203
Cover 3110114750 3110114751 3110114752
Mushroom Button (less button insert) –For NEMA Type 4X, BW70 and BW80
Color Type
Red B303
10
25 100
147146145150
Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 1
Speed 2
The Class 9001 BW70 and BW80 pendant stations are used for hoist applications, requiring either single speed or two speed but-tons. The thermoplastic enclosure is provided with a 1/2 inch conduit entrance at top to accept a pendant cable and has internal strain relief provided as standard. The stations are rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4 and 4X. The enclosure is available in three colors. All universal stations have double circuit blocks (1 N.O. — 1 N.C.) on each button and come without legends so they can be as-sembled to fit the application. For convenience, push buttons have interchangeable legend inserts. The complete line is UL listed and C.S.A. certified.
Maintained contact
No.of
UnitsDescription Legend Insert
MarkingsMechanical
Interlock
Enclosure ColorContactSymbol
Replacement Interior
Yellow Black Red 9001Type
ContactSymbol
2
SingleSpeed
Up-Down Yes BW72Y BW72B BW72R 146 BOC368 146
Forward-Reverse Yes BW73Y BW73B BW73R 146 BOC368 146
On-Off
Yes BW74Y BW74B BW74R 10 BOC358 147
Start-Stop No BW75Y BW75B BW75R 145 BOC359 25
Start-Stop
Yes BW76Y BW76B BW76R 10 BOC358 147
On-Off No BW77Y BW77B BW77R 146 BOC359 25
On-Off No BW79Y BW79B BW79R 145 BOC359 25
Up-Down Yes BW78Y BW78B ..... 100 ... ....
W/O Legend Inserts Yes BW70YU BW70BU BW70RU 25 BOC366 25
W/O Legend Inserts No BW71YU BW71BU BW71RU 25 BOC359 25
W/O Legend Inserts
Yes BW74YU BW74BU BW74RU 147 BOC358 147
TwoSpeed
W/O Legend Inserts Yes BW80YU BW80BU BW80RU 150 BOC367 150
Up-Down Yes BW82Y BW82B BW82R 150 BOC367 150
Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.
Addition of External hanger bracket (similar to the one used on Class 9001 Type SKYPPendant Stations). Use when polymeric cord connectors are required.
Interchangeable Push Button Legend Inserts
Marking
ForNEMA Type
4XType BW70’sand BW80’s
Mushroom Button
Inserts ForNEMA Type
4X Type BW70’s
and BW80’s
Marking
ForNEMA Type
4XType BW70’s and BW80’s
Mushroom Button
Inserts ForNEMA Type
4X Type BW70’s
and BW80's
Type Type Type Type
StartStopForwardReverseOpenCloseRaiseLowerUpDown
B259B260B255B256B263B264B261B262B253B254
B282B283B278B279B286B287B284B285B276B277
OnOff
HandAuto
Blank- BlackBlank- Red
B257B258B265B266
B251
B252
B280B281B288B289
B251
B252
Legend Insert Kit –
Kit includes one each of standard legend inserts as indicated below Type No. of kit.
Where Used: Type
For NEMA Type 4XType BW70’sand BW80
Push ButtonB250 (includes
1 each ofB253 through B266)
MushroomButton
B300 (includes1 each of
B276 through B289)
Hanger Bracket
Form
Y236
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2Material Pull Pendant Station
161
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
The
Material Pull Pendant Stations
provide an interface be-tween the SERIPLEX
control bus and a single input push but-ton operator enclosed in a pendant station. Single-bit businterface circuitry is used in this unit. If multiplexed operation isused by the CPU interface card, the pendant is scanned everyframe. This pendant is not capable of being multiplexed (Seepage 9 for details).
Features
• Durable enclosure rated NEMA Type 12.• Bus powered lamp modules don’t require an auxiliary power
supply or additional power conductors.• Bus powered lamp modules use high visibility, low current
consumption LED lamps, providing long life and greater sys-tem flexibility.
• Mini-style quick-change connectors provide for easy pendantinstallation and change out.
• LED indicators provided on the SERIPLEX module showpower-on status, input status and output status – a conve-nient installation and troubleshooting aid.
About Material Pull Systems
A SERIPLEX Material Pull Pendant is used to control the floorstock of parts being installed during a final assembly operation.Typically, as an assembly worker uses parts they monitor thestock of material being used. When stock falls to a predeter-mined level, the assembly worker pushes the button on the Ma-terial Pull Pendant and a signal is sent to the computerrequesting parts for that specific assembly operation. The illu-minated push button in the pendant flashes to indicate the loca-tion where the parts are needed and a lift truck driver isdispatched with the parts. The lift truck driver presses the pen-dant push button to indicate that the parts have been deliveredand to reset the system.
Electrical Specifications
Voltage: 24 VdcCapacitance: 75 pF (typical)Max Current: 20 mA
Catalog Number
Input TypeAddress A
Input TypeAddress B
Output TypeAddress B Description
SPX BWPEND5
— N.O. LED Lamp - Amber
Pendant enclosure, single illumi-nated push button, bus powered amber LED lamp, 5-pin mini-style
quick change connector
9001AEQ3370
— N.O. LED Indica-tor - Red
Pendant enclosure, single non-illuminated push button, red LED indicating lamp inserted in bottom of pendant, 5-pin mini-style quick
change connector
Pin 5Data Line
Pin 4Clock Line
Pin 1Shield Drain
Pin 2V+ DC
Bus Power
Pin 3 Extended Pin Bus Common
Male Receptacle Pin-out
Dimensions (SPXBWPEND5 only)
Replacement Parts
Internal Wiring to SERIPLEX Module
For additional information, see catalog 8330CT9601R11/96.
Part Number Description
SPXLEDA1
LED Lamp - Amber
9001B350
BW Pendant Hanger Bracket
9001A31
Push button Lens - Amber
SPXHH2P2CABLE
Hand-Held Set-Up Tool Adapter Cable for 5-Pin Mini-style Connectors
4.65(118)
3.12(79.2)
4.10(104)
2.20(55.9)
5.50(140)
Pendant connector receptacle: Torque nut to 23 - 27 lb-in. Pendant enclosure screws: Torque screws to 15 lb-in.Operator ring nut: Torque 6 - 8 lb-ft.
Note: Gasket must be in place to maintain enclosure rating.
in.(mm)
Module LED Indicators
Input address B (N.O.)
O PB IB
white (data)
blue (clock)
red (V+)
black (common)
orange (shield drain)
LED Color Function and Address
I
B
yellow Input B Active
P green Bus Power Applied
O
B
yellow Output B Active
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant StationsSpecifications
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
162
11/97
XACA08
(Shown with optional operators and accessories)
XAC pendant stations are designed for standard or medium duty control circuit applications. The en-closures are made from rugged, double insulated thermoplastic material. These stations have beendesigned for easy handling and operation, even with heavy work gloves.
Two styles of stations are offered; “small hoist” pistol grip stations with integral parts (see page 163),and "general purpose" station components with modular assembly required. The general purpose com-ponents are available as custom factory assembled stations. For custom applications, a wide range ofoperators, contact blocks, legend plates and accessories are offered.
Features Applications
•
1 and 2 speed versions
•
Overhead cranes
•
Double insulated
•
Tower cranes
•
Shock and corrosion resistant
•
Fixed hoists
•
2, 4, 6, 8, 12 element versions
•
Beam hoists
•
Ease of operation
Specifications
Electrical ratings NEMA A600, Q600
Enclosure XACAO* NEMA Type 4, 4X (Indoor/Outdoor), 5IP 65
XACAO* (Pistol grip) NEMA Type 4, 4X (Indoor), 5IP 65
Operating temperatures -15
°
C to +70
°
C-5
°
F to +158
°
F
Housing Yellow polypropylene
Storage temperatures -40
°
C to +70
°
C-40
°
F to +158
°
F
Shock resistance 100 g
Vibration resistance 15 g for f = 40 to 500 Hz
Mechanical life
1 million operations(The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product, please refer to Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.)
Operating force
XACA Multi-element types-with contact ZB2BE:1 daN (36 oz.) for 1N.O.,1.3 daN (46.8 oz.) for 1N.O./1N.C.-with contact XENG1491:1.4 daN (50.4 oz.) for 1N.C./2N.O.-with contact XENG1191:1.4 daN (50.4 oz.) for 1st step,2.5 daN (89.9 oz.) for 2nd step
Cable entry XACD - 7 to 18 mmAll other models - 8 to 26 mm
CablingScrew and captive cable clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 in lbs. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5 mm
2
(20 AWG) solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm
2
(16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm
2
(14 AWG) or by cable quick connector conforming to NF C 20- 20 (on request).
Approvals
File E164353CCN NKCR
File LR 44087Class 3211 03
Marking
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant StationsStandard Duty
163
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
XACA03(Shown with optional operator)
XACA06
XACA2013
ZB2BE10
XENG1191
XENG371
XACS10
q
These XACD units are available with factory installed E-stops. Add a “3” to the end of the catalog number for standard E-stop or add a “4” for a “Trigger Action” E-stop.
t
Standard enclosures include internal mounting plate, cable sleeve for 8 to 26 mm, internal cable clamp, suspension ring and cable tie.
j
Cannot be used with
XACA03
pendant.
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Pistol grip stations
Description Speeds Function1 Speed / 2 Speed Catalog Number
1 N.O. contact per operator2 Mechanically interlocked operators 1 XACA201
q
2 N.O. (staggered) contacts per operator2 Mechanically interlocked operators 2 XACA207
q
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.2 Mechanically interlocked operators 1 XACA205
q
1 N.O. contact per direction1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle 1 XACD21A0101
1 N.O. + N.O. staggered1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle 2 XACD21A1231
1 N.O. & 1 N.C. contact per direction1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle 1 XACD21A0105
1 N.C. + 1 N.O. + 1 N.O. staggered1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle 2 XACD21A1241
General purpose pendants
t
Enclosures Catalog Number
2 hole enclosure XACA02
3 hole enclosure XACA03
4 hole enclosure XACA04
6 hole enclosure XACA06
8 hole enclosure XACA08
12 hole enclosure XACA12
Contact Blocks For Operators In Cover
Description Wiring Diagram Catalog Number
1 N.O./spring return/1 speed – ZB2BE101
1 N.C./spring return/1 speed – ZB2BE102
1 N.O. early close & 1N.C.&1N.O./spring return/2 speed Fig. 1 XENG1191
1 N.C. & 2 N.O./spring return/1 speed Fig. 2 XENG1491
1 N.O. & 1 N.O. latching/1 speed/interlocked Fig. 3 XENG3781
1 N.O. & 1 N.C. latching/1 speed/interlocked Fig. 4 XENG3791
For operators in base of enclosure
j
1 N.O./1 speed XACS101
1 N.C./1 speed XACS102
2 N.O./1 speed XACS103
2 N.C./1 speed XACS104
1 N.O. & 1 N.C./1 speed XACS105
13 14
21 22
33 34
13 14
21 22
33 34
13 14 13 14 13 1411 12
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant StationsOperators and Accessories
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
164
11/97
Booted push buttons are for cover mounting only. All other operators can be mounted on cover or bottom.
Trigger action mushroom heads are “tamper proof” whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.
Not for use with XEN G contact blocks.
Operators
Description Color Catalog Number
Booted push button
White XACA9411
Black XACA9412
Green XACA9413
Red XACA9414
Yellow XACA9415
Blue XACA9416
Brown XACA9419
Description Mushroom Size Color Catalog Number
Mushroom head, momentary 30 mmBlack ZA2BC24
Red ZA2BC44
Mushroom head, momentary 40 mmBlack ZA2BC2
Red ZA2BC4
Mushroom head, push to maintain/turn to release30 mm Red ZA2BS44
40 mm Red ZA2BS54
Mushroom head, push to maintain/turn to release (trigger action)
30 mm Red ZA2BS834
40 mm Red ZA2BS844
Mushroom head, push to maintain/key turn to release30 mm Red ZA2BS74
40 mm Red ZA2BS14
Mushroom head, push to maintain/key turn to release (trigger action)
40 mm Red ZA2BS844
Description Color Catalog Number
Selector switch/2 position - maintained
Black ZA2BD2
Selector switch/3 position - maintained
Black ZA2BD3
Selector switch/2 position - maintained key operated - key removal from left or right position
NA ZA2BG4
Selector switch/3 position - maintained key operated - key removal from left or right position
NA ZA2BG5
Wobble stick (bottom mounting recommended)Black ZA2BB2
Red ZA2BB4
Pilot light components
Description Color Catalog Number
Direct supply base/without lamp (for 6 to 120 V applications) (AC/DC) ZB2BV006
Resistor supply base/with 130 V lamp (for 220-240 V applications) (AC/DC) ZB2BV007
Pilot light operators for incandescent lamps
Green ZA2BV03
Red ZA2BV04
Amber ZA2BV05
Blue ZA2BV06
Clear ZA2BV07
Pilot light operators for LED lamps
Green ZA2BV033
Red ZA2BV043
Amber ZA2BV053
Enclosure Accessories
Description Catalog Number
Blank hole plug ZB2SZ3
Mechanical interlock (momentary). For use with XAC booted operators only XACA009
Adapter for self-supporting cable XACB961
Low suspension ring for single row station XACA971
Protective guard for bottom mounted mushroom head XACA982
Protective guard for bottom mounted selector switch or key switch XACA983
Booted push button
Mushroom head
Selector switch
Selector switch(key operated)
Wobble stick
XACA982
XACB961 XACA971
XACA983
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant StationsExploded Drawing
165
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
XAC-A941
ZA2-BC4
ZA2-BC44
ZA2-BS54
ZA2-BS44
ZA2-BS14
ZA2-BS74
ZB2-SZ3
ZA2-BD ZA2-BB
XAC-A971
XAC-A983
XAC-B961
XAC-A009
XAC-S
ZB2-BE
ZA2-BG ZA2-BC BS
XAC-A982
ZB2-BV00
XEN-G1 91
XEN-T1192
XEN-G37 1
ZB2-BY
ZB2-BY
ZA2-BG
ZA2-BD
ZA2-BV0
30075-16
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant StationsLamps and Legend Plates
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
166
11/97
Lamps
a
All nameplates are black w/white lettering except “Stop”, “Emergency Stop” and “Reset” which are red w/white lettering.For black “Reset” change final digit of catalog number to 2.
j
Please specify lettering when ordering. Two lines with 11 characters (including spaces) maximum on each line.
Type Voltage (AC/DC) Watts Catalog Number
Replacement bulbs (Type BA9s)Incandescent
6 1.2 DL1CB00612 2.0 DL1CE01224 2.0 DL1CE02448 2.4 DL1 CE048
130 2.6 DL1CE130
Neon(use with direct supply light module)
120 - NE51HRT120V220 - NE51HRT220V380 - NE51HRT380V
Type Color Voltage Part Number
LED, BA9s base for Direct Supply blocks
Green 6 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0063Red 6 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0064
Amber 6 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0065Green 12 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0123Red 12 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0124
Amber 12 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0125Green 24 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0243Red 24 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0244
Amber 24 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS0245Green 120 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS1203Red 120 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS1204
Amber 120 volt ac/dc DL1CJUS1205
PVC Standard legend plates 30 x 40mm
Text
a
Catalog number Text
a
Catalog number
Bridge Forward ZB2BY2343 Off ZB2BY2312Bridge Reverse ZB2BY2344 On ZB2BY2311Close ZB2BY2314 Off On ZB2BY2367Down ZB2BY2308 Open ZB2BY2313Emergency Stop ZB2BY2330 Open Close ZB2BY2376Fast ZB2BY2328 Open-O-Close ZB2BY2388Forward ZB2BY2305 Out ZB2BY2339For Rev ZB2BY23 Power On ZB2BY2326For-O-Rev ZB2BY2384 Raise ZB2BY2335Hand Off Auto ZB2BY2387 Reset ZB2BY2323High ZB2BY2338 Reverse ZB2BY2306High Low ZB2BY2369 Right ZB2BY2309Hoist Down ZB2BY2342 Run ZB2BY2334Hoist Up ZB2BY2341 Slow ZB2BY2327In ZB2BY2503 Start ZB2BY2303Inch ZB2BY2321 Stop ZB2BY2304Jog For ZB2BY2381 Stop Start ZB2BY2366Jog Rev ZB2BY2380 Trolley Right ZB2BY2345Jog Run ZB2BY2365 Trolley Left ZB2BY2346Left ZB2BY2310 Up ZB2BY2307Low ZB2BY2336 Up Down ZB2BY2370Lower ZB2BY2337 Up-O-Down ZB2BY2389Man Auto ZB2BY2372
Type Description Catalog number
PVC blank legendBlank Black or red background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2101Blank Yellow or white background-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4101
PVC custom engraved
Special engraving
j Black background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2002Special engravingj Red background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY2004Special engravingj White background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4001Special engravingj Yellow background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm ZB2BY4005
DL1CE0**(Incandescent)
DL1CJUS****(LED)
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XACA — Pendant Stations
Order Form
16711/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
XACA Order guide instructionsCustom built pendant stations
1. The first step in putting together your pendant station is to determine the number of operators that you require. This enables you to choose theenclosure based on the number of holes needed.
2. Select the type of operator, contact block and appropriate nameplate for each function required from pages 163-166. Enter the componentsfor each function on the order form below.
3. Check for special functions that may be required. These items could include mechanical interlocks, adapters for self-supporting cable, lowersupport rings, protective guards etc.
Photocopy this form and complete all information.
TO BE COMPLETED BY SQUARE D TO BE COMPLETED BY CUSTOMERName Branch/Sales office Firm Sheet No.
Date Order No. Delivery date Date Cust. Order No. Delivery date
No. ofidentical unitsrequired
Unit referenceof enclosure
XACA
Functions(optional)
Mechanicalinterlock(draw a linebetween the 2units to beinterlocked)
Legends Contact blocksand pilot light bodies
push buttonpilot light orblanking plug
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Mechanical interlock XACA009 Number of XAC A009 required
Unit mounted in base of station (facing downwards)
13
AttachmentsPosition Type Catalog No.
Cross theappropriatebox if required
14 Adapters for self supporting cable type BBAP(only available with 8 to 26 mm dia. cable sleeve) XACB961
15 Lower support ring XACA971
16 Protective guard for base mounted selector switchor 40 mm emergency stop push button XACA982
17 Protective guard for key switch XACA983
123456789101112
13
14
15
16
17
1 1
22
3 34 4
5 5
6 6
1
2
34
5
6
* Mechanical interlock
Possible combinations
Impossible combinations
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XACA — Pendant StationsDimensions
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved168
11/97
No. of HolesIN/mm
2 3 4 6 8 12
IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm
A 15.00 380 15.00 380 17.33 440 19.70 500 22.10 560 26.78 680
B 7.50 190 7.50 190 9.85 250 12.20 310 14.57 370 19.30 490
1.948
2.3660
Internal dia.9 to 13 mm
Small hoist typeXAC A201 and A205
1.6642
1.9750
8.5
216
10.8
727
6
General purpose typeXAC A••••
2.7570
3.5590
.35 81.1
28
1.3
33
3.1580
2.25 57
3.1580
.79
20
3.1580
B
A
XAC A982
XAC A971
XAC A983
Internal dia.8 to 10 mm
11 to 14 mm
15 to 17 mm
18 to 22 mm
22 to 26 mm
823.23
1013.9791
3.58
240
9.45
300.
511
.83
Small HoistXACD
8 mm dia.
inner dia.
16 to 1813 to 1510 to 127 to 9 mm
General purpose typeXACA
Small hoist typeXACA201 and A205
Small hoistXACD
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations
Specifications
16911/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
OSHA Regulation, Section 1910.170 Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits the voltage at pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc.
Specifications
Electrical ratings Types SKRU2 - SKRU5: AC - Nema B300 DC - Nema P600Types SKRU1, 10, 11: AC - Nema A600: DC - Nema P600
Enclosure type UL Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, and 13
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 60 °C- 13 °F to + 140 °F
Housing material Polycarbonate
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 70 °C- 40 °F to + 158 °F
Cable entry 1/2 inch NPT
Approvals File E42259CCN NKCR
File LR 25490Class 3211 03
Electrical Contact Ratings (Types SKRU2 Through SKRU5)
AC – NEMA Type B300
Volts
Inductive35% Power Factor
Resistive75% Power Factor
Make Break ContinuousCarrying Amperes
Make, Break and Continuous Carrying
AmperesAmps VA Amps VA
120240
3015
36003600
31.5
360360
55
55
Electrical Contact Ratings (Types SKRU1, 10 and 11)
AC – NEMA Type A600 DC - Standard Duty - NEMA P600
Volts
Inductive35% Power Factor
Resistive75% Power Factor
Volts
Inductiveand
Resistive
Make Amperes Break AmperesContinuous
Carrying Amperes
Make, Break and Continuous
Carrying Amperes
Make and Break Amperes
Continuous Carrying Amperes
120240480600
60301512
63
1.51.2
10101010
10101010
120240600
1.10.550.2
101010
Marking For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant StationsApplication Data and Order Information
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved170
11/97
This line of pendant stations consists of polymeric enclosures(2 through 10 units), push button units (1 through 5 speed) andlaminated legend plates. All enclosures have an extra singleunit space near the top which permits the installation of a tog-gle switch ➀, a Type SK operator or pilot light ➁ or a warninglabel. All enclosures come with a stainless steel hanger brack-et and internal strain relief post, as standard. Enclosures areyellow and have a threaded opening in the top. The completeline is UL Listed and CSA Certified with NEMA Type environ-mental ratings 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13.
Class 9001 SK push-to-test pilot lights and remote test pilot lights will not fit in these enclo-sures.
Assembled pendant stations consist of an enclosure, operators and legend plates. Theprice of the total station consists of the prices of the individual components - there is nocharge for assembly. All custom orders must include the pendant key sheet available asshown on page 173.
Threaded conduit hole
Hanger bracket (Part no. 6509101801)
Space for toggle switch, a type SK operator or pilot light. Use appropriate legend plates.
Type SKYP enclosure
Type SKRU1 through SKRU11 operators. Any Type SK pilot light or operator can be mounted in this enclosure. The enclosure depth will accommodate 1 Type KA1 thru KA6 (total of 2) contact blocks.
Type SKN2 legend plate
Types SKRU 1, 10 and 11 use Type KA contact blocks. Types SKRU 2 thru 5 are factoryenclosed contact blocks.
Multispeed Contact Symbols (“X”= Contact Closed)
Enclosures
Size Conduit EntranceSize
Enclosure OnlyEnclosure For
Assembled Station
Type Type
2 Button4 Button6 Button8 Button
10 Button
3/4"-14 NPT3/4"-14 NPT1"-111/2 NPT
11/4"-111/2 NPT11/4"-111/2 NPT
SKYP2SKYP4SKYP6SKYP8SKYP10
SKYP20SKYP40SKYP60SKYP80SKYP100
Push Button UnitsNumber of
ButtonsPer Unit
DescriptionContact
Symbol –See Below
Type
2 Single Speed –Momentary Interlocked 7 SKRU1
2 Single Speed –Momentary Non-Interlocked 5 SKRU10
2 Single Speed –Maintained Interlock 10 SKRU11
2 Two Speed –Momentary Interlocked 87 SKRU2
2 Three Speed –Momentary Interlocked 88 SKRU3
2 Four Speed –Momentary Interlocked 89 SKRU4
2 Five Speed –Momentary Interlocked 90 SKRU5
Terminals
87
2868-D30
C
1
2
2 1
SPEED POSITIONOFF
1 2
C
1
2
Terminals
TerminalsC
1
2
3
4
4 3 2 1
SPEED POSITIONOFF
2868-D31
89
1 2 3 4Terminals
C
1
2
3
4
C
1
2
3
3 2 1
SPEED POSITIONOFF
2868-D29
88
1 2 3 Terminals
C
1
2
3
Terminals
TerminalsC
1
2
3
4
4 3 2 1
SPEED POSITIONOFF
2868-D32
90
1 2 3 4Terminals
C
1
2
3
4
5 5
55
➀ Can be supplied by Square D as Class 9001 Type SKSTS1- includes boot for NEMA Type 4X.
➁ See Class 9001 Type SK on page 171.➂ Includes legend plate, gasket and ground plate to be used with toggle switch.➃ Tri-laminated legend plate having a yellow or red background on a black core. ➄ 19 characters each side max.
Single Speed Contact Symbols
Dimensions ........................................................................................... Page 172Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Pendant ........................................... Page 173
Legend PlatesWhere Used Marking Type
For SKRU1throughSKRU11
Blank-BlankHoist: Up-DownTrolley: East-WestTrolley: Fwd.-Rev.Trolley: North-SouthBridge: Fwd.-Rev.Bridge: East-WestBridge: North-SouthStart-StopReset-StopAux Hoist: Up-DownPower: On-OffSpecify Marking
SKN200➄SKN201SKN202SKN203SKN204SKN205SKN206SKN207SKN208SKN209SKN210SKN211SKN299➄
With ToggleSwitch➀ inTop Space ofEnclosure
BlankOff-OnOn-OffSpecify Marking
SKN500➂SKN544➂SKN545➂SKN599➂
WithType SKOperator orPilot Light➁in Top Spaceof Enclosure
BlankOnOffEmerg. StopRunPower OnOff-OnSpecify Marking
SKN100➃SKN103SKN104SKN105SKN124SKN138SKN144SKN199➃
Closing PlateType
SK52
LIFETIMEENCLOSUREWARRANTY
1057
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SK — Operators
Application Data and Order Information
17111/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
(1) Red knob available with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob.See note (3) below for additional options.
(1) Red knob available with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob.See note (3) below for additional options.
Shallow Depth Light Modules For Type SK Control Units• UL listed and CSA certified• LED light modules use lamp with 7 element LED cluster that provides illumination similar to incandescent illumination.• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
➀ 9001 SK
(3) For additional Type SK push button operators (illuminated and non-illuminated), light modules, and contact blocks, see document 9001CT9601: 30mm Push Buttons Type K and SK. All illumi-nated push button operators must use a shallow depth light module listed above. Only standard pilot lights and non-illuminated selector switches can be used in Type SKYP enclosures.
Non-illuminated
Description Color Catalog
2 Position Red SKR9R
Maintained Pull Red (1) SKR9R05
Maintained Push (2) SKR9 (2)
Illuminated
Description Color Voltage Catalog
2 Position Red 120 Vac/dc - Full Voltage SKR9P58R
Maintained Pull Red (1) 24 Vac/dc - Full Voltage SKR9P55R05
Maintained Push (2) 24 Vac/dc - Full Voltage SKR9P55 (2)
Voltage DescriptionFor Use With Single Lamp
Ill. Operators as Indicated ➀
Light Module Type
No.
Voltage Assembly
CodeRating
Replacement Lamps
Lamp Number(ANSI)
Lamp PartNumber
24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc24-28 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
All AllAll All
KM55KM55LRKM55LGKM55LY
5555LR55LG55LY
1.2 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA
757 2550101002650880520465088052066508805205
110-120 Vac-dc110-120 Vac-dc110-120 Vac-dc110-120 Vac-dc
Full VoltageLED Red
LED GreenLED Yellow
AllAllAll All
KM58KM58LRKM58LGKM58LY
5858LR58LG58LY
3.0 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA0.5 VA
120MB 2550101027650880520465088052066508805205
Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts – Types KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
Volts
AC
Volts
DC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600)35% Power Factor Resistive 75%
Power FactorMake, Break
and ContinuousAmperes
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type P600)
Make Break ContinuousCarryingAmperes
Make and Break Continuous
CarryingAmperes
Amperes VA Amperes VA KA1 KA2KA3 KA4 KA5
KA6
120240480600
60301512
7200720072007200
6.03.01.51.2
720720720720
10101010
10101010
125250600
1.10.550.2
1.10.550.2
1.1––
1.10.550.2
101010
Color (2) Other Color Codes
Black B
Red R
Green G
Blue L
Yellow Y
White W
Orange S
Clear C
Amber A
These colors are not available on illuminatedpush buttons.
Both N.C. contacts are direct opening.
Contact Blocks (3)
Description Symbol Catalog
(Clear Cover)
KA1
(Red Cover)
KA3
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant StationsDimensions
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved172
11/97
682.68
1024.00
111
See Chart for NPT Size
Type SKYP
4.38
54.48
2.15"A"
542.12
1104.33
1224.79
592.32
843.31
D65075-140B
893.50
522.0489
3.49
3.19 81
7.37187
Dual Dimensions:Millimeters
Inches
Type SKYP
Approximate Dimensions
Type SKYPClass 9001 Type SK Push-To-Test Pilot Lights and Remote TestPilot Lights will not fit in these enclosures.Standard Pilot Lights will fit in these enclosures. For illuminatedoperators, in the SKYP, the shallow depth light module(9001KM55 or 9001KM58) must be used.
Units
“A” Dimensions Conduit Opening
Inches mm NPT
2 11.70 297 3/4” -14
4 16.03 407 3/4” -14
6 20.36 517 1” -11 1/2
8 24.69 627 11/4” -111/2
10 29.02 737 11/4” -111/2
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideClass 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations
Order Form
17311/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
1. Operator or Closing Plate.Example - SKRU1
2. Legend Plate Type NumberExample - SKN201
3. Legend Plate Marking – Used Only if Special Marking is RequiredExample:
Line 2 - SKN299Line 3 - A.) Hoist
B.) FWD C.) REV
ENCLOSURES – NEMA 4X, 13
PUSH BUTTON UNITS – NEMA 4X, 13
CLOSING PLATE
Control Products KEY SHEET FOR ORDERING CLASS 9001 TYPE SKYPASSEMBLED PENDANT CONTROL STATIONS
CUSTOMER CUSTOMER ORDER NO.
Class 9001 Type SKYP -________DATE LIST PRICE EACH, DIB QUANTITY
SizeConduitEntrance
Size
Enclosurefor Assembled
Station
Type
2 Button 3/4” -14 NPT SKYP20
4 Button 3/4” -14 NPT SKYP40
6 Button 1” -14 NPT SKYP60
8 Button 11/4” -11 1/2 SKYP80
10 Button 11/4” -11 1/2 SKYP100
Assembled pendant stations consist of an enclosure, operators, and legendplates. The price of the total station consists of the prices of the individualcomponents – there is no charge for assembly.
Number of Buttons per
UnitDescription Contact
Symbol Type
2 Single Speed - Momentary Interlocked 7 SKRU1
2 Single Speed - Momentary Non-Interlocked 5 SKRU10
2 Single Speed - Maintained Interlocked 10 SKRU11
2 Two Speed - Momentary Interlocked 87 SKRU2
2 Three Speed - Momentary Interlocked 88 SKRU3
2 Four Speed - Momentary Interlocked 89 SKRU4
2 Five Speed - Momentary Interlocked 90 SKRU5
Type
SK52
A
1
C
B 23
SKRU1SKN201
123
SKRU1SKN201
Hanger bracketThreaded conduitholeSpace for toggleswitch ➀, a Type SKoperator or pilot lightor a warning label.Use SKN5 or SKN1legend plates.
Type SKYP enclosure
Type SKRU1 throughSKRU11 operators.Type SKN2 legendplate
LEGEND PLATES – NEMA 4X, 13
➀ Can be supplied by Square D as 9001SKSTS1➁ Includes legend plate, gasket and ground plate to be
used with toggle switch.➂ Tri-laminated legend plate having a yellow or red
background on a black core.➃ 19 characters each sides. Class 9001 Type SK Push-To-Test Pilot lights and Re-
mote Test Pilot lights will not fit in these enclosures.
Where Used Marking Type
For SKRU1 throughSKRU11
Blank-BlankHoist: Up-DownTrolley: East-WestTrolley: Fwd.-Rev.Trolley: North-SouthBridge: Fwd.-Rev.Bridge: East-WestBridge: North-SouthStart-StopReset-StopSpecify Marking
SKN200➃SKN201SKN202SKN203SKN204SKN205SKN206SKN207SKN208SKN209SKN299➃
With Toggle Switch ➀ in Top Space of Enclosure
BlankOff-OnOn-OffSpecify Marking
SKN500 ➁SKN544 ➁SKN545 ➁SKN599 ➁
With Type SK Operator or Pilot Light in Top Space of Enclosure
BlankOnOffEmerg. StopRunPower OnOff-OnSpecify MarkingSpecify Marking(Red Background)
SKN100 ➂SKN103SKN104SKN105SKN124SKN138SKN144SKN199 ➂SKN199R ➂
When operator and legend plateuse 2 adjacent holes - specifysame in both locations. Example:
1
2
3
1
2
3 A)
B)
C)
1
2
3 A)
B)
C)
1
2
3 A)
B)
C)
1
2
3 A)
B)
C)
1
2
3 A)
B)
C)
1
2
3 A)
B)
C)
1
2
3 A)
B)
C)
1
2
3 A)
B)
C)
1
2
3 A)
B)
C)
1
2
3 A)
B)
C)
Space for tog-gle switch ➀, a Type SK opera-tor or pilot light, or a warning la-bel. Use SKN-5 or SKN-1 leg-end plates.
Type SKRU1 through SKRU 11 operators or Type SK operators and Type SKN-2 leg-end plate.
TYPE NUMBER KEY
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved174
11/97
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 181-182XVAL Single Stage Indicating Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177XVAC Indicating Bank Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Prewired Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178LED Cluster Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179-180Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181-182
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
Type XVA Indicating Banks and Beacons
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVA — Indicating Banks and BeaconsGeneral Description
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
176
11/97
The XVA indicating bank is an illuminatedstackable modular system of signaling lightsthat can be used for indicating the status of amachine and verifying that status from a dis-tance and in all directions (360
°
). The modularsystem of lenses allows the unit to be construct-ed from any combination of 1 to 5 lenses. Con-stant, flashing and strobe units are available.
Examples: Indicates machine shutdown, short-age of materials, paging of supervisor or main-tenance personnel, hazardous or dangerousconditions to name a few. It is a perfect solutionfor status indication on factory floors utilizingJIT methods.
Machines, instrument panels and work stationsequipped with the XVA allow personnel to reactmore quickly to any situation or incident.
Some industries that currently use or could use XVAs:
Automotives CanningOEMs Test EquipmentElectronics Computer IndustryGarment Food ProcessingPharmaceuticals RoboticsPublishing SemiconductorTextiles Machine ToolAgriculture
Typical applications for the XVA include:
Conveyor Systems Industrial Baking OvensMachine Tools Automated Paint BoothsPrinting Presses Automated Test EquipmentRetro-fit Just-In-Time ManufacturingAssembly Lines Automated Manufacturing LinesTextile Looms Assembly Work Stations
Specifications
• One complete single stage beacon or components con-sisting of 1 to 5 lenses forming an indicating bank.
• Five colors to select from: green, red, orange, blue andclear.
• Signal can be continuous, flashing or strobe.• Visible from a distance and on a 360
°
radius.• Shock and vibration resistant.• One common base for 1-5 lenses, only one cable entry
required.• Aluminum tubes of 4 in. (100 mm), 16 in. (400 mm), and
31.5 in. (800 mm) lengths for extension of column.• Audible signal available
Mounting
• Two screws affix base when units are direct mounted orfour screws used for tube and tulip mounted.
• The tube and base of column mount directly on the tulip.• All wiring done into saddle clamp screws in the base.
See page 181 for wiring diagram.• Lenses stack on one another by use of a captive screw
through the lens.
Specifications
Protective treatment
Standard version, treatment TC “all climates”
Ambient temperature
Storage: -40
°
F to +158
°
F (-40
°
C to +70
°
C)Operating: -13
°
F to +158
°
F (-25
°
C to +70
°
C)
Degree of protection
Approval per UL508. Meets NEMA Type 1 and 12 protection, IEC Type IP54
Material
Cover and lenses: polycarbonateBase: PolyamideTube: Anodized aluminumGasket: Neoprene
Rated insulation voltage 250 V
Approvals
File E164353CCN NKCR
File LR 44087Class 3211 03 andClass 3211 07
Marking For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226
Lamps 5 W minimum, 7W maximum, length: 1.61" (41 mm) for DL1BA
1.93" (49 mm) for DL1BL
Terminal marking Terminal marked “O” common to 5 elements and ground
WiringCaptive terminal with screw saddle clamp, minimum capacity:2 size #18 AWG seriesmaximum capacity: 2 size #12 AWG series
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVAL — Indicating Banks and BeaconsSingle Stage Indicating Beacon
177
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
XVAL471(One circuit only)
XVAC09
XVAC02, 027XVAC03, 037XVAC04, 047
XVAC01XVAC11
DL1B
XVACO5 XVAC06
XVAC12
(1) XVAC211Base + cover
Indicating Beacons
For Additional Lamps see LED Lamps on page 179 and 180.
Description Signal Color Catalog Number
Complete assemblycomprising:1 cover1 illuminated lens unit1 base
Steady lightlamp type BA15d (not supplied)
≤
240 Vac/dc
Green
XVAL331
Red
XVAL341
Orange
XVAL351
Blue
XVAL361
Clear
XVAL371
Standard flashing lightlamp type BA15d (not supplied)24 V - 240 Vac only (
±
10%)
Green
XVAL431
Red
XVAL441
Orange
XVAL451
Blue
XVAL461
Clear
XVAL471
Strobe light(integral discharge tube)24 Vdc, 260 mA max.
Green
XVAL73C024
Red
XVAL74C024
Orange
XVAL75C024
Blue
XVAL76C024
Clear
XVAL77C024
Strobe light(integral discharge tube)110-120 Vac, 110 mA50-60 Hz
Green
XVAL73B120
Red
XVAL74B120
Orange
XVAL75B120
Blue
XVAL76B120
Clear
XVAL77B120
Strobe light(integral discharge tube)220 Vac (
±
10%), 80 mA50-60 Hz
Green
XVAL73A220
Red
XVAL74A220
Orange
XVAL75A220
Blue
XVAL76A220
Clear
XVAL77A220
Accessories and spare parts for indicating beacons and banks
TypeSize/Type
Voltage
CatalogNumber
Accessoriesfor tube mounting
4" metal tubes 100 mm
XVAC02
16" metal tubes 400 mm
XVAC03
31.5" metal tubes 800 mm
XVAC04
4" black anodized metal tubes 100 mm
XVAC027
16" black anodized metal tubes 400 mm
XVAC037
31.5" black anodized metal tubes 800 mm
XVAC047
1/2" NPT conduit adaptor Metallic
XVAC00
Tube support/fixing plate - Black Anodized Plastic
XVAC01
Tube support/fixing plate - Black Anodized Metallic
XVAC11
Wall mounting bracket Metallic
XVAC12
Gaskets for use at point of mounting
For direct base mounting
XVAC05
For tube support/mounting plate
XVAC06
For between lenses, base, cover - replacement
XVAC09
AC or DC
Lamps typeBA15d
Length 49 mm (BL)41 mm (BA)
2.5 W 12 V
DL1BA012
4 W 24 V
DL1BA024
6.5 W 24 V
DL1BL024
4 W 48 V
DL1BA048
7 W 110 V
DL1BA110
7 W 120 V
DL1BL120
5 W 160 V
DL1BA160
6 W 260 V
DL1BA260
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVAC — Indicating Banks and BeaconsIndicating Bank Components
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
178
11/97
(1) XVAC211Base + cover
(1) XVAC027
(1) XVAC11
+
(1) XVAC06
+
(3) DL1BL120
+
+
1 exampleof a complete
indicating bank=
(1) XVAC94
+
(1) XVAC341
+
(1) XVAC331
+
Indicating banks are supplied as sub-assemblies, individually referenced and boxed, for assem-bly by the user.
Maximum number of units:
5, including 1 (max.) top mounted strobe.
See page 177 for Accessories and Spare Parts.
Example: XVAC73C024
Pre-Wired Bases (1)
(1) Common and ground wires are provided with all of the above options.(2)
Standard wire
provides 2 feet of wire as standard length.(3) #14 AWG wire cannot be used with tube support/fixing plates (XVAC01 or XVAC11)and
wall mounting bracket (XVAC12).
(Components for variable composition)
Description Signal Color CatalogNumber
Lens unit sub assembly Steady light lamp type BA15d (not supplied)
≤
240 Vac/dc
Green
XVAC331
Red
XVAC341
Orange
XVAC351
Blue
XVAC361
Clear
XVAC371
Standard flashing light lamp type BA15d(not supplied)24 V to 240 Vac only (
±
10%)
Green
XVAC431
Red
XVAC441
Orange
XVAC451
Blue
XVAC461
Clear
XVAC471
Lens unit sub assembly with strobe light (only 1 strobe may be used on each bank and must be mounted in the top position).
Strobe light(integral dis-charge tube) 24 Vdc, 260 mA max. common negative (for com-mon positive, take off digit 1 at the end of the refer-ence.
Green
XVAC73C0241
Red
XVAC74C0241
Orange
XVAC75C0241
Blue
XVAC76C0241
Clear
XVAC77C0241
Strobe light(integral dis-charge tube) 110-120 Vac, 110 mA, 50-60 Hz
Green
XVAC73B120
Red
XVAC74B120
Orange
XVAC75B120
Blue
XVAC76B120
Clear
XVAC77B120
Strobe light(integral dis-charge tube)220 Vac (
±
10%), 80 mA50-60 Hz
Green
XVAC73A220
Red
XVAC74A220
Orange
XVAC75A220
Blue
XVAC76A220
Clear
XVAC77A220
Audible sounder sub assembly (90 db. at1 meter, 3KHz)
(for common positiveremove digit 1 at the end of the reference
Example: XVAC91
)
Continuous tone12 to 48Vdc, 13 mA max.common negative
XVAC911
110 to 220 Vac, 3.3 mA
XVAC93
Intermittent tone12 to 48 Vdc 13 mA max.common negative
XVAC921
110 to 220 Vac, 3.1 mA
XVAC94
Cover and one to five unit base
XVAC211
Cover only
XVAC081
Base only
XVAC07
Wire Gauge Standard Wire (2)
#14 AWG (3) XVAC211S5
#16 AWG XVAC211S1
#18 AWG XVAC211S10
#22 AWG XVAC211S11
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVA — Indicating Banks and BeaconsLED Cluster Lamps
179
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Lens
Lamp
How to choose between the standard incandescent bulband the LED cluster lamp
Average P.O. costs
$25 - $50
to process; assume bulbs ordered twice each year.
Assume maintenance worker rate of approximately
$20
/hr. or
$5
/15 minutes to changebulb.
LED Lamp & Lens Assemblies
Yellow lamps can be installed in either yellow or clear bases.
The flashing circuitry is in the LED lamp, not the lens.
Yellow lamp installed in a yellow lens. Order components XVAC381 (for indicating banksand beacons) with XVAD381B120 (steady light) or XVAD481B120 yellow (flashing) LED lamp. Lead time based on components.
Yellow installed in a clear lens (both items are in stock).
Yellow lamps can be installed in either yellow or clear bases.
The flashing circuitry is in the LED lamp, not the lens.
Yellow lamp installed in a yellow lens. Order components XVAC381 (for indicating banksand beacons) with XVAD381C024 (steady light) or XVAD481C024 yellow (flashing) LED lamp. Lead time based on components.
Yellow installed in a clear lens (both items are in stock).
Use standard incandescent bulb when desiring: Use upgraded LED cluster lamp when desiring:
average operating life
≤
2,000 hours
a universal bulb
–
each bulb can be used with any color lens
–
Bipolar (e.g. 120 V bulb can be used with either 120 Vac or 120 Vdc)
low initial bulb cost for short term cost savings
bulb is normally OFF
extended lamp life (industry average for an LED is approx. 100,000 hrs.) - lamp is normally ON
resistance to vibration (e.g. direct machine mounting, conveyor mount, etc.)
to avoid machine and/or process downtime due to changing lamp, or if process is complicated to reset
lower power consumption
long range cost savings (see table below)
Product Cost Comparison
Lamp Type Average Life(approximate) Miscellaneous Illumination Cost Savings (over 11 years)
Incandescent ~ 2,000 hours
+ Low initial cost+ Many color options+ AC or DC power- Generates heat- Prone to shock and vibrationdamage
• Maximum brightness
$5 List Price/bulb x 50 ($30 cost/P.O.) (2 P.O.'s/yr.) (11yr.) ($5/bulb change) (50 bulb changes)
This price does not include cost of ma-chine or process downtime.
= 250.00= 660.00= 250.00—————
$ 1,160.00
LED
~ 100,000 hours (11.4 years)
“LED Industry Average”(~50 times life of incandescent)
+ Extremely long life+ Resistant to shock/vibration+ Cool operation+ Low power consumption
LED ColorBrightest Red
OrangeYellowGreen
Least bright Blue
$150 List Price/LED lamp x 1 ($30 cost/P.O.) (1 P.O.) ($5/lamp change) (1 lamp installation)
This price does not include savings from reduced power consumption.
= 150.00= 30.00= 5.00—————
$ 185.00
Color Steady Unit LED Catalog Numbers Flashing Unit LED Catalog Numbers
(Lamp/Lens) Voltage Indicating Banks and Beacons Indicating Banks and Beacons
Green/Green
120 VAC
XVACD331B120 XVACD431B120
Red/Red XVACD341B120 XVACD441B120
Orange/Orange XVACD351B120 XVACD451B120
Yellow/Yellow XVACD381B120 XVACD481B120
Yellow/Clear XVACD371B120 XVACD471B120
Color Steady Unit LED Catalog Numbers Flashing Unit LED Catalog Numbers
(Lamp/Lens) Voltage Indicating Banks and Beacons Indicating Banks and Beacons
Green/Green
24 VAC/DC
XVACD331C024 XVACD431C024
Red/Red XVACD341C024 XVACD441C024
Orange/Orange XVACD351C024 XVACD451C024
Yellow/Yellow XVACD381C024 XVACD481C024
Yellow/Clear XVACD371C024 XVACD471C024
NEW LAMP/LENSCOMBINATION
FREE LENS!
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XVA — Indicating Banks and BeaconsLED Cluster Lamps
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved180
11/97
No twisting orturning–insertstraight in andclick.
LED Cluster Lamp
LED Cluster Lamp Selections
These LEDs will not fit in XVA flashing lenses (i.e. XVAC4••) nor in steady lenses manufactured with date codes before 9221 (21st week of1992 Example of date code before this date would be 9210, 9138, etc.). LEDs will fit into lenses with a two letter date code, e.g. MA, CB, etc.
The flashing circuitry is in the LED, not the lens. *Yellow lens is not UL listed. Note: The LEDs have a separate negotiation category from the standard XVA Line.
Product CapabilitiesOur new XVA LED Cluster Lamp has passed (and even surpassed) exhaustive testing to en-sure the highest level of quality. The following are a few of those tests:
Reliability — predicted minimum mean time between failure (MTBF) of 200,000 hours.
Vibration Resistant — passed the following standard tests: IEC68-2-6: Cycling from 10 Hzto 55 Hz for 5 minutes, and holding at resonance on 55 Hz for 30 minutes.
Low Power Consumption — Approximately 40% less power dissipation than the incandes-cent lamp.
Current Regulated — Illumination will not vary in intensity from 85% to 120% of rated volt-age.
Leakage Current — Device will not illuminate with leakage current up to 3 mA.
UL Recognized, CSA Certified, with CE Marking
Noise Immunity — Meets requirements of IEC801. Passed the following standard tests:
IEC801-2: Electro-static discharge
IEC801-4: Fast transient burst
IEC801-5: Line-to-line surge withstand
IEC801-5: Line-to-ground surge withstand
Shock Resistant — Passed the following standard test: IEC68-2-27 (30 g, for 11 ms, 1/2 sinewave).
Shipping Test — Passed National Safe Transit Committee Project 1A Test
Thermal Cycling Test — Passed 35 cycles from -25 °C to 75 °C (one cycle = -25 °C to +75 °C to -25 °C in 1 hr.)
Salt Spray Test — Passed (96 hours). Test = 96 hours of direct spray.
Immune to interference from portable communication devices.
Storage Temperature -40 °C to + 70 °C (-40 °F to + 158 °F)
Operating Temperature -25 °C to + 55 °C (-13 °F to + 158 °F)
Color Steady Unit Flashing Unit
(Recommended Lens Color) Voltage Current LED Catalog No. Current LED Catalog No.
Red 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD341B120 25 mA XVAD441B120
(Red) 24 V AC/DC
AC: 80 mADC: 95 mA XVAD341C024 AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA XVAD441C024
Orange 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD351B120 25 mA XVAD451B120
(Orange) 24 VAC/DC
AC: 80 mADC: 95 mA XVAD351C024 AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA XVAD451C024
Green 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD331B120 25 mA XVAD431B120
(Green) 24 VAC/DC
AC: 80 mADC: 95 mA XVAD331C024 AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA XVAD4312C024
Yellow 120 Vac 25 mA XVAD381B120 25 mA XVAD481B120
(Yellow or Clear) 24 VAC/DC
AC: 80 mADC: 95 mA XVAD381C024 AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA XVAD481C024
File LR 44087Class 3211 03
File E164353CCN NKCR2
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons
Dimensions
18111/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Indicating beacon, 1 stage
b2
dia.2.769
1.6542
= =
4.2
107
dia.2.769
1.6542
= =
= =
b1
dia. 2.6768
2.1254
.63
16
dia..9825
4.2
107
2.769
b
= =
b1
dia.2.6768
2.1254
.63
16
dia..9825
b2
1.57 40
b
Indicating bankColumn 1 to 5 stages
Mounting with tube
Mounting with tube
Dual Dimensions:mm
Inches
Note: For strobe unit add 3.19" (81mm) to total stack height.
Note: For strobe unit add 3.19" (81 mm) to total stack height.
Tube length b b1
in. mm in. mm in. mm
3.9 100 7.3 186 2.5 63
15.7 400 19.1 486 14.3 363
31.5 800 34.9 886 30.0 763
No. oflenses Tube length b b1 b2
1
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
3.9 100 7.3 186 2.5 63 4.2 107
15.7 400 19.1 486 14.3 363 4.2 107
31.5 800 34.9 886 30.0 763 4.2 107
2
3.9 100 9.25 238 2.5 63 6.25 159
15.7 400 21.2 538 14.3 363 6.25 159
31.5 800 36.9 938 30.0 763 6.25 159
3
3.9 100 11.4 290 2.5 63 8.3 211
15.7 400 23.2 590 14.3 363 8.3 211
31.5 800 39.0 990 30.0 763 8.3 211
4
3.9 100 13.4 342 2.5 63 10.3 263
15.7 400 25.3 642 14.3 363 10.3 263
31.5 800 41.0 1042 30.0 763 10.3 263
5
3.9 100 15.5 394 2.5 63 12.4 315
15.7 400 27.3 694 14.3 363 12.4 315
31.5 800 43.0 1094 30.0 363 12.4 315
1st unit
2nd unit3rd unit
4th unit
5th unit
** “—” pole to “common” terminal
Common**
Cabling(base viewed from above)
5
4
3
2
1
L2L1
0 (+)
Wiring Diagram
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideType XVA — Indicating Banks and BeaconsDimensions
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved182
11/97
Baseplate 1
Lite Tube
Wall Mount Front
0.3910
r =
30°
40°
0.0591.5
r =
0.195
65°
0.9825
0.3910
0.9524
0.0591.5
r =
0.4010.5
0.225.5
Inchesmillimeters
M23 x 2
4.02102
1.4637
0.9123
0.4311
0.0471.2
@ 45°
4.50114.3
2.6868
1.5038
0.174.32
0.5012.7 0.59
15
0.5513.97
0.7619.30
0.7619.30
0.174.32
0.205.08
Dia. (Qty. 2)
Dia. (Qty. 4)
0.266.60
0.9022.86
Dia.
Wall Mount Side
Wall Mount Bottom
Drilling and tapping of support
0.9022.86
4.50114.3
2.2055.88
0.287.11
2.0451.82
0.5313.5
0.051.27
0.133.30
0.174.32
0.5313.5
Inchesmillimeters
1.2030.5
0.0551.4
2.6868
0.0551.4
0.7017.8
0.307.62
0.153.81
Dia.
1.5038
0.5313.5
0.4611.68
0.143.56
0.235.84
Dia.(Qty.3)
2.0451.82
0.205.08
0.205.08
Tubing and Thread DimensionsWall Mounting BracketTo be Drawn
2.1254
2.12 54
1.5740
1.6542
1.3343 2 size M4 screws
(dia. 4)
2 size M5 screws(dia. 5)
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers Guide
Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
Class 9003
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 2, 3 and 4 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 5, 6 and 7 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 8, 9 and 10 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Type K Instrument Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Type K Rotary Cam Switch Operators and Handles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Accessories and Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Type K Rotary Cam Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Type K Rotary Cam Switch Markings and Special Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
184
11/97
The Class 9003 Type K2 rotary cam switch is a versatile means of providing inexpensive logic control. The Class 9003 Type K cam switch is available with:• Up to 12 switching positions • Worldwide acceptance • Attractive operator/handle appearance• Up to 20 contacts • Standard or custom configured sequencesA complete rotary cam switch consists of up to four items. This includes the contact block assembly, the operator/handle, a legend (if desired), and anyspecial accessories (if required).A. There are two ways of ordering a Class 9003 Type K rotary cam switch contact block assembly.1. If the desired contact sequence can be found on pages 185 through 189, order the class and type of the device.2. If the contact sequence cannot be found on pages 185 through 189, use the keysheet on pages 193 through 195. Indicate the exact contact config-
uration desired.
Devices will be assembled at the factory per this keysheet.
B. Operators/handles are listed on pages 190 and 191. The operator/handle is chosen depending on the application and size of the rotary cam switch.C. Many operators/handles come standard with a blank legend plate. Separate legends for operators without blank legend plates or when an additional
legend is desired are listed on page 192. Page 194 contains a chart on the maximum characters allowed on all legend plates.D. All accessories are listed on page 192.
Example
– Below is an explanation of the Contact Sequence/Wiring Diagrams found on pages 185 through 189.
1. Vertical arrow indicates contact status at 0
°
(up) handle position.2. Terminal identification, terminals 1 and 2 are one contact.3. Contact 3-4 is closed between 2nd and 4th position. The “H” indicates
that the contact does not open while switching from one position toanother.
4. Contacts 5-6 and 7-8 overlap between positions 4 and 5.5. Jumpers installed by factory between terminals 2 and 4, 6 and 12, 8
and 10.6. Horizontal arrow indicates spring return to
previous position
.7. Contact 1-2 is open in third position.8. Contact 1-2 is closed in second position.9. A “1” in adjacent boxes does not assure that the contact remains
closed while switching between adjacent positions.10. Contact 11-12 closes momentarily when switching from position 3 to
position 4. This contact is not closed at position 3 or at position 4.
Contact Ratings
The following contact rating charts are to be used in properly sizing a Class 9003 Type K rotary cam switch to a particular application. The UL ratings chartbelow reflects the ratings to UL specifications. The UL file is E164864. The Class 9003 Type K2 is UL Listed per guide NLRV. The Class 9003 Type K3through KA9 are UL component recognized per guide NLRV2. The lower chart is contact ratings per German specification VDE 0660. The CSA file isLR 44087, Class 3211 03 or Class 3211 05.
c
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.
UL Ratings
Contact Block Assembly
MaximumV
General Purpose
A
Horsepower 1 PH - 2 pole 60 Hz Horsepower 3 PH - 3 pole 60 Hz110V-120V
200V-208V
220V-240V
440V-480V
550V-600V
110V-120V
200V-208V
220V-240V
440V-480V
550V-600V
HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HPK2 300 12 0.5 1 1 – – 1.5 2 3 – – X XK3 120 20 0.75 – – – – 2 – – – – XK4 600 25 2 3 3 7.5 7.5 3 5 7.5 15 20 X XK5 600 32 2 3 5 10 15 5 7.5 10 20 25 X XK6 600 45 – – – – – 7.5 15 15 30 40 X XK7 600 63 – – – – – 10 15 20 40 50 X XK8 600 110 – – – – – 15 25 25 60 60 XK9 600 195 – – – – – 15 30 30 75 75 X
Electrical Ratings (VDE 0660)
Con-tact
Block
ShaftDi-
men-sions
Rated Cur-rentas
LoadBreakSwitch
I
a
ContinuousCurrent I
th2
InFreeAir
Utiliza-tion
Cate-gory
AC1 I
e
Utilization CategoryAC1
RatedOperational Current I
e
Utilization CategoryAC2 and AC3
Rated OperationCurrent I
e
Operational VoltagesUtilizationCategory AC11
Utilization CategoryAC3 and AC3 1 PH
InFreeAIr
En-closed
3 PH 3 Pole 1 PH 2 Pole 3 PH 3 Pole 1 PH 2
Pole For Y
q
-Starters
240 V 415 V 500 V
RatedInsu-lationVolt-age
MainSwitches
Emer-gencyStop
Switch
Emer-gencyMain
Switch220 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V 220 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V 220V 415 V 500 V 660 V
c
mm A A A A kW kW kW kW kW kW kWA
kWA
kWA
kWA kW kW kW kW kW kW A A A V V V V
K2 6 20 20 16 16 6 10.5 14 14 4.5 7.5 2.28.5
48.5
46.5
45 1.3 2.2 2.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4 3 2 660 500 660 500
K3 6 32 32 25 32 12 21 27.5 27.5 7 12 4.315
7.515.5
7.512
7.59 2.5 4.3 6.5 11 11 11 6 4 3 660 500 660 500
K4 8 63 63 50 40 15 26 34 34 14 24 5.520.5
1122
1122
1113 – – 8.5 15 15 15 12 8 6 660 500 660 500
K5 8 63 63 50 40 15 26 34 34 14 24 8.529
1530
1523
1517.5 – – 12.5 22 22 22 – – – 660 500 660 500
K6 8 80 80 63 63 24 41.5 54 54 17.5 30 1139
2040
2030.5
2023 – – 17 30 30 30 – – – 660 500 660 500
K7 8 100 100 80 80 30 52.5 69 69 22 38 1759
3057
3044
3033 – – 26 45 45 45 – – – 660 660 660 660
K8 8 160 160 125 125 48 83 108 108 35 61 2481.5
4585
4565
4549 – – 32 55 55 55 – – – 660 660 660 660
K9 8 250 250 200 200 75 130 170 170 55 95 34115
60114
6085
6065 – – – – – – – – – 660 660 660 660
Only an example! – Contact your local Square D Sales Office for conditions on Spring Return and Jumper options and pricing.
1
7
2
8
11 129 10
5 63 4
1 6
2 25
5
5
8
3
4
4
9
10
7
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
185
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend — see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
t
Contact local Square D Company sales office for ordering information on base mounting contact block assemblies.
2 and 3 Contacts
Contact SequenceWiring Diagram Switching Angle
Panel Mounting
t
Type
45
°
K2B001S
45
°
K2B001UA
45
°
K2B002AK3B002AK4B002AK5B002AK6B002AK7B002AK8B002AK9B002A
45
°
K2B002GA
45
°
K2B002NA
45
°
K2B002QA
45
°
K2B003T
45
°
K2B004T
45
°
K2B006T
45
°
K22C002LA
45
°
K2C003AK3C003AK4C003AK5C003AK6C003AK7C003AK8C003AK9C003A
45
°
K2C003GA
45
°
K2C003NA
45
°
K2C003QA
45
°
K2C007T
13
24
13
24
13
24
13
24
13
24
13
24
13
24
13
24
13
24
1
5
2
63 4
1
5
2
63 4
1
5
2
63 4
1
5
2
63 4
1
5
2
63 4
1
5
2
63 4
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 184Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 184Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 190
4 Contacts
Contact SequenceWiring Diagram Switching Angle
Panel Mounting
t
Type
45
°
K2D002S
45
°
K2D002UA
45
°
K2D003LA
45
°
K2D004AK3D004AK4D004AK5D004AK6D004AK7D004AK8D004AK9D004A
45
°
K2D004GA
45
°
K2D004NA
45
°
K2D004QA
30
°
K2D005T
30
°
K2D012GA
45
°
K2D012NA
45
°
K2D012QA
1
7
2
85 63 4
1
7
2
85 63 4
1
7
2
85 63 4
1
7
2
85 63 4
1
7
2
85 63 4
1
7
2
85 63 4
1
7
2
85 63 4
1
7
2
85 63 4
1
7
2
85 63 4
1
7
2
85 63 4
1
7
2
85 63 4
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
186
11/97
6 And 7 Contacts
Contact SequenceWiring Diagram Switching Angle
Panel Mounting
t
Type
45
°
K2F013GA
45
°
K2F013NA
45
°
K2F013QA
60
°
K2F013UAK3F013UK4F013UK5F013UK6F013UK7F013UK8F013UK9F013U
45
°
K2F022GA
45
°
K2F022NA
45
°
K2F022QA
45
°
K2G007NA
45
°
K2G007QA
45
°
K2G007AK3G007AK4G007AK5G007AK6G007AK7G007AK8G007A
1
11
2
129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
7
2
8
11 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
11
2
129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
7
2
8
11 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
11 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
11 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
11 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
13 1411 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
13 1411 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
13 14
11 12
9 10
5 63 4
t
Contact local Square D Company sales office for ordering information on base mounting contact block assemblies.
5 and 6 Contacts
Contact SequenceWiring Diagram Switching Angle
Panel Mounting
t
Type
45
°
K2E003WAK3E003WK4E003WK5E003WK6E003WK7E003WK8E003W
45
°
K2E005AK3E005AK4E005AK5E005AK6E005AK7E005AK8E005AK9E005A
45
°
K2E005NA
45
°
K2E005QA
45
°
K2F003SA
45
°
K2F006AK3F006AK4F006AK5F006AK6F006AK7F006AK8F006AK9F006A
45
°
K2F003UAK3F003UK4F003UK5F003UK6F003UK7F003UK8F003UK9F003U
45
°
K2F006NA
45
°
K2F006QA
1
7
2
8
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
89 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
9 10
5 63 4
1
11
2
129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
7
2
8
11 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
11 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
11 129 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
11 129 10
5 63 4
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend — see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
187
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
8 Contacts
Contact SequenceWiring Diagram Switching Angle
Panel Mounting
t
Type
45
°
K2H004S
45
°
K2H004UAK3H004UAK4H004UAK5H004UAK6H004UAK7H004UAK8H004UA
45
°
K2H008NA
30
°
K2H008QA
45
°
K2H014GA
45
°
K2H014NA
45
°
K2H014QA
45
°
K2H032NA
45
°
K2H032QA
1
15
2
1613 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
15
2
1613 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
7
2
8
15 1613 1411 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
15 1613 1411 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
15
2
1613 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
15
2
1613 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
15
2
1613 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
15
2
1613 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
15
2
1613 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
t
Contact local Square D Company sales office for ordering information on base mounting contact block assemblies.
9 and 10 Contacts
Contact SequenceWiring Diagram Switching Angle
Panel Mounting
t
Type
30
°
K2I009NA
30
°
K2I009QA
45
°
K2I023GA
45
°
K2I023NA
45
°
K2I023QA
45
°
K2K005SA
1
7
2
8
17 18
13 1415 16
11 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
7
2
8
17 18
13 1415 16
11 12
9 10
5 63 4
1
17
2
1815 16
13 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
17
2
1815 16
13 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
17
2
1815 16
13 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
1
19
2
20
17 1815 16
13 14
11 129 10
7 85 6
3 4
Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
188
11/97
Class 9003 Type K instrument switches are a specialized form of a control circuit rotary cam switch. These switches have the proper contact sequencesand jumpers to provide measurement of either voltage or amperage of more than one source on one meter.
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
Description Type
Suggested Operatorand Legend Marking.
See pages 190 –191, 195for other operators.
Wiring Diagram Contact Sequence
VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase toneutral voltageswith off position
K2D023M KBF1C 4-13
VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase to phasevoltageswith off position
K2D024M KBF1C 4-10
K2D1049M KBF1C 4-534
K4D1049M KBF2F4-534
VOLTMETERFor reading1 phase to neutraland 3 phase tophase voltageswith off position
K2E025M KBF1C 4-11
VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase to phasevoltages of twodifferent supplieswith off position
K2H026M KBF1C 4-12
VOLTMETERFor reading3 phase to phaseand 3 phase toneutral voltagesof one supplywith off position
K2F1050MKBF1C 4-14
orKBF1C 4-535
K4F1050M KBF2F4-535
AMMETERFor reading theamperage on threelines using 2 CT'swith off position
K2D1047M KBF1C 4-536
K4D1047M KBF2F4-536
Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
189
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Class 9003 Type K instrument switches are a specialized form of a control circuit rotary cam switch. These switches have the proper contact sequencesand jumpers to provide measurement of either voltage or amperage of more than one source on one meter.
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
Description Type
t
Suggested Operator and Legend Marking. See pages 190 –191, 195 for other operators. Wiring Diagram Contact Sequence
AMMETER/VOLTMETERReads 3 currenttransformers and3 phase to neutralvoltages. Withoutoff position.
K2K1014M KBF1C 9-14
AMMETER/VOLTMETERReads 3 currenttransformers and3 phase to phasevoltages. Withoutoff position.
K2K1021M KBF1C 9-14
AMMETERReads 3 currenttransformers withoff position.
K2F003M KBF1C 9-4
K2F1051M KBF1C 4-536
K4F1051M KBF2F4-536
AMMETERReads 3 currenttransformers withoutoff position.
K2F013M KBF1C 9-14
AMMETERReads 4 currenttransformers withwith off position.
K2H004M KBF1C 6-2
AMMETERReads 4 currenttransformers withoutoff position.
K2H014M KBF1C 9-5
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-136Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-136Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-142
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
190
11/97
t
Key withdrawal codes.When ordering a Key operator for a contact block assembly, the switching angle of the contact block assembly must first be known. From the chart at right, choose the appropriate suffix for the desired switching angle. This suffix is added to the end of the operator/handle's type number.
Example: 45
°
switching for 9003KAB1S KAB1S16
Note: Key is removable in all positions.Replacement Key is Class 9001Z18.
q
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.
The following operators/handles are for the Class 9003 Type K2 Rotary Cam Switches. These are single hole mounting, and are mounted in a 22mm (
7
/
8
inch) diameter mounting hole. All meet protection category IP-65.
Description Style
BlackBezelBlackKnob
ChromeBezelBlackKnob
YellowBezelRed
Knob
Dimensions
q
mm
Bezel – Small square similar to 9001D1 and D2 operators.
Does not includeblank legend plate.
Knob KAB1A KBB1A --
Key
t
KAB1S KBB1S --
Bezel – Small round similarto 9001D3 and D4 operators.
Does not includeblank legend plate.
Knob KAA1A KBA1A --
Key
t
KAA1S KBA1S --
Bezel – Large round.Does not include
blank legend plate.
Knob KAA2B KBA2B KCA2L
Key
t
KAA2S KBA2S --
Bezel – 45 x 45 mm.Includes blanklegend plate.
Knob KAC1B KBC1B KCC1L
Key
t
KAC1S KBC1S --
Bezel – 60 x 60 mm.Includes blanklegend plate.
Knob KAD1C KBD1C KCD1M
Key
t
KAD1S KBD1S --
The following operators/handles are for the Class 9003 Type K2 Rotary Cam Switches with 90˚ switching angle and only two positions.
Description Black BezelBlack Knob
Yellow BezelRed Knob
Dimensionsmm
q
For Size K2-K3Bezel – 60 x 60 mmMounting – 22 mm
(
7
/
8
inch)
Marked 9-30(see page 195).
No other markingsavailable.
KAD1X KCD1Y
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 192Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 192, 195
Angle Code
30
°
45
°
60
°
90
°
Not Available1616
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
191
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
a
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.
The following operators/handles are for 4 hole mounting of the Class 9003 Types K2 through K9 rotary cam switch. They are suitable for panel mounting or base mounting of contact block assemblies. See description below for proper sizing of operators/handles and contact block assemblies. These operators provide protection category IP-40. See page 192 for gaskets.
Description Black LegendBlack Knob
Chrome LegendBlack Knob
Yellow LegendRed Knob
Dimensionsmm
a
Mounting
Includes blankbezel legend
For size K2-K3Bezel 45 x 45 mm KAE1B KBE1B KCE1L
For size K2-K3Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF1C KBF1C KCF1M
For size K4-K6Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF2F KBF2F KCF2R
Includes blankbezel legend plate
For size K7-K9Bezel 90 x 90 mm
KAG2G KBG2G KCG2T
KAG2H KBG2H KCG2U
The following operators/handles are for 4 hole mounting of the Class 9003 Types K2 through K9 rotary cam switches with 90˚ switching angle and only two positions.
Description Black OperatorBlack Knob
Yellow OperatorRed Knob
Dimensionsmm
a
Mounting
For size K2-K3Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF1X KCF1Y
For size K4-K6Bezel 60 x 60 mm KAF2X KCF2Y
For size K4-K9Bezel 90 x 90 mm
KAG2X KCG2Y
Marked 9-30 (see page 195) No other markings available.
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 192, 195Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 192
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
192
11/97
Description Type
Shrouds Number ofContacts
For K2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
121620
KZ35KZ36KZ37KZ38KZ39
For K3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
KZ53KZ54
For K4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
KZ58KZ59
For K6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
KZ59KZ75
For K7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
KZ60KZ61
For K8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
KZ61KZ63
For K9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 KZ64
Ring Nut Wrench –for use with all operators/handles listed on page 190.
9001Z01
Gasket used with operators/handles listed on page 191 to provide IP-65 protection – for panel mounting contact block assemblies.
45 x 45 mm KZ65
60 x 60 mm KZ66
90 x 90 mm KZ67
For small square bezel. See page 190 to determine size of operator.
Holder with blank legend 900101Q
Blank legend only 900101W
Empty holder only 9001Z15
For small round bezel. See page 190 to determine size of operator.
Holder with blank legend 900101R
Blank legend only 900101W
Empty holder only 9001Z16
Replacement ring nut for all operators/handles listed on page 190. KZ30
t
Last letter of the “operator/handle” type number is the “handle code.”
Description Type
For large round bezel. See page 190 to determine size of operators
Holder with blank legend KZ33
Blank legend only 9001 01V
Empty holder only KZ34
Additional legend for 45 x 45 mm bezel opera-tors. See page 190 to determine size of operator.
Holder with blank legend KZ13
Blank legend only KZ76
Empty holder only KZ14
Additional legend for 60 x 60 mm bezel opera-tors. See pages 190-191 to determine size of operator.
Holder with blank legend KZ15
Blank legend only KZ77
Empty holder only KZ16
Blank legend platebezel inserts
Size Color
45 x 4545 x 4545 x 45
60 x 6060 x 6060 x 60
90 x 9090 x 9090 x 90
BlackSilverYellow
BlackSilverYellow
BlackSilverYellow
KZ17KZ18KZ19
KZ20KZ21KZ22
KZ23KZ24KZ25
DescriptionTypeReplacement Knobs
for K2-K3 OperatorsHandleCode
t
Color Length(d)
ABCDLMN
BlackBlackBlackBlackRedRedRed
29 mm34 mm42 mm57 mm34 mm42 mm57 mm
KZ26KZ27KZ28KZ29KZ41KZ42KZ43
FGHRTU
BlackBlackBlackRedRedRed
42 mm57 mm116 mm42 mm57 mm116 mm
KZ44KZ46KZ48KZ45KZ47KZ49
Replacement KnobsK4-K9 Operators
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
193
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Instructions
1. Choose the chart below with the switching angle as determined on thekey sheet. This identifies the angular location and the position numbersfor the various positions of the rotary cam switch.
Zero degrees orstraight up is always position 1.
Use these position numbers whencompleting the target table on page 194.
2. Terminals on the cam switch have the same numbers as the terminalnumbers on the target table.
Contact 1-2 is a single contact.
3. WHEN INDICATING A CONTACT CLOSURE, PLACE “X” WITHINTHE SQUARE AS SHOWN IN THE CONTACT SEQUENCEEXAMPLE AT RIGHT.
Explanation Of Example Below
1. Contact 1-2 is open in all positions but position 2.2. Contact 3-4 is closed from the 2nd through the 4th position. The
contact does not open while switching from one position to another.3. Contacts 5-6 and 7-8 overlap between positions 2 and 3.4. Contact 9-10 is closed in positions 2 and 3. It is open momentarily
while switching between positions 2 and 3.5. Contact 11-12 closes momentarily when switching from position 2 to
position 3. This contact is not closed in position 2 or position 3.6. Position 1 is an off position.
6. Based on the number of contacts, determine the price of the contactblock assembly below. Prices of operators/handles, legendmarkings, and any accessories are listed on their respective page(s).
POSITIONS
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
194
11/97
To order custom cam switches:
1. Indicate the contact size at right (9003K2-K9).
2. Indicate desired switching angle at right.
If the switching angle is notindicated, the factory will determine the angle from the recom-mended column of the table on right.
3. Per the example on page 193, fill in target table below.
4. Indicate operator/handle type.
5. If operator/handle bezel has legend and legend marking is desired,indicate legend marking on back of this form.
6. If separate legend is required, indicate legend type on right andmarking on back of this form.
See page 184 forTarget Table Explanation
Customer F.O. NO.
Date P.O. Number Qty.
Switching Angle MaximumNumber of Positions
See OrderingInstructions at left
90
°
60
°
45
°
30
°
468
12
2-34-56-7
8-12
Contact size
Switching angle
Operator/Handle type
Separate legend
Class 9003
Class 9003
Class 9003
Type
Type
Type
K
____________
______________
______________
______________
39-40
11-1213-1415-1617-1819-2021-2223-2425-2627-2829-3031-3233-3435-3637-38
9-10
1-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3-45-67-8
PositionsTargetTable
TERMINALS
Target TablePositions
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
195
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Standard Markings
The following legend markings are standard for the 45 x 45 mm and60 x 60 mm bezel operators. To order one of these size bezel operators with a standard marking, add the code below of the desired marking as a suffix to the operator type number. Example: 9003 KBC1B 4-3.
1 2
6-1
10
43
2
6-2
HAND AUTO STOP L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
START
STOP START
START
6-6 6-8 6-11 6-12 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33
10
2
120
10
32
10
02
2
1
210
300
0
10
2
1
2
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
4-57 4-58
L1-NL1-L2
L2-L3L3-L1
HANDAUTO
VOLTMETER VOLTMETER
OFF
4-59 4-534 4-535 4-536
4-21 4-23
HAND AUTOMIN. AUTO
MAX.
4-34 4-38 4-43 4-44 4-51 4-54 4-55 4-56
4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20
L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1
0 1
4-1
2
4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10
0 12
3
0 12
3
0
4
12
3
0
45
126
3
0
45
1
1 23
1 23
4
1 23
4
1
5
23
4
1
56
237
4
1
56
2
263
0
45
7 1
374
1 0 0
2
2
3
3 11-
2
2-3
3-1
1OFF
AMMETER
OFF
2 31
56
8 2 012
AUTO0
12
3
L1L2
L3
L1-L2L2-L3L1-L3
L1-NL2-NL3-N
021
10 2 2
1 3
120 1
2
0
1.2
0
L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1
L1-N0
L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1
L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1
0L1-NL2-NL3-N
0L1-NL2-NL3-N
L1-L2L2-L3L3-L1
0
1
2
3
0
9-1
0
9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-10 9-14 9-30
01
3
24 1
0
6-34
0
6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39
60° Marking
45° Marking
0 1
3-1
10
456 67
832
3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10
30° Marking
90° Marking
1START
L2
L1L3
START
0
12
4
L3
L2
L1
L3
L2
L1
L4 12
10
457
8392
6
10
457
839
10 2
6
10
457
839
1011
21 0 21
567 78
943
21
568
94103
7
21
568
9410
11 3
7
21
568
9410
1112
3
Special Markings
All other legend engraving is considered special. To order, clearlyindicate the position of the desired marking. See below for the maximumcharacters allowed on a specially engraved legend.
Rectangular Legends
Type LegendSize
For OperatorSize
Maximum# CharactersPer Position
900101Q900101R900101W
26 x 19 mm – 7
900101V9003KZ33 37 x 22 mm – 11
9003KZ119003KZ139003KZ76
42 x 13 mm 45 x 45 mm 12
9003KZ159003KZ77 57 x 27 mm 60 x 60 mm 17
Square Legends
Type For BezelSize
LegendSize
Maximum# CharactersPer Position
KZ17KAC1BKAE1BKAC1S
KZ18KZ19KBC1BKBE1B
KBC1SKCC1LKCE1L
45 x 45 mm 42 x 42 mm 3
KZ20KAD1CKAF1CKAF2FKAD1S
KZ21KZ22KBD1CKBF1CKBF2F
KBD1SKCD1MKCF1MKCF2R
60 x 60 mm 57 x 57 mm 5
KZ23KAG2GKAG2H
KZ24KZ25KBG2G
KBG2HKCG2TKCG2U
90 x 90 mm 87 x 87 mm 6
All dimensions in mm. To convert toapproximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.
Positions of engravable locations on blank legends.
Rectangular Legends Square Legends
t
Maximum number of characters for these positions is one (1) less than the listed maximum in the chart above.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
196
11/97
With Shrouds
The door interlock mounting radius is the length of the radius between the center of the mounting hole of the operator/handle and the pivot point (hinge) of the panel front.
Contact Block Assembly Depth
Numberof Contacts
K2Length
a
t
mm
K3Length
a
t
mm
K4, K5Length
a
t
mm
K6Length
a
t
mm
K7Length
a
t
mm
K8Length
a
t
mm
K9Length
a
t
mm
1-2 52.5 50.5 58.5 64.5 67.5 77.5 120.5
3-4 62.5 63 74.5 86.5 86.5 106.5 192.5
5-6 72.5 76 90.5 108.5 105.5 135.5 264.5
7-8 82.5 89 106.5 130.5 124.5 164.5 –
9-10 92.5 102 122.5 152.5 143.5 193.5 –
11-12 102.5 115 138.5 174.5 162.5 222.5 –
13-14 112.5
t
Dimension
a
for the 9003K2 is for 4 hole mounting operator/handle. Add 18 mm to dimension a when using single hole mount operator/handles.
15-16 122.5
17-18 132.5
19-20 142.5
mm K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9
b 48 54 85 85 85 111 111 180
c 26 27 40 40 40 50 50 88
Base Mount
Panel Mount
Push Buttons andOperator InterfaceSpecifiers GuideMAGELISTM XBT Message Display andTerminal Products
CONTENTS
Description ....................................................................................................... PageGeneral Information ............................................................................................. 198Features and Characteristics ............................................................................... 202Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH ..................................................................... 204Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP ................................................... 206Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE .......................................... 208Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM ................................................ 210Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA ................................................... 212Software and Accessories ................................................................................... 214XBT Cable Configuration Guidelines ................................................................... 217Compatibility Tables ............................................................................................. 218XBT Software and Environmental Compatibility .................................................. 219Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 220Technical Documentation .................................................................................... 222Communication Protocols for XBTH/P/E ............................................................. 223Selection of Data Exchange Protocol for XBTA/K/M ........................................... 224
198
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
The MAGELiS XBT is a state-of-the-art industrial operator interface product line. It comprises three families—XBTH message displays, XBTP operatorterminals, and XBTE operator terminals—designed for machine builders, panel makers, and end users.From a simple 2 x 20 character display to a 24 function key 4 x 40 character terminal, many flexible solutions are available to meet the customer's needs.MAGELiS XBT products have a unique design—combining good looks, ergonomics, and practicality— providing unsurpassed value in terms of price andperformance. Windows software-based configuration software, simple page concept programming (messages and alarms), and downloadablecommunication protocols make the MAGELiS XBT an outstanding choice for globally accepted, low cost operator interfaces.
MAGELiS Operator Terminals
Offer flexible solutions with a wide range of features.
Maximize access to information through simple keypad prompting.
Allow customization of function keys and front panel.
Utilize downloadable protocols for ease of installation and support.
Provide LCD and fluorescent displays based on cost and performance needs.
MAGELiS Software
Allows design of effective operator messages, prompting, and data entry.
Provides simple WYSIWYG configuration tools, on-line help, and examples.
Benefits designer with integrated alarming and communication setup.
Offer flexible solutions with a wide range of features.
Maximizes development with multi-language support.
Compliments application training with on-line simulation.
MAGELiS XBT operator terminals meet the requirements of the European Machinery Directive for function keys, symbols, icons, alarm handling, andability to structure information. MAGELiS XBT operator terminals carry the CE mark.
European Machinery Directive: 89/655 EEC: Minimum Health and Safety Regulations for the Protection of Machine Operators.Low Voltage Equipment: IEC 947-1, General Electrical Requirements
IEC 947-5, Control Equipment and Switching Devices
Other relevant standards met: IEC 1131, Programmable ControllersIEC 801, Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial Control EquipmentIEC 255, Electrical RelaysIEC 529, Degree of Protection Provided by EnclosuresIEC 68, Environmental Testing
UL 508 : Type 4 CSA C22.2 No. 14 : Type 4
199
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Square D, Groupe Schneider is pleased to provide you a complete line of rugged message display terminals. This family of display terminals is availableto meet a host of needs by establishing dialog and simplifying data exchanges between the programmable controller and the operator. With featuresranging from simple message readouts to user-programmable function keys, operators may adjust machine parameters through direct communications.
Some of the key features offered as a part of the XBT line are listed below. XBTs have been designed with the industrial environment in mind.
MAGELiS Message Displays, Terminals, and Configuration Software (XBTH, P, and E) Refer to page 204
MAGELiS XBT industrial message displays and operator terminals are suitable to most any automation application. The product lin e can adaptto almost any control system environment—from nano to micro to larger PLC systems of varying brands.
MAGELiS Message Displays:
XBTH: 2-line x 20 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 4 Service Keys, 4 Function Keys, or No Keys.
XBTH: 2-line x 20 characters - LCD Type, available with 4 Service Keys, 4 Function Keys, or No Keys.
Store up to 200 messages.
MAGELiS Operator Terminals:
XBTP: 2-line x 20 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 9 Service Keys, 8 or 12 Function Keys.
XBTP: 2-line x 20 characters - LCD Type, available with 9 Service Keys, 8 or 12 Function Keys.
Store up to 400 messages.
XBTE: 2-line or 4-line x 40 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 10 Service Keys, 24 Function Keys.
XBTE: 2-line or 4-line x 40 characters - LCD Type, available with 10 Service Keys, 24 Function Keys.
Store up to 800 messages.
MAGELiS Windows-based Configuration Software:
XBTL1000: Multilingual: English, Spanish, French, German, Italian.
XBTL1***: Downloadable protocols: Modbus®, Uni-Telway, Siemens, etc.
This family of XBT products is configured through a single, Windows® software-based package, reducing your investment and installation costs.
Message Displays (XBTK, XBTM) Refer to page 210
The XBTK and XBTM are Square D's single and two line display units. Display units establish one-way communication between the operatorand the machine. Messages contain machine status or fault indication.
XBTK: 1-Line x 20 1/2-inch characters.
XBTM: 1-Line x 10 1-inch characters, 2-Line x 21 1/2-inch characters.
Store up to 600 messages.
Operator Terminals (XBTA) Refer to page 212
The XBT-A operator terminal establishes two-way dialog between the operator and the machine for monitoring and adjusting systemparameters.
1-line display of 16 characters.
8-12 Function Keys, 12 Edit Keys, 3 Service Keys.
Store up to 250 messages.
As you will see, Square D offers a full range of industrial grade message displays and terminals. From the simple display devices through moresophisticated operator terminals, Square D can be your single source supplier for message displays and terminals. For specific ordering informationand pricing, contact your local Square D Field Office.
General Information
200
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
XBTH/P/E message displays and terminalsavailable :- no operating system- no protocol- no application
+XBTL1000 configuration software used withcompatible PC to:- select the XBT-H/P display unit or terminal- select the protocol used- design an application on screen- simulate the functions with the control system- download the application
+XBTL downloadable communication protocols :- operating system of downloadable products- downloadable applications.
Design:- of application pages- of alarm pages
Configuration:- Windows compatible software- user-friendly- “WYSIWYG” type entry
(what you see is what you get)
Message Displays or terminals:- Automatic execution of commands transmitted
by the PLC
PLC:- Programming communication configured
by dialogue table
Product Line
Communication
Application
XBT-L1000
UTW
Compatible PC
MOD
UNI-TELWAY Siemens Modbus/Jbus
XBTH
+
Pg 2
Pg 1Pg 0
Pg 3
XBTP
Dialog Table
Pg 3TEMPERATURESPEED
Pg 2MAINTENANCE
Pg 0AUTOMATICOPERATION
Pg 1MACHINE ADJUSTMENT
TSX07
+
Design of the XBTH/P/E range of message displays and terminals
XBTP
XBTE
...
ModiconOmron
SIE
General Information
201
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Presentation
The XBTH/P/E range of message displays and terminals comprise 3 families of products :
• XBTH display units- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display- 2 lines of 20 characters- With or without function keys- 128/256 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 200
application pages (approx), 256 available alarmpages
- Optional Printer/Log function
• XBTP terminals- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display- 2 lines of 20 characters- Function and service keys- 256 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 400 application
pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages- Optional Printer/Log function
• XBTE terminals- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display- 2 or 4 lines of 40 characters- Function, service and alphanumeric keys- 384 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 800 application
pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages- Optional Printer/Log function
Description
XBTH/P/E message displays and terminals comprise :Front panel :
1 2 indicator LEDs
2 Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display
3 Function keys with LED, and removable,customizable legend
4 Service keys
5 Numeric keys (for XBTP)Alphanumeric keys (for XBTE)
Rear panel :
- Plug-in terminal block for power supply, 3 screwterminals (5.08 mm pitch)
- Serial port, 25-pin female SUB-D connector
- Printer port, 9-pin male SUB-D connector
XBTH
2
5
1
3
4
XBTP
XBTE
General Information
202
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Display
Keyboard
Signalling
Memory
Message Displays Operator Terminals
XBTPXBTH
Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixelsper character), height 5 mm or LCDbacklit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.- 2 lines of 20 characters (scrolling to 25).
Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixelsper character), height 5 mm or LCDbacklit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.- 2 lines of 20 characters (scrolling to 25).
Flat membrane keypad with tactilefeedback and 2 mm travel.- 1 version without keys- 4 function keys + 1 service key- 5 service keys
Flat membrane keypad with tactilefeedback and 2 mm travel.- 8 function keys + 9 service keys- 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys
- 2 system indicator LEDs- 7 service key LEDs- 8-12 function key LEDs
128 kB Flash EEPROM200 application pages256 alarm pages
- 1-2 system indicator LEDs- 0 or 2 service key LEDs- 0 or 4 function key LEDs
128/256 kB Flash EEPROM400 application pages256 alarm pages
Transmission
Real-time clock
Printer
Protocols
RS232/RS485/RS422asynchronous serial link
Access to programmable controllerreal-time clock.
Access to programmable controllerreal-time clock.
RS232 serial link RS232 serial link
UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens
RS232/RS485/RS422asynchronous serial link
For selection Refer to page 204 Refer to page 206 Refer to page 208
XBTE
Operator Terminals
384 kB Flash EEPROM800 application pages - 2 lines/page256 alarm pages - 2 lines/page400 application pages - 4 lines/page128 alarm pages - 4 lines/page
UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens
RS232 serial link
Incorporated real-time clock.
RS232/RS485/RS422asynchronous serial link
Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixelsper character), height 5 mm or LCDbacklit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.- 2 lines of 40 characters (scrolling to 25)- 4 lines of 40 characters (scrolling to 25)
Flat membrane keypad with tactilefeedback and 2 mm travel.- 24 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 alphanumeric keys
- 2 system indicator LEDs- 7 service key LEDs- 24 function key LEDs- 1 buzzer
Features and Characteristics
203
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
14 segment fluorescent green, height10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.- 1 line of 16 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 32).
3 operator guide inputs(external buttons)
4 system indicator lamps
SRAM with 5 year lithium batterybackup, holding 160 or 180 messagesof 20 characters.
EEPROM cartridge, size 24K:600 messages of 21 charactersLog RAM with backup:100 messages of 21 characters
27 key keypad with tactile feedbackand 2 mm travelNumeric models:- 12 programmable function keys- 12 numeric input keys- 3 service keys.Alphanumeric models:- 27 alphanumeric input keys- Flat 12 key keypad (F1 to F12 with LED) with covering membrane.
EEPROM holding 100 messages of16 characters.
1 buzzer
Operator Terminals
14 segment fluorescent green, height10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.- 1 line of 20 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 40).
Fluorescent green matrix display(128 x 20 pixels)- 1 line of 10 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 40) height 20 mm, legible from up to 8 m.- 2 lines of 21 alphanumeric characters (scrolling to 2 x 84) height 10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.
Message Displays
Display
Keyboard
Signalling
Memory
Parallel linkRS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485 asynchronous serial link
Asynchronous serial link
Built-in and backed up by removablelithium battery.
RS 232C serial link
ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY/SYMAX®/MODBUS
ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY
Transmission
Real-time clock
Printer
Protocols
For selection Refer to page 210 Refer to page 210 Refer to page 212
XBTK1-line display
XBTA1-line display(keypad with tactile feedback)Compact flush-mounting
XBTM1- or 2-line display(configurable)
Features and Characteristics
204
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Type of display unit XBTH0 •2•10 (fluorescent) XBTH0 •1010 (back-lit LCD)
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
Product approvals UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087 UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01 CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01
Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C) 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) -4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 IP 65, conforming to IEC 529NEMA and UL Type 4 NEMA and UL Type 4
Mechanical characteristics
Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick) (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)
Material Enclosure Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)Keypad Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester
Electrical characteristics
Display Fluorescent green matrix for each character, Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),(5x7 pixels) 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm
Keys - 1 version with no keys (XBTH002010) - 1 version with no keys (XBTH001010)- 4 function keys + 1 service key (XBTH022010) - 4 function keys + 1 service key (XBTH021010)- 5 service keys (XBTH012•10) - 5 service keys (XBTH011010)
Power supply Voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
Voltage limits 18-30 Vdc 18-30 Vdc
Ripple 25 % maximum 25 % maximum
Consumption 10 W 10 W
Operating characteristicsSignalling - 1 LEDs (XBTH002010) - 1 LEDs (XBTH001010)
- 6 LEDs (XBTH022010) - 6 LEDs (XBTH021010)- 4 LEDs (XBTH012•10) - 4 LEDs (XBTH011010)
Memory - 128 kb Flash EEPROM, 256 kb (XBT-H011010) - 128 kb Flash EEPROM, 256 kb (XBT-H011010)- 200 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 200 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page
Log function Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
Transmission RS 232C/RS 485/RS 422 RS 232C/RS 485/RS 422(asynchronous serial link)
Downloadable protocol Multiple (see page 214) Multiple (see page 214)
Real-time clock Access to PLC real-time clock Access to PLC real-time clock
Printer port RS 232 (XBTH012110) –(asynchronous serial link)Relay – –
Connection Power supply Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block3 terminals 3 terminals
Serial port 25-pin female SUB-D connector 25-pin female SUB-D connector
Printer port 9-pin male SUB-D connector –
Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH
205
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent)Download- Possible Supply Language Number of Reference Weightable links voltage version keysexchangeprotocol Vdc lb (kg)
Refer to No printer 24 Multilingual No keys XBTH002010 1.3 (0.6)page 214 port
No log
4 function keys XBTH022010 1.3 (0.6)1 service key
5 service keys XBTH012010 1.3 (0.6)
Printer 24 Multilingual 5 service keys XBTH012110 1.3 (0.6)portand log
Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD)Download- Possible Supply Language Number of Reference Weightable links voltage version keysexchangeprotocol Vdc
lb (kg)
Refer to No printer 24 Multilingual No keys XBTH001010 1.3 (0.6)page 214 port
No log
4 function keys XBTH021010 1.3 (0.6)1 service key
5 service keys XBTH011010 1.3 (0.6)
Documentation (to be ordered separately)
Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E XBTX000US 0.4(0.2)(1)
(1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documention in French, DE in German, ES in Spanishand 1T in Italian.
XBTH002010
XBTH012010
XBTH001010
XBTH021010
Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH
206
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Type of terminal XBTP0 •2•10 (fluorescent) XBTP0 •1•10 (back-lit LCD)
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
Product approvals UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087 UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01 CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01
Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C) 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) -4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 IP 65, conforming to IEC 529NEMA and UL Type 4 NEMA and UL Type 4
Mechanical characteristics
Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick) (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)
Material Enclosure Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)
Keypad Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester
Electrical characteristics
Display Fluorescent green matrix for each character, Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),(5x7 pixels) 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm 2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm
Keys - 8 function keys + 9 service keys (XBTP012010) - 8 function keys + 9 service keys (XBTP011010)- 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric - 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys keys(XBTP022•10) (XBTP021•10)
Power supply Voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
Voltage limits 18-30 Vdc 18-30 Vdc
Ripple 25 % maximum 25 % maximum
Consumption 10 W 10 W
Operating characteristics
Signalling - 17 LEDs (XBTP012010) - 17 LEDs (XBTP011010)- 21 LEDs (XBTP022•10) - 21 LEDs (XBTP021•10)
Memory - 256 kb Flash EEPROM - 256 kb Flash EEPROM- 400 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 400 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page
Log function Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
Transmission RS 232/RS 485/RS 422 RS 232/RS 485/RS 422(asynchronous serial link)Downloadable protocol Multiple (see page 214) Multiple (see page 214)
Real-time clock Access to PLC real-time clock Access to PLC real-time clock
Printer port RS 232 (XBTP022110) RS 232 (XBTP021110)(asynchronous serial link)Relay – –
Connection Power supply Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block3 terminals 3 terminals
Serial port 25-pin female SUB-D connector 25-pin female SUB-D connector
Printer port 9-pin male SUB-D connector 9-pin male SUB-D connector
Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP
207
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent)Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Num. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)
No printer port, no log
Refer to 8 9 – 24 Multilingual XBTP012010 1.8 (0.8)page 214
12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTP022010 1.8 (0.8)
With printer port and log
Refer to 12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTP022110 1.8 (0.8)page 214
Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD)Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Num. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)
No printer port, no log
Refer to 8 9 – 24 Multilingual XBTP011010 1.8 (0.8)page 214
12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTP021010 1.8 (0.8)
With printer port and log
Refer to 12 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTP021110 1.8 (0.8)page 214
Documentation (to be ordered separately)
Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E XBTX000US 0.4 (0.2)(1)
(1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documentation in French, DE in German, ES in Spanishand 1T in Italian.
XBTP022010
XBTP021010
Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP
208
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Type of terminal XBTE014 •10/XBTE016•10 (fluorescent) XBTE013 •10/XBTE015•10 (back-lit LCD)
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
Product approvals UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087 UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01 CCN NRAQ Class 2252 01
Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C) 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) -4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 IP 65, conforming to IEC 529NEMA and UL Type 4 NEMA and UL Type 4
Mechanical characteristics
Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 m thick) (supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 m thick)
Material Enclosure Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)
Keypad Anti-UV treated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester
Electrical characteristics
Display Fluorescent green matrix for each character (5x7 pixels) Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),- 2 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm - 2 lines of 40 characters, height 9 mm- 4 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm - 4 lines of 40 characters, height 9 mm
Keys - 24 function keys - 24 function keys- 10 service keys - 10 service keys- 12 alphanumeric keys - 12 alphanumeric keys
Power supply Voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
Voltage limits 18-30 Vdc 18-30 Vdc
Ripple 25 % maximum 25 % maximum
Consumption 10 W 10 W
Operating characteristics
Signalling - 33 LEDs + 1 buzzer - 33 LEDs + 1 buzzer
Memory - 384 kb Flash EEPROM - 384 kb Flash EEPROM- 800 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page - 800 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page - 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page- 400 application pages (approx) of 4 lines per page - 400 application pages (approx) of 4 lines per page- 128 available alarm pages of 4 lines per page - 128 available alarm pages of 4 lines per page
Log function Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
Transmission RS 232/RS 485/RS 422 RS 232/RS 485/RS 422(asynchronous serial link)Real-time clock Yes (incorporated) Yes (incorporated)
Printer port RS 232 (XBTE014110/XBTE016110 ) RS 232 (XBTE013110/XBTE015110 )(asynchronous serial link)Relay 0.5 A, 24 Vdc 0.5 A, 24 Vdc
Connection Power supply and Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal blockparallel port 5 terminals 5 terminals
Serial port 25-pin female SUB-D connector 25-pin female SUB-D connector
Printer port 9-pin male SUB-D connector 9-pin male SUB-D connector
Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE
209
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Terminals with 2 lines of 40 characters (fluorescent)Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Alphanum. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)No printer port, no log
Refer to 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTE014010 2.2 (1.0)page 214
With printer port and log
Refer to 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTE014110 2.2 (1.0)page 214
Terminals with 4 lines of 40 characters (fluorescent)
Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Alphanum. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)No printer port, no log
Refer to 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTE016010 2.2 (1.0)page 214
With printer port and log
Refer to 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTE016110 2.2 (1.0)page 214
Terminals with 2 lines of 40 characters (back-lit LCD)
Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Alphanum. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)No printer port, no log
Refer to 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTE013010 2.2 (1.0)page 214
With printer port and log
Refer to 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTE013110 2.2 (1.0)page 214
Terminals with 4 lines of 40 characters (back-lit LCD)
Downloadable Number of keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Funct. Service Alphanum. voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)No printer port, no log
Refer to 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTE015010 2.2 (1.0)page 214
With printer port and log
Refer to 24 10 12 24 Multilingual XBTE015110 2.2 (1.0)page 214
Documentation (to be ordered separately)
Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E XBTX000US 0.4 (0.2)(1)
(1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documentation in French, DE in German, ES in Spanishand 1T in Italian.
XBTE015010
XBTE013010
XBTE016010
XBTE014010
Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE
210
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Type of display unit XBTK XBTM
Environment
Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C) 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C) -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)
Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529 IP 65, conforming to IEC 529
Mechanical characteristicsType of mounting and fixing Flush-mounting by 2 retractable fasteners Flush-mounting by 2 retractable fasteners
Enclosure Zinc alloy. Front panel coated with black Zinc alloy. Front panel coated with blacksatin-finish polyurethane paint satin-finish polyurethane paint
Electrical characteristics
Display Fluorescent green, 14 segment Fluorescent green matrix (128 x 20 pixels)- 1 line of 20 characters, height 10 mm - 1 line of 10 characters, height 20 mm
- 2 lines of 21 characters, height 10 mm
Power supply Voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
Voltage limits 18 to 30 Vdc 18 to 30 Vdc
Ripple 25 % maximum 25 % maximum
Consumption 10 W 25 W
Operating characteristics
Visual signalling – 4 system indicator lights
Memory Messages SRAM with 5 year lithium battery backup EEPROM cartridge 160 or 180 messages of 20 chars. (depending on model) 24 K bytes : 600 messages of 21 characters
Log – RAM with lithium battery backup100 messages of 21 characters
Transmission Parallel link Yes Yes
Asynchronous RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485 RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485serial link
Protocol ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY (depending on model) ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY
Real-Time Clock – Yes, with lithium battery back-up
Printer link – RS 232C(Asynchronous serial link)Relays – 1 N/O contact (min. 1 mA/5 Vdc, max. 0.5 A/24 Vdc)
Cabling Power supply and Plug-in terminal block Power supply and relays:parallel link 17 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch) Plug-in terminal block with 5 screw terminals (5.08 mm
pitch)Clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2 Capacity: 1.5 mm2
Parallel link:Plug-in terminal block with 17 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch)Clamping capacity : 1.5 mm2
Serial link SUB-D 25-pin female connector SUB-D 25-pin female connector
Printer link – SUB-D 9-pin male connector
Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM
211
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
1-line display units (1 x 20 characters)Data Possible links Supply Language Reference Weightexchange voltage versionprotocol VDC lb (kg)
ASCII No printer link 24 Multilanguage XBTK801010 4.2 (1.9)ADJUST No real-time clockUNI-TELWAY
Display units with 1 line (1 x 10 characters) or 2 lines (2 x 21 characters)
ASCII No printer link 24 Multilanguage XBTM801010 5.3 (2.4)ADJUST No real-time clockUNI-TELWAY No operator guide
ASCII With printer link 24 Multilanguage XBTM804110 5.3 (2.4)ADJUSTUNI-TELWAY
Note:XBTM display units are supplied without a TSXMC70E324 EEPROM memory cartridge. Memory cartridges mustbe ordered separately. (Refer to Software and Accessories on page 214).
XBTK801010
XBTM801010
Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM
212
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Type of terminal XBTA keypad with tactile feedback
Environment
Temperature Operation 32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)
Degree of protection IP 65, conforming to IEC 529.
Mechanical characteristics
Type of mounting and fixing Flush-mounting with 4 retractable fasteners
Enclosure Front panel Zinc alloyBlack satin-finish polyurethane paint
Rear cover Zinc alloy
Keypad Function keys 8 to 12 depending on model
Input keys 12
Service keys 3
Alphanumeric keys 26 (alphanumeric model)
Electrical characteristics
Display unit (fluorescent/green 1 line of 16 characters14 segment, height 10 mm)
Power supply Voltage 24 Vdc
Voltage limits 18 to 30 Vdc (ripple 25 %)
Consumption 10 W
Operating characteristics
Signalling Visual 0 or 4 user indicator lights (depending on model)
Audible 1 buzzer
Memory Messages EEPROM:100 messages of 16 characters
Transmission Asynchronous RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485serial link
Protocol ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY/SYMAX/MODBUS
Real-time clock –
Printer link –
Connection Power supply Plug-in terminal block3 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch)Clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2
Serial link SUB-D 25-pin female connector
Printer link –
Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA
213
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Flush-mounting compact terminals, keypad with tactile feedbackData Function keys Supply Language Reference Weightexchange Number Marked voltage versionprotocol Vdc lb (kg)ASCIIADJUST 12 F1 to F12 24 Multilanguage XBTA801010 4.3 (1.95)UNI-TELWAY without LED
Legend-plate 24 Multilanguage XBTA811010 4.3 (1.95)carrier
12 with LED Legend-plate 24 Multilanguage XBTA821010 4.3 (1.95)carrier
8+4 indicator Legend-plate 24 Multilanguage XBTA831010 4.3 (1.95)lights carrier
SY/MAX
12 F1 to F12 24 Multilanguage XBTA301010 4.3 (1.95)without LED
Legend-plate 24 Multilanguage XBTA311010 4.3 (1.95)carrier
12 with LED Legend-plate 24 Multilanguage XBTA321010 4.3 (1.95)carrier
ModBus/JBus 12 F1 to F12 24 Multilanguage XBTA401010 4.3 (1.95)
without LED
Legend-plate 24 Multilanguage XBTA411010 4.3 (1.95)carrier
12 with LED Legend-plate 24 Multilanguage XBTA421010 4.3 (1.95)carrier
XBTA801010
Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA
214
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
XBTL software (1)
Description Compatibility Language Operating Reference Weightversion system lb (kg)
Configuration XBT•3 Multilingual (2) DOS XBTL100 1.4 (0.65)and terminal XBT•7/•8 Multilingual Windows XBTL900 1.4 (0.65)software DOS XBTL100 1.4 (0.65)
XBT•4 Multilingual Windows XBTL900 1.4 (0.65)DOS XBTL400 1.4 (0.65)
XBT•4/•7/•8 Multilingual X-TEL (V4 and V5)XBTL940 1.4 (0.65)
Configuration software XBTH/P/E Multilingual Windows XBTL1000 1.4 (0.65)for display unitsand terminals(1) XBTL software is supplied in an A5 box including a user's guide and one or two installation diskettes : one 5“1/4and one 3“1/2 (XBTL900), one 3"1/2 (XBTL940/L1000). (2) English, Spanish, French, German, Italian.
Downloadable protocols (for use with XBTL1000 software)Type of protocol Compatibility Reference WeightAllen-Bradley XBTH/P/E XBTL1AB01 lb (kg)Omron XBTH/P/E XBTL1OMR01UNI-TELWAY XBTH/P/E XBTL1UTW01 1.4 (0.65)Modbus XBTH/P/E XBTL1MOD01 1.4 (0.65)Siemens XBTH/P/E XBTL1SIE01 1.4( 0.65)
InterfacesConnection Link Compatibility Mounting Reference Weight
rail lb (kg)
Screw terminals CL/CL Any XBT " XBTZ9011 0.3 (0.12)' XBTZ9012 0.3 (0.12)
CL/RS 232C or Any XBT " XBTZ961 0.3 (0.12)RS 232C/CL
SUB-D connector CL/RS 232C XBTKL/KN/ML XBTZ939 0.1 (0.04)25-pin/25-pin
DC power supplyInput voltage Supply voltage Compatibility Reference Weight
lb (kg)24 Vdc/1 A Any XBT TBXSUP10 0.1 (0.04)
100-240 Vac
24 Vdc/320 mA Any XBT 8440 PS24 0.1 (0.04)
EEPROM memory cartridgesSize Compatibility Reference Weight
lb (kg)
4 Kb XBTKN/M/ML XBTZ800004 0.1 (0.04)
16 Kb XBTKN/M XBTZ800016 0.1 (0.04)
24 Kb XBTKN/M/TSX 17 TSXMC70E324 0.1 (0.04)
56 Kb XBTKN/M XBTZ800056 0.1 (0.04)
88 Kb XBTKN/M XBTZ800088 0.1 (0.04)
120 Kb XBTKN/M XBTZ800120 0.1 (0.04)
Lithium batteryUse Compatibility Reference Weight
lb (kg)
For real-time clock back-up XBTKN/M/TSX 17 TSX17ACC1 0.04 ( 0.02)
XBTL1000
PS24
XBTZ800016
Software and Accessories
215
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Connection cables for XBTH/P/EPort Transmission Connection Compatibility Length Catalog numberRS 232C PC/PS 9-pin (male) Any XBT (3) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ915
programming 25-pin (female) Any XBT (3) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ90525-pin (male) Any XBT (3) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ9052
ASCII – Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ905Serial printer Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ936XBT/XBTZ961 Any XBT (1) 6.6 (2) XBTZ933
Current loop ASCII – Any XBT 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ906RS 485 UNI-TELWAY TSXSCA 62 Any XBT (1) 5.9 (1.8) XBTZ908
TSXSCM 21•6 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ918TSXP•••425 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ948TSXSCG 1161 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ928TSX17 XBTH/P/E 16.4 (5) XBTZ958
Plug TSX07/37 Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ968(1) Including XBTH/P/E terminals(2) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.(3) For XBTH/P/E in version V2.2.
Cables for Open Protocol for XBTH/P/EPort/Transmission Connection Compatibility Length Catalog numberRS 232/RS 485 25-pin (male)-RJ45 XBTH/P/E 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ915RS 232 25-pin male-5 pin XBTH/P/E 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ909
male
SUB-D Adaptors for Open ProtocolAdaptor Connection Compatibility Catalog numberFemale adaptor RJ45-25 pin female XBTZ900 XGVSZ2510Female adaptor RJ45-9 pin female XBTZ900 XGVSZ0910Male adaptor RJ45-9 pin male XBTZ900 XGVSZ0920Male adaptor RJ45-15 pin male XBTZ900 XGVSZ1520Male adaptor RJ45-25 pin male XBTZ900 XGVSZ2520RS232/Current Loop 25 pinmale-25 pin XBTZ939 XBTZ939
female
Cables for ModBus ProtocolPort/Transmission Connection Compatibility Length Catalog numberRS 232/RS 485 RJ45-RJ45 XBTH/P/E 3 (.91) 110XCA28201RS 232/RS 485 RJ45-RJ45 XBTH/P/E 6 (1.8) 110XCA28202RS 232/RS 485 RJ45-RJ45 XBTH/P/E 12 (3.6) 110XCA28203
SUB-D Adaptors for ModBus ProtocolAdaptor Connection Compatibility Catalog numberMale adaptor RJ45-9 pin 9male XBTH/P/E 110XCA20301Female adaptor RJ45-9 pin female XBTH/P/E 110XCA20302Male adaptor RJ45-25 pin male XBTH/P/E 110XCA20401Female adaptor RJ45-25 pin female XBTH/P/E 110XCA20402 feet (meters)
InterfacesConnection Link Compatibility Mounting rail Catalog numberDual port connection UNI-TELWAY TSX07/37 – TSXPACC01Simulation RS 485/RS 232 TSX07/37 – TFTXCBP025
converterCurrent Loop CL/RS 232C or Any XBT – XBTZ961
RS 232C/CLSUB-D connector CL/RS 232C XBTH/P/E – XBTZ93925-pin/25-pin
Software and Accessories
216
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Connection cables for XBTA/K/MPort Trans- Connection Compatibility Length Reference Weight
mission ft (m) lb (kg)RS 232C PC/PS 9-pin (male) Any XBT (4) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ915 0.4 (0.2)
25-pin (female) Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ905 0.4 (0.21)
25-pin (male) Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ9052 0.4 (0.21)
ASCII – Any XBT (1) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ905 0.4 (0.21)
Serialprinter XBTM 16.4 (5) XBTZ936 0.4 (0.2)
XBT/XBTZ961 Any XBT (1) 6.6 (2) XBTZ933 0.4 (0.2)
XBT/SYMAX Any XBT 8.2 (2.5) 8010CC108 0.4 (0.2)
Current ASCII – Any XBT 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ906 0.4 (0.21)loop
ADJUST TSX47-40 Any XBT (2) 8.2 (2.5) XBTZ902 0.4 (0.21)
RS 485 UNI- TSXSCA62 Any XBT (1) 5.9 (1.8) XBTZ908 0.5 (0.24)TELWAY
TSXSCM 21•6 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ918 0.5 (0.23)
TSXP•••425 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ948 0.5 (0.23)
TSXSCG 1161 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ928 0.5 (0.24)
TSX17 XBTH/P/E (3) 16.4 (5) XBTZ958 0.5 (0.24)
ADJUST TSX17 Any XBT (1) 16.4 (5) XBTZ917 0.5 (0.21)
1.6 (0.5) XBTZ9171 0.5 (0.21)
Plug TSX07/37 Any XBT (1) 0.8 (0.25) XBTZ968 0.4 (0.18)
Function key labelsColor Number Use with Number Reference Weight
of sheets of labels lb (kg)Grey 1 XBTH02•010 12 XBLYH4 0.2 (0.1)
XBTP01•010 24 XBLYP8 0.2 (0.1)XBTP02••10 24 XBLYP12 0.2 (0.1)XBTE01••10 32 XBLYE24 0.2 (0.1)
(1) Including XBTH/P/E terminals.(2) Add the XBTZ939 module for XBTKL/KN/ML.(3) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.(4) For XBTH/P/E in version V2.2.
XBTZ902
XBTZ928
Software and Accessories
217
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
TSX 17
XBTM
FTX417FTX507
25-pin(male)
25-pin(female)
9-pin(male)
PC RS 232
TSX07
TSXSCG1161
TSX17
TSXSCA 62
TSXP•••425 + TSXLES 64
TSXSCM 21•6TSX47-40
Printer
ADJUST
ASCII
UNI-TELWAY
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
UNI-TELWAY
UNI-TELWAY
ADJUST
UNI-TELWAY
UNI-TELWAY
UNI-TELWAY
tsx07 Te
Serial
XBT Cable Configuration Guidelines
Cables for connecting XBT terminals and devices/peripherals
Devices Protocols Connecting cables
XBT XBT XBT XBT XBT XBT XBT XBT- XBT XBT XBTZ902 Z905 Z9052 Z908 Z915 Z917 Z918 Z928 Z948 Z968 Z958(1) (2)
Peripherals Links Connecting cables
XBTZ936
Connecting cables to be used. Example : XBTZ917 cable to connect TSX17 (ADJUST) PLC with XBT
(1) Add XBTZ939 module (20 mA current loop/RS 232C interface) for XBTKL/KN/ML(2) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.
218
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Compatibility Table for Protocols/Cables for MAGELiSTM
PLC PLC Model Connection XBT Status Protocol Protocol Name Type of Type of CableSeries Type (Part Number) to Install Physical Layer Connection PLCTELE TSX07 Terminal Port Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 2.0 RS 485 DIN XBTZ968
TSX37 Terminal Port Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 2.0 RS 485 DIN XBTZ968TSX37 Terminal Port+SCA Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 2.0 RS 485 DIN XBTZ968+SCA62+ACC01TSX37 + PCMCIA Terminal Port+SCA Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 2.0 RS 485 DIN XBTZ908+SCA62TSX17 Terminal Port Master XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 1.0 RS 485 SUB-D XBTZ958TSX17 TSXSCG 1161 Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 1.0 RS 485 SUB-D XBTZ928TSX Series 7 TSXP...425 Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 1.0 RS 485 SUB-D XBTZ948
+TSXLES 64TSX Series 7 TSXSCA 62 Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 1.0 RS 485 SUB-D XBTZ908TSX Series 7 TSXSCM 21.6 Slave XBTL1UTW01 Unitelway 1.0 RS 485 SUB-D XBTZ918
MODICON MICRO COMM 1 Master XBTL1MOD01 MODBUS RS 232 RJ 45 XBTZ900+XGVSZ+Adapt.MODICON 984 984 ModBus Port Master XBTL1MOD01 MODBUS RS 232 SUB-D 25 male XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910QUANTUM ModBus Port Master XBTL1MOD01 MODBUS RS 232 SUB-D 25 male XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910
SIEMENS S5-90U Terminal Port – XBTL1SIE01 AS511 Current Loop SUB-D 15 female XBTZ939+XBTZ909S5-95U Port communication – XBTL1SIE01 3964R RS 232 SUB-D 15 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ1520S5-95U Terminal Port – XBTL1SIE01 AS511 Current Loop SUB-D 15 female XBTZ939+XBTZ909S5-105U Module – XBTL1SIE01 3964R RS 232 SUB-D 25 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520S5-105U Terminal Port – XBTL1SIE01 AS511 Current Loop SUB-D 15 female XBTZ939+XBTZ909S5-115U Module – XBTL1SIE01 3964R RS 232 SUB-D 25 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520S5-115U Terminal Port – XBTL1SIE01 AS511 Current Loop SUB-D 15 female XBTZ939+XBTZ909S5-135U Module – XBTL1SIE01 3964R RS 232 SUB-D 25 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520S5-135U Terminal Port – XBTL1SIE01 AS511 Current Loop SUB-D 15 female XBTZ939+XBTZ909
ALLEN SLC500 Terminal Port Master XBTL1AB01 DF1 RS 232 SUB-D 9 male XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910BRADLEY
PLC5 Terminal Port – XBTL1AB01 DF1 RS 232 SUB-D 25 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520
OMRON COM1 Terminal Port Master XBTL1OMR01 SYSMAC RS 232 SUB-D 9 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920C200Hx Terminal Port Master XBTL1OMR01 SYSMAC RS 232 SUB-D 9 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920CV Terminal Port Master XBTL1OMR01 SYSMAC RS 232 SUB-D 9 female XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920
Chemical Compatibility Table for MAGELiSTM
Resistance of Chemical Agents Concentration Temperature Enclosure KeypadPolyester
PPO • PET ••ACIDS
Nitric Acid 10% +20 °C S LSulfuric Acid 50% +20 °C S NCitric Acid 10% +20 °C S S
Chloric Acid 50% +20 °C S SALCOHOLS
Ethanol 100% +20 °C S SGlycol 100% +20 °C ? S
Methanol 100% +20 °C L LHYDROCARBONS
Hexan 100% +20 °C S SGasoline, Fuels 100% +20 °C N S
Grease 100% +20 °C S SHydraulic Oils 100% +20 °C S SCutting Oils 100% +20 °C S SSOLVENTS
Trichlorethylene 100% +20 °C N LTrichlorethane 100% +20 °C N L
Acetone 100% +20 °C N LWhite Spirits 100% +20 °C L S
AGRO-CULTURAL PRODUCTSVegetable Oils 100% +20 °C S SAnimals Fats 100% +20 °C L SFruit Juices 100% +20 °C ? ?
Milk (Lactic Acid) 100% +20 °C S SS: Satisfactory for the temperature indicatedL: Limited for the temperature indicatedN: Non-satisfactory?: Unknown, testing required• Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)•• Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester
Compatibility Tables
219
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
XBT Software and Environmental Compatibility
XBT software/XBT terminal compatibility
Terminal Software
XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL400 XBTL400 XBTL900 XBTL900 XBTL940 XBTV1.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.3 V1.1 V1.2 V ≤ 1.2 V ≥ 1.3 V1.1 L1000and V1.1 (DOS, (DOS, (OS/2, (DOS,
Windows) Windows) X-TEL) Window)
XBTA7/K7/KL7
XBTA8
XBTA3
XBTA4
XBTM/ML
XBTKN
XBTH/P/E
Compatible
XBT environmental compatibility
The XBTA series of flat keyboards with covering membrane has been subjected to trials in collaboration withDIVERSEY and HENKEL HYGIENE, whose detergents and disinfectant products are commonly used in the agri-foodstuffs industry.Under normal conditions of use, the XBTA series of flat keyboards with covering membrane suffered no ill-effects after200 hours being immersed in the following products :
DIVERSEY detergent and disinfectant productsSEPTINEIGE PLUS Self-lathering disinfecting neutral detergent, 1 to 4% and 20 °C.DIVOSAN MEZZO Broad spectrum oxidizing acid disinfectant, 0.5% and 20 °C.DILAC NEIGE Self-lathering acid detergent, 3 to 5% and 20 °C.DIVONEIGE ML Self-lathering mild alkaline detergent, 2 to 5% and 20 °C.CHLORINEIGE 400 Chlorinated self-lathering alkaline detergent, 1 to 5% and 20 °C.
HENKEL HYGIENE detergent and disinfectant productsP3 - FORMAKLAR Broad spectrum non-oxidizing neutral disinfectant, tested at 4 % and 20 °C.P3 - OXONIA ACTIF Strong oxidizing disinfectant, tested at 0.5% and 20 °C.P3 - TOPAX M ACIDE Self-lathering acid disinfectant, tested at 2% and 40 °C.P3 - TOPAX M 55 Chlorinated self-lathering disinfecting alkaline detergent, tested at 5 % and 50 °C.P3 - HOROLITH M Self-lathering acid detergent, tested at 5% and 20 °C.
220
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Message displayXBTH
± 0.5 mm
Operator terminalXBTP
± 0.5 mm
Operator terminalXBTE
Dimensions Inches mm
10.5264
0.49.20.3
70.37
7.2
182.
5
0.513
2.3
58
11.6292
820
2.5
+1
-1
MOD
ESC MENU
HOME SYST
ALARM
ENTERSHIFT
DEL 7 8 9
ABC DEF GHI
+/± 0 ∑
1 2 3
STU VWX YZ
4 5 6
JKL MNO PQR
0.718.8
7.3183.8
2 50
0.512.4
0.35.9
ENTER
8202
4 102
0.37
3.6
89.6
0.36.2
0.36.2
7.953(202)
7.28(185)
4.016(102)
3.58(91)
.335(8.5) .335
(8.5)
.217(5.5)
1.96(50)
Depth =
in(mm)
CUT-OUT
.472(12)
10(253)
6(152)
5.295(134.5)
.315(8) .374
(9.5)
.217(5.5)
2.18(55)
Depth =
9.308(235.5)
.472(12)
CUT-OUT
7.953
7.244(184)
(8.5) .709(18)
.236(6)
2.28(58)
Depth =
in(mm)
CUT-OUT
.472(12)
11.496(292)
10.453(265.5)
(202)
.335
Dimensions
± 0.5 mm
+1
-1
MOD
ESC MENU
HOME SYST
ALARM
ENTERSHIFT
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
+/- 0 .
DEL
10253
6 152
9.3234.5
0.38.5
0.410
2.2
55.4
0.37.1
5.3
133.
3
0.512.5
0.36.2
221
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Message displays
XBTK XBTM
(1) Dimensions for support cut-out: (1) Dimensions for support cut-out:276 x 61.5 ±0.5 mm(10.87 x 2.42 ± 0.02 in) 275.5 x 88.5 ± 0.5 mm.(10.85 x 3.48 ± 0.02 in)
(2) Support thickness: from 1.5 to 6 mm. (0.06 to 0.24 in.) (2) Support thickness: from 1.5 to 6 mm. (0.06 to 0.24 in)Terminals
XBTA
(1) Dimensions for support cut-out: 231 x 145.5 ± 0.5 mm. (9.09 x 5.73 ± 0.02 in)(2) Support thickness: 10 mm (0.39 in)
Dimensions Inches mm
Dimensions
222
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Type Language ASCII + ADJUST UNI-TELWAY MULTI-PROTOCOL
XBTH/P/E French XBTX000FRterminals German XBTX000DE
English XBTX000USSpanish XBTX000ESItalian XBTX000IT
XBTK French XBTXK700F XBTXK800Fmessage displays German XBTXK700D XBTXK800D
English XBTXK700E XBTXK800ESpanish XBTXK700S XBTXK800SItalian XBTXK700T XBTXK800T
XBTM French XBTXM800Fmessage displays German XBTXM800D
English XBTXM800ESpanish XBTXM800SItalian XBTXM800T
XBTA French XBTX63255 XBTXA800Fterminals German XBTX63257 XBTXA800D
English XBTX63256 XBTXA800ESpanish XBTX63258 XBTXA800SItalian XBTX63259 XBTXA800T
XBT Terminal French XBTXD800 FRUtilization German XBTXD800 DEHandbook English XBTXD800 EN
Spanish XBTXD800 ESItalian XBTXD800 1T
XBT installation bulletins supplied with the product are in English. If additional technical manuals or specific catalogs areneeded, they may be purchased separately.
For specific ordering information and pricing regarding the products shown in this catalog, contact your localSquare D Field Office.
Technical Documentation
223
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Downloadableprotocol
TSX07 XBTH
Downloadableprotocol
XBTP
Control system architecturesBy remotely downloading protocols from a variety of manufacturers, MAGELiS terminals can easily be integrated with many popular PLCs. Remoteloading of protocols also provides:
minimum stock with maximum effectiveness.
convenient updating of installed base of products and protocols as new versions are introduced.
point-to-point or multidrop PLC communication.
MachineControlLevel 1
• Programmable controllers
• Numerical controllers
• Workshop terminals(factory floor programming)
• Inter-product communication
• Operator interface
SupervisionLevel 2
Single Machine
UNI-TELWAY busTSX7
XBTE
XBTH
TSX17
XBTP
Dow
nloa
dabl
e
prot
ocol
Factory network
ETHERNET/ETHWAY/FIPWAY/…networks
Third party PLC
Modicon
Communication Protocols for XBTH/P/E
224
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers GuideMAGELiS TM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved 11/97
Selection ofdata exchangeprotocol
ADJUST protocol
Serial link Point-to-point data exchange
protocol with TSX7® PLCs.
Using the XBT terminal with TSX7 PLCs. Connect to the terminal port of the
TSX7 PLC (no special board in thePLC).
Direct access to the TSX7 PLCvariables. The PLC program is veryreduced or non-existent.
ASCII protocol
Serial link Universal data exchange protocol
compatible with SY/MAX PLCs.
Using the XBT terminal with a Serial Link Connect to any programmable
control system which has a seriallink, including SY/MAXprogrammable controllers.
Parallel link (24 V)
Using parallel connected messagedisplays Connect to any hard wired or
programmable control system. No special board required.
UNI-TE protocol
Serial link Multi-station UNI-TE data exchange
protocol.
Using the XBT terminal in a multi-stationnetwork architecture. Automatic data exchanges with
numerous Telemecanique devices:- variable speed controller- weighing system- numerical controller
Direct access to the device variables.The PLC program is very reduced ornon-existent.
UNI-TELWAY
Selection of Data Exchange Protocol for XBTA/K/M
225
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
MANUFACTURER’SDECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL BUSINESS UNITMan-Machine Dialogue Activity ManagementWE: SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SA
40, Avenue A.Morizet92100 Boulogne-BillancourtFRANCE
declare under our own responsibility that the products(s):
TRADEMARK: TELEMECANIQUENAME, TYPE:
Display units
MODELS: XBT-K, -KL, -M,-KN, -HL, -HNAME, TYPE:
Operator dialogue terminals with keypad LEDs
MODELS: XBT-BBNAME, TYPE:
Operator dialogue terminals
MODELS: XBT-A, -E, -PNAME, TYPE:
Operator dialogue terminals
MODELS: XBT-VA, -VM
to which this declaration refers conform to :
STANDARDS OR NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS:
Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear,General rules IEC 947-1 (EN60947-1)Programmable controllers IEC 1131Electromagnetic compatibility EN 50081-2
Subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to its (their) intended purpose, to the applicable regulations and standards, to the supplier’s instructions and to standard practice,the products conform to the requirements of the applicable European Directives:
Low-voltage Directive N
°
73/23/EECEMC Directive N
°
89/336/EEC
The CE mark on the products and/or their packaging signifies that Schneider Electric holds thereference technical file available to the European Union authorities.
Done at ANGOULEME : 28 November 1995 Authorized Signatory
Name: Xavier Robineau BourgneufTitle: DHM Activity DirectorSignature:
ALL DISTRIBUTION OR REPRODUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION IS FORBIDDEN.
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
226
11/97
MANUFACTURER’SDECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL BUSINESS UNITMan-Machine Dialogue Activity ManagementWE: SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SA
40, Avenue A.Morizet92100 Boulogne-BillancourtFRANCE
declare under our own responsibility that the products(s):
TRADEMARK: TELEMECANIQUENAME, TYPE:
Pushbuttons and pilot lights
MODELS: XB2-B.., ZA2-B.., XB2-M.., Domino, XB2-E.., XVL...NAME, TYPE:
Control Stations
MODELS: XAL-.., XAP-..NAME, TYPE:
Rotary switches
MODELS: XBC-D.., K1.., K2..NAME, TYPE:
Illuminated indicator bank
MODELS: XVA..
to which this declaration refers conform to :
STANDARDS OR NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS:
Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear,General rules IEC 947-1 (EN60947-1)Electromechanical control circuit devices IEC 947-5-1 (EN60947-5-1)
Subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to its (their) intended purpose, to the applicable regulations and standards, to the supplier’s instructions and to standard practice,the products conform to the requirements of the applicable European Directives:
Low-voltage Directive N
°
73/23/EECEMC Directive N
°
89/336/EEC
The CE mark on the products and/or their packaging signifies that Schneider Electric holds thereference technical file available to the European Union authorities.
Done at ANGOULEME : 28 November 1995 Authorized Signatory
Name: Xavier Robineau BourgneufTitle: DHM Activity DirectorSignature:
ALL DISTRIBUTION OR REPRODUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION IS FORBIDDEN.
227
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We, Schneider Limited, Cheney Manor, Swindon, Wiltshire, SN2 2QG.
declare that the product range:-
Square D Class 9001 Type T Push Buttons,
Selector Switches, Pilot Lights and Contact Blocks.
Provided that the said products are installed, maintained and used in the application for which they were made, in accordance withcurrently accepted professional practices, relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions,
complies with the provisions of Council Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EECAmendment 1 93/68/EEC
EMC Directive 89/336/EECAmendments 91/263/EEC
92/31/EEC93/68/EEC
The above product is in conformity with the following standards:
BS EN 60947-1Underwriters Laboratory UL 508
National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS 1 and ICS 2Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . if required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The CE Marking regarding the Low Voltage Directive was first affixed to the product type in 95.
Name . . . . . . . . J FRENEHARD ....................................
Function . . . . . . Director Industrial Controls ...................
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
228
11/97
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We, Schneider Limited, Cheney Manor, Swindon, Wiltshire, SN2 2QG.
declare that the product range:-
Square D Class 9001 Type TY and KY Enclosures
Provided that the said products are installed, maintained and used in the application for which they were made, in accordance withcurrently accepted professional practices, relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions,
complies with the provisions of Council Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EECAmendment 1 93/68/EEC
The above product is in conformity with the following standards:
BS EN 60947-1Underwriters Laboratory UL 508
National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS 1 and ICS 2Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Additional information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .if required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The CE Marking regarding the Low Voltage Directive was first affixed to the product type in 95.
Name. . . . . . . . . J FRENEHARD.....................................
Function. . . . . . . Director Industrial Controls ...................
229
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
MANUFACTURER’SDECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
WE: Square D Company
128 Bingham Road
Asheville, NC 28802
Declare that the products:
BRAND: SquareDNAME, TYPE: Class 9001, Type KM, KMF, “Light Modules”
“ “ , Type KA, “Contact Blocks”“ “ , Type K, KX, SK, SKRU, “30 mm Operators”“ “ , Type BW, SKYP “Pendant Stations”
Class 9002, Type AW, “Foot Switches”
To which this declaration refers are in conformity with:
The following Standards or Normative Documents:
- General rules: EN60947.1- Electromechanical control circuit devices: EN60947.5.1
subject to installation, maintenance and utilization in accordance with their purpose, regulations, current standards, manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.
Meet the provisions of the following Directives:
No. 73/23/CCE of
February 19, 1973, named Low-voltage Directive, modified by Directive 93/68/E
C
of July 22, 1993.
No. 89/336/CEE of May 3, 1989, named Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive,modified by Directives 92/31/CEE of April 28, 1992 and 93/68/CEE of July 22, 1993.
The CE marking on the product and/or the packaging signifies that Square D holds thereference technical file available to the European Authorities.
Executed at Raleigh:
October 22, 1997
Authorized Signature:
Name: Neil TollasPosition: Director, Logic ControlSignature:
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
230
11/97
MANUFACTURER’SDECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
WE: Square D Company
128 Bingham Road
Asheville, NC 28802
Declare that the products:
BRAND: TelemecaniqueNAME, TYPE: XVA LED LAMPSMODELS: XVAD•••B120, XVAD•••C024
To which this declaration refers are in conformity with:
The following Standards or Normative Documents:
- General rules: EN60947.1- Electromechanical control circuit devices: EN60947.5.1
subject to installation, maintenance and utilization in accordance with their purpose, regulations, current standards, manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.
Meet the provisions of the following Directives:
No. 73/23/CCE of
February 19, 1973, named Low-voltage Directive, modified by Directive 93/68/E
C
of July 22, 1993.
No. 89/336/CEE of May 3, 1989, named Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive,modified by Directives 92/31/CEE of April 28, 1992 and 93/68/CEE of July 22, 1993.
The CE marking on the product and/or the packaging signifies that Square D holds thereference technical file available to the European Authorities.
Executed at Raleigh:
April 10, 1997
Authorized Signature:
Name: Neil TollasPosition: Director, Logic ControlSignature:
231
11/97 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
NOTES:
Catalog No. 9001CT9701 November 1997 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved.
Square D and are registered trademarks of Square D Company.
Square D CompanyP.O. Box 27446Raleigh, N.C. 27611, USA
Schneider Canada6675 Rexwood RoadMississauga, Ontario L4V 1V1
www.squared.com
O/S2
is a registered trademark of IBM Corporationand are registered trademarks of Underwriters Laboratoryis a registered trademark of Canadian Standard Association
Windows
is a registered trademark of the Microsoft CorporationModbus
is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.SY/MAX
is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.MAGELiS
is a trademark of Schneider Electric SAUNI-TELWAY
is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA X/TEL
is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SATSX 7
is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SAFINGERSAFE
is a registered trademark of Square D Companyis a trademark of Square D Company
SERIPLEX
is a registered trademark of Square D Company
™
9001CT9701 replaces the following:
9001CT9501, dated 1/969001CT9601, dated 11/969001CT9602, dated 11/969001CT9603, dated 11/969001CT9604, dated 1/979001CT9605, dated 1/979001CT9606, dated 1/979001CT9607, dated 1/979001CT9608, dated 1/979001CT9609, dated 2/97